[featured_image]

Download

Download is available until [expire_date]

Version 2015.2
Download 2084
Tamanho do Arquivo 38.96 MB
File Count 1
Data de Criação 15 de março de 2018
Ultima Atualização 3 de julho de 2018

Manual InfoU

Right choice for ultimate yield
LSIS strives to maximize customers' profit in gratitude of choosing us for your
partner.
Human Machine Interface
XGT InfoU
XGT HMI Software
User’s Manual
 Read this manual carefully before
installing, wiring, operating, servicing
or inspecting this equipment.
Keep this manual within easy reach
for quick reference. http://www.lsis.com

Revision History

Revision History
Version Date Major Change Revised Page
V 1.0

‘07.07
‘08.06
‘09.06
‘15.02

The first edition is published
Revised to version 1.1
Revised to version 1.5
Revised to version 1.7

-
V 1.1 -
V 1.5 Full revision
V 1.9 Full revision
※ The manual number is marked on the right side of the manual back cover
ⓒ 2015 LSIS Co., Ltd All rights reserved.

Contents

Chapter 1 XGT InfoU ............................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Special Feature ...........................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Open Structure ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Efficient Project Management............................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.3 Tag Engineering ................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.4 I/O Driver Convenience ........................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.5 Better Alarm Function........................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.6 Convenient Logging Management........................................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.7 Define VBS and Action Trigger............................................................................................................. 1-4
1.1.8 Robust Graphic Engine......................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.1.9 Cross Reference................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.1.10 Web Server........................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.1.11 Mobile Monitoring System .................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2 System Requirement..................................................................................................................................1-7
1.3 License.........................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.4 Product Composition .................................................................................................................................1-8
1.5 Caution.........................................................................................................................................................1-9
Chapter 2 System Composition ..........................................................................................2-1
2.1 Software Component..................................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Stand Alone System...................................................................................................................................2-3
2.3 Client/Server System..................................................................................................................................2-3
2.4 Line Redundancy........................................................................................................................................2-4
2.5 Redundancy System ..................................................................................................................................2-5
2.6 Web Server ..................................................................................................................................................2-6
2.7 Mobile Monitoring System.........................................................................................................................2-7
Contents
2
Chapter 3 Install and Start ...................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Installation...................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Arrange Installation............................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Select a Package to Install ................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.3 Start Installation .................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.4 Complete Installation ..........................................................................................................................3-10
3.1.5 Menu and Shortcut .............................................................................................................................3-10
3.2 Start and Stop ...........................................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.1 Start InfoU...........................................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.2 Stop InfoU...........................................................................................................................................3-12
3.3 Removal and Reinstallation of Programs ..............................................................................................3-13
3.3.1 Removal of the InfoU ............................................................................................................................3-13
3.3.2 Reinstallation ......................................................................................................................................3-16
Chapter 4 Engineering .........................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Screen Composition...................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Main Screen Composition..................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Menu and InfoU Explorer ...........................................................................................................................4-3
4.2.1 File ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
4.2.2 Tool....................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Help....................................................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.4 Tool Bar ..............................................................................................................................................4-10
4.2.5 Pop-up Window ..................................................................................................................................4-10
Chapter 5 Run Time..............................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Start InfoU Run-Time..................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Shutdown InfoU Run-Time.........................................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Runtime Menu .............................................................................................................................................5-6
5.3.1 Menu Item............................................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.4 Device Status ..............................................................................................................................................5-7
5.4.1 Controls................................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.4.2 Station Staus Information Interface ...................................................................................................... 5-7

Contents

5.5 Simulation settings.....................................................................................................................................5-8
5.5.1 Controls................................................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.5.2 Simulation Information Interface........................................................................................................... 5-8
5.6 Device Data ...............................................................................................................................................5-10
5.6.1 Controls...............................................................................................................................................5-10
5.6.2 Raw Data Information Interface..........................................................................................................5-10
Chapter 6 System Settings ..................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Project Property..........................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Create New Project............................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Project Settings..................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2 Graphic Run-Time Settings .......................................................................................................................6-9
6.3 Alarm Property..........................................................................................................................................6-11
6.4 Time Synchronization ..............................................................................................................................6-18
6.4.1 Default Screen ....................................................................................................................................6-18
6.4.2 Scenario for the Whole System ..........................................................................................................6-20
6.4.3 Time Synchronization Settings ...........................................................................................................6-22
Chapter 7 I/O Driver..............................................................................................................7-1
7.1 I/O Driver Setting ........................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Communication Channel......................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Station................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Chapter 8 Tag Management.................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Definitions of Terms.............................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 Execution and Main Screen.................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 Conversion of Tag View........................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2 Configuration of Communication Equipment..........................................................................................8-6
8.2.1 Communication Channel ...................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.2 Station................................................................................................................................................... 8-9
Contents
4
8.3 Tag Property..............................................................................................................................................8-12
8.3.1 Common Items ...................................................................................................................................8-13
8.3.2 General Items .....................................................................................................................................8-15
8.3.3 Details – Analog..................................................................................................................................8-17
8.3.4 Details – Digital...................................................................................................................................8-20
8.3.5 Details – String ...................................................................................................................................8-21
8.3.6 Alarm – Analog ...................................................................................................................................8-22
8.3.7 Alarm – Digital ....................................................................................................................................8-24
8.3.8 Calculations ........................................................................................................................................8-24
8.4 Tag Edition ................................................................................................................................................8-28
8.4.1 Addition of Tags..................................................................................................................................8-28
8.4.2 Storage of Tags ..................................................................................................................................8-29
8.4.3 Deletion of Tags..................................................................................................................................8-30
8.5 CSV Tag I/O ...............................................................................................................................................8-31
8.5.1 Export to CSV File ..............................................................................................................................8-31
8.5.2 Import from CSV File ..........................................................................................................................8-32
8.5.3 Tag Items of the CSV File...................................................................................................................8-34
8.6 Cop/Paste/Cut of Tags .............................................................................................................................8-38
8.6.1 Copy....................................................................................................................................................8-38
8.6.2 Paste...................................................................................................................................................8-40
8.6.3 Cut ......................................................................................................................................................8-41
8.7 Sturcture Tag ............................................................................................................................................8-42
8.7.1 Main Screen and Explanation of Terms .............................................................................................8-42
8.7.2 Addition of Structure of Tag Templates..............................................................................................8-43
8.7.3 Addition of Structure of Tag Items......................................................................................................8-44
8.7.4 Addition of Structure of Tag (Creating the instance of structure tags) ...............................................8-45
8.8 Others ........................................................................................................................................................8-47
8.8.1 Find/Replace.......................................................................................................................................8-47
8.8.2 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................8-49
8.8.3 License................................................................................................................................................8-49
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor .....................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Configuration of Graphic Editor................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Menu Configuration....................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.1 File ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-5

Contents

9.2.2 Edit........................................................................................................................................................ 9-8
9.2.3 View ....................................................................................................................................................9-10
9.2.4 Insert...................................................................................................................................................9-14
9.2.5 Draw....................................................................................................................................................9-16
9.2.6 Tool.....................................................................................................................................................9-17
9.2.7 Window ...............................................................................................................................................9-21
9.2.8 Help.....................................................................................................................................................9-21
9.3 Insert Image...............................................................................................................................................9-22
9.3.1 Insert Image........................................................................................................................................9-22
9.3.2 Difference between Bitmap and Vector..............................................................................................9-22
9.3.3 Characteristics of each Graphic File Format ......................................................................................9-23
9.4 Tag Link .....................................................................................................................................................9-25
9.4.1 Using Location ....................................................................................................................................9-25
9.4.2 Find/Replace.......................................................................................................................................9-26
9.5 Library........................................................................................................................................................9-27
9.5.1 Use Symbol Objects ...........................................................................................................................9-27
9.5.2 Register Symbol Objects ....................................................................................................................9-27
9.5.3 Library Dialog Box ..............................................................................................................................9-27
9.6 Layer ..........................................................................................................................................................9-29
9.6.1 Layer Settings.....................................................................................................................................9-29
9.6.2 Layer Lock/Unlock ..............................................................................................................................9-29
9.6.3 Layer Show/Hide ................................................................................................................................9-29
9.7 Object Property.........................................................................................................................................9-30
9.7.1 General ...............................................................................................................................................9-30
9.7.2 Event Property ....................................................................................................................................9-33
9.8 Define Dynamic Properties......................................................................................................................9-34
9.8.1 Horizontal Size....................................................................................................................................9-34
9.8.2 Vertical Size........................................................................................................................................9-35
9.8.3 Horizontal Move..................................................................................................................................9-36
9.8.4 Vertical Move ......................................................................................................................................9-37
9.8.5 Horizontal Fill ......................................................................................................................................9-38
9.8.6 Vertical Fill ..........................................................................................................................................9-39
9.8.7 Color ...................................................................................................................................................9-40
9.8.8 Blink ....................................................................................................................................................9-41
9.8.9 Visible .................................................................................................................................................9-42
9.8.10 Rotate .................................................................................................................................................9-43
Contents
6
9.8.11 Display Value......................................................................................................................................9-44
9.8.12 Display String......................................................................................................................................9-46
9.8.13 GIF Animation.....................................................................................................................................9-47
9.8.14 GIF Play Time.....................................................................................................................................9-48
9.8.15 GIF Tag Image....................................................................................................................................9-49
9.8.16 Lamp...................................................................................................................................................9-49
9.8.17 Click ....................................................................................................................................................9-50
9.8.18 Input Value..........................................................................................................................................9-69
9.8.19 Horizontal Drag...................................................................................................................................9-70
9.8.20 Vertical Drag .......................................................................................................................................9-71
9.9 Runtime Settings ......................................................................................................................................9-72
9.9.1 Graphic Runtime Settings...................................................................................................................9-72
9.9.2 Page Settings .....................................................................................................................................9-74
9.10 Graphic Script ...........................................................................................................................................9-76
9.10.1 InfoU Graphic Function List ................................................................................................................9-76
9.10.2 Explanation of InfoU Graphic Function...............................................................................................9-79
9.11 Tag Variable ............................................................................................................................................9-101
9.11.1 Example Used by the Dynamic Property Settings for Graphic.........................................................9-101
9.11.2 Example of Using in Graphic Script..................................................................................................9-101
9.12 Objects Using Images ............................................................................................................................9-106
9.12.1 Button Image ....................................................................................................................................9-106
9.12.2 Lamp Image......................................................................................................................................9-105
9.13 Smart Symbol..........................................................................................................................................9-108
9.13.1 Creating Smart Symbol.....................................................................................................................9-108
9.13.2 Registering and Importing the Smart Symbol in the Library ......................................................................9-109
9.13.3 Smart Symbol Instance Settings ......................................................................................................9-110
9.14 Animation Editor.....................................................................................................................................9-111
9.14.1 Execution and Composition of the Animation Editor.................................................................................9-111
9.14.2 Creation of Animation...........................................................................................................................9-111
9.15 Lighting Function ...................................................................................................................................9-115
9.15.1 Object Selection Settings in the Graphic Runtime....................................................................................9-115
9.15.2 Object Highlight Settings in the Graphic Runtime ....................................................................................9-116

Contents

Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime ...............................................................................................10-1
10.1 Run.............................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.2 Menu Composition ...................................................................................................................................10-2
10.2.1 File ......................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.2.2 View ....................................................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.4 Help.....................................................................................................................................................10-9
10.3 Popup Menu ............................................................................................................................................10-10
10.3.1 Detailed Realtime Trend...................................................................................................................10-10
10.3.2 Realtime Trend .................................................................................................................................10-11
10.3.3 Realtime List Trend...........................................................................................................................10-11
10.3.4 Alarm Viewer ....................................................................................................................................10-12
10.3.5 Input Value........................................................................................................................................10-12
10.3.6 Cross Reference...............................................................................................................................10-12
10.4 Cross Reference Function.....................................................................................................................10-13
10.4.1 Execution on the Plant Screen .........................................................................................................10-13
10.4.2 Execution on the Tag View...............................................................................................................10-14
10.4.3 Execution on the Alarm Pop-up Screen ...........................................................................................10-15
10.4.4 Execution on the Graphic Object......................................................................................................10-15
Chapter 11 Graphic Object ..................................................................................................11-1
11.1 How to Use Graphic Object .....................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.1 Object Insert .......................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.2 Script Use ...........................................................................................................................................11-3
11.2 Alarm Viewer .............................................................................................................................................11-4
11.2.1 Prerequisite and Environment ............................................................................................................11-4
11.2.2 Screen Configuration..........................................................................................................................11-4
11.2.3 Real-time Function..............................................................................................................................11-6
11.2.4 Settings.............................................................................................................................................11-11
11.2.5 Filtering .............................................................................................................................................11-14
11.2.6 Other Functions ................................................................................................................................11-16
11.2.7 How to Use Script .............................................................................................................................11-19
11.3 Trend Viewer ...........................................................................................................................................11-25
11.3.1 Prerequisite and Environment ..........................................................................................................11-25
Contents
8
11.3.2 Screen Configuration........................................................................................................................11-25
11.3.3 Settings.............................................................................................................................................11-27
11.3.4 Logging Search.................................................................................................................................11-45
11.3.5 Others ...............................................................................................................................................11-46
11.3.6 How to Use Script .............................................................................................................................11-47
11.4 List Trend Viewer....................................................................................................................................11-60
11.4.1 Prerequisite and Environment ..........................................................................................................11-60
11.4.2 Screen Configuration........................................................................................................................11-60
11.4.3 Settings.............................................................................................................................................11-61
11.4.4 How to Use Script .............................................................................................................................11-71
11.5 Recipe Viewer .........................................................................................................................................11-79
11.5.1 Prerequisite and Environment ..........................................................................................................11-79
11.5.2 Screen Configuration........................................................................................................................11-79
11.5.3 Real-Time Function ..........................................................................................................................11-80
11.5.4 How to Use Script .............................................................................................................................11-85
11.6 Gauge Control.........................................................................................................................................11-88
11.6.1 Prerequisite and Environment ..........................................................................................................11-88
11.6.2 Screen Configuration........................................................................................................................11-88
11.6.3 Property Settings ..............................................................................................................................11-89
11.7 How to Use External ActiveX.................................................................................................................11-91
11.7.1 How to Use .......................................................................................................................................11-91
Chapter 12 Alarm Management...........................................................................................12-1
12.1 Alarm Kind and Rules ..............................................................................................................................12-1
12.1.1 Analog Alarm ......................................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.2 Digital Alarm .......................................................................................................................................12-4
12.1.3 Alarm Delay ........................................................................................................................................12-5
12.2 Alarm Group Settings...............................................................................................................................12-7
12.2.1 Alarm Group Management .................................................................................................................12-7
12.2.2 Alarm Group Settings .........................................................................................................................12-9
12.3 Alarm Service..........................................................................................................................................12-12
12.3.1 Alarm Sound .....................................................................................................................................12-12
12.3.2 Common Items for Alarm Service.....................................................................................................12-13
12.3.3 Automatic Printout of the Line Printer...............................................................................................12-14
12.3.4 Mail Sending .....................................................................................................................................12-15

Contents

12.3.5 SMS Transmission............................................................................................................................12-20
Chapter 13 Logging Management .......................................................................................13-1
13.1 Logging Type ............................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.1 Logging Type ......................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.2 Calculation Method for Logging Data .................................................................................................13-2
13.2 Logging Settings ......................................................................................................................................13-3
13.2.1 Configuration Interface .......................................................................................................................13-3
13.2.2 Add, Edit and Delete...........................................................................................................................13-4
13.2.3 General ...............................................................................................................................................13-5
13.2.4 Cycle...................................................................................................................................................13-7
13.2.5 Statistics..............................................................................................................................................13-7
13.2.6 Accumulation ......................................................................................................................................13-8
13.2.7 String...................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.8 Event.................................................................................................................................................13-10
13.2.9 Selective Log ....................................................................................................................................13-11
13.2.10 Event String ......................................................................................................................................13-12
Chapter 14 Script..................................................................................................................14-1
14.1 Start............................................................................................................................................................14-1
14.2 Editor Screen ............................................................................................................................................14-2
14.3 How to Use ................................................................................................................................................14-5
14.3.1 Use of Internal Fuctions......................................................................................................................14-5
14.3.2 Tag Name Delivery.............................................................................................................................14-6
14.3.3 Editor Debugging ................................................................................................................................14-8
14.3.4 How to use DLL ................................................................................................................................14-13
14.3.5 How to use OLE object.....................................................................................................................14-13
14.3.6 Error Handling...................................................................................................................................14-14
14.4 Runtime Debug .......................................................................................................................................14-15
Chapter 15 Function.............................................................................................................15-1
15.1 Funtion Inquire..........................................................................................................................................15-1
Contents
10
Chapter 16 Action Trigger....................................................................................................16-1
16.1 Start............................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................16-2
16.2.1 General Information............................................................................................................................16-2
16.2.2 Schedule.............................................................................................................................................16-7
16.2.3 Tag Value Change............................................................................................................................16-10
16.2.4 Alarm Status .....................................................................................................................................16-12
16.3 Holiday Settings......................................................................................................................................16-14
Chapter 17 User Settings.....................................................................................................17-1
17.1 Setting Screen...........................................................................................................................................17-1
Chapter 18 Recipe ................................................................................................................18-1
18.1 Component................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.2 Unit......................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.3 Data ....................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.2 Settings......................................................................................................................................................18-2
18.2.1 Model Information ...............................................................................................................................18-3
18.2.2 Unit Information ..................................................................................................................................18-4
18.2.3 Data Information .................................................................................................................................18-6
18.3 Recipe Runtime.........................................................................................................................................18-7
18.3.1 Function ..............................................................................................................................................18-7
18.3.2 Recipe Viewer OCX............................................................................................................................18-7
18.3.3 Internal Function .................................................................................................................................18-7
Chapter 19 Database ............................................................................................................19-1
19.1 Database Connection ...............................................................................................................................19-1
19.1.1 Demo ..................................................................................................................................................19-1
19.1.2 Database Connection Settings ...........................................................................................................19-2
19.2 Database Operation..................................................................................................................................19-4

Contents

19.2.1 Operation Type ...................................................................................................................................19-4
19.2.2 Demo ..................................................................................................................................................19-4
19.2.3 Database Operation Settings .............................................................................................................19-5
19.3 Database Runtime ..................................................................................................................................19-10
19.3.1 Function ............................................................................................................................................19-11
19.3.2 Internal Function ...............................................................................................................................19-11
Chapter 20 Report ................................................................................................................20-1
20.1 Start............................................................................................................................................................20-1
20.1.1 Report Menu .......................................................................................................................................20-2
20.1.2 New.....................................................................................................................................................20-5
20.1.3 Report Property Settings ....................................................................................................................20-7
20.2 Layout ......................................................................................................................................................20-11
20.2.1 Report Layout ...................................................................................................................................20-11
20.2.2 Sheet Property..................................................................................................................................20-12
20.3 Report Open ............................................................................................................................................20-20
20.3.1 Edit....................................................................................................................................................20-20
20.3.2 Report View ......................................................................................................................................20-21
20.3.3 Refresh Auto Output Information......................................................................................................20-25
20.3.4 View History Information...................................................................................................................20-25
20.3.5 How to Use during the Runtime........................................................................................................20-26
Chapter 21 Utility..................................................................................................................21-1
21.1 Unit.............................................................................................................................................................21-1
21.2 Alarm Message Registration ...................................................................................................................21-3
21.3 On/Off Display Message Registration ....................................................................................................21-5
21.4 LSIS Program Registration......................................................................................................................21-7
21.5 LS PLC Tag Import ...................................................................................................................................21-9
21.6 Application Registration ........................................................................................................................21-14
Contents
12
Chapter 22 Cross Reference................................................................................................22-1
22.1 Function and Property .............................................................................................................................22-1
22.2 Cross Reference DB Creation .................................................................................................................22-2
22.3 Engineering Function...............................................................................................................................22-4
22.3.1 Search by Tag ....................................................................................................................................22-4
22.3.2 Search by Module...............................................................................................................................22-4
22.3.3 Filtering ...............................................................................................................................................22-5
22.3.4 Error Tag Search ................................................................................................................................22-6
22.3.5 Jump Function ....................................................................................................................................22-7
22.3.6 Save File.............................................................................................................................................22-9
22.4 Runtime Function ...................................................................................................................................22-11
Chapter 23 Web ....................................................................................................................23-1
23.1 InfoU Web Configuration .........................................................................................................................23-1
23.1.1 Prerequisite.........................................................................................................................................23-1
23.1.2 Configuration Procedures...................................................................................................................23-2
23.2 Creating InfoU Web Site...........................................................................................................................23-2
23.2.1 Execution of the Navigation Management..........................................................................................23-2
23.2.2 Creating New Website........................................................................................................................23-5
23.2.3 Get Project Information.....................................................................................................................23-12
23.2.4 Adding the Virtual Folder on the Existing Website ...........................................................................23-14
23.2.5 Creation of a Website in Addition to the Existing One......................................................................23-19
23.3 InfoU Website Configuration .................................................................................................................23-25
23.3.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................................23-25
23.3.2 Prerequisite.......................................................................................................................................23-25
23.3.3 Login Screen.....................................................................................................................................23-25
23.3.4 System Management........................................................................................................................23-33
23.3.5 Monitoring Web User........................................................................................................................23-41
23.3.6 Main Screen......................................................................................................................................23-45
23.4 Web HMI Server ......................................................................................................................................23-51
23.4.1 Operation Settings ............................................................................................................................23-51
23.4.2 Server Settings .................................................................................................................................23-52

Contents

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server ........................................................................24-1
24.1 System Environment Settings.................................................................................................................24-1
24.1.1 Cancel Network Security ....................................................................................................................24-1
24.2 Redundancy Settings.............................................................................................................................24-16
24.2.1 Procedure .........................................................................................................................................24-16
24.2.2 Create Server Project .......................................................................................................................24-16
24.2.3 Project Property Settings..................................................................................................................24-17
24.2.4 Redundancy Settings........................................................................................................................24-18
24.2.5 RunTime Operation ..........................................................................................................................24-24
24.3 Client-Server Settings ............................................................................................................................24-26
24.3.1 Procedure .........................................................................................................................................24-26
24.3.2 Server Project Settings.....................................................................................................................24-26
24.3.3 Client Project Settings ......................................................................................................................24-31
Chapter 25 Mobile.................................................................................................................25-1
25.1 Mobile Designer ........................................................................................................................................25-1
25.1.1 Startup ................................................................................................................................................25-1
25.1.2 Mobile Server Project .........................................................................................................................25-5
25.1.3 Mobile APP Page................................................................................................................................25-8
25.1.4 Resolution Document .......................................................................................................................25-11
25.1.5 Object................................................................................................................................................25-16
25.1.6 Dynamic Properties ..........................................................................................................................25-28
25.1.7 Service Settings................................................................................................................................25-38
25.2 Mobile Server ..........................................................................................................................................25-42
25.3 Mobile Client ...........................................................................................................................................25-45
25.4 Mobile Network Settings........................................................................................................................25-59
Appendix 1 Modbus Server ................................................................................................ A1-1
1.1 Modbus Server Editor ............................................................................................................................. A1-1
1.1.1 Execute Editer ....................................................................................................................................A1-1
1.1.2 Registered Information .......................................................................................................................A1-2
1.1.3 Tag Setting .........................................................................................................................................A1-4
1.1.4 Copy / Paste Clipboard.......................................................................................................................A1-8
Contents
14
1.1.5 Export to CSV file .............................................................................................................................A1-11
1.2 Modbus Server Runtime ....................................................................................................................... A1-14
1.2.1 Execute Runtime ..............................................................................................................................A1-14
1.2.2 Runtime Menu ..................................................................................................................................A1-15
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server ................................................................................... A2-1
2.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. A2-1
2.2 Install Program......................................................................................................................................... A2-1
2.2.1 Installation...........................................................................................................................................A2-1
2.2.2 Modify/Repair/Remove Program ........................................................................................................A2-5
2.3 Configuration of Default Screen .......................................................................................................... A2-10
2.3.1 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................A2-10
2.3.2 Monitoring .........................................................................................................................................A2-13
2.4 OPC Project Configuration ................................................................................................................... A2-15
2.4.1 Create New OPC Project...................................................................................................................A2-15
2.4.2 Open or Modify OPC Project ............................................................................................................A2-17
2.5 Run Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................... A2-18
2.5.1 Connect LS InfoU OPC Server / Start Monitoring ............................................................................A2-18
2.5.2 Disconnect LS InfoU OPC Server / Stop Monitoring ........................................................................A2-20
2.6 DCOM Configuration ............................................................................................................................. A2-20
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration.............................................................................. A3-1
3.1 Windows 7 Configuration ....................................................................................................................... A3-1
3.1.1 Common(Client&Server) Settings ......................................................................................................A3-1
3.1.2 Client Settings...................................................................................................................................A3-11
3.1.3 Server Settings .................................................................................................................................A3-15
3.2 Windows XP Configuration .................................................................................................................. A3-23
3.2.1 Client Settings...................................................................................................................................A3-23
3.2.2 Server Settings .................................................................................................................................A3-33

Contents

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help ................................................................................. A4-1
4.1 Script Function of Microsoft Script Engine .......................................................................................... A4-1
Appendix 5 Function........................................................................................................... A5-1
5.1 Function Classification ........................................................................................................................... A5-1
5.1.1 List by Item .........................................................................................................................................A5-1
5.1.2 List by Alphabetic Order .....................................................................................................................A5-6
5.2 Function Descriptions and Examples ................................................................................................. A5-11
5.2.1 Project Function................................................................................................................................A5-11
5.2.2 Screen Function................................................................................................................................A5-14
5.2.3 Tag Function.....................................................................................................................................A5-17
5.2.4 Script Function..................................................................................................................................A5-22
5.2.5 Event Function..................................................................................................................................A5-23
5.2.6 Log Function .....................................................................................................................................A5-25
5.2.7 Network Function..............................................................................................................................A5-28
5.2.8 System Function ...............................................................................................................................A5-31
5.2.9 Recipe Function................................................................................................................................A5-35
5.2.10 Database Function............................................................................................................................A5-42
5.2.11 Alarm Function..................................................................................................................................A5-42
5.2.12 External Device Function..................................................................................................................A5-52
5.2.13 User Function ...................................................................................................................................A5-53
5.2.14 Report Function ................................................................................................................................A5-55
5.2.15 History Data Function .......................................................................................................................A5-57
5.2.16 I/O Driver Function............................................................................................................................A5-63
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection ............................................................................. A6-1
6.1 Q&A for Windows XP .............................................................................................................................. A6-1
6.2 Q&A for Windows 7 ............................................................................................................................... A6-14

Chapter 1 XGT InfoU

1-1

Chapter 1 XGT InfoU
As a PC HMI(Human Machine Interface) software package for collecting real-time data on the device, setting up
a data transmission system and playing a role of a central observer, InfoU allows the operator to monitor/analyze
the overall operational status of the device in real time.
This software provides various useful functions that can run in the latest operation systems such as Windows XP,
Windows 2000, Windows Vista, Windows7 and enhances the reliability, fast processing speed and convenient use
of the automatic system.
Data management function of this monitoring software helps the user to collect, store and calculate data on the
device’s operation status and to respond to requests for data. Its monitoring function also provides real-time data
along with graphs configured by the operator on the display screen.
1.1 Special Feature
1.1.1 Open Structure
Its open structure with excellent extension and compatibility makes it possible to provide stable communication
and effective interface with other systems.
● Supports industrial standard interface such as 1OLE DB, OPC Server/Client
● Easy access to DBMS (Data Base Management System)
Its database connection or work function ensures easy input or output by using tag values of universal databases
such as MS, SQL or Oracle and efficient data sharing with MES or ERP system.
● It can be referred by other applications with OLE automation.
● It supports edition and compatibility of MS office software especially PowerPoint of the graphic editor for easy
graphic works
● It also provides ActiveX component graphic objects and allows the user to use other company’s components for
his/her graphic works.
1.1.2 Efficient Project Management
InfoU project is treated as the unit subjected to engineering and real-time operation management and under each
project unit, sub-paths such as tag, logging, alarm, graph, report and script are created and managed.
Therefore, it becomes much easier to move or copy a certain project to other system, drive or path.
The user can easily manage numerous projects while easily copying and transferring contents between projects
and efficiently conducting engineering works.
In addition, the user can selectively execute only the modules he/she wants since each function works individually
in its own execution unit,
1.1.3 Tag Engineering
It provides efficient engineering and convenient operation by providing two perspectives of tag management
criteria.
Chapter 1 XGT InfoU
1-2
(1) View by device
It is very convenient to use since device set-up and tag work can be executed at the same time as a treetype tag explorer according to device configuration.
(2) View by group
Logical tag groups are displayed in a window explorer type to allow the user to manage tags according to
their purposes from the point of operator’s view.
(3) Import/Export CSV
The user can output, add, edit or delete a large amount of tags by using CSV (Comma Separated Values)-
type files editable with Excel or general text editors (notepad)
(4) Expression
Not only numeric expression but also logical expression can be used with memory tag values
(5) LS PLC Tag Sharing
GLOFA-LSIS’s PLC-shares its program tool GMWIN and engineering files to enable automatic input to InfoU
tags.
1.1.4 I/O Driver Convenience
(1) Tag Simulator
Even though there is no device in place actually or it is before communication service is open, it can provide
various rules of data to tags and significantly reduce debugging time since it can run the same applications
with those in the site.
● Analog Simulator: Random, sign wave, chopping wave, saw tooth wave, control function
● Digital Simulator: Random, change, control function
● String Simulator: Random, control function
● XG5000 Simulator: For XGT PLC’s tags, you can use the simulation function of XG5000 that is the
program tool.
(2) Create auto block
Even though the user does not set up additional communication blocks, it automatically creates blocks
according to tag’s I/O address setting when runtime runs.
(3) Automatically register system tag when adding a station
When registering a station, it also registers its communication status automatically to allow the user to check
the station status and its communication performance.
1.1.5 Upgraded Alarm Function
Its improved alarm function using alarm group delivers more efficient problem solving.
(1) Manage alarm group
It can manage alarm groups of the tag designated by the user to execute alarm sound, printing, sending mails
and SMS by the level of the alarm generated in the relevant tag.
(2) Batch assignment of alarm rank
If any alarm rank is not assigned in the tag setting, the user can assign a certain rank uniformly to all of the

Chapter 1 XGT InfoU

1-3

alarms in a group by using this batch assignment function.
(3) Various analog alarms
Since Limit alarm, Gap alarm and Variation alarm occur for one tag at the same time, each process can be
closely and thoroughly monitored.
(4) Change dynamic setting
Dynamic change in alarm’s limit value, gap value, variation value and other setting values enables
more flexible action processing.
(5) Convenience of alarm check
You can check alarms on the graphics screen using the Alarm viewer OCX. You can use mini alarm, backup
alarm check, alarm filtering function, etc. for convenient and efficient management.
(6) Alarm-Linked to Action Trigger
You can realize various functions by specifying trigger operations linked with alarm-action trigger-script.
1.1.6 Convenience of Logging Management
The user can create and manage a data logging group for major data that need history management according to
his/her purpose and assign one tag data to multiple logging groups.
(1) Type of logging group
Divided into Cycle, Statistics, Accumulation and String
(2) Save in excel file
Logging data inquired from trend and list trend can be immediately saved in excel files.
(3) Inquire logging data
Data can be inquired from trend, report and list trend and API, which can be inquired from script, is
provided
(4) Automatically calculated statistics/integrated data
Statistics/integrated data are created without the use of additional script or application.
(5) Data to inquire according to type of history model
● Cycle: Analog (current value), Digital (current status), String
● Statistics:
- Analog (current value, min value, min time, max value, max time, average value)
- Digital (ON count, running time, change count)
● Accumulation: Analog (change amount, current value)
(6) Report
Daily report, monthly report, temporary report and etc can be generated. The user can easily select an Excel
form and register data in the form. Data of logging group can be inquired and automatically printed from
Report and this Report function provides copy of report model, drag & drop report tag, clipboard copy/paste,
(7) Backup
It is possible to backup all of the collected groups and backup files can be inquired from trend and list trend.
Chapter 1 XGT InfoU
1-4
1.1.7 Define VBS and Action Trigger
It supports Action Trigger and VB Script for preparing robust and flexible applications
(1) Script Editor
It supports VB script, uses external OLE individuals such as ActiveX and registers and uses DLL’s API.
(2) Action Trigger
It integrates execution action conditions of script, recipe and database work together to manage them and
trigger actions. Changing tag value, generating alarm and action by schedule can be set up.
Also efficient management is possible by assigning one action to multiple tasks.
(3) Provide recipe
Recipe is used when the same production/process line generates various products according to the
prescribed vales and this function is applicable to various fields including flexible manufacturing system and
lighting control.
(4) Execute recipe
A recipe is provided by its exclusive graphic object and can be executed and controlled on the run time
graphic screen. In addition, execution can be defined from Action Trigger. Providing API available in Script
ensures control at more diverse situations.
(5) Transmit tag name with parameter value.
It is possible to implement effective applications by assigning various action triggers for script execution and
transmitted tag name to script function with parameter value.
1.1.8 Robust Graphic Engine
(1) Symbol Library
It supports more than 1000 symbol library images and its drag & drop provides a more convenient usage
way..
(2) Support various types of graphic files
BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, ICON, WMF, EMF, Animation GIF and other various graphic files are
supported.
(3) Engineering Template
A certain screen can be more frequently and conveniently reused with its template object and plant screens
and transmitted parameter values.
(4) Provide exclusive graphic objects for stable extension:
Alarm view (real-time, history), trend (real-time, history), recipe view, list trend (real-time, history) and gauge
control are provided for convenient use.
(5) Provide accurate and fast screen mobility
The user can display part of the screen or the entire screen or move to the work area he/she want with Zoom,
panning or navigation function to more accurately and fast identify the relevant process.
(6) Layer
Hide/UnHide and Lock/UnLock functions can be used after selecting a graphic object.

Chapter 1 XGT InfoU

1-5

(7) Built-in Graphic Script
When it is insufficient with the screen settings only because of complicate dynamic components of the
graphic screen, various functions can be used from the built-in scripts and internal functions of the graphic
editor.
(8) ActiveX Control
Direct control over the Company’s unique control functions such as Alarm Viewer and Trend and other
company’s ActiveX enables efficient and high-functional graphic works. It supports virtual keyboard and
window to input various values for panel PC.
(9) Use the prepared drawing screen.
It provides the template screens for frequently used functions to improve engineering workability remarkably.
When clicking the mouse, it can display the prepared real-time/history trend, list, report retrieval screen, etc.
without engineering works.
(10) Template screen
You can make the customized template screen; namely, you can draw the graphic works of the standardized
device through Drag & Drop to improve productivity.
(11) Added convenient functions
Batch change of tag link and string, digital tag control (pulse control, momentary control), image button and
image lamp functions are added.
1.1.9 Cross Reference
(1) Simple correction
With Cross Reference, the user can trace the interrelation and immediately correct engineering error without
making unnecessary effort to find each error in the tag and the drawing to change or delete it.
(2) Accident Analysis during the run time
When alarm occurs during the run time, the user can use Cross Reference in the alarm screen and the alarm
pop-up screen to move to the relevant plant screen or Trend and analyze the accident fast and conveniently.
1.1.10 Web Server
(1) Simple Web Conversion
In the InfoU Web server, existing projects can be automatically converted to the web through the Wizard
function so that even a user who does not have any expertise on web server or website configuration can
easily configure a website.
(2) Monitoring system without restriction to place
InfoU is possible to control monitoring only with web browser and monitor history data through Trend as well
as real-time tag data without additional installation or restriction to place.
(3) Configuration with various types
The user can create a new web site by configuring a site he/she wants and form a link connection by adding
virtual folders to existing web sites.
Chapter 1 XGT InfoU
1-6
1.1.11 Mobile Monitoring System
(1) Graphic editor for mobile devices
Through the graphic editor for mobile devices, a user can make the plant screen that can be monitored in the
smartphone. It also provides various dynamic properties and graphic library.
(2) Various functions
It provides various functions; monitoring through a plant screen, monitoring for registered tags, alarm
monitoring, trend viewer, etc.
(3) Mobile app
It provides the client operating in the smartphone environment.

Chapter 1 XGT InfoU

1-7

1.2 System Requirement
At least the following environment is required to execute this program;
● IBM-PC compatible computer with Intel Pentium 4 or higher
● Memory of 1GB or higher
● VGA graphic card and monitor with basic resolution 1024 X 768 or higher
● Hard disc space required of 10GB or more
● Port of USB 1.0 or higher
● Microsoft Windows XP/2003/Vista/Win7
● Microsoft Excel 32bit Verstion (MS Office 2003/2007/2010/2013)
● Ethernet Card 100Mbps higher
● Standard Serial Port
1.3 License
(1) Using USB lock key
● The use of the project may be restircted depending on the following conditions (1-hour use)
● Restriction to the number of I/O tags: When more number of I/O tags is using than the designated number
to the key
● Project option: When using general local license key for web option project
● Web version: Restrict to the number of concurrent users
(2) Demo Mode
● If the user uses excessive functions than the assigned ones to the lock key, demo mode will run for one
hour.
● Example of use 1: If you run more than 500 I/O tags with the lock key for 500 tags, the program will end
after one hour of run time and engineering tool execution.
● Example of use 2: If you set up the web project with the lock key for a signal system, the program will end
after one-hour run time.
Chapter 1 XGT InfoU
1-8
1.4 Product Composition

Classification	Production Name	I/O Tag	Other
Developer Version (Engineering+Real-time operation)	InfoU-RC-75	75 tags
InfoU-RC-150	150 tags
InfoU-RC-500	500 tags
InfoU-RC-1K	1000 tags
InfoU-RC-2K	2000 tags
InfoU-RC-MAX	64000 tags
Executor Version (Real-time operation)	InfoU-RT-75	75 tags
InfoU-RT-150	150 tags
InfoU-RT-500	500 tags
InfoU-RT-1K	1000 tags
InfoU-RT-2K	2000 tags
InfoU-RT-MAX	64000 tags
Web Version (Engineering + Real time operation + Web)	InfoU-OP-WEB2	Unlimited tags	Concurrent users: 2 Users
InfoU-OP-WEB5	Unlimited tags	Concurrent users: 5 Users
InfoU-OP-WEB10	Unlimited tags	Concurrent users: 10 Users
InfoU-OP-WEBMAX	Unlimited tags	Concurrent users: Unlimited Users
InfoU-OP-WEB5/150	150 tags	Concurrent users: 5 Users
InfoU-OP-WEBMAX/150	150 tags	Concurrent users: Unlimited Users
InfoU-OP-WEB5/500	500 tags	Concurrent users: 5 Users
InfoU-OP-WEBMAX/500	500 tags	Concurrent users: Unlimited Users
InfoU-OP-WEB5/1K	1000 tags	Concurrent users: 5 Users
InfoU-OP-WEBMAX/1K	1000 tags	Concurrent users: Unlimited Users
InfoU-OP-WEB5/2K	2000 tags	Concurrent users: 5 Users
InfoU-OP-WEBMAX/2K	2000 tags	Concurrent users: Unlimited Users

Chapter 1 XGT InfoU

1-9

1.5 Caution
(1) Please, be cautious to keep and retain the enclosed license key.
Any lost license key will not be reissued and some program operations and functions may be restricted
depending on the license key.
(2) This software shall be operated only in the authorized OS and installation environment.
The entire or part of the program may generate some errors or malfunctions if it is installed and used in any
unauthorized OS.
(3) Checklist when any error occurs during the program installation or the initial execution
Please, be aware that some program errors may occur because the vaccine program in your computer may
block the program’s communication port or service.
(4) Check your history data volume
Accumulation of history data such as alarm history and data history may cause insufficient storage space in
the system and lead to the occurrence of error.
(5) When carrying out engineering works, take into account the system performance
If you register and use too many tags or log in excessive history data over the system performance, the
program may become significantly slower or generate malfunctions during the engineering or run-time
operation.
(6) Be cautious when preparing a script
When preparing a script, excessive system load or malfunction may occur due to the script which is omitted
from unlimited loop by logical error or the one that requires long processing time.
(7) Be cautious about logging data loss when adding a tag after deleting it
There is no problem with the logging setting even though you delete a tag, which is set up in the logging
group, from the tag database and then add it again with the same name, however, you may loss some
logging data.
It is better to work with tag edition or CSV file update function rather than adding a tag after deleting it when
changing tag attributes,
(8) Instruction for use in Windows
Common (Windows XP, 2003, Vista, Win7): Installed and executed by the administrator
Windows Vista, Win7: Cancelation of user-defined options

Chapter 2 System Composition

2-1

Chapter 2 System Composition
2.1 Software Component
InfoU software is made up of the components as seen in the figure above and the structure of this software allows
the user to add other various components to its basic ones and those newly added components are internally
connected through data communication and API to act dependently on each other. .
In the engineering environment, integral engineering tool InfoUD and graphic editor InfoUG are provided in
additional execution files and Report is provided as an additional Excel function.
In the run time environment, the components above and I/O drivers are activated by additional execution files and
play a each one’s role depending on the engineering setting environment.
Chapter 2 System Composition
2-2
Various types of software packages can be provided by re-composing InfoU’s functions and options as seen in the
figure above.

Chapter 2 System Composition

2-3

2.2 Stand Alone System
● Only with this stand alone system, the user can monitor and control the data status of multiple devices.
2.3 Client/Server System
● Remote/multiple monitoring and controlling the system is available.
● Time synchronization between server and client is provided.
Chapter 2 System Composition
2-4
2.4 Line Redundancy
● Line redundancy with the device port such as PLC is available.
● Ethernet port redundancy of Server 1, Server 2 and Client
● An additional switcher is needed for signal communication between system and device,

Chapter 2 System Composition

2-5

2.5 Redundancy System
● When the Run Server is failed, the Standby Server will be activated through auto switching to provide a reliable
service.
● Manual switching: The manual switching is avaiable in menu operations and script.
● Time synchronization can be made among Server 1, Server 2 and Client.
● Monitoring to check for any error of the partner server is available through RS-232C communication line.
● Project duplication: A redundancy project can be automatically duplicated to prevent error and to provide
convenience to the user.
● For signal communication between system and device, an additional switcher is needed.
Chapter 2 System Composition
2-6
2.6 Web Server
● Without any need to conduct additional engineering works for the projects in the InfoU server, real-time
monitoring and controlling is available in the Web Client.
● Without installing any additional client program, monitoring is available only through MS Explore web browser.
● Data such as Trend (real-time history), Alarm (real-time history) can be monitored simultaneously as if the user
is in the site.

Chapter 2 System Composition

2-7

2.7 Mobile Monitoring System
● It provides the graphic editor with which you can make a plant screen for the smartphone.
● Through a plant screen, monitoring, tag monitoring, alarm monitoring, real-time trend monitoring are available in
the smartphone.

Chapter 3 Install and Start

3-1

Chapter 3 Install and Start
3.1 Installallation
3.1.1 Arrange Installation
Once the setup CD are inserted in the computer’s CD/DVD input device, the installation screen automatically
appears in the user’s computer as seen in the splash screen below.
If it is not automatically executed, execute the CD’s setup.exe file in the explorer.
Otherwise, the latest version of InfoU is posted on our homepage (www.lsis.com) so feel free to download it
and unzip a file for use.
Chapter 3 Install and Start
3-2

Chapter 3 Install and Start

3-3

You can select available languages; Korean /English version.
Chapter 3 Install and Start
3-4
The preliminary components required to execute the InfoU program are installed.
The installed preliminary components are “Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package”and“HASP
License Key”, “Microsoft .NET Framework 4” installation program.

Chapter 3 Install and Start

3-5

Press [Next(N)] button
If you want to change the previous screen’s setting, press [<Back (B)] button or, if you stop installation, press
[Cancel] button. Then, the installation work will stop.
Chapter 3 Install and Start
3-6
This is License
Contract.
In case that the printer is already set up in the system, the terms and conditions of the license is printed upon the
click on [Print (P)]. Only after you press the radio buttone of "I agree on the terms and condtions of this license",
[Next (N)>] button becomes active and it moves to the next screen.

Chapter 3 Install and Start

3-7

Then, you may select a path to install.
Chapter 3 Install and Start
3-8
3.1.2 Select a Package to Install
There are three types of packages you may install.
● InfoU Package - Package that consists of a wider range of applications by using InfoU - LS Industrial System’s
universal HMI software package.
● Web Package – InfoU’s extend package that allows the user to monitor and operate the screen functions
presented by InfoU with Internet browser.
● InfoU + Web Package - Package that allows the user to configure No 2 and No 3 packages in one computer.
Click [Next (N)>] button after selecting one,

Chapter 3 Install and Start

3-9

3.1.3 Start Installation
After completing settings, press [Install (I)] button to start installation.
Chapter 3 Install and Start
3-10
3.1.4 Complete Installation
Once installation is completed, the computer shall be restarted for the program’s normal execution.
Select the radio button “Yes, I will restart the computer now” and press [Complete] button, the system will restart
after few minutes. Once the system restarts, all of the installation works are completed.
3.1.5 Menu and Shortcut
If installation is normally completed, [User Manual] [Run-Time] [Engineering] and [Language Selector]menus are
created in the new "InfoU" program list.
Shortcut icons for Runtime and Engineering are created in the desk top.

Chapter 3 Install and Start

3-11

3.2 Start and Stop
3.2.1 Start InfoU
(1) How to execute engineering (InfoUD)
Select [Engineering] from the program menu to execute InfoUD- InfoU’s integral engineering tool.
You may also click and execute the shortcut icons generated during the program installation.
(2) How to execute run time (InfoUD)
Select [File]-[Runtime]-[Start InfoU Run-Time] from the engineering (InfoUD) program menu or select the tool
bar icon to execute InfoUR, InfoU’s Run-Time, along with other Runtime component programs.
At this time, the default project that starts to run is the project on which the user worked most recently or the
demo project included when installing.
You may also click and execute the shortcut icons generated during the program installation.
Chapter 3 Install and Start
3-12
3.2.2 Stop InfoU
(1) How to stop engineering (InfoUD)
Select [File]-[Exit] from the menu to end InfoU.
At this time, only the engineering (InfoUD) program will end without having influence on the run time in effect.
(2) How to stop run time (InfoUD)
At this time, only the engineering (InfoUD) program will end without having influence on the run time in effect.
Select [File]-[Runtime]-[Stop InfoU Run-Time] from the engineering (InfoUD) program menu or select the tool
bar icon to end Runtime.
When the engineering (InfoUD) program is not in effect, you can also end the project when ending the graphic
runtime.
You may select project end menu from the tray icons to end.
[See Chapter 5: Runtime]

Chapter 3 Install and Start

3-13

3.3 Removal and Reinstallation of Programs
3.3.1 Removal of the InfoU
To remove the InfoU program installed in the system, exit the running InfoU runtime program and InfoU
engineering program.
Select the [Delete InfoU] menu in the "InfoU" program list.
Otherwise, select InfoU in [Control Panel]-[Add/Remove Programs] and click the ‘Remove’ button.
Chapter 3 Install and Start
3-14
In the above screen, after selecting [Remove], click the [Next] button.

Chapter 3 Install and Start

3-15

Program removal is in process.
Chapter 3 Install and Start
3-16
When you restart the computer, program removal will be completed.
3.3.2 Reinstallation
To modify or repair, remove the installed program, as shown in the fig., select [Delete InfoU].

Chapter 3 Install and Start

3-17

● Modify: Change the installed package.
● Restore: Reinstall the previously installed package.
● Remove: Remove the installed InfoU.

Chapter 4 Engineering

4-1

Chapter 4 Engineering
As a tool used for configuring a monitoring and control system and developing an application, InfoU Engineering
(InfoUD) allows the user to define system environments needed for executing Run-Time and set up device
configuration, tag, logging and alarm. Engineering settings are managed on a project basis.
The screen below is the one that appears when the program starts executing and it is made up of menu, tool bar,
tool (application) explorer and splash screen. If the program is executed, the default project will be loaded and the
project information screen will appear. The project on which the user worked most recently or the project that is
currently running is designated as the default project.
If Close Project is executed or Open Project fails, the project list screen will appear.
Since this chapter covers only the default screen, menu and tool bar, please refer to [Help] if you need more
information on each application function.
Chapter 4 Engineering
4-2
4.1 Screen Composition
The default screen of engineering is as below.
4.1.1 Main Screen Composition
The main screen consists of the following;
(1) Menu bar
The user can select a menu from the menu bar made up of functions that can be used for the application
program.
(2) Tool bar
The user can execute a frequently used application program with one click on the tool bar.
(3) Identity Zone
A zone to display the identity of the InfoU program.
(4) InfoU Explorer
Icons displayed in a tree type to select an application program.
(5) Main View
An area in which the application program is executed.

Chapter 4 Engineering

4-3

(6) Pop-up Window
Notice is displayed on the system’s status or the user event for application programs.
4.2 Menu and InfoU Explorer
Function menus to be used in InfoUD Engineering are provided.
4.2.1 File
Basic menus such as Start InfoU Run-Time/Stop InfoU Run-Time, Open Project/Close Project, Print and other
menu are provided.
(1) Runtime
The user can start or stop InfoU Run-Time.
(2) New Project
The user can create a new InfoU Project.
1) Project Folder and File
Once a new project is create in InfoU, the following folders and files will be managed.
The following folders are created having the same names with projects.

Folder Name	Description
Archive-AlarmLog	Path to save alarm event logging files
Archive-TagLog	Path to save data logging files
Config	Path for configuration files needed for running
CrossRef	Path for files related to cross reference
GraLS	Path for graphic screen files
IO Driver	Path for driver configuration files
Log	Path to save application logs
Pacakage	Path for server package files
Report	Path for configuration files related to report
Report-Form	Path for report form files
Report-Data	Path to save report creation files
Script	Path for script files
TagDB	Path to save all of the engineered setup information database
Wav	Path for sound file to generate salarm sound

Chapter 4 Engineering
4-4
2) File type related to project

Item	Extension	Description
Project	.lsp	Project information files
Alarm Logging	.adb .rec	Alarm event logging database files Real-time alarm saving files
Tag Logging	.db	Logging database
Config	.ini	Configuration files needed for running
Database	.dbf .cdx	Engineered setup database files
Graphic	.ivd	Graphic file
Serverdata	.sdp	Server data file where the server configuration information is saved
Report	.stg .crf	Report settings information file
Script	.sba	Script file
Sound	.wav	Wave sound file

(3) Open Project
The user can open an InfoU project.
(4) Close Project
The user can close the current project.
(5) Exit
The screen displayed in the current menu view will end and a new empty screen will be displayed.

Notice

If any project is running in real-time, other project can not be selected even after the project is closed in
the engineering.

Chapter 4 Engineering

4-5

4.2.2 Tool
You can execute various functions that need for your engineering works. Tool menu and InfoU Explorer perform
the same functions.
(1) System Settings
You can set up system settings needed for Runtime.
1) Project Property
The user can modify project information and options.
2) Graphic Run-Time Settings
The user can set up the splash screen and style of the graphic runtime screen.
3) Alarm Property
The user can set up overall settings related to activating an alarm.
4) Time Synchronization
The user can set up time synchronization property between system and device.
5) Server Data Management
Set the server data management.
Chapter 4 Engineering
4-6
6) Redundancy Settings
Select the tasks related to redundancy.
(2) Tag Management
You can organize devices to be used for the projects, input, edit or delete tags.
(3) Structure Tag
A Structure Tag template and item list is displayed.
1) Structure Tag
The user can input, edit or delete structure tags.
(4) Logging Management
You can set up and manage logging groups of the tag data needed for the user’s history management.
Logging groups can be inquired from Trend, Report, List Trend and Script.
1) Cycle
The user can set up regular cycle logging groups.
2) Statistics
The user can set up statistics logging groups.
3) Accumulation
The user can set up accumulation logging groups.
4) String
The user can set up string logging groups.
5) Event
Set the event logging group.
6) Selective Log
Set the logging group for selective storage.
7) Event String
Set the event string logging group.

Chapter 4 Engineering

4-7

(5) Alarm Management
You can manage alarm event information by setting up alarm groups.
1) Alarm Management
The user can input, edit or delete alarm groups.
(6) Graphic
A list of graphic files currently used for the project is displayed.
1) Graphic
The user can click a file from the InfoU Graphic file list in the project “GraLS” folder and edit it in the
graphic editor.
(7) Report
A report list is displayed.
1) Graphic
The user can click a file from the InfoU Graphic file list in the project “GraLS” folder and edit it in the
graphic editor.
(8) Script
You can edit a script and inquire an internal function list.
1) Edit Script
The user can edit a script document
2) Function List
A list of the internal functions presented in InfoU is displayed.
(9) Action Trigger
With this function, you can execute Edit Action Trigger and Holiday Settings for executing script, recipe and
database.
Chapter 4 Engineering
4-8
1) Edit Action Trigger
The user can add, modify or delete action trigger.
2) Holiday Settings
The user can add, modify or delete holiday settings.
(10) User Settings
The user can set up user-related information and use these settings when receiving the authorization to
control them in the alarm action and graphic
1) User Settings
The user can set up his/her personal information such as his/her authorization to control or contact
information.
(11) Recipe Settings
The user can set up control over designated patterns by inputting items, units and data of a recipe.
1) Recipe Settings
The user can add, modify or delete a recipe from the displayed recipe list.
(12) Database
Sharing data with other systems is possible by setting up Database Connection and Database Operation.
1) Database Connection
The user can manage settings to connect with external database
2) Database Operation
The user can define the data input and output relationship with external database
(13) Utility
It supports convenient engineering works by registering and setting up various components.

Chapter 4 Engineering

4-9

1) Unit Message Registration
Various industrial units registered in this menu are very helpful to select a unit easily during the tag edit.
2) Alarm Message Registration
If the user registers alarm messages that will be displayed in case of any alarm event and select those
during the tag edit, he/she can inquire those messages when alarm actually takes place.
3) On/Off Display Registration
The user can register display methods according to the status of digital value to use them during the tag
edit.
4) LS IS Program Registration
The user can register LS Industrial System’s PLC Programs and execute them in the engineering screen
and also input a tag automatically
5) LS PLC Tag Import
You can import the LS PLC tag for use.
6) Application Registration
The user can register external programs and execute them in the engineering screen.
(14) Cross Reference
The Cross reference relationship in the project between tag and object is displayed to allow the user to
identify any engineering error.
1) Cross Reference
The cross reference screen is displayed.
4.2.3 Help
Displays InfoU Engineering information
(1) InfoU Help
The Help screen is displayed
(2) InfoU Information
Information on the InfoU version is displayed.
Chapter 4 Engineering
4-10
4.2.4 Tool Bar
It displays the toolbar menu for each image.

Tool Bar	Name
Tag Management
Logging Management
Alarm Management
Graphic
Script
Action Trigger
Start InfoU Run-Time
Stop InfoU Run-Time

4.2.5 Pop-up Window
It provides the function that gives a user the event information.
(1) Notice to inform the system status and user event for application programs is displayed.
(2) Notice is displayed in the messenger-style window.
(3) This window disappears few minutes later after it pops up.

Chapter 5 Run Time

5-1

Chapter 5 Run Time
With this function, the user can execute the project registered for engineering settings.
After establishing a communication link between system and device according to the setting information on the
channel and station, the user can monitor the real-time site status with the attained data in the plant screen. Also,
the user can perform various functions such as history logging and report printing by generating alarms of the
major monitoring points.
5.1 Start InfoU Run-Time
To start InfoU Run Time, click Start in the window screen to find a program directory or click the Run Time icon in
the desk top..
(1) Start with the Shortcut icon.
(2) Start in the InfoU engineering menu.
Chapter 5 Run Time
5-2

Chapter 5 Run Time

5-3

5.2 Shutdown InfoU Run-Time
All of the functions operated during Runtime will stop when this function is selected. This function is executed as
follow.
(1) Shutdown InfoU Run-Time at Tray icon
Click [InfoU Tray Icon]  Mouse right button click  [Shutdown InfoU Run-time]
(2) Stop InfoU Run-Time at engineering menu
Click [File]  [Runtime]  [Stop InfoU Run-Time]
Chapter 5 Run Time
5-4
[InfoU Toolbar]  [Stop InfoU Run-Time]
(3) Exit the InfoU Run-Time
Click the menu [File]  [Exit] or click the Windows system menu [X] button.
If you click the ‘OK’ button, InfoU runtime will end.

Chapter 5 Run Time

5-5

Once InfoU Run-time ends, the following splash screen appears to show the process status.
Chapter 5 Run Time
5-6
5.3 Runtime Menu
5.3.1 Menu Item
Tray icons of the system are displayed as seen in the figure above and the user may use the following menus by
clicking one of them.
● Shutdown InfoU Run-Time: The project being operated in real time ends.
● Show process status: The monitoring screen for process status is displayed.
● Show graphic viewer: The graphic monitoring screen is displayed as an upper-level screen.
● Hide process status: The graphic monitoring screen is hidden. Even though it is not displayed, it is being
executed in the background.
● I/O Driver --> Device Status: The status of a device connected and set up is displayed.
● I/O Driver -->Simulation settings: The simulation setting screen for the set tag is displayed to generate
data on the device values.
● Device Data: A screen is displayed to allow the user to inquire device data.

Chapter 5 Run Time

5-7

5.4 Device Status
The status screen of the connected device is displayed.
5.4.1 Controls
● Select [IO Driver] --> [Device Status] from Run-Time Tray icon Menu to execute.
● Select [Work] --> [IO Station Status] from Graphic Run-Time Program Menu to execute.
● The user may use ShowNetworkStatus() from Graphic Script Function to execute.
5.4.2 Station Staus Information Interface
● Channel/Station: The communication configuration and status of the device is displayed.
● Station OK: It shows the communication status of the device and 0 means normal, 1 means
abnormal.
● Read OK: The number of cases in which device values have been successfully read since the
project started is displayed.
● Read Try: The number of cases in which reading device values has been attempted since the
project started is displayed.
● Write OK: The number of cases in which device values has been successfully written since
t he project started is displayed.
● Write Try: The number of cases in which writing device values has been attempted since the
project started is displayed.
● Reconnect Try: The number of cases in which connecting with the device has been
attempted is displayed.
Chapter 5 Run Time
5-8
5.5 Simulation settings
As a function to generate virtual device values, the user can simulates virtual device values with this function
before connecting a device to identify any error of the engineering work in advance.
5.5.1 Controls
Select [IO Driver] --> [Simulation settings] from Run-Time Tray icon Menu to execute.
5.5.2 Simulation Information Interface
● Load Simulation: The saved simulation files are loaded to set up simulation.
● Cancel All Simulation: All of the simulation settings that have been set up until now are cancelled.
● Apply Simulation at Runtime: When starting Runtime, the user can apply simulation immediately to set up.
● Save Simulation: The current simulation information is saved in a file.
● Select All: All of the tags displayed in the tag list window are selected.
● Deselect All: All of the selected tags in the tag list window are cancelled.
● Tags are displayed depending on the selection either analog or digital. Multiple selections are available.
● Simulation Type: Select a rule to generate simulation data.
- Analog: The user can select one among Writing Test, Random, Sine, Sawtooth and Triangle,
- Digital: The user can select one among Writing Test, Random and Change,
- String: You can choose one; controllable, random
- When selecting items of XG5000, in case of communication channel/station of LSIS XGT PLC series, you
can use the simulation function of XG5000.

Chapter 5 Run Time

5-9

● MIN: The user can set up the lowest value of the range of change when generating data.
● MAX: The user can set up the highest value of the range of change when generating data.
● Initial Value: The user can input the initial value when applying the simulation rule.
● Period: Input a period of one cycle of the simulation type that has a certain cycle (Sine, Sawtooth and Triangle).
● Apply Simulation: The user can apply simulation to the selected tags.
● Cancel Simulation: The user can cancel applying simulation to the selected tags.
● Close: Close the current dialog box. Even after the screen ends, simulation data keep operating.
Chapter 5 Run Time
5-10
5.6 Device Data
The user may monitor raw data values attained from the communication with the device.
Simulation data are displayed when device values are simulated.
5.6.1 Controls
Select [IO Driver][Device data] in the real time operation tray icon menu and run it.
5.6.2 Raw Data Information Interface

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-1

Chapter 6 System Settings
In this step, you may create a project and manage basic environment settings for Runtime.
6.1 Project Property
As the first step needed for Runtime, the user can create a project and manage configuration settings and options
in this step.
Each project becomes an unit subjected to Engineering and Run-time management and the user can move, copy
or use projects to other system, drive or path since they are created and managed as a batch and under each
project unit, sub-paths such as tag, logging, alarm, graph, report and script are created and managed.
It can easily manage numerous projects while providing easy copying and transferring contents between projects
and efficient engineering works.
6.1.1 Create New Project
A function New Project can be executed after closing the previous project.
Once the project is successfully closed, the latest project list is displayed. Click [New Project] button to perform the
work of creating a new project.
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-2

Notice

If any project is currently operated, a new project is not created.

(1) Project Type
1) Stand Alone Project
A stand alone project is created
2) Client -> Server Project
A project that is activated by the server mode of the client to server system is created
3) Client -> Client Project
A project that is activated by the client mode of the client to server system is created
(2) Project Name
Input a project name
(3) Project Path
1) It refers to a path where a new project is created.If […] button is selected, the following screen will appear
to allow the user to select a path
2) A new folder with the same name as the project is created in the subfolder of the folder designated by the
user to create a new project

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-3

(4) Creator
Input a name or a department of the person who creates the project.
(5) Description
Input detailed information
(6) Create
A new project is created. After the new project is created, the project will open
(7) Once the new project is created, a new project file with a project folder and extension “.lsp" will be created
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-4
6.1.2 Project Settings
You may set up general properties of the project and basic configurations of the network. Also, you may set up
project options and execution modules suitable for your purpose.

Notice

Project options can be set up depending on the authorized scope by the system license. Refer to the following
example:
If the license key is of developer or executor version and “Web Function Support” is selected as an option,
the demo mode will operated for one hour resulted from the violation of license.

(1) How to display the screen
●If the engineering program is executed, the Project Property screen of the basic project is displayed
● Select the ‘Project Property’ in the menu and tool explorer.
●Select the route item (project name) from InfoU Explorer.
(2) Project Property Interface
The screen configuration of ‘Project Property’ is as below.

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-5

1) General Information
a. Project Name
The name the user gives when creating a project is displayed and it is not editable
b. Project Type
The selected project type is editable
c. Path
The location of the project is displayed
d. Description
The user can give additional information on the project name
e. Creator
The name of the first creator is displayed
f. Generated Date
The date when the project is created for the first time is displayed
g. Changed Date
The date when the project is latestly changed is displayed
h. Password
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-6
If the option “Check password when the program opens” is selected, the user needs to input
thepassword.
2) Network
a. Line Redundancy
If Line Redundancy was set up in the client and server project, this function is selected.
b. Default IP Address
The user needs to write the IP Address he/she will primarily use
c. Reserve IP Address
The user needs to write the IP Address he/she will use in emergency.
d. This setting is deactivated in a single project (Stand Alone).
3) Information of license
a. The information of the license key is displayed.
b. Option
Engineering, runtime-only, web server options are displayed.
c. Tag Limit
Number of available I/O Tag is displayed.
d. Kind
XGT-InfoU
e. Web User
When using a web license, the number of concurrent connected users.
4) Option
a. Start Run Time Project
It is automatically executed in a runtime mode while InfoUR is executed.If it is not set up, the
standby mode is executed.When creating a project, the user may select default.
b. Check Password
The user needs to input the password to begin the engineering work when opening the project.
c. System Redundancy
When starting the server, the user needs to set up whether to start it as redundancy.
d. Alarm SMS Notify
The user needs to set up whether to provide the alarm message service by SMS or not when
any alarm occurs.
e. Alarm E-Mail Notify
The user needs to set up whether to provide the alarm message service by e-mail or not whenany
alarm occurs.
f. Supporting InfoU Web
As an option, the user needs to decide whether to provide the Web service support or not.
g. Additional Option
If you click the [Additional Options] button, the below screen will show up.

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-7

● When using this option, the Windows system key will be deactivated.
● Alt-Tab, Alt+Esc, Windows Start button, Task Manager, Ctrl+Alt+Del, Ctrl+Shift+Esc keys are not
available.

Notice

This function is available for Windows XP only. It cannot be used for Windows Vista or Windows7.

5) Operation Module
a. The user can limit program functions by selecting functions to execute from the process list
b. This function is intended to restrict unnecessary functions for tests when using a low-capacityhardware

Notice

Select All is a default setting and if the user limits functions voluntarily, unexpected results may be
prompted because the program settings may effect on the interrelation between functions

c. Graphic Runtime
If it is not selected, only data service is executed as background without the plant monitoring control.
d. Report Runtime
The function to automatically output or save the report is restricted.
e. Runtime Script
The function to execute the scrip is restricted.
f. WorkFlow Runtime
The function to designate the scrip operation is restricted.
g. Alarm Logging
The function to save alarm event history is restricted.
h. Tag Logging
The function to save history data is restricted.
i. IO Driver
The function to communicate with the device is restricted.
j. Time Synchronization
The function for time synchronization is restricted.
k. Control Manager
All of the functions set up not only in the screen but also in the scrip are restricted.
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-8
l. Alarm Process
Limitation on operational functions such as automatic printout of alarm sound, automatic printout, SMS,
E-Mail and alarm logging, etc. when an alarm occurs.
m. Alarm Agent
Limitation of the alarm sound
n. Data Export Runtime
The function for data export is restricted.
6) Save
a. The selected options are saved.
b. The options selected during Runtime are not applied; therefore, the user needs to restart the program
after closing it to apply the selected options.

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-9

6.2 Graphic Run-Time Settings
In the graphic execution screen, the user can set up environment for the graphic run-time (InfoUX.exe).
For environment settings, the user can set up menu, view/hide toolbar, initial execution position, name to be
displayed in the title bar, view/hide window control buttons and other options and also set up a default page to
open as soon as it is executed.
(1) Window Style
1) Menu
Select whether to view the basic menu.
2) Toolbar
Select whether to view the toolbar.
3) Status Bar
Select whether to view the status bar(d) Sizable: Select whether to allow the operator to change
thescreen size.
4) Screen size adjustment
The operator can change the screen size.
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-10
5) Title Bar
Select whether to display the title window located in the top of the window.
6) Alarm Popup
Select whether to display the latest alarm in the pop-up window when any alarm occurs during RunTime
a. User Alarm Popup
The alarm popup screen of a user is displayed.
7) Auto Logout
In case there are no key inputs or mouse operations until the set time passes after login, it will be
automatically logged out.
(2) Window Position
1) Start Maximize
Select whether to execute RunTime in the maximum screen.
2) Set Position
The user can designate the location and size of the screen during Run Time.
Click “Full Monitor Area” button, the area coordinates for the multiple monitors are displayed. The
coordinates reference (0, 0) is for the main monitor.
(3) Title Bar
1) Title
Input the title of the screen.
2) System Menu
Select whether to display system menus in icon types in the left top of the screen.
3) Minimize Icon
Select whether to display minimized buttons in the right top of the screen.
4) Maximize Icon
Select whether to display maximized buttons in the right top of the screen
(4) Default Start Page
1) This is for selecting screens to be displayed at first when executing Run Time.
2) Add
All pages contained in the current project will be listed and among them, you can select one for the initial
screen.
3) Delete
The selected screen file is deleted from the initial screen list.
4) Up/Down
You can specify the order of opening the initial screen by moving the selected file up/down.

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-11

6.3 Alarm Property
You may set up items needed for handling and operating alarms. You may set up the number of alarm events to
save and the criteria to handle real-time alarms (Criteria to delete or designate auto printing and color, etc) and
also set up common options (SMS, mail) needed to handle alarms.
Select Alarm Property from InfoU Explorer.
(1) Alarm Delete Condition
Set up a time to delete alarm events from the real-time alarm memory.
1) Recovery
When the alarm is recovered, it is deleted form the real-time alarm memory (Default)
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-12
2) Ack.
You can delete the alarm only when it is acknowledged.
3) Recovery and Ack.
The alarm can be deleted only when it is recovered and acknowledged.
(2) Alarm display when Run-Time Starting
Set up whether to cancel the real-time alarm when restarting. If not set up, the real-time alarm is reset when
the system restarts and the number of alarm begins from 0.
1) Unrecoverable Alarm
When starting the program, information on the unrecovered alarm is loaded in the memory.
2) Unack Alarm
When starting the program, information on the unacknowledged alarm is loaded in the memory.
(3) SMS
Set up details on the SMS message service to send alarm information when it occurs.
1) Telecom Company
Select a telecom company used for sending SMS
2) SMS COM Port
If the SMS sending terminal is installed, set up COM Port.
(4) Mail Server (SMTP)
A mail server (SMTP) shall be set up to send a mail related to alarm information to the user.
Set up a mail server address.
1) Mail Verification
If an account is needed to connect with the mail server, input the mail ID and password.
(5) Backup File Path
You may a path to save backup files.

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-13

1) Storage Path
A path to save backup files is set up.
2) Secondary Storage Path
To be prepared for the event that it fails to access to the storage path, set up a secondary storage path to
access.
3) Delete button
It deletes the input path.
4) Path Search
A button to search folders to input each storage path and when this button is pressed, a folder search
window will appear.
(6) History Alarm
The number of alarms for each alarm type is set up to save them in the history DB.
1) Total storage space
It calculates the storage space depending on the number of alarms set by a user and represents it to the
user.
2) Process Alarm
Input the number of process history alarms to be saved.
3) System Alarm
Input the number of system history alarms to be saved.
4) Event
Input the number of event history alarms to be saved.

Notice

If DB files already exist, editing is not available. To reset the storage period or the alarm number, it is
needed to delete the existing alarm logging file.

Chapter 6 System Settings
6-14
(7) Backup File Storage Number
You may set up the number of backup DB files on history alarms.
1) Process Alarm
The number to backup DB files on process alarms
2) System Alarm
The number to backup DB files on system alarms
3) Event
The number to backup DB files on event alarms
4) Full Storage Space
The storage space needed to maintain the selected number of backup files is displayed.
(8) Select Auto Print Color
You may set up print colors by levels and types when auto printing alarms. Click “Select Auto Print Color”
button.

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-15

1) Auto Print Color Settings
Black is the default color and six colors such as pink, dark green, blue, yellow, red and green are
available.
2) Save
Once color setting is completed, click ‘Save’ button to save the selected colors.
3) Close
The window for Auto Print Color Settings is closed.
(9) Save
Alarm settings are saved.
(10) SMSOption-Notepad
If any new modem control device is used in addition to the mandatory SMS terminal, additional instruction for
users is presented.
1) SMSOption.ini File
There is SMSOption.ini file in the bin folder (ex>C:InfoUin) of the InfoU installation folder (If there is no
corresponding file, the file is automaticalled created when InfoU starts)
The file contains the following contents:
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-16
2) SMSOption.ini Edit
a. [SMS] Item
●Count: Specify the count number when adding the SMS terminal number to be displayed in the setting
screen.
●1=LGT:LGWSM (Exist as many as the above count from 1. When setting SMS telecom company
terminal, contents to be displayed in the combo box Count )
●2=SKT:BSM-856
●3= Telecom company: Terminal (write SMS terminal number and the telecom company name and
terminal name to be newly added.)
b. [Telecom Company: Terminal]: Set up sending and receiving options for the telecom company and
terminal model. (see the terminal manual)
●MSG: Write message types to send/receive to/from the SMS terminal.
[ToTel]: Receiver’s telephone number
[FromTel]: Sender’s telephone number
[Opt1]: If there is any option, write it.
●OptCount: Write the number of options
●MsgType: Select either Text or Hex (Be caution because specifications are different between

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-17

terminals)
●Opt1,…:Option character to be entered in each option part.
●Timeout_msec: Time to wait response from the telecom company
●SuccessMsg: Message code to receive from the terminal when sending is successful.
●FailMsg: Message code to receive from the terminal when sending is failed.
●Retry: Retry number when sending is failed.
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-18
6.4 Time Synchronization
To prevent any improper time from being applied to all of the processes used in the system due to any wrong
computer time during the real-time operation of the current project, time synchronization is executed by periodically
obtaining time from the computer on which the project is executed or other computer.
This can be applied to the stand alone system provided in the InfoU system and other server/client systems and it
also provides time synchronization with the I/O device station connected with the InfoU system.
For time in the system, basically UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) is used.
6.4.1 Default Screen
In the engineering main screen, select Time Synchronization from subclauses under System Settings of InfoU
Explorer to display the setting screen above.Time Synchronization is selected as a default value he initial setting
screen.
(1) General Settings
1) Not Use Time Sync
a. If selected
Time synchronization is not used between the computer in which InfoU system is installed and I/O
device.

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-19

2) Synchronization Type
a. Connection HMI Server Time
The computer in which the current InfoU project is operated is designated
b. Specific Computer Time
The computer on the network is designated.
3) Synchronizing cycle setting service by a user (Unit: Min.)
a. You can synchronize the computer time with the targeted subject in seconds set by the cycle.
4) Event Occurs When Asynchronous
a. If synchronization fails, it generates this information as an event after it carries out time synchronization
with a local system.
5) System Sync. Cycle (Unit: Min.)
a. The interval of the computer’s time synchronization can be set up by the user.
6) Synchronization of the device that provides time synchronization
a. Whether time synchronization is activated or not
b. Even though a device provides time synchronization, it does not perform it if it is not activated.
Time synchronization cycle (Unit: sec), Time unit (UTC/ Local Time)
c. For time synchronization, UTC is used as basic time and if not specified, local time can be used.
(2) Device’s Time Synchronization
Device’s time synchronization is available only if full time synchronization is activated. Device’s time synchronization does
not apply to the entire devices but only to the stations that provide time synchronization while providing the following list to
allow the user to select.
Also, for device’s time synchronization, it can be set up and executed separately depending on whether each
device is activated or not even through the user selects a certain time. The user can select either UTC or
local time since a certain time display way exist for each station of the device rather than using UTC in the
entire stations such as in full time synchronization
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-20
6.4.2 Scenario for the Whole System
(1) Standalone
A time synchronization way used for projects that are executed independently.
1) Connection HMI Time
Time is synchronized with the time of its own local system．
2) Specific Computer Time
a. Time synchronization is performed with the computer assigned as Computer 1.
b. If time synchronization fails in Computer 1, it is carried out with the time of Computer 2 after an event
occurs (if set up).
c. If time synchronization fails both in Computer 1 and Computer 2, it is carried out with the time of local
system.
3) Notice
If time synchronization is carried out with local system due to the failure in time synchronization, time
synchronization is attempted with the very first setting information.
(2) Server/Client-Single System
A time synchronization way used for projects that form a server and client relation to execute.
1) Connection HMI Time
a. Server
Time is synchronized with the time of its own local system.
b. Client
Time is synchronized with the time of the server connected with the project that is being executed.
2) Specific Computer Time
a. If all of the time synchronization fails, it is carried out with the time of the local system.

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-21

3) Notice
If time synchronization is carried out with local system due to the failure in time synchronization, time
synchronization is attempted with the very first setting information.
(3) Server/Client-Redundancy System
A time synchronization way for projects that form a server and client relation and server redundancy
1) Connection HMI Time
a. Server (Running)
●Server 1 brings the information on whether it is in running or standby when it runs first and also brings
the information on its partner-Server 2.
●If Server 1 is running, Server 1 uses its local time and recordｓ this information on the log.
●If Server 1 is in standby, Server 1 synchronizes its time with that of Server2,
b. Server (If redundancy is abstained)
●If Server 1 is running and Server 2 is in standby and Server 2’s running is abstained by Server 1,
Serve 2 uses local time and Server1 obtains time information from Server 2 to time synchronize after
receiving information on the change in the system’s running status
c. Client
●The client synchronizes time between the project under executing and the currently connected
Server 1.
●If Server 1 is abstained to Server 2, redundancy system, due to any failure in the network or the
system, the client that receives this information changes automatically from Server 1 to Server 2 for
time synchronization and an event for the changed information on synchronization occurs.
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-22
2) Specific Computer Time
a. Server/Client
●It is synchronized with the time of Computer 1 connected with the network.
●If time synchronization fails in Computer 1, it is carried out with the time of Computer 2 after an event
occurs (if set up).
●If time synchronization fails both in Computer 1 and Computer 2, it is carried out with the time of local
system.
3) Notice
If time synchronization is carried out with local system due to the failure in time synchronization, time
synchronization is attempted with the very first setting information.
6.4.3 Time Synchronization Settings
(1) Exceptional settings of firewall [server]
UDP port 123 is handled exceptionally. Set (Inbound) or Firewall Disable.

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-23

Chapter 6 System Settings
6-24

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-25

Chapter 6 System Settings
6-26
(2) Services running [Server]
Among the service items, check whether the Windows Time item has been started.

Chapter 6 System Settings

6-27

(3) Registry settings [Server, Client]
1) Server
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesW32TimeTimeProvidersNtpServer
Enabled value data set to 1
Chapter 6 System Settings
6-28
2) Client
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESYSTEMCurrentControlSetServicesW32TimeTimeProvidersNtpClient
Enabled value data set to 1

Chapter 7 I/O Driver

7-1

Chapter 7 I/O Driver
This software is to collect data from a device and transfer to the upper process.
The user can add or set up Channel and Station in Tag Management.
7.1 I/O Driver Setting
The user can add, delete or modify Channel and Station through pop-up menu if each device is displayed in a tree
structure. This section briefly explains how to edit each item.
7.1.1 Communication Channel
Channel refers to a channel to be communicated and selected among supporting I/O Drivers. Also, it basically
provides a “memory” type of channels to classify input/out tags and memory tags in InfoU.
(1) Configuration
To add communication channels, run the menu based on the below procedures.
① Click [InfoU Explorer]  [Tag Management]
Chapter 7 I/O Driver
7-2
② Run [Device Tag]  [I/O Tag]  [Add Channel].
③ Select the desired communication driver in the communication driver list and click the [OK] button.

Notice

☞ The setting method may be different depending on the communication driver.
☞ For settings of each communication driver, refer to [Communication Driver] of the appendix.

Chapter 7 I/O Driver

7-3

(2) Edit
To edit the communication channel, double-click the relevant communication channel or click with the right
mouse button then run [Communication Channel Property] in the popup menu.
7.1.2 Station
The station means the actual device belonging to the upper communication channel such as PLC or Inverter.

Notice

☞ The station cannot exist by itself so it should be added and subordinated to the communication channel.
☞ For some communication drivers, you can add the station even in the communication driver setting window.

Chapter 7 I/O Driver
7-4
(1) Add
After clicking with the right mouse button on [Device Tag]  [I/O Tag]  [“Communication Channel Name”],
run [Add Station] in the popup menu.
(2) Edit
In [Device Tag]  [I/O Tag]  [“communication channel name”]  [“station name”], double-click the station
name that you want to edit or after clicking with the right mouse button, run [Station Property] in the popup
menu.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-1

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8.1 Overview
The tag editor is the tool to register and manage the tags that are the basis of the HMI system. All functions
supported and operated by the HMI system runs based on the tags registered in the tag DB. Tags can be largely
divided into I/O tags that receive signal from the on-site equipment and memory tags registered virtually by
necessity of the upper system.
The InfoU shows the tag information obviously and neatly through the property window and a user can easily
perform the tag engineering works through the InfoU. In addition, it supports the clipboard and CSV file’s I/O so
you can register and manage mass tag data easily and promptly.
To execute the tag editor, click [Tag Management] from the menu tree items on the left side of the InfoU
engineering module or select [Tag Management] in the main menu or toolbar of the InfoU engineering module.
8.1.1 Definitions of Terms

Terms	Description
Tag editor	It is the module of InfoU engineering program, which performs a variety of editions for tags.
Analog tag	It means the analog type of tags that can be largely divided into the integer and real number type.
Digital tag	It has two tag values; 0 or 1 (Open/Close, ON/OFF).
Group tag	It is the virtual tag to constitute the tag with logical layer information. For example, it acts as a folder of the Explorer.
General tag	It means any tag created by a user’s direct engineering.
System tag	The tag is automatically created when registering the system. It is mainly related to the unique status and operations of the equipment such as the conditions, the number of reading, etc.
Analog alarm	The alarm occurs for the analog tag. When the analog tag values exceed the limits of the range, variations, etc., the alarm will occur. After that, if the values come into the normal range, the alarm will be cleared.
Digital alarm	The alarm occurs for the digital tag. When the digital tag value is 0 or 1, or it varies, the alarm is set up for processing.
CSV file	It is the text format file and each item is separated by a comma (,). It can be compatible with Excel and used to manage the mass tag in the tag editor.
Structure tag template	In case there is the tag set of the specific device or the tag that should be created repetitively since its structure is fixed, this template defines the name of the patterns of these tags as a bunch.
Structure tag item	It means the common prototype of each tag forming the structure tag template.

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-2
8.1.2 Execution and Main Screen
To execute the tag editor, click [Tag Management] from the menu tree on the left side of the InfoU engineering
program or select [Tool]  [Tag Management] in the menu.
The screen of the executed tag editor is as shown below.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-3

The composition of the tag editor is as shown below table.
(1) Menu / toolbar
It is composed of the basic menu and toolbar buttons such as Refresh, View Transition, Move to upper group,
etc.

Toolbar icon	Description
The icon indicates Refresh. It refreshes the details of tag database.
The icon indicates Group Tag View. It converts the deployment scheme of the tag into Group View.
The icon indicates Device Tag View. It converts the deployment scheme of the tag into Device View.
The icon indicates Move to Upper Group. It moves the tag to the upper tree items in the tree structure.

(2) Tag structure tree
It deploys the tag composition in a tree image to display many tags in an efficient manner. The deployment of
the tag composition has two types; [Device View] deploying tags through the physical structure that is actually
connected to devices; [Group View] composing the tag structure with logical groups. A user can select the
desired tag structure to perform tag editions effectively.
(3) Tag list
It shows the list of the tags belonging to the items selected from the tag structure tree. The properties shown
in the list are the typical items of the tags. A user can select the shown column or change the position of the
column or specify the order of showing tags.
(4) License information
It shows the InfoU’s license information simply. It also shows the validity of the license and the number of
tags.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-4
8.1.3 Conversion of Tag View
The conversion of tag view is the function to manage tags easier by converting the deployment method of the tag
tree into a user’s desired one. You can convert the deployment into [Device View] and [Group View] by clicking the
appropriate button of the toolbar menu.
(1) Device view tree structure
It can be used when you want to view tags in the way physically connected to devices. The group is not
visible in the device view. The device view tree structure is composed of the following tree items.
1) Tag management(fixed item)
It shows the whole tags, however, the group tag is not visible.
2) I/O tag (fixed item)
It is the tag that is actually connected to the I/O point of the on-site device. There are communication
channels for its sub-item. When selecting this, all I/O tag lists will be shown.
3) Communication channel (variable item)
It means the type of the channel to communicate and you can see the channel selected among available
I/O Drivers. Namely, the channels only registered during tag engineering can be shown. When selected
from the tree, the tag list belonging to the relevant communication channel is visible.
4) Station (variable item)
It is the sub-item of the communication channel and means the actual devices such as the PLC, inverter.
When selecting this, the tag list belonging to the relevant station will be shown.
5) Memory tag (fixed item)
It means the virtual memory tag for operations in HMI system. When selecting this, all memory tags
except the group tags will be shown.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-5

(2) Group view tree structure
In contrast with the above, the group view tree structure shows tags by composing logical groups. The
creation of each group leads to the creation of group tags and it includes the sub-tag. Each group can have
the sub-group. When selecting one group, the tag belonging to the selected group will be shown with the subgroup.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-6
8.2 Configuration of Communication Equipment
In the case of the device view tree structure, you can add, delete, and change the communication channels and
stations through popup menus. This section briefly describes how to edit each time. For each property of the
communication channels, stations with detailed usage, refer to the “I/O driver” manual.
8.2.1 Communication Channel
It means the type of the channel to communicate and can be selected among the available I/O drivers
(1) Addition
To add communication channels, after clicking with the right mouse button on the I/O tag items,
select [Add Channel] menu.
If you select the menu, the available I/O diver lists will be shown.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-7

If you select the item to add in the communication driver list and click [Add], the window to edit the properties
of the relevant communication channel will be shown.
For more details, refer to the “I/O Driver” manual.
(2) Edition of Properties
To edit the properties of the registered communication channel, click with the right mouse button on the
relevant communication channel and select [Channel Property]. (Or you can double-click the tree item)
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-8
If you select [Channel Property], the window displaying the properties for the registered communication
channel will show up. Through this window, a user can change the properties of the communication channel
and save them.
(3) Deletion
It is the function to delete the registered communication channel with the stations and tags belonging to the
registered one. Select the communication channel to delete and click with the right mouse button and then,
select [Delete Channel] in the popup menu.
If you select [Delete Channel], the following warning message will show up.
If you select [Yes], the ‘Delete’ function will be executed; if you select [No], the function will be canceled.
When you delete the data once, it will be deleted permanently so be careful of this.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-9

8.2.2 Station
The station means the actual devices such as the PLC, inverter acting as the communication channel, which is the
type of communication channels. Its menu deployment method is similar to the communication channels.
For more details on each station, refer to the “I/O Driver” manual.
(1) Addition
To add stations, after selecting the type of the relevant communication channels, click with the right mouse
button and execute [Add Station].
Then, you can see the screen for the relevant station.
If you input the details and save them, the relevant station will be added to the sub-item of the communication
channel.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-10
(2) Edition of Properties
Then, you can see the screen for the relevant station.
If you input the details and save them, the relevant station will be added to the sub-item of the communication
channel.
(3) Deletion
It is the function to delete the registered station with the tags belonging to the registered one. Select the
station to delete and click with the right mouse button and then, select [Delete Station] in the menu.
Then, the following warning message will show up.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-11

If you select [Yes], the ‘Delete’ function will be executed; if you select [No], the function will be canceled.
In common with the communication channel, when you delete the data once, it will be deleted permanently so
be careful of this.

Notice

You should pay special attention to delete communication channels and stations.
☞ Deleting communication channels means the relevant communication channel with its all stations and tags will
be removed.
☞ Deleting stations means the relevant station with its all stations and tags will be removed.

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-12
8.3 Tag Property
The tag is the basic unit that has the field or virtual value in the upper HMI system as well as the InfoU. The can be
divided into the actual I/O tag connected to the I/O devices; the memory tag created by necessity. All tags can
have their own values except group tags and they can be divided into Analog, Digital, String tags depending on the
type of values.
The tag has several properties and the definable items are limited depending on each property. In this section, the
properties of the tag are classified and the meaning of each property is defined. The figure shown below is an
example of the tag property window.
The tag properties are divided into 5; common, general items, details, alarms, operation expressions. In the case
of the detailed tab and alarm tab, the definable properties may be different depending on the tag types. As shown
in the Fig., unsettable items are deactivated and depending on the tag types and the relevant property group tab is
visible and invisible over and over again.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-13

The following is the description on each property group tab.

Properties	Description
Description items	Property that the tags should have commonly
General items	I/O information of I/O and various flags
Details - Analog	The property that is related analog values can be settable when the tag is an analog type.
Details - Digital	The property that is related to digital values can be settable when the tag is a digital type.
Details - String	The property that is related to string values can be settable when the tag is a string type.
Alarm - Analog	The alarm property can be settable when the tag is an analog type.
Alarm - Digital	The alarm property can be settable when the tag is digital type.
Operation expression	Property related to operation expressions

8.3.1 Common Items
They are the most basic property sets of the tag that are commonly used for all types of tags.
(1) Group Name

Properties name	Description
Group name	Name to manage the tag in a logical group

(2) Tag Name

Properties name

Description

Tag name

It is the name of the tag and has the eigen value in the group. The length of the tag
name cannot exceed 95 characters of Korean/ 190 characters of English. In this
context, the length of the tag name means the full name including the group name.
The rules applied to define the tag name are as shown below.
● The length of the name is limited to 95 characters of Korean/ 190 characters of
English,
● It must not begin with a number and cannot contain spaces.
● Except some cases, special characters are not available.
● Available characters : # $ [ ] _ { }

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-14
(3) Description

Properties name	Description
Description	It is the comment on the tag. The string length is limited to 127 characters of Korean/ 254 characters of English.

(4) Tag Type

Properties name

Description

Tag type

It classifies the type of tag values. They can be divided into Group / Analog / Digital /
String depending on the characteristics of values.
● Group : The value does not exist and it is deactivated in the device view so you
cannot select it.
● Analog : Select this if you have the analog value.
● Digital : Select this if you have the digital value of 0 or 1.
● String : Select this if you have the string value.
If the group tag has the tag as its sub-item, changing into the general tag is not
allowed.

(5) Kind

Properties name	Description
Kind	It is the kind of tags. It is read-only property so cannot be changed by a user. ● General : Tags created by a user ● System : Tags to manage the status of the station. They are automatically created when adding stations.

Notice

Among common items, the group name and tag name may work differently when executing the tag properties in
the device view and group view.
In the group view, the full name of the tag is divided into the group name and tag name but in the device view, the
group name column is empty and the full name of tags will be displayed in the tag name column.
☞ Name property in the group view
The full name of the tag is divided into the [group name] and [tag name]. In this case, the group name is read
only so it cannot be changed by a user and the [tag name] should be the only one in the relevant group.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-15

☞ Name property in the device view
There is no group in the device view so the [Group Name] item does not exist. Instead, the full tag name
combining the [group name] with the tag name is displayed in the [Tag Name]. In practice, the external/internal
communication is made with the full tag name and the full name has the eigen value in the project.

8.3.2 General Items
They are the items to set up the tag properties related to I/O and various flags.
(1) Separation

Properties name	Description
Separation	It distinguishes whether the tag is collected from the connected actual devices; or the tag is virtually created for engineering and convenience. ● I/O tag : Select this if the tag is connected to the actual devices. ● Memory tag: Select this if the tag is logically used only.

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-16
(2) Device Information
The item is activated only in case of I/O tag. You can set up the communication channel, station and I/O
address of the tag.

Properties name	Description
Communication channel	Select the channel for communication of the tag. It can be selected only when the communication channel is registered in the tree items of the tag editor in advance.
Station	It is a subordinate concept belonging to the communication channel and means selecting the actual devices such the PLC, Inverter, etc. It can be selected only when the station is registered in the tree items of the tag editor in advance.
I/O address	Input the communication address of the actual tag of the relevant station. Depending on the types of communication channels, you can also select it from the list by pressing the button. The string length is limited to 127 characters of Korean/ 254 characters of English. The setup method may be different for each device. For more details, refer to the “I/O Driver” manual.

(3) Flag
It defines various settings for tags and operations of tag values during runtime

Properties name	Description
Alarm Process	It sets whether applying alarm to tag values or not. It can be selected only in case of the analog / digital tag. If this property is selected, the property tab is created to set up the detailed alarms.
Save Tag Value When Exit	It determines whether recording the final value of the tag in the database when ending the real-time operation. If this property is activated, the tag value will be saved when the program ends. The saved value will be used as the initial value of the tag when starting the project.
Write Tag Value	It determines whether controlling tags is allowed or not. If this property is canceled, you cannot control the tag even though the control command is given.
Reverse Value	It determines whether reversing the digital tag value obtained from the field. This property can be applied when the tag is I/O and digital type.
Memory Tag Calculation	It determines whether performing the operation expression in case the value is not the group tag but the memory tag. If this property is selected, the operation expression tab that can set up the operation expression will be created.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-17

8.3.3 Details – Analog
When the tag is an analog type, it defines the properties related to the analog type.
(1) Engineering Data
It means the properties related to the data that a user recognize in the upper system.

Property Name	Description
Eng. Data Type	It is the type of the engineering value of the tag in the upper system. There might be a little difference from the pure data type due to the processing of tag values. The types of available values are as follows. ● INT8: Signed 8 bit integer (-128 ~ 127) ● INT16: Signed 16 bit integer (-32.768 ~ 32.767) ● INT32: Signed 32 bit integer (-2,147,438,648 ~ 2,147,483,647) ● UINT8: Unsigned 8 bit integer (0 ~ 255) ● UINT16: Unsigned 16 bit integer (0 ~ 65535) ● UINT32: Unsigned 32 bit integer (0 ~ 4,294,967,295) ● FLOAT: 4 byte real number (-3.4028e+38 ~ 3.4028e+38) ● DOUBLE: 8 byte real number (-1.797693e+308 ~ 1.797693e+308) [NOTE] When using the real number type of the tag in the upper system, it is recommended to apply the DOUBLE type rather than the FLOAT type to increase accuracy of the value and reduce the number of errors.
Eng. Min. Value	It is the minimum engineering value of the tag. If the engineering value of the tag is less than this, the value will be treated as ‘Bad’.
Eng. Max. Value	It is the maximum engineering value of the tag. If the engineering value of the tag is greater than this, the value will be treated as ‘Bad’.

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-18
(2) Raw Data
It means the properties related to the tag data used for the equipment.
The property becomes active only in case of I/O tag so it cannot be settable for the memory tag.

Property Name	Description
Raw Data Type	It is the type of the tags collected from the equipment. There might be a little difference from the pure data type due to the processing of tag values. The types of available values are as follows. ● INT8: Signed 8 bit integer (-128 ~ 127) ● INT16: Signed 16 bit integer (-32.768 ~ 32.767) ● INT32: Signed 32 bit integer (-2,147,438,648 ~ 2,147,483,647) ● INT64: Signed 64 bit integer (-9.007.199.254.740.990 ~ 9,007,199,254,740,990) ● UINT8: Unsigned 8 bit integer (0 ~ 255) ● UINT16: Unsigned 16 bit integer (0 ~ 65535) ● UINT32: Unsigned 32 bit integer (0 ~ 4,294,967,295) ● UINT64: Unsigned 64 bit integer (0 ~ 9,007,199,254,740,990) ● FLOAT: 4 byte real number (-3.4028e+38 ~ 3.4028e+38) ● DOUBLE: 8byte real number (-1.797693e+308 ~ 1.797693e+308) ● BCD8: -79 ~ 79 ● BCD16: -7,999 ~ 7,999 ● BCD_32: -79,999,999 ~ 79,999,999 ● BCD_64: -7.999.999.999.999.990 ~ 7.999.999.999.999.990 ● UBCD_8: 0 ~ 99 ● UBCD_16: 0 ~ 9.999 ● UBCD_32: 0 ~ 99.999.999 ● UBCD_64: 0 ~ 9.007.199.254.740.990 ● BIT1: 0 ~ 1 ● BIT2: 0 ~ 3 ● BIT3: 0 ~ 7 ● BIT4: 0 ~ 15
Raw Min. Value	It is the minimum raw value of the tag. If the raw value of the tag is less than this, the value will be treated as ‘Bad’.
Raw Max. Value	It is the maximum raw value of the tag. If the raw value of the tag is greater than this, the value will be treated as ‘Bad’.

(3) Others (Etc.)
They are the other properties related to process and display of tag values.

Property Name	Description
Decimal Point	If the data is [Double] or [Float] type, the decimal places are displayed. When displaying tag values, you can apply this property and display it on the screen.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-19

Basically, to 4 decimal places are provided and you can set up to 10 decimal places.
Deadband	In case the tag value varies slightly, you can set up the range of deadband to ignore the micro variation of the tag value.
Unit	It indicates the unit of the engineering value.
Initial value	It means the initial value of the tag when starting the project and it is activated only in case of the memory tag. However, when storage options are enabled at the end of the project, please note that the initial value will be ignored and the final value of the saved tag will act as the actual initial value.

(4) Raw Data Conversion
It is the property related to changing the equipment data into the data type that users recognize in the upper
system. This property is activated only in case of the I/O tag and it cannot be settable for the memory tag.

Property Name	Description
Data Conversion Rule	It establishes the rules to change the raw value into the engineering value. You can choose one among 4 options; N/A, Ratio/Bias, ratio, ratio/Offset. ● N/A: The raw value is intactly applied as the engineering value without any conversion. ● Ratio/Bias : Conversion method using gradient/intercept. engineering value= (Ratio X raw value) + Bias ● Ratio: Converting the value into ratio using the Min./Max. values of the raw value and engineering value ● Ratio/Offset: Adding Offset to the above ratio value
Ratio	It indicates the value to be multiplied by the raw value. It is activated when the conversion rule is set as [Ratio/Bias].
Bias	It indicates the value to be added to the above value (ration x raw value). It is activated when the conversion rule is set as [Ratio/Bias].
Offset	It indicates the value to be added to the output of ratio conversion. It is activated when the conversion rule is set as [ratio/Offset].

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-20
8.3.4 Details – Digital
When the tag is a digital type, it defines the properties related to the digital type.
(1) Data

Property Name	Description
Eng. Data	It is the type of the engineering value of the tag. (BOOL fixed)
Raw Data	It is the type of the raw value of the tag. (BOOL fixed)

(2) String

Property Name	Description
ON String	It sets up the sting to be output on the screen when the tag value is 1.
OFF String	It sets up the sting to be output on the screen when the tag value is 0.

(3) Initial Value

Property Name	Description
Initial value	It is activated in the memory tag, not the group tag. To specify the value to use at the beginning stage, you can choose one between OFF(0) and ON(1).

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-21

8.3.5 Detail – String
It is the set of properties when the tag is string type.
(1) Data

Properties name	Description
Eng. Data	It is the type of the engineering value of the tag. (STRING fixed)
Raw Data	It is the type of the raw value of the tag. (STRING fixed)

(2) String

Properties name	Description
Initial value	It is the type of the engineering value of the tag. (BOOL fixed)
String length	It is the type of the raw value of the tag. (BOOL fixed)

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-22
8.3.6 Alarm – Analog
They are the properties to set up alarms when the tag is an analog type.
(1) Alarm-General
The property defines general and common items of alarms.

Properties name	Description
Delay time(sec.)	It is the delay time for alarm occurrence. It means an alarm does not occur immediately; after being putting on hold for the delay time, the alarm is generated by using the value of that point. For more details, refer to the manual on alarm functions.
Alarm Deadband	It means the deadband for an alarm. In case the data value varies slightly in the boundary, you can set up the alarm deadband to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary alarms.
Alarm Level	It can be set from 1 to 10 depending on the severity of alarms.

(2) String Information
It sets up strings related to alarms to display various expressions when an alarm occurs.

Properties name	Description
Occurrence String	It is displayed when an alarm occurs.
Recovery String	It is displayed when an alarm is restored.
User string1	It is defined for a user convenience.
User string2	It is defined for a user convenience.
User string3	It is defined for a user convenience.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-23

(3) Limit Alarm
They are the properties defining the boundary alarm of tags.

Properties name	Description
HH alarm	The HH alarm setting value cannot exceed the max. engineering value and should be greater than the HI value.
HI alarm	The HI alarm setting value should be smaller than the HH setting value and should be greater than the LO setting value.
LO alarm	The LO alarm setting value should be smaller than the HI setting value and should be greater than the LL setting value.
LL alarm	The LL alarm setting value should be smaller than the LO setting value and should be greater than the min. engineering value.

(4) Variation Alarm
It is the property related to variations alarms of the tag value.

Properties name	Description
Variation value	It is the reference value to generate the variation alarm. It compares the current value with the previous one and if the data exceeds the variation value, the variation alarm will occur. Properties name

(5) Gap Alarm
They are the properties to set up the separation alarm.

Description
Base value	It is the absolute value that acts as the baseline to generate the separation alarm when setting the separation type as the absolute value.
Basic tag name	You can set up the tag name that is the baseline to generate the separation alarm when setting the separation type as the relative value.
Main Gap Value	It means the main separation alarm value.
Sub. Gap Value	It means the secondary separation alarm value.

Base type

It is the type of the reference value that acts as the baseline to generate the
separation alarm. You can choose one between the absolute value and relative value.

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-24
8.3.7 Alarm – Digital
They are the properties to set up an alarm when the tag is a digital type.
(1) Alarm Kind

Properties name

Description

Alarm Kind

In the case of a digital type, it establishes the rules of alarm occurrence depending on
the value. The kinds of alarms are as follows.
● OFF: Occurs when the tag value is OFF.
● ON: Occurs when the tag value is ON.
● OFFON: Occurs when the tag value is changed from OFF to ON.
● ONOFF: Occurs when the tag value is changed from ON to OFF.
● Variation: Occurs when the tag value varies.

8.3.8 Calculations
If you set up the [Memory Tag Operation] flag in the memory tag, the calculation can be settable.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-25

Properties Name	Description
Operating cycle(sec.)	You can input the operating cycle. The default value is 0 and if it is set as 0, the operation expression sets up the context of related tags and works based on the event method. In case it is set as a positive number, each tag independently performs the operation expression in the fixed cycle.
Calculation Formula	You can input the calculation formula.

(1) Fundamental concept
You can calculate the memory tag using the operation expressions such as the four fundamental arithmetic
operations, conditional statement, variables, etc. In addition, you can put the formula into the operation
expression property of the subject tag that acts as the output of calculation. When starting the project, the
data processing engine compiles all operation expressions belonging to the tag and determines each
operation set and priorities for calculation.
For example
● The memory tag Tag A is intended to adopt the value of I/O tag Tag B added to 1.
● The memory tag Tag C is intended to adopt the value memory tag Tag A added to I/O tag Tag D.
The above assumption can be expressed as the below formula.
● TagA = TagB + 1
● TagC = TagA + TagD
When the tag DB engineering is applied to the above, you can get the below table. In this case, Tag A and
Tag C act as the subject of the operation expression output. You can put the formula into the operation
expression property of each tag.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-26

Tag Name	Operating Cycle	Operation Expression	Remarks
TagA	0	TagB + 1	memory tag
TagB	X	X	I/O tag
TagC	0	TagA + TagD	memory tag
TagD	X	X	I/O tag

The above two formulas can be composed of one set with the cause-and-effect relationship. The data
processing engine internally establishes the operation sequence of the above set to operate the memory tag.
However, in case the tag operation is under cross reference or loop, the operation cannot be performed.
(2) Operation cycle
In the property window, the operation cycle is entered in seconds so you can input the value that is greater
than 0. From the viewpoint of the engine performing the operation expression, the cycle can be divided into
two types; event method and fixed cycle.
If the cycle is set as “0”, it operates in the event method; if it is set as a positive number, it operates based on
the fixed-cycle using a timer.
1) Event method
The operation expression based on the cause-and-effect relationship follows this method, which is
derived from the above fundamental concept.
When a user inputs the data manifestly as if he(she) inputs the formula to the mathematical function, the
internal engine will determine the order of operation expressions and performs the operations in the
manner of artificial intelligence. However, as mentioned above, you need to be careful of the cross
reference or loop.
2) Fixed-cycle method (sec.)
Unlike the even method, the operation expression belonging to the relevant cycle is performed. There is
no correlation and in the case of operation expressions with the same cycle, the order of execution
cannot be determined. It is used when you refer to other tag values in a fixed cycle.
(3) Syntax and usage
A user needs to input the operation expression to the property window of the tag and perform the error
checking by pressing the [Error Check] button to confirm whether the operation expression is normal or not.
The available syntax for the operation expression is as below.

Classification	Keywords
Reserved word	IF, THEN, ELSE
Operator	= , +, -, , /, %, *
Bit	&, \|, ~, ^, <<, >>
Function	SIN, COS, TAN, SQRT, LOG, LOG10, EXP, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, ABS, MAX, MIN, AVG
Separator	( , )

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-27

Notice

☞ The reserved word and function name should be in upper case.
☞ IF~THEN~ELSE statement should always be used together. (cannot be omitted)

[Example of using syntax]

Operation Expression	Description
IF ( A + B > 10) THEN 4 ELSE 5	If the value of tag A and tag B is greater than 10, 4 is returned; if the value is smaller than 10, 5 is returned.
ABS(A)	The absolute value of A is returned.
IF (A & B) THEN C ELSE D	If A and B are True, the value of C is returned; if they are False, the value of D is returned.

[Actual examples]

Tag	Operation expression
Current active electric power by 15minutes	Electricity No 01.Just 15 minutes ago_Max. current electric power + electricity No 02.Just 15 minutes ago_Max. current electric power + electricity No 01.Just 15 minutes ago_Max. current electric power
Current wattage 2	WDC.current electric power * meter constant.PCT
Current wattage	WDC.current electric power * meter constant.PCT+ meter constant.correction value
Current electric power_ratio	(100 * MEM.current wattage) / 150000
Current electiric power	IF ((WDC.demand time < 10) \|\| (WDC.demand time > 895 )) THEN (MEM. average current power) ELSE (WDC.current electric power* meter constant.PCT*900+meter constant.correction value) / (WDC.demand time) Wattage = MEM.current electric power / 4
Pulse integration	WDC.current electric power*5000/4000
Predicted electric power	IF(WDC.demand time < 60) THEN (MEM.current electric power) ELSE (WDC.predicted electric power * meter constant.PCT+ meter constant.correction value)
Load electric power	IF ((WDC.demand time < 61) \|\| (MEM.predicted electric power <= MEM.current wattage)) THEN (MEM.current electric power) ELSE ((MEM.predicted electric power - MEM.current wattage) * 900 / MEM.demand time_remaining time)
Base electric power	WDC.Base electric power * meter constant.PCT
PCT	(Meter constant.PT * meter constant. CT)/(meter constant.PT_2 * meter constant.CT_2)

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-28
8.4 Tag Edition
8.4.1 Addition of Tags
If you double-click the empty list on the tag list screen or select [New Tag] in the popup menu, the property window
where you can add new tags will show up.
The basic items of the tag property window may be a little different depending on which part of the tag editor calls
it up.
(1) Addition of tags in the device view
If you run [New Tag] on condition that the specific station is selected in the device view, the tag property
window where the relevant communication channels and stations are basically entered will show up. Of
course, although you change the communication channels and stations, tags can be registered.
In the device view, there is no logical tag group so the group name is deactivated and you cannot also select
the group tag type. In this case, you need to input the full tag name and if there is a DOT(.) in the middle of
the tag name, the parent group of the relevant tag will be automatically created.
Ex.) If the tag name of “HELLO.KOO” is entered and saved, the group name called “HELLO” will be internally
searched and when the group named “HELLO” exists, “KOO” will be added as a sub-tag. In case the group
named “HELLO does not exist, after adding the “HELLO” group and save it, add the tag called “KOO” as its
sub-tag.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-29

(2) Addition of tags in the group view
If you run the [New Tag] command on condition that the specific group is selected in the group view, the tag
property window where the group is basically entered will show up. In this case, you cannot change the group
name. Namely, in the group view, you can just add the child tag only under the its parent group.
When the tag is added at the top level (route) of the group view, the group name will be deactivated.
8.4.2 Storage of Tags
If you double-click the tag or select [Tag Property] in the popup menu on the right side of the tag, the property
window will show up. When you click the [Save] button after editing tag properties, the information will be saved;
when you click the [Close] button, the tag property window will be closed without saving the tag.
If you modify the tag name and save it in the tag property window, the tag with a new name will be added instead
of tag modification.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-30
During saving the tag, perform the integrity check for the tag properties internally and save the data only when the
result turns out to be normal. (For the integrity rules of tags, refer to the tag properties)
When the error occurs during the tag test, the below error message will shows up.
8.4.3 Deletion of Tags
After selecting the tag from the tag list, if you press the [Delete] button, the dialog box asking whether deleting the
tag will show up. If you press the [Yes] button, the tag will be deleted
The deletion of tags can be divided into the individual deletion that selects and removes one tag; multiple deletion
that selects and removes several tags.
In addition, when you delete tags including the group tags, all sub-tags of the groups will be deleted. When the
group tag is included in the tag to delete, the below message will show up.

Notice

Please note that the deleted tags cannot be restored so you must be careful to delete tags.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-31

8.5 CSV Tag I/O
For mass tags works, Not only tag edition using a clipboard but also tag engineering using the CSV file is available.
The CSV file means the file whose each property is separated by a comma (,).

Notice

It cannot be compatible with the CSV file made in the existing InfoU engineering module.
(Cannot be compatible with the earlier versions than 1.9.0)

8.5.1 Export to CSV File
(1) Execution in the tag tree
If you select the tag tree item, the tags included in the selected tag tree will be displayed in the tag list. A user
can export the tag data shown in the tag list to the CSV file using the [Export to CSV file] function in the
popup menu of the tag tree.
However, the tag data exported from the tree menu is the tags included in the tree item. If you execute
[Export to CSV file] in a specific communication channel, the tags only included in the channel will be
exported.
(2) Execution in the tag list
After selecting the tags to export in the tag list, if you select [Export to CSV file] in the popup menu, the
selected tags only will be exported to the CSV file.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-32
After executing ‘Export’, the below CSV file will be created.
8.5.2 Import from CSV File
In the previous step, you can import the CSV file to the tag editor again through the [Import from CSV file] menu.
However, the CSV file works of tags may internally cause I/O related to saving many tags so it is recommended to
split the working unit into a small scale

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-33

(1) Running the menu
Unlike ‘Export’, the [Import from CSV file] menu imports the whole contents of the CSV file regardless of the
tree or list, etc.
If you run the menu, the screen where you can select the CSV file will show up as below.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-34
After selecting the CSV file to import to the tag editor, when you click the [Open] button, the details of the
[Open] button will be imported. If there is the same tag name, the tag property will be changed and in the
case of the new tag name, the tag will be added.
(2) Confirmation of the output
After performing the [Import from CSV file] menu, the message box showing a user the output will be
displayed.
The output file for the works named XXX_ImportResult.csv will be created in the folder where the CSV file is
located. The output file has three items by tags ; tag name, DB works, message and the meaning of each
item is as below.
● Tag name : Full tag name
● DB works : Output of DB works
● Message : Success / Error message
However, in case the value of the item is omitted, the default value will be input so you must be careful of this.
8.5.3 Tag Items of the CSV File
Addition and modification of tags through the tag property window is the way to minimize errors of tag input such
as automatic errors caused by the user interface, Enable/Unable by tag classification or input limit through list
selection, etc. However, in the case of tag input through the CSV file, the properties of all tags should be written
with the data such as text, number, etc. and the error of data integrity may occur so your attention is required.
Each item of tag properties saved as the CSV file is as below. The first line of the CSV file is recognized as the

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-35

column name and it is not saved as data. In addition, as shown in the below table, in the case of the CSV file’s
data, the number of 50 columns should match.
[Tag properties of the CSV file]

Order	Column name	Input details	Remarks
1	Tag name	Tag’s full name
2	Comment	Tag comment	If there is a comma in the text, put quotation marks “”.
3	Type	Group / Analog / Digital / String	-
4	Sort	General / system	-
5	Communication channel	communication channel name	-
6	Station	station name	-
7	I/O address	I/O address	-
8	Alarm process	0 / 1	flag items - 0 : Unable, 1 : Enabled
9	Save at the end	0 / 1	flag items - 0 : Unable, 1 : Enabled
10	Reverse of the actual data	0 / 1	flag items - 0 : Unable, 1 : Enabled
11	Write tag value	0 / 1	flag items - 0 : Unable, 1 : Enabled
12	Memory tag operation	0 / 1	flag items - 0 : Unable, 1 : Enabled
13	Decimal places	Decimal places	-
14	Value Deadband	Value Deadband	-
15	Unit	Unit	If there is a comma in the text, put quotation marks “”.
16	Data type	BOOL INT8 / INT16 / INT32 / UINT8 / UINT16 / UINT32 / FLOAT / DOUBLE STRING	-
17	Raw value type	BOOL INT8 / INT16 / INT32 / INT64 / UINT8 / UINT16 / UINT32 / UINT64 FLOAT / DOUBLE BCD8 / BCD16 / BCD32 / BCD64 UBCD8 / UBCD16 / UBCD32 / UBCD64 BIT1 / BIT2 / BIT3 / BIT4 STRING	-
18	Min. tag value	Min. tag value	-

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-36

19	Max. tag value	Max. tag value	-
20	Min. raw value	Min. raw value	-
21	Max. raw value	Max. raw value	-
22	Initial value	Initial value	If the tag type is string and there is a comma in the text, put quotation marks “”.
23	Conversion rules	0 / 1 / 2 / 3	0 : N/A 1 : Ratio/Bias 2 : ratio 3 : ratio/Offset
24	Ratio	Ratio	-
25	Bias	Bias	-
26	Offset	Offset	-
27	ON string	ON string	If there is a comma in the text, put quotation marks “”.
28	OFF string	OFF string	If there is a comma in the text, put quotation marks “”.
29	String length	String length	-
30	Alarm delay time	Alarm delay time	-
31	Alarm Deadband	Alarm Deadband	-
32	Alarm level	Alarm level	-
33	Occurred string	Occurred string	If there is a comma in the text, put quotation marks “”.
34	Recovery string	Recovery string	If there is a comma in the text, put quotation marks “”.
35	User-defined1	User-defined1	If there is a comma in the text, put quotation marks “”.
36	User-defined2	User-defined2	If there is a comma in the text, put quotation marks “”.
37	User-defined3	User-defined3	If there is a comma in the text, put quotation marks “”.
38	HH boundary value	HH boundary value	-
39	HI boundary value	HI boundary value	-
40	LO boundary value	LO boundary value	-
41	LL boundary value	LL boundary value	-
42	Variation value	Variation value	-
43	Type of separation reference value	0 / 1 / 2	0 : N/A 1 : absolute value 2 : relative value
44	Reference value	Reference value	-

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-37

45	Basic tag	Basic tag	-
46	Main separation value	Main separation	-
47	Secondary separation value	Secondary separation	-
48	Digital alarm types	1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5	1 : OFF 2 : ON 3 : ON  OFF 4 : OFF  ON 5 : CHANGE
49	Memory operating cycle	memory operating cycle	-
50	Memory operation expression	memory operation expression	In case there is the line-break character in the operation expression string, change it into the symbol ` (Grave key).

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-38
8.6 Copy/Paste/Cut of Tags
The InfoU tag editor supports the ‘Copy’ and ‘Paste’ functions besides the link with the CSV file that provides the
function to edit mass tags. The copied tags are saved to a clipboard so you can paste them to the tag editor or
Excel, notepad, etc. In addition, you can also copy the tag data from Excel and import it to the tag editor.
However, the ‘Copy’ and ‘Paste’ functions of tags are provided by the group view only and they are not available in
the device view. Moreover, these functions may internally cause I/O related to saving many tags so it is
recommended to split the working unit into a small scale.
The data copied from the tag editor has basically the same structure and data as the output file exported to the
CSV file. However, the data has the following characteristics.
[Restrictions and characteristics of clipboard tag data]
● It does not include the column name.
● The tag name is not the full name but the tag name excluding the parent groups.
● ‘Paste’ can be applied only when the data is composed of more than 3 columns of the tag name, comment, type.
● Each item is separated by the tab symbol. If the tab symbol is included in a certain property text of the tag, it
does not work normally.
8.6.1 Copy
In the group view, you can select [Copy] in the popup menu of the tag tree or tag list.
If the copied tag is a group tag, the group tag and all sub-tags belonging to the group are copied together.
When copying tags, in terms of the tag name, please note that the name will be copied from the name of the
selected position is copied, not the full tag name. The copied tag data can be freely used in the programs such as
a notepad or Excel, etc.
When pasting the data copied from the tag editor to Excel, you can see the below screen.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-39

When pasting the data copied from the tag editor to a notepad, you can see the below screen.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-40
8.6.2 Paste
The [Paste] menu is enabled after copying tags.
If you execute the [Paste] menu in the tree or list items of the tag to paste, the previously copied tag will be added.
In case there is the same tag name, the tag property will be changed into new contents.
If you execute ‘Paste’ and save the data, the following message will be displayed.
The CSV file is executed with the full tag name so the same output is obtained even if it is performed anywhere of
the tag editor, however, in the case of ‘Paste’, the relative path of the tag is used so the tag is saved depending on
the position where the tag is pasted.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-41

8.6.3 Cut
The [Cut] menu is the function to move the tag to other groups.
When executing [Cut], please note that the relevant tag will be removed from the tag database and the deleted
data will be kept in a clipboard. After that, a user can paste the tag by using [Paste].

Notice

Please note that the tag will be deleted from the database right after executing [Cut]. At the same time, the
information of the deleted tag will be kept in a clipboard.
After that, if you recopy the other object or text in Windows without executing [Paste], the information of the
previously [Cut] tag will be deleted.

Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-42
8.7 Sturcture Tag
It is the function to prepare frequently used tag groups and add tags by the group in order to make tags more
conveniently. This function can be mainly used to insert the tag sets expressing the physical devices or logical
groups to the tag DB repetitively. If you can set the specific tags and register them in the structure tag template,
the actual tags will be created by the template and can be added to the tag DB.
The definition of structure tags is performed by the InfoU engineering module and the instantiation process of
structure tags is performed by the tag editor.
8.7.1 Main Screen and Explanation of Terms
You can see the registered structure tag templates and the tag’s property window through [Structure Tag] in the
Tool Search of the InfoU engineering.

No.	Item	Description
1	Structure tag template	Registered structure tag template list
2	Structure tag items	Items of the selected structure tag template
3	Item properties	Properties of the selected item

The description on each item is as shown below.
(1) Structure tag template
When the components of a specific equipment or unit device are the same, the structure tag template means
making them into the structure tag template and specifying a framework.
For example, in the case of the scale device A, it is composed of the power supply part, measuring device,

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-43

display device, etc. To register 100 scale devices in the HMI system, you need to register 100 groups and
tags belonging to each group, etc.
In this case, if you specify the structure tag template named A, you can proceed with tag works easily.
(2) Structure tag item
It means each component belonging to one structure tag template. In the above case of the scale device A,
you can specify each item such as power supply part, measuring device, display device, etc.
(3) Item property
It means the property of the item. You can specify the unique properties of the item such as name, type,
Min./Max. values, etc.(Refer to the Tag Properties Manual)

Notice

The definition of the structure tag is to define templates and does not mean the actual tag.

8.7.2 Addition of Structure Tag Templates
To add the structure tag templates, double-click the structure tag in the tool search or after clicking with the right
mouse button, select [Add Structure Tag Template]. In addition, in the template list screen, after clicking with the
right mouse button, you can select [Add Structure Tag Template] in the popup menu.
If you select the menu, the window to define the structure tag template will show up as below.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-44
8.7.3 Addition of Structure Tag Items
It is the function to add the items that form the structure tag template.
The structure tag items can be input in the property window on the right side of the InfoU engineering.
It is similar to the definition of tags but there are some differences. The characteristics of the structure tag items
are as below. For more details on each item, refer to the properties of tags.

Item	Description
Tag type	Unlike the general tag, the structure tag does not allow to set up [Group]. Choose one among analog / digital / string.
Communication channel	For the communication channel, you can select [I/O tag] and [Memory tag] only. If you choose [I/O tag], you can input the data at the time when the structure tag is actually input to the tag DB, namely, at the time when the structure tag is added and instantiated. When you select [Memory tag], set the relevant tag as the memory tag.
Station	In common with the communication channel, the stations can be set all at once by adding the relevant template to the structure tag at the time of instantiation.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-45

8.7.4 Addition of Structure Tags (Creating the instance of structure tags)
The previously performed works are to define the set structure of the tags that have specific pattern for creating
the structure tag templates and structure tag items.
Definition of the structure tag is performed by the InfoU engineering module and the instantiation of the actual tag
is performed by the tag editor. The creation of structure tags can be executed in the tree items of the tag editor.
Select [Add Structure Tags] in the popup menu of the tree items of the tag editor.
If you select the menu, the window to create the structure tag will show up.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-46
The description on each item is as shown below.

Item	Description
Structure tag template list	The structure tag template list created in the InfoU engineering is shown. A user can select the structure tag template to create.
Group name to create	Input the parent group name at the time when the items of the structure tag are instantiated.
Communication channel	Input the communication channel at the time when the items of the structure tag are instantiated.
Station	Input the station at the time when the items of the structure tag are instantiated.

After inputting the data as shown in the Fig., if you click the [Create] button, the structure tags of the structure tag
templates will be made as follows.
The created tags can be used in the same manner as the general tag.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-47

8.8 Others
8.8.1 Find / Replace
Through the ‘Find / Replace’ function, you can easily find the tag that you want and save the changed details.
(1) Find
It is the function to find the items that correspond with the targeted string from the tag list.
If you execute [Find] in the popup menu of the tag list, the below screen where a user can input data will
show up.
The descriptions on the displayed properties are as follows.

Item	Description
String to find	Input the string that you are looking for.
Property to find	Select the property that you are looking for. The ‘Find’ function can be performed for the tag name, tag comment, I/O address property.
Range to find	Tag list : Finds the string from the currently displayed tag list. Selected list : Finds the string from the selected are of tag lists
Upper/Lower Case	Select this when you try to find case-sensitive items.
Find Next	Finds the next object.
Close	Closes the window for Find.

After inputting a specific string, if you execute the ‘Find’ function, the found items are displayed in a different
color in the tag editor list. When you click the [Find Next] button, the screen will move to the next item
automatically.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-48
(2) Replace
It is the function to find the string to change from the tag list and replace it. If you execute [Replace] in the
popup menu of the tag list, the below screen where a user can input data will show up. After selecting ‘Find’,
if you click the [Replace] button, the targeted details will be changed.
The items of the ‘Replace’ screen are as follows.

Item	Description
String to find	Input the string that you are looking for.
String to replace	Input the string to replace.
Property to Find	Select the property that you are looking for. The changeable properties are the tag command and I/O address.

Chapter 8 Tag Management

8-49

Range to find	Tag list : Finds the string from the currently displayed tag list. Selected list : Finds the string from the selected are of tag lists
Upper/Lower Case	Select this when you try to find case-sensitive items.
Find Next	Finds the next object.
Replace	Select this when you try to replace the targeted string.
Replace All	Replaces all strings that correspond with the string to find within the range.
Close	Closes the window for Change.

8.8.2 Configuration
It is the item that can be settable for convenience and additional functions of the tag editor.
(1) Setting double-clicking of the group tag
It is the option to determine whether showing the properties for the group tag or entering into the relevant
group when you double-click the group tag in the tag list.
When you execute [Tool]  [Option] menu, the following setup window will show up. After selecting the
option that you want, if you click [OK] button, the option will be immediately applied.
8.8.3 License
The InfoU’s license uses the hard lock key of a USB type and the lock key should be applied in accordance with
the number of tags. In case the license is not certified, there may be a variety of restrictions on functions. If you do
not have the lock key, the system will shut down automatically 1 hour after startup.
The number of license tags is applied to the I/O tag only, not to the system tag. The group tags and memory tags
are available regardless of the license.
The license information and the number of tags are displayed in a status bar of the tag editor.
The screen is as shown below.
Chapter 8 Tag Management
8-50
For the license information, there are largely three items shown in the status bar as below table.

Items	Description
No key
Limitation on the number of tags	The number of the current license tags / The number of the total tags that can be registered
Unlimited

Notice

Here are a few things related to the license that you need to be aware of.
☞ If the invalid license is used, the below warning message will show up in an hour and then, the program will be
terminated.
☞ If the number of available licenses is exceeded, the tags cannot be saved so be careful of this.

Unlimited

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-1

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
This graphic editor provides the following various functions for editing the monitoring screen as a program used to
edit the process screen.
● Graphic drawing tools
● Various graphic libraries
● Support of ActiveX container and its server, ActiveX control
● OLE automation interface for execution and manipulation from other application programs
● Visual basic script for robust applications
● Exclusive ActiveX control and availability of using ordinary ActiveX
● Function to inquire tag information used in the object and screen
● Function to save tag information used in the object and screen in the cross-reference database
● Function to prohibit or allow control according to the user’s authorization
● Function to edit diverse and easy-to-use objects
● Support of various dynamic properties and user’s action functions to display dynamic information through
animation based on the site data
● Support of template screen
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-2
9.1 Configuration of Graphic Editor
This graphic editor consists of the following menus and tool collections.
As a system development tool, this InfoU graphic editor defines and sets up system components needed to perform projects
such as defining dynamic properties of screen configuration, setting up execution environments and setting up page
environments. The figure above shows an example of the InfoU graphic editor screen when a basic page is created and the
main tool collection needed for the screen configuration is as follows.
● Standard tools: Command icons the most frequently used in the graphic editor.
● Object tools: Object icons needed when writing a page.
● Format tools: Icons needed to define font or line prosperities.
● Layer tools: Tools that enable to perform layer organization works useful for editing.
● Draw tools: Icons related to Zoom, Group/Regroup and Align.
● Color tools: A tool window that designate the color of page or object conveniently.
● Object Property Window: A window to define each object’s properties or define events with scripts.
● Library: A window to register/delete/edit symbols in the library.
● Navigation: Tools to ensure easy moving to a work area the user wants to go.
● Status tools: Tools to show major properties such as object coordinates or Help

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-3

9.2 Menu Configuration

Upper-level Menu	Menu	Description
File	New	Create a new page.
Open	Open one among existing documents
Close	Close the current document.
Close All	Close all documents
Import From WMF File	Import WMF file in the currently activated document.
Save	Save the activated document with the same name.
Save As	Save the activated document with the different name.
Print	Print document.
Print Preview	Display the contents to be printed in the screen.
Print Setup	Set up print options
Recent Files	Open documents that have been worked recently.
Exit	Exit the graphic editor.
Edit	Undo	Cancel the previously executed command.
Redo	Re-input the cancelled command.
Cut	Delete a certain range of data from the document and move it to the clipboard.
Copy	Copy a certain range of data to the clipboard
Paste	Paste the copied data to the document from the clipboard.
Delete	Delete the selected data.
Select All	Select the entire objects in the page.
Find/Replace String	Find a certain string used for the object in the page and replace the found string with other string.
Find/Replace Tag Link	Find a certain tag used for the object in the page and replace the found tag with other tag
Tag Link MS Excel Export	Send tags mapped in the page to Excel file.
Smart Symbol Instance Settings	Set the instance for the smart symbol.
Batch Dynamic Monitoring Properties	It batch-changes the same types of properties mapped in the dynamic property setting window.
Dynamic Objects Show	The only object whose dynamic properties are mapped is displayed on the screen.
View	Toolbars	Show or hide standard, object, format and draw tools.
Status Bar	Show or hide status tools.
Library	Show or hide the symbol library dialog box.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-4

Project Page	It displays or hides the project page window.
Page Tab	It displays the project page as the page tab style or hide it.
Color	Show or hide color tools.
Navigation	Show or hide navigation tools for moving to other screen.
Layer	Show or hide layer tools.
Dynamic Properties	Show or hide dynamic properties of the object and the screen for action settings.
Object Properties	Show or hide the property screen for editing object types or shapes.
Ruler	Show or hide the ruler.
Snap to Grid	Setup or cancel snapping to grid.
Grid Settings	Designate grid intervals and colors by displaying the grid setting dialog box.
Zoom	Zoom in/out the page with setting rates.
Full Screen	Convert the page into a full screen size.
Insert	Figure	Draw various figure objects.
Window Control	Draw various window control objects.
Text	Input strings.
Tag Value	Create an object with tag values.
Image	Insert image files.
Meter	Insert meter objects
Image Button	Insert image button objects
Image Lamp	Insert image lamp objects
ActiveX	Insert OCX objects.
Alarm Viewer	Insert alarm viewer objects.
Trend Viewer	Insert trend viewer objects.
Gauge	Insert gauge viewer objects.
List Trend	Insert list trend objects.
Recipe	Insert recipe objects.
Draw	Group	Create one group object with several objects.
Ungroup	Cancel the group object.
Regroup	Recover the control function over the objects that have been grouped and then cancelled to re-create the group.
Order	Bring the select object to the very front or sent it to the very end or bring it to the front or send it to the rear.
Edit Points	Change the shapes of multiple curves or looped curves freely.
Open/Close	Convert multiple curves to looped curves and looped curves to multiple curves.
Align	Align, assign and arrange the selected objects.
Make Same Size	Make the sizes of the selected objects equivalent.
Rotate	Rotate the selected objects freely to their original locations or 90°rotation to the right

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-5

Tool	Run Mode	Preview the operation screen of the runtime.
Objects	Change the order of the object list and set up the tap sequence for keyboard run.
Declutter Settings	Set up a range of enlarge rate for each layer to be displayed in each screen during the runtime.
Graphic Runtime Settings	Set up the execution environment of graphic runtime.
Option	Set up the environment such as number of cancellation or mode to select multiple options.
Windows	Cascade	Arrange windows in a cascade form.
Tile	Arrange windows in a tile form.
Arrange Icons	Arrange windows to the location to designate various tool bar defaults.
Help	User Manual	Show the Help items of the graphic editor.
About Graphic Editor	Show version information of the graphic editor.

9.2.1 File
(1) New
A new graphic file is created.
(2) Open
This command is used to open one of the existing documents. If this command is made, a dialog box appears to allow the
user to designate a file to open from it.
(3) Close
The currently activated document is closed with this command. Before the document is closed, it needs to be saved. If it is
closed without saving, the changed contents that have been made before the latest saving will disappear. When it is
closed, a dialog box appears to allow the user to designate a name and save it with the name.
(4) Close All
Currently open documents are all closed so you need to save them before closing.
(5) Import from WMF file
A WMF file is inserted to the current work screen in the graphic editor’s own format type. If this command is made, a dialog
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-6
box to import WMF files appears to allow the user to select one.
(6) Save
This command is used when saving the activated document with the same name as the current one. If the page
document is saved for the first time, the “Save” dialog box appears to allow the user to designate its name. If the user
wants to save the document with other name, he/she may choose “Save As” command.
(7) Save As
This command is used when saving the activated document with a different name from the current one. the “Save” dialog
box appears to allow the user to designate its name. If the user wants to save it with the current name, he/she may use
“Save" command.
(8) Print
This command is used when printing document. If this command is executed, the “print” dialog box appears to allow the

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-7

user to select a print range, number of copies, printer and printer option.
(9) Print Preview
This command allows to user to preview the content to be printed in an actual output format in advance.
If this command is performed, a preview window is displayed. The user may perform various functions such as
view one or two pages, view the front and rear page, zoom in/out and print command with the preview tool collection.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-8
(10) Print Setup
Letter size and orientation for printing documents can be selective.
(11) Recent Files
The user can open the documents that have been worked recently in this graphic editor. Up to 10 recent documents can
be displayed. The user can select one among the displayed files.
(12) Exit
The graphic editor is ended. If any changed content exists without being saved, a dialog box appears to ask the user
whether to save it or not. At this time, press “Yes” if he/she wants to save it otherwise press “No.” If “Cancel” is selected,
this ‘Exit’ command is cancelled.
9.2.2 Edit
(1) Undo
This command is used when the user wants to cancel the contents that have been recently inputted and return to the
previous status. Up to 20 events of inputting can be cancelled.
(2) Redo
This command is used when re-performing the cancelled contents.
(3) Cut
This command is used to delete the selected data from the document and copy them to the clipboard. If no data is
selected currently, this command can not be used. If this “Cut” command is performed, the previous data in the clipboard
is replaced.
(4) Copy
This command is used to copy the selected data to the clipboard. If no data is selected currently, this command can not be

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-9

used. If this “Copy” command is performed, the previous data in the clipboard is replaced.
(5) Paste
This command is used to copy data in the clipboard and insert them to the document. If the clipboard is empty, this
command can not be used.
(6) Delete
This command is used to delete the selected data. If no data is selected currently, this command can not be used. If
important data are about to be deleted, a dialog box appears to ask the user whether he/she really wants to delete them,
At this time, he/she may press “Yes” to delete them or he/she may press “No” to cancel the ‘Delete’ command.
(7) Select All
The entire objects in the page are selected.
(8) Find/Replace String
This command is used to find a string that was used throughout the objects in the page and replace the found one with
other one. When this command is executed, the “Find and Replace String” dialog box appears.
1) Find what
Input the string to replace with.
2) Replace with
Click “Replace” button to display the planned strings in the list.
3) Apply
Click “Apply” button to replace the strings with the ones displayed in the list.
(9) Find/Replace Tag Link
This command is used when finding mapped tags among the entire objects or the selected objects in the page or
replacing the found tags with others. When this command is executed, the “Find and Replace Tag Link” dialog box
appears. For detailed explanation, refer to the “Tag Link” provision.
(10) Excel Export
This command is used when exporting the mapped tags in the page to excel.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-10
(11) Smart Symbol Instance Settings
The dialog box is provided to set the instance for the smart symbol. For more details, refer to the items of
‘Smart Symbol’.
(12) Batch Dynamic Monitoring Properties
An across the board change the same types of mapped properties in the dynamic property window. Among
the selected objects, they are changed into the properties mapped to the master object in a lump. Accordingly,
in order to change the master object, select the relevant object with a mouse, while holding the CTRL key.
(13) Dynamic Objects Show
The only objects whose dynamic properties are mapped are displayed on the screen.
9.2.3 View
(1) Toolbars
There are [Standard], [Object], [Format] and [Draw] tools and they are either shown or hid with various related tools in the
tool window upon clicking on each one.
1) Standard
It is used when showing or hiding standard tools. Standard tools are command icons the most frequently used in the
graphic editor. When it is shown, the check mark appears in front of the menu.
2) Object Bar
It is used when showing or hiding object tools. Object bar has object icons needed to write pages. When it is shown,
the check mark appears in front of the menu. For details, refer to the ‘Insert’ menu.
3) Format Bar
It is used when showing or hiding format tools. This format bar has various icons including font, size, bold, underline,
italic, arrange to the left, center and right, line thickness, style and arrow type. When it is shown, the check mark
appears in front of the menu.
4) Draw Bar
It is used when showing or hiding draw tools. This draw bar has various icons related to functions to arrange objects in
the page and icons for Group/Regroup/Ungroup, Zoon in/out and Rotate. When it is shown, the check mark appears

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-11

in front of the menu. For details, refer to the ‘Draw’ menu.
(2) Status Bar
It is used when showing or hiding status tools. ‘Help’ messages or coordinates are displayed in the status bar. When it is
shown, the check mark appears in front of the menu.
(3) Library
It is used when showing or hiding the library dialog box. In addition to the library provided by the system, the user may
register/delete/edit his/her own library. For detailed explanation, refer to the “Library” provision.
(4) Project Page
It displays or hides the project page window. You can delete the page file with the ‘Delete’ button in the project page
window.
(5) Page Tab
It displays the project page as the page tab style or hides it. If you select the tab by clicking with the right mouse
button on the page tab, the page will be closed.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-12
(6) Color
It is used when showing or hiding color tools. This color bar has a part to set up view colors, background colors and
transparency setting. When it is shown, the check mark appears in front of the menu. A user can separately specify
and maintain colors up to 10.
(7) Navigation
It is used when showing or hiding navigation tools. If the current work area is small, this navigation bar allows the user to
move pictures to the work area he/she wants. When it is shown, the check mark appears in front of the menu.
(8) Layer
It is used when showing or hiding layer tools. This lay bar can either show or hid the relevant layer and it can also lock it.
For detailed explanation, refer to the “Layer” provision.
(9) Dynamic Properties
It is used when setting up dynamic properties and action functions of the relevant object. First, select an object and
execute this command to show a dialog box to set up its dynamic properties. The displayed dialog box allows the user
to set up dynamic properties and action functions of the relevant object. For detailed explanation, refer to the
“Dynamic Property Definition” provision.
1) Horizontal Size
A function to change the object’s size in the horizontal direction according to tag values.
2) Vertical Size
A function to change the object’s size in the vertical direction according to tag values.
3) Horizontal Move
A function to move the object in the horizontal direction according to the designated tag value.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-13

4) Vertical Move
A function to move the object in the vertical direction according to the designated tag value.
5) Horizontal Fill
A function to fill the object in the horizontal direction according to the designated tag value.
6) Vertical Fill
A function to fill the object in the vertical direction according to the designated tag value.
7) Color
A function to change the object in the prescribed color according to the inputted tag value.
8) Blink
A function to blink the object in the specified interval according to the tag status.
9) Visible
A function either to show or hide the object according to the input tag value.
10) Rotate
A function to rotate the object by the designated angle degree according to the input tag value.
11) Display Value
It is used to create an object marked with its tag value.
12) Display String
A function to change the object with the prescribed string according to the inputted tag value.
13) Lamp
The function shows the On image or Off image depending on the input tag value.
14) Click
A control function to execute the defined action when clicking on the object with the mouse or keyboard.
15) Input Value
A function to select an object and input a value in the predefined dialog box with the mouse or keyboard.
16) Horizontal Drag
A function to drag the object in the horizontal direction with the mouse to convert coordinates values to tag values.
17) Vertical Drag
A function to drag the object in the vertical direction with the mouse to convert coordinates values to tag values.
(10) Object Properties
If an object is selected and [View] ☞ [Object Properties] is clicked, object properties of the selected object and the
event list window appear. For detailed explanation, refer to the “Object Properties” provision.
(11) Ruler
It is used when showing or hiding the rulers on the top and the left side in the current page.
(12) Snap to Grid
It is used to set up or cancel the ‘Snap to Grid’ command. If ‘Snap to Grid.’ is set up, objects move to adjust to the grid
coordinates. If cancelled, objects can move freely.
(13) Grid Settings
It is used to designate grid spacing and whether to show grid. If this command is performed, the ‘Grid Settings’
window is displayed. Input grid spacing and check in the box of ‘Show Grid,’ grid appears in the screen.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-14
(14) Zoom
To make a more delicate edition in the screen, use zoom in or out. From 400% to 25% zooming can be designated.
It is used to display the full page to the screen size.
9.2.4 Insert
(1) Figure
1) Line
It is used to draw a line. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the line draw mode.
2) Poly Line
It is used when drawing multiple curves or looped curves. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to
the free draw mode.
3) Rectangular
It is used to draw a rectangular. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the rectangular draw mode.
4) RoundRect
It is used to draw a round square. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the round square draw
mode.
5) Ellipse
It is used to draw a circle or an ellipse. If you execute this command, the editing mode will be changed
into the drawing mode for an ellipse.
6) Arc
It is used when drawing a circle or an oval. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to
the arc draw mode.
7) Chord
It is used to draw a fan shape. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the chord draw mode.
8) Pie
It is used to draw a circular arc. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the pie draw mode.
(2) Window Control
1) Button
It is used to draw a button. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the button draw mode.
2) Group Box
It is used to draw a group box. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the group box draw mode.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-15

3) Check Box
It is used to draw a check box. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the check box draw mode.
4) Radio Button
It is used to draw a radio button. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the radio button draw mode.
5) Combo Box
It is used to draw a combo box. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the combo box draw mode.
6) List Box
It is used to draw a list box. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the list box draw mode.
7) Edit Box
It is used to draw an editor box. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the edit box draw mode.
8) Multiple Edit Box
It is used to draw a multiple editor box. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the multiple edit box
draw mode.
9) Slider
It is used to draw a slider. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the slider draw mode.
(3) Text
It is used to input text. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the text input mode.
(4) Tag Value
It is used to create an object marked with its tag value. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the object
input with tag value mode.
(5) Image
It is used to insert various types of image files. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the image insert
mode and the ‘Open’ dialog box appears. Select an image file to insert in the displayed dialog box.
For detailed explanation, refer to the “Image Insert” provision.
(6) Meter
It is used to create the measuring instrument object. If you perform this command, the editing mode will be
converted into the input mode for the measuring instrument object. You can specify the color, large/small
gradation size, the number of large/small gradations, label, position, etc.
(7) Image Button
It is used to insert picture files with various formats into the Up/Down image that will be put into the button
image. If you perform this command, the editing mode will be changed into the image button mode and the
setting dialog box will be displayed. In the displayed dialog box, you can just select the picture file that you
want to insert. For more details, refer to ‘Objects using images’.
(8) Image Lamp
It is used to insert picture files with various formats into the On/Off image that will be put into the button image.
If you perform this command, the editing mode will be changed into the image lamp mode and the setting
dialog box will be displayed. In the displayed dialog box, you can just select the picture file that you want to
insert. For more details, refer to ‘Objects using images’.
(9) ActiveX
It is used to insert Active X object. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the Active X
insert mode and the ‘Open’ dialog box appears. Select an Active X object to insert in the displayed dialog box.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-16
(10) Alarm Viewer
It is used to insert Active Viewer object. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the Active
Viewer object insert mode.
(11) Trend Viewer
It is used to insert Trend Viewer object. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the Trend
Viewer object insert mode.
(12) Gauge
It is used to insert Gauge object. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the Gauge object
insert mode.
(13) List Trend
It is used to insert List Trend object. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the List Trend
object insert mode.
(14) Recipe
It is used to insert Recipe object. If this command is executed, the edit mode is changed to the Recipe object
insert mode.
9.2.5 Draw
(1) Group
If this command is executed while more than two objects are selected, those selected objects are bound into one. During
the period between the time when selecting ‘Group’ and the time when canceling this ‘Group,’ the selected objects move
together as a group.
(2) Ungroup
It is used to cancel the selected objects as a group and release them into individual objects. If this command is executed,
control functions defined for the group disappear. These control functions for the group can be recovered with the
command ‘Regroup’.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-17

(3) Regroup
To edit some of the objects in a group with control functions, cancel the ‘Group’ command and edit them. After finishing
editing, use this command to recover those control functions. Regrouping is not allowed if other objects are newly added
or some of them are deleted. This command is available only when original objects are edited.
(4) Order
It is used to decide the order of the overlapped objects. There are [Bring to the Very Front], [Send to the Very Rear], [Bring
to Front] and [Send to Back].
(5) Edit Points
It is used to change shapes of free curve, multiple curve and looped curve objects. If this command is executed, a black
rectangular mark appears on each vertex. The user may change shapes by selecting the displayed mark and moving it
with the mouse.
(6) Open/Close
It is used to convert from multiple curves to looped curves and looped curves to multiple curves. If this command is
executed, multiple curves are converted to looped curves or looped curves are converted to multiple curves.
(7) Align
As a function to arrange more than two objects at the same position vertically and horizontally, distribute or sort them,
there are [Align to left], [Align to center], [Align to right], [Align to top], [Align to middle], [Align to bottom], [Same horizontal
spacing], [Same vertical spacing], [Vertical center] and [Horizontal center].
(8) Make Same Size
It is used to assign the same size to all of the selected objects.
(9) Rotate
It is used to rotate objects in the direction the user wants. [Free Rotate] allows the user to rotate them freely and
[Rotate 90°to the right] allows the user to rotate them by 90°. [Original Status] sends the direction of objects to their own
status.
9.2.6 Tool
(1) Run Mode
If this command is executed, a new window is created and runtime begins to operate as in the Runtime screen. The user
may test during the editing by loading its actual operation status to check whether it is properly operated.
(2) Objects
All of the activated objects are displayed in the screen. The user may set up the order among objects or rename or delete
objects in the Object Sheet dialog box and he/she may also organize a sequence to move one object to the other one to
ensure operation is enabled without mouse during the Runtime.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-18
(3) Declutter Settings
During the Runtime, layers (the entire objects in the layers) can be shown or hid depending on the zoom in/ out rate.
Therefore, overall objects can be seen in the zoom out screen while closer and more detailed objects can be displayed in
the zoom in screen. The user can assign the minimum and maximum zoom rate unique to each layer. Each layer can be
seen in the assigned range and the rate of its zoom in/ out are set in percentage.
For detailed explanation on how to assign to layers, refer to the “Layer” provision.
(4) Graphic Runtime Settings
It is used to edit settings during the Graphic Runtime such as window style, execution location, title bar or
start page. If this command is executed, a “Graphic Runtime Environment Setting” dialog box appears.
For detailed explanation, refer to the “Execution Settings” provision.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-19

(5) Options
1) Graphic Editor
a. Undo
You can specify the maximum number of times of undo.
b. Object Selection
You can choose two options: Selecting the object of grazing area and maintaining the previous
selected object.
2) Graphic Runtime Page
a. Object Selection
For the visible object only, you can specify whether applying dynamic property actions, whether using
the dynamic property action cursor.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-20
b. Popup Menu
A user can choose one of the three operations; Nonuse of the popup menu, user mode, general mode.
In the user mode, a user can edit and control the popup menu page in a lump.
* General mode
* User mode
c. Light Selection
In the graphic runtime, through the lighting function, you can specify whether showing object selection,
highlighting the object, in addition, you can also change the color. For more details, refer to ‘Lighting
Function’.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-21

9.2.7 Window
(1) Cascade
Windows are arranged in a cascade style.
(2) Tile
Windows are arranged in a tile style.
(3) Arrange Icons
Windows are arranged to the location to designate various tool bar defaults.
9.2.8 Help
(1) User Manual
It is used to show ‘Help’ provisions. Step-by-step commands and instructions on the displayed provisions are presented. A
content button is clicked in the Help screen, the corresponding provision screen appears.
(2) About Graphic Editor
It is used to show the version information of the graphic editor. If this command is executed, version information and
copyright message appear.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-22
9.3 Insert Image
A graphic file format refers to the type of a file that contains graphic images. A graphic file can either lower or extend its image
capacity and have a different file format depending on how the graphic images are compressed and saved. This InfoU Graphic
Editor supports general-purpose graphic file formats.
9.3.1 Insert Image
If the user selects [Insert] ☞ [Image] in the menu or clicks ‘Image’ button in the Draw Bar to define an image area in the screen
page, the ‘Open’ dialog box appears. The user may select an image file to insert in the displayed dialog box. The image file
types that are supported by the Graphic Editor are BMP, JPG, GIF, PNG, TIF, WMF, EMF and etc. The user may also use the
clip board to insert images by copying images from external APP and pasting them. Image names and formats can be checked
and methods to save images, transparency degree and colors can be designated in ‘Image Object Properties.’ For GIF
animation image objects, a time cycle of each frame can be set up.
9.3.2 Difference between Bitmap and Vector
(1) Bitmap
Bitmap refers to a way to divide one image into several points when saving images. With this way, the user may use
various colors and produce vivid colors and flexible pictures like photograph. However, it has some limitations to process
delicate lines or shapes and the resolution becomes rough or deteriorated by zooming in/out. Because information is
processed in pixel unit, file size is relatively large.
(2) Vector
Vector refers to a way to divide one image into several lines and shapes when saving images. This way is proper when
expressing simple shapes and objects and it enables to express delicate lines or forms effectively. Zooming in/out does
not have any influence on the resolution. However, available colors are limited and flexible works like photograph can not
created in this way.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-23

9.3.3 Characteristics of each Graphic File Format
This command is used to open the existing documents. If you perform this command, the dialog box is
displayed and you can specify the file to open.
(1) BMP
As a format to save uncompressed bit map images, this file format is used basically in Windows and OS/2. Logo pictures
displayed when the window starts or ends or background pictures in the wallpaper are all BMP-type files. Since BMP
saves image data inefficiently, a file with larger capacity than the actually needed one is created. Both RGB mode and
Indexed mode are supported and BMP-type files can be compressed in RLE compression method. Layers and alpha
channels are not supported.
(2) JPG
It is not the file format that can be used only in particular software or platforms rather, as a data encoding method in which
data files can be downloaded only after their size is lowered, this method has significant bigger merit than compression
loss and is the one used the most when saving image files among other image saving methods. As one of the graphic file
formats used the most on the Internet, its compression rate is the most excellent method. To compress image files, this
method deletes overlapped information in the frame to compress color static image data. JPG can be applied to any
picture regardless of image contents or resolution and it can also make it possible to use sequential decoding and gradual
decoding that gradually decodes the entire picture. Unlike GIF format, JPEG maintains all of color information of RGB
image. However, even though it has a high compression rate because it conducts loss compression, the quality becomes
significantly deteriorated as compression increases. About 11.2MB is required when saving 24 bit color images, however,
the file size lowers to 1.4MB if it is compressed in ratio of 8 to1. This format is considered almost as a standard format on
the Internet and file size is very low about 1/10 of that of other formats when saving the same number of colors under
similar definition.
(3) GIF
As a graphic format developed by CompuServe, a leading PC computer company in the USA, it can be used in various
device types for smooth interchange of graphic information between different device types. GIF files lower image
capacity by reducing the number of colors so that this file format has remarkable compression rates to obtain high
resolution images by reducing important transfer time. When saving, this method sorts 256 colors mostly used in the
overall image to create a color index and the entire images are expressed in those 256 colors. Therefore, the file’s capacity
remarkably decreases. However, as its biggest shortcoming, the available number of colors may vary depending on the
version of this format so that up to 256 colors are supported in version 87a. This way is rarely used for image saving today
because a format with 256 colors is the smallest one. Therefore, it is mainly used when producing website icons. Gif 89a
Format is mostly used for creating moving animation or files with transparent background.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-24
(4) PNG
As an abbreviation word of Portable Network Graphics, it is introduced to support interface functions and increase the
compression rate as PEG does. Like GIF, this image format lowers the number of colors to compress images but, unlike
GIF which limits up to 256 colors, it can save 16,000,000 colors and provides more excellent compression rates of 10~30%
than those of GIF. Basically, it supports true colors, uses no-loss compression and enables to express original images as
they are without image deterioration on the web. PNG provides improved functions in the alpha channel related to image’s
transparency and supports 256 gray colors and 256 colors as well as true colors. This format can be called an emerging
web image format after GIF and JPEG. PNG is currently used in Netscape and Explorer.
(5) TIF
TIFF means an image file format with a tag and it is co-developed by Aldus Corp and Microsoft Corp. This file format is
used when files are exchanged between application and computer platform and even though most files are saved without
being compressed under this format, it reduces file capacity most significantly by using a “no-loss compression method.”
Basically, it does not depend on OS so that it can describe resolution and compression methods and as a format to
preserve image data from black and white to various colors, it is used to preserve dot-expression images. Most of scanner
software or graphic software support this TIFF type and it is mainly used for scanning, saving or sending image files
expressed in gray scale. It seems passable to think this format is used for image exchange in Macintosh and Window.
(6) WMF
As an abbreviation word of Windows Meta File, this is the format to support the vector method -drawing programs. As a
common format of drawing programs, it is supported by Microsoft Office as clip arts. Not only it can enlarge into any size
freely without lowering resolution but also this format is supported by many useful programs. This format also expresses
graphic information displayed in the window screen with GDI Function.
(7) EMF
As an abbreviation word of Enhanced Meta File, this can provide enhanced 32bit definition even though it is the same as
WMF.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-25

9.4 Tag Link
This command is used when finding mapped tags among the entire objects or the selected objects in the page or replacing the
found tags with others. The user may define a range to be searched by selecting either ‘All Objects’ or ‘Selected Objects’.
9.4.1 Using Location
The left area of the using location tab indicates the list of tags composed in the object selection. The right area
shows the object using each tag and dynamic property list.
(1) ToolTip
Among objects into which the selected names are mapped, after choosing the desired object, you can batchapply the tag information and user definition with a tooltip.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-26
9.4.2 Find/Replace
The left area under ‘Find/Replace’ tab shows the names of the tags organized through selecting objects and it is used when tag
link is re-organized for all of the selected objects. Preview is available through single or multiple selection and it is also possible
to copy with the clipboard to edit in a Excel file and paste.
(1) Find What
When replacing the selected tag name, directly input a name of the new tag or click ‘Select Tag’ button and then input it in
the ‘Select Tag’ dialog box.
(2) Select All
All of the tag lists are selected.
(3) Delete List
The selected tag lists are cancelled.
(4) Replace
Click ‘Replace’ button to check and inspect the planned replace.
(5) Apply
Click ‘Apply’ button to link the select tag link as seen in the displayed list.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-27

9.5 Library
In addition to the library basically provided by the system, the user may register/delete/edit his/her own library. One of the strong
points of this “Library Object” command is that several objects can be selected at the same time to be saved in the library list
and at this time, the properties set up in those objects are also saved.
9.5.1 Use Symbol Objects
Any object registered in the library can be inserted in the screen. The user may drag any object he/she wants to edit in the
library and drop to the page he/she is editing with the left button of the mouse or the user may copy relevant symbols and paste
them to the edit page to insert objects. Then, these objects can be reformed to a desired shape through editing.
9.5.2 Register Symbol Objects
In addition to the library basically provided by the system, the user may add his/her own library. To register an object, the user
can select an object in the edit page and drag and drop it to the Library dialog box while pressing ‘Alt ‘key or the user can copy
the relevant symbol and paste it to a desire location in the Library dialog box.
When creating a new group, the user needs to input a group name. Library data are saved in location ‘InfoU Installation
PathinPicLibs’ in file type ‘Group Name.dat.’.
9.5.3 Library Dialog Box
(1) New Name
It is used to create a new library group. If the name of an image to be registered in the library is inputted, the image with the
new name is added to the library group.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-28
(2) Open
It is used to open one of existing library groups. The opened library group is added to the list.
(3) Close
The relevant library group is closed. The closed library group is deleted from the list.
(4) Lock
If the relevant library group is locked, any symbol is not added nor deleted from the relevant library group.
(5) Copy/Paste/Delete
It is available to copy, paste or delete symbol objects from the library dialog box.
(6) Preview
The user may preview symbol objects in icon, name or icon & name type.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-29

9.6 Layer
By using layers such as Show/Hide, Lock and Declutter function in the graphic editor, the user may simplify complicate process
screen works into individual object processes. The contents in the process screen can be divided up to eight layers and Layer0
objects are located on the lowest layer while Layer7 objects are located on the top
9.6.1 Layer Settings
In default, all of the layers can be seen and Layer O is activated. Objects can be always added to the activated layer but, they
can be quickly moved to other layer. The user may change to assign objects to layers by using the Object Property screen. If
the user needs to move multiple objects in different layers to one layer, he/she may use multiple-selection to move them quickly.
To change active layers, the user may use the Layer combo box.
9.6.2 Layer Lock/Unlock
The layer lock function makes selecting and editing objects either possible or impossible. By using Lock button, the user may
lock the relevant layer and use it as background image.
9.6.3 Layer Show/Hide
By using the Layer Palette, the user may show or hide the relevant layer individually. That is, it is possible to show/hide the
objects assigned to the relevant layer.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-30
9.7 Object Property
9.7.1 General
Static characteristics of each object such as page and object size, shape, location and color can be defined. After selecting
objects on the screen, you can change the same properties in a lump.
(1) Page Property

Property	Descriptions
(FormName)	Name of page object
Color	Page background color
CursorPointer	Cursor shape when the mouse is on an object
Height	Page height
Width	Page width
PrintPageFit	Designate a rate to align print paper and page
Quality	Designate the quality level of an object to be drawn
UserData	Save data defined by the user
Title	Page name
ToolTipText	Tooltip when the mouse is on an object
UpdatePeriod	Screen update period during Runtime
LocalVariables	Designate variables used in the page
UserLevel	Specify the user class on object actions.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-31

(2) Object Property

Property	Descriptions
(ObjectName)	Object name
Left	Left location of an object
Top	Top location of an object
Width	Object width
Height	Object height
CursorPointer	Cursor shape when the mouse is on an object
ToolTipText	Tooltip when the mouse is on an object
Enable	Designate to assign event handling of an object
Visible	Designate whether to show an object
UserData	Save data defined by the user
BackColor	Object background color
ForeColor	Object line or letter color
Font	Designate font name, style, size
Layer	Designate layer where an object exists
RotateAngle	Designate a rotation angle of an object
PenWidth	Designate line width
HatchStyle	Designate a hatch pattern to fill
BorderStyle	Normal, 3D, Sunken or Raised.
GradientStyle	Designate a gradient pattern to fill
PenStyle	Designate a line style
Arrowhead	Designate arrow direction
ArrowheadHeight	Designate arrow size

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-32

Text	Designate text to be displayed
Alignment	Designate text alignment
Angle1	Designate the start angle
Angle2	Designate the end angle
BorderColor	Object border color
ImageName	Name and format type of the displayed image
ImageInclude	Designate a type to save images
KeyCode	Dynamic property- Specify the shortcut key to click
KeyState	Dynamic property- Specify the secondary shortcut key to click
TransparentColor	Designate the transparent Color
ButtonStyle	Designate the push button style
Layout	How to specify the image size
FrameIndex	Specify the animation Gif frame
ImageIndex	Designate the multi-image index
UserLevel	Specify the user class on object actions
Lighting	Customized lighting function
ScriptSecurity	It is the function to specify the script security for the object. Once you apply the security function, it will never be canceled so you need to keep the original all the time.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-33

9.7.2 Event Property
The user may use scripts when designating complicate dynamic properties defined by the user or executing functions other
than the predefined movements. ‘Script Engine’ provided by Microsoft Corp is used and it is very similar to visual basic
programming. If ‘Event’ tab is selected in the Object Sheet and an event to be edited is selected, VBS Mini-Editor, a scripter
editor, appears.

Event	Descriptions
OnInitialize	Event that takes place when the relevant page is open(For setting-up)
OnTerminate	Event that takes place when the relevant page is closed(For clean-up)
OnClick	Event that takes place when the user clicks on an object
OnDblClick	Event that takes place when the user double clicks on an object
OnLButtonDown	Event that takes place when the user clicks the left of the mouse on an object
OnRButtonDown	Event that takes place when the user clicks the right of the mouse on an object
OnMouseMove	Event that takes place when the user moves the mouse
OnLButtonUp	Event that takes place when the user moves up an object with the left mouse
OnRButtonUp	Event that takes place when the user moves up an object with the right mouse
OnUpdate	Event that takes place when screen updates regularly.
OnSetFocus	Event that takes place when enable the page
OnKillFocus	Event that takes place when disable the page

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-34
9.8 Define Dynamic Properties
Dynamic Properties are used when setting up dynamic properties and action functions of the relevant object. First, select an
object and execute this command to show a dialog box to set up its dynamic properties. The displayed dialog box allows the
user to set up dynamic properties and action functions of the relevant object.
9.8.1 Horizontal Size
This is a function to change the size of objects in the horizontal direction according to tag values.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of horizontal size. A tag name can be designated
with ‘Search’ (...) on the right.
(2) Direction
Set up a base location and direction of change in size.
(3) Data Variation Range
Set up a range of data to be referred when changed. The minimum value cannot be bigger than the maximum one.
(4) Size Variation Range
Set up a range of size to be changed. The minimum size cannot be bigger than the maximum one.
(5) Sample examples
Action screen when changing the tag value: 10030

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-35

9.8.2 Vertical Size
This is a function to change the size of objects in the vertical direction according to tag values.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of vertical size. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...).
(2) Direction
Set up a base location and direction of change in size.
(3) Data Variation Range
Set up a range of data to be referred when changed. The minimum value cannot be bigger than the maximum
one.
(4) Size Variation Range
Set up a range of size to be changed. The minimum value cannot be bigger than the maximum one.
(5) Sample examples
Action screen when changing the tag value: 10030
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-36
9.8.3 Horizontal Move
This is a function to move the object in the horizontal direction according to the designated tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of horizontal move. A tag name can be designated
with ‘Search’ (...) on the right.
(2) Direction
Set up a base location and direction of change in move.
(3) Data Variation Range
Set up a range of data to be referred when changed. The minimum value cannot be bigger than the maximum
one.
(4) Move Variation Range
Set up a range of move to be changed. The minimum move cannot be bigger than the maximum one.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-37

(5) Sample examples
Action screen when changing the tag value: 030
9.8.4 Vertical Move
This is a function to move the object in the vertical direction according to the designated tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of vertical move. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...)
on the right.
(2) Direction
Set up a base location and direction of change in move.
(3) Data Variation Range
Set up a range of data to be referred when changed. The minimum value cannot be bigger than the maximum
one.
(4) Move Variation Range
Set up a range of move to be changed. The minimum move cannot be bigger than the maximum one.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-38
(5) Sample examples
Action screen when changing the tag value: 030
9.8.5 Horizontal Fill
This is a function to fill in the object in the horizontal direction according to the designated tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of horizontal fill. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...)
on the right.
(2) Direction
Set up a base location and direction of change in fill.
(3) Data Variation Range
Set up a range of data to be referred when changed. The minimum value cannot be bigger than the maximum
one.
(4) Fill Area (%)
Set up an area to fill when changed. The start area cannot be bigger than the maximum one.
(5) Color
Set up colors of line and background when filling.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-39

(6) Sample examples
Action screen when changing the tag value: 030
9.8.6 Vertical Fill
This is a function to fill in the object in the vertical direction according to the designated tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of vertical fill. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...) on
the right.
(2) Direction
Set up a base location and direction of change in fill.
(3) Data Variation Range
Set up a range of data to be referred when changed. The minimum value cannot be bigger than the maximum
one.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-40
(4) Fill Area (%)
Set up an area to fill when changed. The start area cannot be bigger than the maximum one.
(5) Color
Set up colors of line and background when filling.
(6) Sample examples
Action screen when changing the tag value: 030
9.8.7 Color
This is a function to change the object in the prescribed color according to the inputted tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of color change. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...)
on the right..
(2) Baseline Value Settings
When colors are changed as new rows are inserted to grids, input the minimum and maximum value of the inputted tag or

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-41

expression and set up colors of line and background to display under the relevant condition.
(3) Sample examples
Action screen when changing the tag value: 9050
9.8.8 Blink
This is a function to blink the object in the specified interval according to the tag status.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of blink. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...) on the
right.
(2) Condition
1) True
If the tag value designated above is true, blink the object. If false, do not blink it.
2) False
If the tag value designated above is false, blink the object. If true, do not blink it..
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-42
(3) Interval
Select a blink interval. Its unit is 100msec. That is, if 1 is inputted, it blinks every 100msec and if 10 is inputted, it blinks
every second. Input one value between 1 and 999.
(4) Sample examples
Action screen when the tag value is TRUE
9.8.9 Visible
This is a function either to show or hide the object according to the input tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or calculation that will be a baseline of pop in/out. You can select tag names by clicking the search
icon (…) at right side of Tag Name / Calculation.
(2) Condition
1) True
If the tag value designated above is true, pop in/out the object. If false, do not pop in/out it.
2) False
If the tag value designated above is false, pop in/out the object. If true, do not pop in/out it.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-43

(3) Sample examples
Action screen when changing the tag value: TRUEFALSE
9.8.10 Rotate
This is a function to rotate the object by the designated angle degree according to the input tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of rotation. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...) on the
right.
(2) Direction
Set up a rotation direction when rotation is changed.
(3) Data Variation Range
Set up a range of data to be referred when changed. The minimum value can not be bigger than the maximum
one.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-44
(4) Rotation Range (Angle)
Set up a range of rotation to be changed. The minimum angle can not be bigger than the maximum one.
(5) Sample examples
Action screen when changing the tag value: 090
9.8.11 Display Value
It is used to create an object marked with its tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...) on the right.
(2) Display Type
You can preview the format displaying the value on the screen. In the case of default setting, the value is
applied in the InfoU engineering. In the case of the digital tag, the On/Off string is displayed and for the
decimal places of the analog tag, the number of digits set in the InfoU engineering is applied. If you want to
display a unit and a sign on the screen, just put a check ‘Show Unit’ and ‘Display Sign’.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-45

(3) Sample examples
The value is basically set as Default. You can specify the number of digits and decimal places for the tag
value as shown below. When the value is set as ‘Default’, the value sent from the tag is displayed as it is.
1) (When selection ####.00)
2) (When selecting ####.00 and putting a check ‘Show Unit’ and ‘Display Sign’)
3) (When selecting ‘Default’ and putting a check ‘Show Unit’ and ‘Display Sign’)
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-46
9.8.12 Display String
A function to change the object to the prescribed string according to the inputted tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline to change strings. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...)
on the right.
(2) Baseline Value Settings
When strings are changed as new rows are inserted to grids, input the minimum and maximum value of the inputted tag
or expression and set up strings to display under the relevant condition.
(3) Sample examples
If you perform the runtime, the displayed string will change depending on the tag value.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-47

9.8.13 GIF Animation
This is a function to execute GIF animation according to the inputted tag values.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline to execute GIF animation. A tag name can be designated with
‘Search’ (...) on the right.
(2) Condition
1) True
If the tag value designated above is true, execute GIF animation. If false, stop executing GIF animation.
2) False
If the tag value designated above is false, execute GIF animation. If true, stop executing GIF animation.
(3) Play Speed
Designate a play speed between frames.
(4) Sample examples
Action screen when the tag value is TRUE
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-48
9.8.14 GIF Play Time
A function to designate a play speed of each GIF animation frame according to the inputted tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of GIF play time. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...)
on the right.
(2) Baseline Value Settings
When strings are changed as new rows are inserted to grids, input the minimum and maximum value of the tag or
expression that will be a baseline of conversion and set up a play speed under the relevant condition.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-49

9.8.15 GIF Tag Image
A function to show each GIF animation frame according to the inputted tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or expression that will be a baseline of showing each GIF animation frame. A tag name can be
designated with ‘Search’ (...) on the right.
(2) Baseline Value Settings
When strings are changed as new rows are inserted to grids, input the minimum and maximum value of the tag or
expression that will be a baseline of conversion and set up a frame to show under the relevant condition.
9.8.16 Lamp
It shows the On image or the Off image depending on the input tag value.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name or calculation that will be a baseline of pop in/out. You can select tag names by clicking the search
icon (…) at right side of Tag Name / Calculation.
(2) Lamp Condition
1) True
If the above specified tag value is True, the On image will be displayed; If it is False, the Off image will be
displayed.
2) False
If the above specified tag value is False, the On image will be displayed; If it is True, the Off image will be
displayed.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-50
9.8.17 Click
This is a control function to execute the defined actions when clicking the object with the mouse or keyboard.
(1) Open Page
The user may directly input a name of the page he/she wants to open or use ‘Search’ (...) button to move the folder that
has the page he/she wants to open and select the relevant page. When opening the page, the user can deliver parameter
and open the page from the clicked position.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-51

(2) Close Page
The user may directly input a name of the page he/she wants to close or use ‘Search’ (...) button to move the folder that
has the page he/she wants to close and then, select the relevant page.
(3) Page Change
1) Previous Page
The user may directly input a name of the page to be closed or use ‘Search’ (...) button to move the folder that has the
page and select the relevant page.
2) New Page
The user may directly input a name of the page to be newly displayed or use ‘Search’ (...) button to move the folder
that has the page and select the relevant page.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-52
(4) Write Tag Value
1) Tag Name
Directly input a tag name or use ‘Search’ (...) on the right to designate a tag name.
2) Write Value
Input a value to write.
(5) Write Digital Value
1) Tag Name
Directly input a digital tag name or use ‘Search’ (...) on the right to designate a tag name.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-53

2) Basic
‘Set’ designates the value of the relevant digital tag as 1. ‘Reset’ designates the value as 0. ‘Toggle’ compares the
value of the current digital tag and designates the value as 1 if the result is 0 and the value as 0 if the result is 1.
3) Momentory
In case of the On image, the digital tag value is specified as 1 in Mouse Down; 0 in Mouse Up.
In case of the Off image, the digital tag value is specified as 0 in Mouse Down; 1 in Mouse Up.
4) Pulse
In case of the On image, the digital tag value is specified as 1 and after the fixed time passes, it is
specified as 0. In case of the Off image, the digital tag value is specified as 0 and after the fixed time
passes, it is specified as 1.
5) Sample examples
Action screen when changing the tag value: TRUEFALSE
(6) Alarm
When you click the object, the system alarm page defined in the InfoU will be open. If you enter the tag name,
the cross reference will be executed when opening the page.
On Off On Off
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-54
1) Tag Name
You can enter the tag name directly or specify the tag name with the search (...) button on the right side.
2) System alarm viewer
(7) Report
Click the object to run ‘Report Settings’.
1) The created report
The created ‘Report Settings’ window is displayed.
2) The progressing report
The ongoing ‘Report Settings’ window is displayed. You need to set the report name and reference time
for retrieval.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-55

3) Report settings
(8) Realtime Trend
If you click the object, the system Realtime Trend page defined in the InfoU will be open.
1) Channel List
Among the channel properties, you can input the tag name, min. and max. value. If you put a check
[Channels Reset], the previously saved channel list is reset and the list set in the current setting window
only will be applied. If you enter -999 for the min. and max. value, the min, and max. value of the DB tag
will be automatically mapped; if you enter 0 or “ “, the auto-scale will be set automatically.
2) MultiTrend
It sets to determine whether displaying the trend as the multi-trend style.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-56
3) Display Window
Select the page style to apply.
4) Open from clicked object
[Open from clicked object] the page will be opened in the position of the relevant object. You can specify
X, Y offset and the size.
5) User Define Position/Size
[User Define Position/Size] A user can directly specify the position and size of the page.
6) Display Window- Style1

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-57

7) Display Window - Style2
(9) Archive Trend
If you click the object, the system Archive Trend page defined in the InfoU will be open.
1) Channel List
Among the channel properties, you can input the tag name, min. and max. value. If you put a check
[Channels Reset], the previously saved channel list is reset and the list set in the current setting window
only will be applied. If you enter -999 for the min. and max. value, the min, and max. value of the DB tag
will be automatically mapped; if you enter 0 or “ “, the auto-scale will be set automatically.
2) MultiTrend
It sets to determine whether displaying the trend as the multi-trend style.
3) Display Window
Select the page style to apply.
4) Open from clicked object
[Open from clicked object] the page will be opened in the position of the relevant object. You can specify
X, Y offset and the size.
5) User Define Position/Size
[User Define Position/Size] A user can directly specify the position and size of the page.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-58
6) Display Window- Style1

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-59

7) Display Window- Style2
(10) Detail Realtime Trend
If you click the object, the system Detail Realtime Trend page defined in the InfoU will be open.
1) Tag Name
Directly input a digital tag name or use ‘Search’ (...) on the right to designate a tag name.
2) Trend axis
It can set the minimum and maximum values for y-axis. If you enter -999 for the min. and max. value, the
min, and max. value of the DB tag will be automatically mapped; if you enter 0 or “ “, the auto-scale will be
set automatically.
3) Display Window
Select the page style to apply.
4) Open from clicked object
[Open from clicked object] the page will be opened in the position of the relevant object. You can specify
X, Y offset and the size.
5) User Define Position/Size
[User Define Position/Size] A user can directly specify the position and size of the page.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-60
6) Display Window- Style1

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-61

7) Display Window- Style2
(11) Detail Archive Trend
If you click the object, the system Detail Archive Trend page defined in the InfoU will be open.
1) Tag Name
Directly input a digital tag name or use ‘Search’ (...) on the right to designate a tag name.
2) Trend axis
It can set the minimum and maximum values for y-axis. If you enter -999 for the min. and max. value, the
min, and max. value of the DB tag will be automatically mapped; if you enter 0 or “ “, the auto-scale will be
set automatically.
3) Display Window
Select the page style to apply.
4) Open from clicked object
[Open from clicked object] the page will be opened in the position of the relevant object. You can specify
X, Y offset and the size.
5) User Define Position/Size
[User Define Position/Size] A user can directly specify the position and size of the page.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-62
6) Display Window- Style1

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-63

7) Display Window- Style2
(12) Realtime List Trend
If you click the object, the system Realtime List Trend page defined in the InfoU will be open.
1) Channel List
Among the channel properties, you can input the tag names and descriptions. If you put a check
[Channels Reset], the previously saved channel list is reset and the list set in the current setting window
only will be applied.
2) Display Window
Select the page style to apply.
3) Open from clicked object
[Open from clicked object] the page will be opened in the position of the relevant object. You can specify
X, Y offset and the size.
4) User Define Position/Size
[User Define Position/Size] A user can directly specify the position and size of the page.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-64
5) Display Window- Style1

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-65

6) Display Window- Style2
(13) Archive List Trend
If you click the object, the system Archive List Trend page defined in the InfoU will be open.
1) Channel List
Among the channel properties, you can input the tag names and descriptions. If you put a check
[Channels Reset], the previously saved channel list is reset and the list set in the current setting window
only will be applied.
2) Display Window
Select the page style to apply.
3) Open from clicked object
[Open from clicked object] the page will be opened in the position of the relevant object. You can specify
X, Y offset and the size.
4) User Define Position/Size
[User Define Position/Size] A user can directly specify the position and size of the page.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-66
5) Display Window- Style1

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-67

6) Display Window- Style2
(14) Write BitFlag Value
1) Tag Name
You can directly enter the digital tag name or specify the tag name using the search button (...) on the
right side.
2) Basic
In ‘Set’ mode, specify the bit flat value of the tag as 1. In ‘Reset’ mode, specify the bit flat value of the tag
as 0. In the Toggle mode, after comparing the bit flat values of the current tag, if the value is 0, specify it
as 1; if the value is 1, specify it as 0.
3) Momentory
In ‘On’ mode, specify the bit flat value of the tag as 1 in Mouse Down; specify it as 0 in Mouse Up. In ‘Off’
mode, specify the bit flat value of the tag as 0 in Mouse Down; specify it as 1in Mouse Up.
4) Bit flag
Specify the bit of the tag that you want to set.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-68
(15) Set Value
1) Tag Name
Directly input a digital tag name or use ‘Search’ (...) on the right to designate a tag name.
2) Open page from clicked object
[Open from clicked object] the page will be opened in the position of the relevant object. You can specify
X, Y offset and the size.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-69

9.8.18 Input Value
A function to select an object and input a value in the predefined dialog box with the mouse or Keyboard.
(1) Tag Name
Input a name of the tag to which the inputted value will apply. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...) on the
right.
(2) Input Type
The user may choose either ‘Number’ or ‘String' to decide how to input a value.
(3) Input Value Range
Designate the minimum and maximum value to input. The minimum value can not be bigger than the maximum one.
(4) Display Type
Designate a type of the window screen to be displayed in the screen.
(5) Title
Input a title of the screen..
(6) Comment
Input comment on the window.
(7) Sample examples
Action screen when you input the tag value to 10.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-70
9.8.19 Horizontal Drag
This is a function to drag an object in the horizontal direction with the mouse to convert coordinate values to tag values.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name to which the value of horizontal sliding will be inserted. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...)
on the right.
(2) Direction
Set up a base location and direction of horizontal sliding.
(3) Data Variation Range
Set up a range of data to be referred during the horizontal sliding. The minimum value can not be bigger
than the maximum one.
(4) Drag Variation Range (Pixel)
Set up a range of move during the horizontal sliding. The minimum move can not be bigger than the maximum one.
(5) Change value when dragging (100ms)
Check √ in the box if the user wants to operate the dragging value while the mouse is moving.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-71

(6) Sample examples
Action screen when moving the object: 030 pixel
9.8.20 Vertical Drag
A function to slide an object in the vertical direction with the mouse to convert coordinate values to tag values.
(1) Tag Name
Input a tag name to which the value of vertical sliding will be inserted. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ (...) on
the right.
(2) Direction
Set up a base location and direction of vertical sliding.
(3) Data Variation Range
Set up a range of data to be referred during the vertical sliding. The minimum value can not be bigger
than the maximum one.
(4) Drag Variation Range (Pixel)
Set up a range of move during the vertical sliding. The minimum move can not be bigger than the maximum one.
(5) Change value when dragging (100ms)
Check √ in the box if the user wants to operate the dragging value while the mouse is moving.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-72
9.9 Runtime Settings
9.9.1 Graphic Runtime Settings
‘Runtime settings’ is to set up the environment for the graphic runtime (InfoUX.exe).
To set up the environment, the user can set up menu, view/hide toolbar, initial execution position, name to be displayed in the
title bar, view/hide window control buttons and other options and also set up a default start page to open simultaneously along
with execution.
(1) Window Style
1) Menu
Select whether to view the basic menu.
2) Toolbar
Select whether to view the toolbar.
3) Status Bar
Select whether to view the status bar.
4) Sizable
Select whether to allow the operator to change the screen size.
5) Title Bar
Select whether to display the title window located on the top of the window.
6) Alarm Popup
Select whether executing the alarm popup window when an alarm occurs.
7) Auto Logout
Select whether executing auto-logout when a mouse or a keyboard does not work within the fixed time.
(2) Window Position
1) Start Maximize
Select whether to execute RunTime in the maximum screen.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-73

2) Set Position
The user can designate the location and size of the screen during Run Time.
Click ‘Full Monitor Area’ button, the area coordinates for the multiple monitors are displayed.
The coordinates reference (0, 0) is for the main monitor.
(3) Title Bar
1) Title
Input the title of the screen.
2) System Menu
Select whether to display system menus in icon types on the left top of the screen.
3) Minimize Icon
Select whether to display minimized buttons on the right top of the screen.
4) Maximize Icon
Select whether to display maximized buttons on the right top of the screen.
(4) Default Start Page
This is for selecting screens to be displayed at first when executing Run Time. If ‘Add’ button is pressed, all of the written
pages for the current page are listed up and the user may select one to be used as a start page.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-74
9.9.2 Page Settings
The page settings are used to designate a view (size and position, etc) when each graphic screen is displayed. In
order to set up the page environment, click [View] ☞ [Object property] of the menu in the screen to display the
‘page settings’ screen.
The screen to set up the page environment is as follows.
(1) Window Style
1) Writer and Description
Input the writer of the relevant graphic file and describe on the file. (Optional and informative)
2) Fetch Current Position
Calculate the location and size during the editing in the graphic editor and display them on the location/size input box.
3) Toolbar Style Editor
It provides the editing window to set up the page in a simple toolbar style.
4) Register Current Settings
Register and save the current setting value in the page setting window.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-75

5) Import Registered Settings
Import the registered and saved page setting value to the page setting window.
6) Left (Start X Position)
Show coordinates X in which the relevant page is located when executed. For the base of coordinates X, designate
the number of pixels starting from the area displayed in the screen (except the left frame area in the window) out of the
main window of the graphic runtime program.
7) Top (Start Y Position)
Show coordinates Y in which the page is located when executing. For the base of coordinates Y, designate the
number of pixels starting from the area displayed in the screen (any location other than caption bar, menu bar and tool
bar) out of the main window of the graphic runtime program.
8) Right
Designate pixel/ratio and width/right of the page when executing.
9) Bottom
Designate pixel/ratio and height/bottom of the page when executing.
10) Title Bar
Set up whether to show/hide the caption bar (title bar) of the page when executing.
11) Maximum size
Show the page in a full screen of the runtime frame when executing.
12) Sizable
Make the size of the page adjustable. When it is adjustable, the size of the window can be changed by clicking and
dragging the edge of the window, and a thick window frame is used. If the size adjustment is not available, the size of
the page cannot be changed, and a thin window frame is shown.
13) Scroll bar
Set up whether to show/hide the scroll bar of the page when executing.
14) Always On Top
If 'Always on Top' option is selected, the window is always located on top among various graphic pages
and it exists above other windows (among graphic monitoring pages).
15) Menu page
Designate the relevant page as a menu page when executing. The file designated as menu page is not
closed and continuously maintained even close (menu, toolbar) command is executed.
(If the user wants to close the page forcibly, he/she may execute 'closing' while pressing shift key.)
16) Zoom Auto Adjust
The zoom ratio (zoom in/out) is automatically adjusted (fit to the screen) by width and length ratio of the
screen when opening the page.
17) Same Width and Height Rate
When opening the page, the zoom ratio (zoom in/out) is automatically adjusted (fit to the screen) by
maintaining the ratio of width and height.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-76
9.10 Graphic Script
This Graphic Script is a function to define the activities for the object event (user's mouse action) or periodic
execution (OnUpdate Function: Executed at every set-up time in the screen UpdatePeriod) as VB Script.
The available commands at this time are the ones provided by the standard Microsoft VB Script Engine and the
graphic functions exclusively available in the InfoU system.
9.10.1 InfoU Graphic Function List
The functions available at the script of this graphic editor are composed of the standard VB script functions and the InfoU
graphic functions. The InfoU graphic functions are as seen in the following table.

Function Type	Function Declarations
AckAllAlarm	void AckAllAlarm()
ChangePage	long ChangePage(BSTR OldPageName, BSTR NewPageName)
ChangePageEx	long ChangePageEx(BSTR OldPageName, BSTR NesPageName, BSTR Tag Param)
ClosePage	long ClosePage(BSTR PageName)
ExecuteCommand	void ExecuteCommand(BSTR PathName)
GetAllAlarmCount	long GetAllAlarmCount(void)
GetGraLSPath	BSTR GetGraLSPath(void)

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-77

GetHistDataCount	long GetHistDataCount(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR TagName, LPCTSTR DataKind, double ReferenceTime, long DataCount, long Direction, VARIANT FAR* ResultCount, VARIANT FAR* ArrTimeStamp, VARIANT FAR* ArrDblTagVal, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongTagStatus, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongRets)
GetHistDataCountStr	long GetHistDataCountStr(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR TagName, LPCTSTR DataKind, double ReferenceTime, long DataCount, long Direction, VARIANT FAR* ResultCount, VARIANT FAR* ArrTimeStamp, VARIANT FAR* ArrStrTagVal, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongTagStatus, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongRets)
GetHistDataPeriod	long GetHistDataPeriod(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR TagName, LPCTSTR DataKind, double FromTime, double ToTime, VARIANT FAR* ResultCount, VARIANT FAR* ArrTimeStamp, VARIANT FAR* ArrDblTagVal, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongTagStatus, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongRets)
GetHistDataPeriodStr	long GetHistDataPeriodStr(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR TagName, LPCTSTR DataKind, double FromTime, double ToTime, VARIANT FAR* ResultCount, VARIANT FAR* ArrTimeStamp, VARIANT FAR* ArrStrTagVal, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongTagStatus, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongRets)
GetLoggingModelList	long GetLoggingModelList(long lOutCount,VARIANT arrModelName, VARIANT arrModelDesc, VARIANT arrModelType, VARIANT arrArchivingCycle, VARIANT arrSegmentPeriod)
GetLoggingTag	long GetLoggingTag(LPCTSTR ModelName,long lOutCount, VARIANT arrTagName, VARIANT arrTagType)
GetNoActionsTime	long GetNoActionsTime(void)
GetProjectPath	BSTR GetProjectPath(void)
GetRecentAlarmTagName	BSTR GetRecentAlarmTagName(void)
GetTagOFFSTR	BSTR GetTagOFFSTR(BSTR TagName)
GetTagONSTR	BSTR GetTagONSTR(BSTR TagName)
GetTagVal	VARIANT GetTagVal(BSTR TagVarName)
GetTagValMAX	VARIANT GetTagValMAX(BSTR TagName)
GetTagValMIN	VARIANT GetTagValMIN(BSTR TagName)
GetUnAckAlarmCount	long GetUnAckAlarmCount (void)
GetUnRecoverAlarmCount	long GetUnRecoverAlarmCount (void)
GetUserID	BSTR GetUserID()
GetUserInfoList	long GetUserInfoList(long lOutCount, VARIANT rrUserID, VARIANT arrUserName, VARIANT arrDesc, VARIANT arrPassword,VARIANT arrUserLevel,

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-78

VARIANT arrHPhoneNo, VARIANT arrPhoneNo, VARIANT FAR* arrMailAdd )
GetUserLevel	long GetUserLevel()
HardCopy	long HardCopy()
HolidaySet	long HolidaySet()
FindPage	VARIANT FindPage(LPCTSTR PageName)
IsPageOpen	BOOL IsPageOpen(LPCTSTR PageName)
MsgTrace	void MsgTrace(VARIANT MessageValue)
OpenPage	long OpenPage( BSTR PageName, BSTR TagParam)
OpenPageEx	long OpenPageEx(VARIANT X,VARIANT Y, VARIANT cX, VARIANT cY, BSTR PageName, BSTR TagParam)
OpenPageObject	long OpenPageObject( BSTR PageName, BSTR TagParam, BSTR ObjectName)
PlaySound	void PlaySound(BSTR WaveFile)
PulseOff	void PulseOn(BSTR TagName, long MilliSec)
PulseOn	void PulseOff(BSTR TagName, long MilliSec)
Quit	long Quit()
QuitProject	long QuitProject()
Reload	long ReLoad( BSTR PageName, BSTR TagParam)
ReportDatabase	long ReportDatabase(BSTR ReportName)
ReportDatabaseEx	long ReportDatabaseEx(BSTR ReportName, BSTR RefTime)
ReportDialog	long ReportDialog()
ReportPrint	long ReportPrint(BSTR ReportName)
ReportPrintEx	long ReportPrintEx( BSTR ReportName, BSTR RefTime)
ResetStatistic	long ResetStatistic(BSTR TagName)
RunScript	void RunScript(BSTR ScriptName)
SaveDeskTopToBmp	void SavePageToBmp(LPCTSTR FilePathName)
SavePageToBmp	void SavePageToBmp(LPCTSTR FilePathName)
SendData	BOOL SendData( LPCTSTR PageName, VARIANT FAR& VariantData)
SetLogging	void SetLogging( BOOL TrueFalse)
SetTagVal	long SetTagVal(BSTR TagVarName, VARIANT Value,VARIANT_BOOL bRet)
SetCopyFile	void SetCopyFile(LPCTSTR SourceFile, LPCTSTR NewFile)
ShowAlarmPage	long ShowAlarmPage(BSTR AlarmTag)
ShowCrossReference	void ShowCrossReference (BSTR TagName)
ShowFileDialog	BSTR ShowFileDialog(VARIANT_BOOL bOpen)
ShowHelp	long ShowHelp( BSTR HelpFile, long idx)
ShowLayer	void ShowLayer(LONG Index, VARIANT_BOOL bVisible)
ShowNetworkStatus	long ShowNetworkStatus()
ShowRawDataInfo	long ShowRawDataInfo()

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-79

ShowTagView	void ShowTagView(BSTR TagName)
ShowVirtualKeyboard	void ShowVirtualKeyboard(void)
Sleep	void Sleep(long Milliseconds)
StartAlarmSound	long StartAlarmSound(void)
StopAlarmSound	long StopAlarmSound()
TaskBarShow	void TaskBarShow(VARIANT_BOOL bShow)
TaskBarAutoHide	void TaskBarAutoHide(VARIANT_BOOL bAutoHide)
TimeOutMsgBox	void TimeOutMsgBox(BSTR Msg, BSTR Title, long nSec)
UserAdd	void UserAdd(LPCTSTR UserID, LPCTSTR UserPassword, LPCTSTR UserLevel, LPCTSTR UserName, LPCTSTR UserDesc, LPCTSTR UserCompany, LPCTSTR UserPhoneNo, LPCTSTR UserHPhoneNo, LPCTSTR UserMailAdd, VARIANT_BOOL UserSMSCheck, VARIANT_BOOL UserMailCheck)
UserDel	void UserDel(LPCTSTR UserID)
UserCommand1	long UserCommand1( long nCmd, BSTR Str1, BSTR Str2, BSTR Str3, BSTR Str4)
UserLogOff	void UserLogOff(void)
UserLogOn	BOOL UserLogOn(BSTR UserID, BSTR PassWord)
UserPassChange	void UserPassChange(void)

9.10.2 Explanation of InfoU Graphic Function

AckAllAlarm Function
Description	ACK all alarms.
Syntax	AckAllAlarm()

ChangePage Function
Description	Change the graphic page.
Syntax	ChangePage(BSTR OldPageName, BSTR NewPageName) OldPageName: Save the previous page. The previous page can be designated "abc.ivd” or “*.” The page designated as the previous page will be closed, and the page designated in NewPageName will be opened. NewPageName: Designate a name of the page that will be newly opened. If the user does not designate this dPageName (empty string), the current page will be closed.
Reference	If the user designates "*" to this dPageName, all pages will be closed. However, if the page designated to this dPageName is a menu page, it will not be closed. The menu page can be designated on the 'Page settings' screen in this Graphic Editor.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-80

ChangePageEx Function
Description	Change the graphic page
Syntax	ChangePage(BSTR OldPageName, BSTR NesPageName, BSTR TagParam) OldPageName: It specifies the previous page. You can set the previous page as “abc.ivd” or “*”. Then, the page that was set as the previous one is closed and the page specified in ‘NewPageName’ will be open. NewPageName: You can specify the file name of the page to open newly. OldPageName: In case you do not specify the page(empty string), the current page will be closed. TagParam: In the template screen, you can specify the name of the tag to replace. If you do not specify the tag to replace, just specify the empty string("").
Reference	If you enter “”into the ‘OldPageName’, all pages will be closed. However, the page is set as the menu page in the ‘OldPageName’, it will not be closed. You can specify the menu page in ‘Page Configuration’ of the ‘Dynamic Property Settings’ screen of the graphic editor. OldPageName: It specifies the old page. You can set the old page as “abc.ivd” or “”. Then, the page that was set as the old one is closed and the page specified in ‘NewPageName’ will be open.

ClosePage Function
Description	Close the graphic page.
Syntax	ClosePage (BSTR PageName) PageName: Designate the page to be closed. It is available to designate with either“abc.ivd” or “*”.
Reference	If the user designates with "*" in the PageName, all pages will be closed. However, if the page designated to this PageName is a menu page, it will not be closed. The menu page can be designated on 'Page settings' screen in this Graphic Editor

ExecuteCommand Function
Description	Executes an external program.
Syntax	ExecuteCommand(BSTR PathName)
Reference	PathName: Designate the program name to be exeuted.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-81

FindPage Function
Description	Find the designated page name from the opened pages.
Syntax	FindPage(LPCTSTR PageName)
Reference	The page pointer value is returned in the form of variant type.

GetAllAlarmCount Function
Description	It notifies you of the number of all occurring alarms.
Syntax	GetAllAlarmCount()

GetGraLSPath Function
Description	It notifies you the paths where the screen pages are located.
Syntax	BSTR GetGraLSPath(void)

GetHistDataCount Function
Description	For the specified history model and tag, it informs you of the history data (time stamp, tag value, status value, result value) as much as the number of history data that occurred in the request time.
Syntax	long GetHistDataCount(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR TagName, LPCTSTR DataKind, double ReferenceTime, long DataCount, long Direction, VARIANT FAR* ResultCount, VARIANT FAR* ArrTimeStamp, VARIANT FAR* ArrDblTagVal, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongTagStatus, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongRets) ModelName: History of model name TagName: Name of tag DataKind: Data type (default: current value) ReferenceTime: Request time DataCount: Number of history data Direction: Direction or time sequence ResultCount: Result of number of history data ArrTimeStamp: Time stamp array ArrDblTagVal: Tag value array ArrLongTagStatus: Tag status array ArrLongRets: Result of history data
Reference	Dim ModelName Dim TagName Dim DataKind

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-82

Dim RefTime
Dim lCount
Dim lDir
Dim ResultCount
Dim TimeStamp
Dim NumValue
Dim Status
Dim Result
ModelName = "INV1_SEC"
TagName = "INV_1.1_AI_CT"
DataKind = "Current value"
RefTime = Now()
lCount = 5
lDir = 1
GetHistDataCount(ModelName, TagName, DataKind,
RefTime, lCount, lDir, ResultCount,TimeStamp, NumValue, Status, Result)
For count = 0 To ResultCount -1
MsgBox("NumValue = " + CStr(NumValue(count)) + " Status = " + CStr(Status (count)))
Next

GetHistDataCountStr Function
Description	For the specified string history model and tag, it informs you of the history data (time stamp, tag value, status value, result value) as much as the number of history data that occurred in the request time.
Syntax	long GetHistDataCount(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR TagName, LPCTSTR DataKind, double ReferenceTime, long DataCount, long Direction, VARIANT FAR* ResultCount, VARIANT FAR* ArrTimeStamp, VARIANT FAR* ArrDblTagVal, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongTagStatus, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongRets) ModelName: History of model name TagName: Name of tag DataKind: Data type (default: current value) ReferenceTime: Request time DataCount : Number of history data

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-83

Direction: Direction or time sequence
ResultCount: Result of number of history data
ArrTimeStamp: Time stamp array
ArrDblTagVal: Tag value array
ArrLongTagStatus: Tag status array
ArrLongRets: Result of history data

Reference

Dim ModelName
Dim TagName
Dim DataKind
Dim RefTime
Dim lCount
Dim lDir
Dim ResultCount
Dim TimeStamp
Dim NumValue
Dim Status
Dim Result
ModelName = "INV1_SEC"
TagName = "INV_1.1_AI_CT"
DataKind = " Current value "
RefTime = Now()
lCount = 5
lDir = 1
GetHistDataCount(ModelName, TagName, DataKind,
RefTime, lCount, lDir, ResultCount,TimeStamp, NumValue, Status, Result)
For count = 0 To ResultCount -1
MsgBox("NumValue = " + CStr(NumValue(count)) + " Status = " + CStr(Status (count)))
Next

GetHistDataPeriod Function
Description	For the specified history model and tag, it informs you of the history data (time stamp, tag value, status value, result value) that occurred within a given period.
Syntax	long GetHistDataPeriod(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR TagName, LPCTSTR DataKind, double FromTime, double ToTime, VARIANT FAR* ResultCount, VARIANT FAR* ArrTimeStamp, VARIANT FAR* ArrDblTagVal, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongTagStatus,

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-84

VARIANT FAR* ArrLongRets)
ModelName: History of model name
TagName: Name of tag
DataKind: Data type (default: current value)
FromTime: Starting time
ToTime: Ending time
ResultCount: Result of number of history data
ArrTimeStamp: Time stamp array
ArrDblTagVal: Tag value array
ArrLongTagStatus: Tag status array
ArrLongRets: Result of history data

Reference

Dim ModelName
Dim TagName
Dim DataKind
Dim dFrom
Dim dTo
Dim ResultCount
Dim TimeStamp
Dim NumValue
Dim Status
Dim Result
ModelName = "INV1_SEC"
TagName = "INV_1.1_AI_CT"
DataKind = "Current value"
dFrom = Now() -1
dTo = Now()
GetHistDataPeriod( ModelName, TagName, DataKind, dFrom, dTo, ResultCount, TimeStamp,
NumValue, Status, Result)
For count = 0 To ResultCount -1
MsgBox("NumValue = " + CStr(NumValue(count)) + " Status = " + CStr(Status (count)))
Next

GetHistDataPeriodStr Function
Description	For the specified string history model and tag, it informs you of the history data (time stamp, tag value, status value, result value) that occurred within a given period.
Syntax	long GetHistDataPeriodStr(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR TagName,

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-85

LPCTSTR DataKind, double FromTime, double ToTime,
VARIANT FAR* ResultCount, VARIANT FAR* ArrTimeStamp,
VARIANT FAR* ArrStrTagVal, VARIANT FAR* ArrLongTagStatus,
VARIANT FAR* ArrLongRets)
ModelName: History of model name
TagName: Name of tag
DataKind: Data type (default: current value)
FromTime: Starting time
ToTime: Ending time
ResultCount: Result of number of history data
ArrTimeStamp: Time stamp array
ArrDblTagVal: Tag value array
ArrLongTagStatus: Tag status array
ArrLongRets: Result of history data

Reference

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-86

GetLoggingModelList Function
Description	It notifies the user on the list of models registered in the history.
Syntax	long GetLoggingModelList(long lOutCount,VARIANT arrModelName, VARIANT arrModelDesc, VARIANT arrModelType, VARIANT arrArchivingCycle, VARIANT arrSegmentPeriod)
Reference	Sub Text2_OnClick() Dim This : Set This = Text2 'Declare variable Dim nCount'Number of registered models Dim ModelName() 'Model Name Dim ModelDesc()'Model Description Dim ModelType()'Model Type Dim ArchivCycle()'Collection cycle (return string: 20 seconds = 20ss, 30 minutes=30mm, 5 hours=05hh, 36 months = 36MM) Dim SavePeriod()'Save period Dim ret Call 'Graphic Script function (ret value is undefined) ret = GetLoggingModelList ( nCount, ModelName, ModelDesc, ModelType, ArchivCycle, SavePeriod ) Dim strMessage ‘The call result into string … strMessage = "Model Name/Model Description/Model Type/collection cycle/save period" strMessage = strMessage + vbCrlf For idx = 0 To nCount -1 strMessage = strMessage+ ModelName(idx) strMessage = strMessage+ "/" EditBox1.Text = ModelName(idx) ' Use it to search tag by model name. strMessage = strMessage+ ModelDesc(idx) strMessage = strMessage+ "/"

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-87

strMessage = strMessage+ ModelType(idx)
strMessage = strMessage+ "/"
strMessage = strMessage+ ArchivCycle(idx)
strMessage = strMessage+ "/"
strMessage = strMessage+ SavePeriod(idx)
strMessage = strMessage + vbCrlf
Next
'Check the result
MsgBox strMessage
End Sub

GetLoggingTag Function
Description	It notifies the user on the list of tags registered in the given history model.
Syntax	long GetLoggingTag(LPCTSTR ModelName, long lOutCount, VARIANT arrTagName, VARIANT arrTagType)
Reference	Sub Text3_OnClick() Dim This : Set This = Text3 Dim nCount'Number of registered models Dim TagName()'Tag name array Dim TagType()'Tag type array Dim ret Dim modelName modelName = EditBox1.Text Call 'Graphic Script function (ret value is undefined) ret = GetLoggingTag (modelName, nCount, TagName, TagType ) Dim strMessage

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-88

‘The call result into string …
strMessage = "Tag name/Tag type"
strMessage = strMessage + vbCrlf
For idx = 0 To nCount -1
strMessage = strMessage+ TagName(idx)
strMessage = strMessage+ "/"
strMessage = strMessage+ TagType(idx)
strMessage = strMessage + vbCrlf
Next
'Check the result
MsgBox strMessage
End Sub

GetNoActionsTime Function
Description	After setting auto-logout and then, it gets the time value (ms) that elapsed after Mouse Down in the graphic runtime.
Syntax	LONG GetNoActionsTime(void)

GetProjectPath Function
Description	It gets the path of the currently running project.
Syntax	BSTR GetProjectPath(void)
Reference	Dim PrjName As String PrjPath = GetProjectPath() If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "GetProjectPath() False" Else MsgBox "GetProjectPath() OK " + PrjPath End If

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-89

GetRecentAlarmTagName Function
Description	It gets the tag name of the alarm that has recently occurred.
Syntax	BSTR GetRecentAlarmTagName(void)

GetUserInfoList Function
Description	Get the list of all users and individual information on each user. The user information will be used for SMS call or mail sending.
Syntax	long GetUserInfoList(long lOutCount, VARIANT rrUserID, VARIANT arrUserName, VARIANT arrDesc, VARIANT arrPassword,VARIANT arrUserLevel, VARIANT arrHPhoneNo, VARIANT arrPhoneNo, VARIANT FAR* arrMailAdd )
Reference	Sub Text1_OnClick() Dim This : Set This = Text1 'Declare variable Dim nCount'Number of registered users Dim UserIDs()'User ID Dim UserNames() 'User name Dim Descs()'User description Dim Passwords()'Password Dim UserLevels()'User level Dim HPhoneNos()'Mobile phone number Dim PhoneNos() 'Telephone number Dim MailAdds() 'Mail address Dim ret Call 'Graphic Script function (ret value is undefined) ret = GetUserInfoList (nCount, UserIDs, UserNames, Descs, Passwords, UserLevels, HPhoneNos, PhoneNos, MailAdds ) Dim strMessage ‘The call result into string … strMessage = "UserID/UserName/UserDesc/Password/UserLevel/HP No/TelNO/Mail" strMessage = strMessage + vbCrlf For idx = 0 To nCount -1

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-90

strMessage = strMessage+ UserIDs(idx)
strMessage = strMessage+ "/"
strMessage = strMessage+ UserNames(idx)
strMessage = strMessage+ "/"
strMessage = strMessage+ Descs(idx)
strMessage = strMessage+ "/"
strMessage = strMessage+ Passwords(idx)
strMessage = strMessage+ "/"
strMessage = strMessage+ cstr(UserLevels(idx))
strMessage = strMessage+ "/"
strMessage = strMessage+ HPhoneNos(idx)
strMessage = strMessage+ "/"
strMessage = strMessage+ PhoneNos(idx)
strMessage = strMessage+ "/"
strMessage = strMessage+ MailAdds(idx)
strMessage = strMessage + vbCrlf
Next
'Check the result
MsgBox strMessage
End Sub

GetTagOFFSTR Function
Description	Return ‘off string’ of the digital tag.
Syntax	GetTagOFFSTR(BSTR TagName) TagName: Designate a name of the tag.
Reference	Return “off string “of the tag whose name is designated in TagName. Off string of the tag is the string defined in the tag engineering, and it is only applied to the digital tag.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-91

GetTagONSTR Function
Description	Return On String of digital tag.
Syntax	BSTR GetTagONSTR(BSTR TagName) TagName: Designate a name of the tag.
Reference	Return “on string” of the tag whose name is designated in TagName. On string of the tag is the string defined in the tag engineering, and it is only applied to the digital tag

GetTagVal Function
Description	Return the tag value.
Syntax	Variant GetTagVal(BSTR TagVarName) TagVarName: Designate a name of the tag. The tag name includes the field name of the tag. Ex: “TagVarName:FieldName” The items listed in the tag selection dialogue can be used as the field name. For the details, see 'Tag variable' described in the next clause.
Reference	Return the designated tag value in a variant type. Since the value of the returned tag is in a variant type, the type of the returned value should be used for the inspected number in order to use this appropriately. To inspect the type of the returned value, use IsNull(variant return value), IsEmpty(variant return value) or VarType(variant return value) functions. For more details on how to use these functions, see the MS VB Script manual or relevant appendix. If the type of returned variant value is null, it means it is in a bad status, that is, the tag value is not normal. If it is empty, it means there is no tag, tag property does not exist or it cannot get any tag value because of the system error.

GetTagValMAX Function
Description	Return the maximum value of the tag.
Syntax	Variant GetTagValMAX(BSTR TagName) TagName: Designate a name of the tag.
Reference	The maximum value of the designated tag is returned in a variant type.

GetTagValMIN Function
Description	Return the maximum value of tag.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-92

Syntax	Variant GetTagValMAX(BSTR TagName) TagName: Designate a name of the tag.
Reference	The minimum value of the designated tag is returned in a variant type.

GetUnAckAlarmCount Function
Description	It informs you the number of unacknowledged alarms.
Syntax	GetUnAckAlarmCount()

GetUnRecoverAlarmCount Function
Description	It informs you the number of unrecovered alarms.
Syntax	GetUnRecoverAlarmCount()

GetUserID Function
Description	If it is called in the graphic runtime, return the ID of the user who is currently logged on.
Syntax	BSTR GetUserID()
Reference	Return the ID of the user logged on, and if there is no user logged on, the string with the length 0 is returned.

GetUserLevel Function
Description	If it is called in the graphic runtime, return the priority of the user currently logged on.
Syntax	LONG GetUserLevel()
Reference	The level of the user (As the priority of the user authority, there are level 1 through level 255) currently logged on is returned, and if there is no user logged on, it returns the default level 255 (the lowest one).

HardCopy Function
Description	Print the entire screen in the main window area of the Graphic runtime program.
Syntax	HardCopy()
Reference	Use the printer set up with default values.

HolidaySet Function
Description	Show the setting screen window to set up holidays in the graphic runtime program.
Syntax	HolidaySet()

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-93

IsPageOpen Function
Description	Inspect whether the designated page name is opened in the graphic runtime program.
Syntax	IsPageOpen(LPCTSTR PageName)
Reference	Return whether the designated file name is opened.

MsgTrace Function
Description	It is used when writing a command formula (script) in the graphic script, and checking the message for the purpose of checking error.
Syntax	MsgTrace (VARIANT MessageValue)
Reference

OpenPage Function
Description	Open the graphic page.
Syntax	OpenPage(BSTR PageName, BSTR TagParam) PageName : Designate a name of the page to be opened. TagParam : Designate tags to be replaced on the template screen. If there is no tag to be replaced, designate empty string (" ").
Reference	OpenPage "Panel_GIPAM.ivd’, "$MACHINE1=WB_EHV04, $MACHINE2=WB_EHV05’ While opening “Panel_GIPAM.ivd” file, it converts the $MACHINE1 tag or string into WB_EHV04, and $MACHINE2 tag or string into WB_EHV05.’ The template screen can be operated by using this function.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-94

OpenPageEx Function
Description	Open the graphic page.
Syntax	OpenPageEx(VARIANT X,VARIANT Y, VARIANT cX, VARIANT cY, BSTR PageName, BSTR TagParam)
Reference	The usage method is same as OpenPage Function, and the location to be opened can be designated. This function is not operated at local, and this supports to designate the location and size of a new page. The function which handles events about the object at HTML of web page should be realized.

OpenPageObject Function
Description	Open the graphic page and mark the designated object.
Syntax	OpenPageObject(BSTR PageName, BSTR TagParam, BSTR ObjectName) PageName : Designate a name of the page to be opened. TagParam : Designate tags to be replaced on the template screen. If there is no tag to be replaced, designate empty string (“ “). ObjectName: The name of the object to be marked

PlaySound Function
Description	Create the sound.
Syntax	PlaySound(BSTR WaveFile) WaveFile: This is the name of a sound file. It should be designated with the path.

PulseOff Function
Description	As the pulse (msec units) which comes to give the tag which is designated pulse off outputs.
Syntax	PulseOff(BSTR TagName, long MilliSec)

PulseOn Function
Description	As the pulse (msec units) which comes to give the tag which is designated pulse on outputs.
Syntax	PulseOn(BSTR TagName, LONG MilliSec)

Quit Function
Description	Quit the graphic runtime program.
Syntax	Quit()
Reference	The graphic runtime program is terminated.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-95

QuitProject Function
Description	Close the current project, and quit the InfoU monitoring system.
Syntax	QuitProject()
Reference	The current InfoU project is terminated and all of the processes are ended.

SaveDeskTopToBmp Function
Description	It captures the currently running graphic runtime frame and saves it to the specified path in the format of BMP.
Syntax	void SaveDeskTopToBmp(LPCTSTR FilePathName) FilePathName

SavePageToBmp Function
Description	It captures the currently selected graphic runtime page and saves it to the specified path in the format of BMP.
Syntax	void SavePageToBmp(LPCTSTR FilePathName) FilePathName

ReLoad Function
Description	Load the current page again.
Syntax	ReLoad( BSTR PageName, BSTR TagParam)
Reference	The usage method of the function is same as OpenPage()Function. The difference is that the designated page is reopened in the same location with the same screen size instead of the currently loaded page. If the PageName is not designated, the currently opened page is reopened.

ReportDatabase Function
Description	Create a report..
Syntax	ReportDatabase(BSTR ReportName)

ReportDatabaseEx Function
Description	Create a report for the designated period.
Syntax	ReportDatabaseEx(BSTR ReportName, BSTR RefTime)

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-96

ReportDialog Function
Description	The report is created at the designated time.
Syntax	ReportDialog()
Reference	A screen is popped up to show the type of the report set up for the current project and the list of the created reports for searching and printing.

ReportPrint Function
Description	Print a report.
Syntax	ReportPrint(BSTR ReportName)

ReportPrintEx Function
Description	Print a report.
Syntax	ReportPrintEx( BSTR ReportName, BSTR RefTime)

ResetStatistic Function
Description	Reset the tag’s statistical value.
Syntax	ResetStatistic(BSTR TagName) TagName: Reset a tag whose statistical data is reset.
Reference	The statistical data is reset only for the tag designated as statistical tag.

RunScript Function
Description	Execute a script that has been written in InfoUD.
Syntax	RunScript(BSTR ScriptName) ScriptName: The script name written in InfoUD.

SendData Function
Description	Sent the factor value to the page name designated by the graphic runtime program.
Syntax	SendData( LPCTSTR PageName, VARIANT FAR& VariantData) OnReceiveData
Reference	The factor value is delivered in a variant type to the Event Function OnReceiveData of the designated page name.

SetLogging Function
Description	It should be logged on to the ‘Event’ for the change (control) in tag values and tag variable values in InfoU

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-97

graphic runtime.
However, when any specific job is implemented in the specific system, this function is available for
controlling or modifying tag variable values without any need to log onto the ‘Event.’
After implementing SetLogging(False), execute SetLogging(True) for the safe operation record of the
system. If SetLogging(False) is implemented, the event logging for the control is not performed until
SetLogging(True) is implemented.

Syntax

SetLogging(BOOL TrueFalse)

SetCopyFile Function
Description	Copy (controls) a tag value or a tag variable value.
Syntax	void SetCopyFile(LPCTSTR SourceFile, LPCTSTR NewFile) SourceFile: Copy the file path name NewFile: New file path name

SetTagVal Function
Description	Set up (controls) a tag value or a tag variable value.
Syntax	SetTagVal(BSTR TagVarName, VARIANT Value, VARIANT_BOOL bRet) TagVarName: Tag name or tag variant value. Value: Control value(tag name intended to change) bRet: Return control(True) or No-return control (False)
Reference	Since this is a control function to change tag values, the description on the control is recorded upon the occurrence of any event. For more details on the tag variable, see the 'tag variable' provision of the manual.

ShowAlarmPage Function
Description	Open an Alarm page. The BinGraSysSysAlarmPage.ivd file of the director where InfoU is installed (ex: :InfoUBinGraSysSysAlarmPage.ivd) is opened as a default alarm page. If the user wants to change the default alarm pgae, he/she may draw the “SysAlarmPage.ivd” page with the same name (saved in GraLS of the project) in the relevant project, then “SysAlarmPage.ivd” file of the project will be opened.
Syntax	ShowAlarmPage(BSTR AlarmTag) AlarmTag : The tag name is designated, then it finds the most recent alarm for the tag, and displays it on the alarm screen.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-98

ShowCrossReference Function
Description	Show the cross reference for the designated tag.
Syntax	ShowCrossReference(BSTR TagName) TagName: Designate a name of the tag.

ShowFileDialog Function
Description	It shows the open and save dialog box for common window file.
Syntax	BSTR ShowFileDialog(VARIANT_BOOL bOpen) bOpen: It specify the dialog box of open and save file

ShowHelp Function
Description	Open the help file.
Syntax	ShowHelp( BSTR HelpFile, long idx) HelpFile and idx parameter are not currently used. (Reserved parameters for expanding function)

ShowLayer Function
Description	Open the layer file.
Syntax	void ShowLayer(LONG Index, VARIANT_BOOL bVisible) Index: Layer index bVisible: Whether to show selected layer

ShowNetworkStatus Function
Description	Open the screen to show the list and communication status of the device (station)..
Syntax	ShowNetworkStatus()

ShowRawDataInfo Function
Description	Open the screen to display the information of raw data in communication.
Syntax	ShowRawDataInfo

ShowTagView Function
Description	Show the tag browser for the designated tag.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-99

Syntax

ShowTagView (BSTR TagName)
TagName: Designate a name of the tag.

ShowVirtualKeyboard Function
Description	Shows the virtual keyboard window.
Syntax	ShowVirtualKeyboard()

Sleep Function
Description	Delay the implementation of the function for the designated time.
Syntax	Sleep(long dwMilliseconds)

StartAlarmSound Function
Description	It is the command to generate the alarm sound when an alarm occurs in the InfoU.
Syntax	StartAlarmSound()

StopAlarmSound Function
Description	If the sound of alarm occurs, this command stops the sound.
Syntax	StopAlarmSound()

TaskBarAutoHide Function
Description	Select whether applying the auto hide Windows task bar.
Syntax	void TaskBarAutoHide(VARIANT_BOOL bAutoHide)

TaskBarShow Function
Description	Select whether applying the display Windows task bar.
Syntax	void TaskBarShow(VARIANT_BOOL bShow)

TimeOutMsgBox Function
Description	Pop up the message box to be displayed for the designated time.
Syntax	TimeOutMsgBox(BSTR Msg, BSTR Title, long nSec)

UserAdd Function
Description	Command for add users.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-100

Syntax

void UserAdd(LPCTSTR UserID, LPCTSTR UserPassword, LPCTSTR UserLevel,
LPCTSTR UserName, LPCTSTR UserDesc, LPCTSTR UserCompany,
LPCTSTR UserPhoneNo, LPCTSTR UserHPhoneNo, LPCTSTR UserMailAdd,
VARIANT_BOOL UserSMSCheck, VARIANT_BOOL UserMailCheck)
UserID
UserPassword
UserLevel
UserName
UserDesc
UserCompany
UserPhoneNo
UserHPhoneNo
UserMailAdd
UserSMSCheck
UserMailCheck

UserCommand1 Function
Description	This function is not operated at local, and it is reserved to be used for specific purpose by realizing the function that sends commands to the graphic page and handles events for the object at the HTML of the web page.
Syntax	UserCommand1( long nCmd, BSTR Str1, BSTR Str2, BSTR Str3, BSTR Str4)

UserDel Function
Description	It deletes the user ID from the user list
Syntax	void UserDel(LPCTSTR UserID)

UserLogOff Function
Description	Log off the logged on user.
Syntax	UserLogOff(void)

UserLogOn Function
Description	Log on the registered user.
Syntax	UserLogOn(BSTR UserID, BSTR PassWord)

UserPassChange Function
Description	It shows the window to change the user’s password.
Syntax	void UserPassChange(void)

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-101

9.11 Tag Variable
Tag variable is referred to variable or invariable related to tag defined by database. The tag variable can be referred by the same
way of "Tag name: Tag variable name.".
9.11.1 Examples Used by the Dynamic Property Settings for Graphic
The functions that are available in the script of the graphic editor are composed of the standard VB script function
and graphic function of the InfoU. The types of the graphic functions of the InfoU are as shown in the below table.
9.11.2 Examples of Using in Graphic Script
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-102

Tag Variable	Descriptions	Support	Remarks
tagValue	It means the current value of tag. It is the same as the tag's name is used only (If only the tag's name is inputted, the default value appears)	Read/Write	Analog/Digital/ String
tagName	Tag name	Read
tagId	Tag unique index(long type)	Read
tagDesc	Tag description (String)	Read/Write
tagKind	Classification of system tags 0 : Normal tag 1 : System tag	Read
tagType	Tag type 1:Analog, 2:Digital, 3:String, 4:Structure, 5:Block, 6:Grouop	Read
structTagTypeId	It is the type index of the structure tag. It indicates the device type and is used to represent the tag information of the device for LSIS only. 0: The general tag does not need this information. 1 or higher: If it is structure tag, this information must be filled.	Read
displayPrecision	It displays the decimal places. /String length	Read/Write
tagPriority	Tag's priority value (Control ranking: 1~255)
engValueType	It shows a type of industrial data value. 1 : bool 2 : char 3 : short 4 : long 5 : longlong 6 : unsigned char 7 : unsigned short 8 : unsigned long 9 : ulonglong 10:float 11:double 101:string type 201:raw type More than 1000:Used for structure tag type.	Read
devValueType	It shows device value type. 1 : bool 2 : int8 3 : int16 4 : int32 5 : int64 6 : uint8	Read	I/O Analog/Digital/ String

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-103

7 : uint16 8 : uint32 9 : uint64 10: float 11: double 12: bcd_8 13: bcd_16 14: bcd_32 15: bcd_64 16: ubcd_8 17: ubcd_16 18: ubcd_32 19: ubcd_64 20: bit_1 21: bit_2 22: bit_3 23: bit_4 101:string 201: raw
engUnitId	String index showing the unit of Analog Tag	Read	Analog
onStrId	String index displayed when digital tag is 1	Read	Digital
offStrId	String index displayed when digital tag is 0	Read	Digital
containerId	Delimiter for tag members Parent tag’s index when it is a member of structure tag	Read	Analog/Digital/ String
memTagExprFlag	Memory tag calculation flag 0 : Memory Tag is not calculated 1 : Memory Tag is calculated	Read	Memory Tag Analog/Digital
memTagExpr	Expression of memory tag	Read	Memory Tag Analog/Digital
memTagExprCycle	Expression cycle of memory tag	Read	Memory Tag Analog/Digital
initVal	Tag's initial value	Read	Analog/Digital/ String
convertRule	Method to convert raw data to industrial data 0:None, 1:Ratio/Bios, 2:Scale	Read/Write	I/O Analog Tag
rawMin	Minimum value of tag’s raw data	Read/Write
rawMax	Maximum value of tag’s raw data	Read/Write	I/O Analog Tag
dataMin	Minimum value of tag’s industrial data	Read/Write	Analog Tag
dataMax	Maximum value of tag’s industrial data	Read/Write	Analog Tag
dataEngRatio	Ratio value to change tag values	Read/Write	I/O Analog Tag
dataEngBias	Bias value to change tag values	Read/Write	I/O Analog Tag

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-104

valueDeadBand	DeadBand value (%)	Read/Write	I/O Analog Tag
alarmDelayTime	Alarm delay time(millisecond)	Read	Analog/Digital
alarmDeadBand	Alarm Deadband (%)	Read/Write	Analog Tag
alarmKind	Alarm process kinds. It is shown in each bit. [Analog] 0000 0000 0000 0001 : Boundary value(HH) 0000 0000 0000 0010 : Boundary value(HI) 0000 0000 0000 0100 : Boundary value(LO) 0000 0000 0000 1000 : Boundary value(LL) 0000 0000 0001 0000 : Changed amount 0000 0000 0010 0000 : Main distance 0000 0000 0100 0000 : Sub distance [Digital] 0000 0001 0000 0000 : OFF 0000 0010 0000 0000 : ON 0000 0100 0000 0000 : ON->OFF 0000 1000 0000 0000 : OFF->ON 0001 0000 0000 0000 : When changed	Read/Write	Analog/Digital
alarmLevel	Value to show alarm level 0 : None(Default Value). 1~10: Actual alarm level	Read	Analog/Digital
alarmGenStrId	String index displayed when alarm is generated	Read	Analog/Digital
alarmRcvStrId	String index displayed when alarm is recovered	Read	Analog/Digital
alarmHH	Analog Tag HIHI Alarm boundary value	Read/Write	Analog
alarmHI	Analog Tag HI Alarm boundary value	Read/Write	Analog
alarmLO	Analog Tag LO Alarm boundary value	Read/Write	Analog
alarmLL	Analog Tag LOLO Alarm boundary value	Read/Write	Analog
alarmChangeValue	Absolute value of the alarm’s changed value	Read/Write	Analog
alarmGapRule	Rule to process distance alarm 0: Not used, 1: Absolute value used, 2:Relative value used(designating tag)	Read/Write	Analog
alarmGapBaseValue	Base value of alarm distance(Absolute value )	Read/Write	Analog
alarmGapBaseTagId	Tag index as base value of alarm distance	Read/Write	Analog
alarmGapMain	Main fluctuation value of alarm distance	Read/Write	Analog
alarmGapSub	Sub fluctuation value of alarm distance	Read/Write	Analog
usrDefAlarmStr1Id	String 1 index of alarm defined by the user	Read	Analog/Digital
usrDefAlarmStr2Id	String 2 index of alarm defined by the user	Read
usrDefAlarmStr3Id	String 3 index of alarm defined by the user	Read
usrDefAlarmStr4Id	String 4 index of alarm defined by the user	Read
stationId	Station index connected to tag 1:Memory Tag, More than 2:Station index	Read	I/O Tag

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-105

comAddr	Tag I/O address	Read	I/O Tag
stationName	Station name connected to tag	Read	I/O Tag
devId	Device index	Read	I/O Tag
devName	Device name	Read	I/O Tag
driverName	Driver name	Read	I/O Tag
engUnitStr	String showing the unit of tag	Read	Analog
onStr	String index displayed when digital tag is On(1)	Read	Digital
offStr	String index displayed when digital tag is Off(0)	Read	Digital
alarmGenStr	String index displayed when alarm is generated	Read	Analog/Digital
alarmRcvStr	String index displayed when alarm is recovered	Read	Analog/Digital
alarmGapBaseTagName	Base tag name of distance alarm	Read	Analog
pOnOffStr	String index showing On when digital tag is On while showing Off when digital tag is OFF (String)	Read	Digital
pAlarmEn	Whether to process tag alarm	Read/Write	Analog/Digital
pStatEn	Whether to process tag statistics value	Read/Write	Analog/Digital
pAlarmEnHH	Whether to process HH alarm	Read/Write	Analog
pAlarmEnHI	Whether to process HI alarm	Read/Write	Analog
pAlarmEnLO	Whether to process LO alarm	Read/Write	Analog
pAlarmEnLL	Whether to process LL alarm	Read/Write	Analog
pAlarmEnCHG	Whether to process changed alarm	Read/Write	Analog
pAlarmEnMAIN	Whether to process main distance alarm	Read/Write	Analog
pAlarmEnSUB	Whether to process sub distance alarm	Read/Write	Analog
pAlarmEnDIG	Process kind of digital alarm 1:Off, 2:On,3:On->Off,4:Off->On,5:When changed	Read/Write	Digital
tagStatus	Information on tag status (Bit)	Read	Analog/Digital/ String
pTagStatus	Information on tag status (0:Normal, 1:Alarm, 2:bad)	Read

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-106
9.12 Objects Using Images
There are pictures, image buttons, and image lamps for the objects using various formats of images. You can
specify the layout types and transparent color commonly. In the case of a picture object, you can use a clipboard
and can specify storage method. The image button/image lamp provides the storage method based on image pixel
data. In the case of the picture/image button object, you can specify the Push button style. In addition,
after selecting the objects on the screen of the objects using images, you can change images in the sub-property
at once.
9.12.1 Button Image
The image button object acts as the Push button. If you select this object and draw on the screen, the below
setting window will be displayed. Then, you can just choose the desired image. The image can be reset by using
[Sub-property] of the menu.
(1) Up Image: Image that you want to display when dragging the mouse up.
(2) Down Image: Image that you want to display when dragging the mouse down.
(3) Library: If you click this button, the image selection window of ‘InfoU installation pathin PicImages’path
will be displayed.
(4) Image Open: If you click this button, the image selection window of GraLS path of the relevant project will be
displayed.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-107

9.12.2 Lamp Image
The image lamp object acts as the lamp according to the tag value. If you select this and draw on the screen, the
below setting window will be displayed. You can choose the desired image for each item and the image can be
reset by using [Sub-property] of the menu.
(1) On Image: Image that you want to display in case of Mouse-On
(2) Off Image: Image that you want to display in case of Mouse-Off
(3) Library: If you click this button, the image selection window of ‘InfoU installation pathin PicImages’path
will be displayed.
(4) Image Open: If you click this button, the image selection window of GraLS path of the relevant project will be
displayed.
The figure shown blows the setting window for the lamp dynamic property. Depending on the input tag value
during runtime, On Image or Off Image is displayed.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-108
9.13 Smart Symbol
When configuring the dynamic properties of objects individually, the smart symbol aims at reuse of each tag name
by arranging the alternative string for structure tags or the specific information excluding the member of a group in
the almost same way as the instance method. The merit of the smart symbol is to define the object only once.
Namely, you can just specify the alternative string every time you put the registered smart symbol on the page.
9.13.1 Creating Smart Symbol
A user can draw a desired picture like a regular object. During tag mapping of the dynamic properties of each
object, it maps the structure tags or the specific information excluding the member of a group into the alternative
string. For smart symbolization, you need to put $ in front of the string to be replaced. If there is no $ separator,
you cannot use the window to set the smart symbol instance.
The figure shown blows the tag management of engineering. As shown in a blue mask, the tag name is composed
of communication channel + station + member. The member name is repeated according to fixed rules so you can
just convert communication channel + station string into the alternative string.
The below figure shows the example of mapping the tag name of the dynamic property into the alternative string
(communication channel + station-> $GIMAC) + member.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-109

9.13.2 Registering and Importing the Smart Symbol in the Library
For registration, you can just copy/paste the object made with smart symbol to the library or drag & drop it as if you
register general symbols. To use the smart symbol, if you copy/paste the smart symbol to the page or drag & drop
it, the smart symbol instance setting window will be displayed. You cannot use the smart symbol setting window for
items other than smart symbols.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-110
9.13.3 Smart Symbol Instance Settings
In order to import smart symbols registered in the symbol library to the relevant page and apply them to the
runtime, you need to change the keywords of smart symbols into the alternative string by using the smart symbol
instance setting window.
If there is no separator $ in front of the first letter of the keyword, it cannot be displayed in the smart symbol
instance setting window. The figure shown blows the process converting the keywords into the alternative string
through the smart symbol instance setting window.
(1) Keyword: It shows the list of strings (keywords) to be replaced, which are found in the smart symbol object.
(2) Alternative string: Enter the string to replace the corresponding keyword.
The below figure shows the changes in the tag name of dynamic properties of each object after being
replaced with the alternative string through the symbol instance setting window.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-111

9.14 Animation Editor
The InfoU animation editor is the animation editor program to display the monitoring screen more vividly by
configuring different images with the multi frame without vexatious processes such as program download or
installation. The InfoU animation editor provides various file formats (BMP, JPG, GIF, PNG, and TIF) to add/insert
graphics but for the file format to read/save, TIF supporting the multi-frame is available only. You can easily add,
replace and delete a number of image frames. The ‘Preview’ function of milliseconds is also provided
9.14.1 Execution and Composition of the Animation Editor
If you select [Tool]  [Animation Editor] in the menu, the below animation editor window will be displayed.
The animation editor is the tool to edit and create animation picture objects, which is composed of
[Open],[Save],[Add] ,[Insert],[Delete],[Delete All],[Paste],[Forward],[Backward],[Start/Stop].
9.14.2 Creation of Animation
First of all, you need to prepare several image files with the same specification (width, height) or object to be used
for each frame in the InfoU graphic editor. Generally, if the individual image and object has different sizes, image
distortion may occur.
(1) Add Frame
You can select several images with the [Add] button and add them to the frame or insert the image into the
frame of the relevant sequence with the [Insert] button. To add the InfoU object to the frame, select the [Paste]
button in a clipboard.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-112
(2) Delete and Move Frame
To delete the whole frames, you can use the [Delete All] button. To delete the frame individually, after
selecting the frame, press the [Delete] button. If you want to change the order of animated frames, you can
use the [Forward] and [Backward] button.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-113

(3) Preview
If you select the thumbnail image of the frame, you can see the information on the width, height of the frame
image. After specifying the speed (millisecond), if you select the [Start/Stop] button, you can make preview
the same animation conditions as the real one.
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-114
(4) Save (TIF)
If you select the [Save] button, the below dialog box where you can enter the file name to save will be
displayed. After entering the file name, if you select the ‘Save’ button, the current animation file will be saved
as the input name. For the format to save the graphic file TIF is available only and each frame image is
preserved as it is.
(5) Open (TIF)
If you select the [Open] button, the below dialog box to open the file will be displayed. The available format to
import the graphic file is TIF only. After selecting the file, if you press the ‘Open’ button, the animation frames
will be displayed. Each frame image is preserved as it is and it can be added / edited.

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-115

9.15 Lighting Function
It is the function to batch-control the tags mapped for the selected objects or highlight the objects with the same
mapping ag by providing multi-selection of objects and highlight function in the graphic runtime.
9.15.1 Object Selection Settings in the Graphic Runtime
Set the lighting property as ‘Yes’ in general property window of the object. Then, in the graphic runtime page tab of
[Tools]  [Options], select ‘Show Object Selection’ and ‘Color’. In the graphic runtime, multi-selection for the
specified color is possible. If you set the popup menu mode as ‘User Mode’, you can control tags in a lump.
* Settings in the graphic editor
* Object selection in the graphic runtime
Chapter 9 Graphic Editor
9-116
9.15.2 Object Highlight Settings in the Graphic Runtime
Set the lighting property as ‘Yes’ in general property window of the object. In the color section of the dynamic
property setting window, after setting tag, then, in the graphic runtime page tab of [Tools]  [Options], select
‘Show Object Highlight’ and ‘Color’. It is the function to extract the mapped tag from the color dynamic property of
the object selected by moving the mouse in the graphic runtime and then, to highlight the mapped objects with the
same tag on the screen.
* Settings in the graphic editor

Chapter 9 Graphic Editor

9-117

*Highlight in the graphic runtime

Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime

10-1

Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime
This Graphic Runtime helps to monitor or control real-time or history information through the graphic screen by
using HMI real-time or history information.
10.1 Run
This Graphic Runtime runs if the runtime running starts and the initial screen are created in the Graphic Runtime
settings.
Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime
10-2
10.2 Menu Composition

Upper-level Menu	Menu	Description
File	Default Page	Open the default page set up in the runtime execution environment.
Open	Open existing document.
Close	Close the current document.
Close All	Close all of documents.
Hard Copy	Print the graphic runtime execution screen in a type of hard copy.
Print	Print document.
Print Setup	Set up print options
Exit	End the graphic runtime.
View	Standard Bar	Show or hide color tools.
Status Bar	Show or hide status tools.
Menu	Show or hide main menus.
Zoom	Zoom in/out the page in set up ratios.
Auto Adjust	Automatically adjust the screen size to a certain ratio fit to the current view size.
Navigation	Show or hide navigation tools for screen moving.
Full Screen	Convert the page into a full screen size.
Operatin	User Login	Log in the registered user.
User Logout	Log out the logged in user.
Change Password	Change the log-in password of the registered user.
Alarm Popup	Show or hide the alarm pop-up screen.
Tag View	Show all of the tags registered in DB
Cross Reference View	Show Cross Reference information on the current project.
I/O Station Status	Show the communication status of the currently connected I/O driver.
Graphic Editor	It shows the currently open page in the graphic editor.
Help	Graphic Runtime Information	Show the version information of the graphic runtime.

10.2.1 File
(1) Default Page
Open the default page set up in the runtime execution environment.
(2) Open
This command is used to open one of the existing documents. If this command is made, a dialog box appears
to allow the user to designate a file to open from it.

Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime

10-3

(3) Close
The current document is closed.
(4) Close All
The currently opened documents are all closed.
(5) Hard Copy
Execute the graphic runtime execution screen as hard copy.
(6) Print
It is used when printing document. If this command is executed, “print” conversation box appears to allow the
user to select a print range, number of copies, printer and printer option.
(7) Print Setup
Paper size and orientation for printing documents can be selective.
Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime
10-4
(8) Exit
The graphic editor is ended.
10.2.2 View
(1) Standard Bar
It is used when showing or hiding standard tools. Standard tools are command icons the most frequently
used in the graphic editor. When they are shown, checkmark appears in front of the relevant menu.
(2) Status Bar
It is used when showing or hiding status tools. Status bar provides Help Message. When it is shown,
checkmark appears in front of the relevant menu.
(3) Menu
It is used when showing or hiding main menus. When it is shown, checkmark appears in front of the relevant
menu.
(4) Zoom
It is used when enlarging or reducing the screen in a predefined ratio during the page runtime.
(5) Auto Adjust
It is used when adjusting the view size of the current runtime screen to a certain ratio or setting up to
automatically adjust the horizontal and vertical proportions. When it is shown, checkmark appears in front of
the relevant menu.
(6) Navigation
It is used when showing or hiding navigation tools.
If the current view screen is narrow, this navigation is used to move it to a desired screen area. When it is
shown, checkmark appears in front of the relevant menu.

Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime

10-5

(7) Full Screen
It is used when displaying the current page in a full screen size.
10.2.3 Operation
(1) User Login
It is used when the registered user logs in. If login is done, the user may use the functions assigned to
him/her. If this command is performed, the following InfoU Administrator Login window is displayed.
(2) User Logout
It is used when the logged in user logs out.
(3) Change Password
It is used when changing the registered user’s login password.
Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime
10-6
(4) Alarm Popup
It is used when showing or hiding the alarm pop-up screen.
This menu is activated only when the user logs in.
If this item is not checked, the following alarm pop-up window appears to call the operator’s attention in case
of the occurrence of a new alarm in the system.
If the Cross Reference button on the right is clicked, the Cross Reference Search screen is displayed to move
to the Accident Analysis or Plant screen (See Cross Reference Function)
(5) Tag View
Information on the all of the tags registered in DB and status of tag values are displayed. Once this command
is executed, the tag browser dialog box appears.

Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime

10-7

(6) Cross Reference View
The Cross Reference information on the current project is displayed. Once this command is executed, the
Cross Reference View dialog box appears. For details, see ‘Cross Reference’.
(7) I/0 Station Status
The communication status of the currently connected I/O driver is displayed. Once this command is executed,
the I/O Station View dialog box appears.
(8) Graphic Editor
If you execute the [Graphic Editor], the pages that are opened in the current graphic runtime will move to the
graphic editor. In case the graphic editor does not run, execute it and open the page. If you execute the
[Graphic Editor], you can see the below.
Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime
10-8

Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime

10-9

10.2.4 Help
(1) Graphic Runtime Information
It is used to show the version information of the graphic runtime. If this command is executed, version
information and copyright message appear.
Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime
10-10
10.3 Popup Menu
In the graphic runtime, the popup menu supports three modes; none mode, user mode, general model.
In a user mode, a user can directly edit the popup menu with the graphic editor and batch-control tags set for the
object. A general mode does not allow a user to edit the popup menu but it provides the function to monitor/control
tags set for the object in a variety forms.
10.3.1 Detailed Realtime Trend
It shows the tags for the object in the form of detailed real time trend. You can edit the screen with the graphic
editor.

Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime

10-11

10.3.2 Realtime Trend
It shows the tags for the object in the form of real time trend. You can edit the screen with the graphic editor.
10.3.3 Realtime List Trend
It shows the tags for the object in the form of real time list trend. You can edit the screen with the graphic editor.
Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime
10-12
10.3.4 Alarm Viewer
It shows the alarm viewer screen. You can edit the screen with the graphic editor.
10.3.5 Input Value
It shows the tag control window of tags set for the object. The value input in the analog screen is different from the
value input in the digital screen. You can edit the screen with the graphic editor.
* In the analog tag
*In the digital tag
10.3.6 Cross Reference
It shows the cross reference information of the current project. If you perform this command, the dialog box of the
cross reference view will show up. For more details, refer to ‘Cross Reference’.

Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime

10-13

10.4 Cross Reference Function
The Cross Reference is available to use during the runtime.
This Cross Reference function is available not only on the plant screen or tag view but also the trend or alarm
viewer, and if any alarm occurs during the running, it is possible to move to a relevant screen or trend for analysis
by using this Cross Reference function.
10.4.1 Execution on the Plant Screen
If a graphic object with dynamic properties is clicked with the right button of the mouse (MouseUP), the tag list is
displayed on the pop-up screen used for the dynamic properties of the graphic object.
If the relevant tag is double clicked with the left button of the mouse on the Cross Reference pop-up screen,
Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime
10-14
the Cross Reference screen is shown as seen in the figure below and if an item on the screen is double clicked, it
moves to a point on the relevant screen and it shows the location of the designated graphic object.
10.4.2 Execution on the Tag View
The Cross Reference of a tag can be inquired on the tag browser.
To execute the tag browser, the user may use the menu or tool bar.

Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime

10-15

If a tag list is clicked with the right button of the mouse on the tag browser, a pop-up menu appears and at this
time, if Cross Reference is selected, the Cross Reference screen is displayed.
Also, if the tag detailed view is selected, the detailed screen of the selected tag is displayed as seen in the figure
below. At this time, if Cross Reference button is clicked on the tag detailed screen, the Cross Reference screen is
inquired. Subsequent actions are the same.
10.4.3 Execution on the Alarm Pop-up Screen
In case that a new alarm occurs, the pop-up window as seen in the figure below appears as the top-level screen
and if the ‘Cross Reference’ button is clicked on the right, the Cross Reference search screen is displayed, and
‘Cross Reference’ button is clicked with the mouse, the Cross Reference screen can be inquired.
10.4.4 Execution on the Graphic Object
When a new alarm occurs, the alarm popup window will be displayed on the top screen. If you click the ‘Cross
Reference’ button on the right side, the cross reference search screen will be displayed. You can retrieve the cross
reference by clicking the ‘Cross Reference’ button.
(1) Alarm Viewer
If an alarm item is selected on the alarm viewer graphic object and the right mouse is clicked, the pop-up
menu below is displayed and ‘Cross Reference’ can be selected to display the ‘Cross Reference’ screen.
Chapter 10 Graphic Runtime
10-16
(2) Trend
If a data grid item is selected on the trend graphic object and the right mouse is clicked, the pop-up menu
below is displayed and ‘Cross Reference’ can be selected to display the ‘Cross Reference’ screen.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-1

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
Graphic Objects can provide various functions that can be implemented just with simple settings such as Alarm
Monitoring, Logging Search, Recipe Control and Analog Gauge Display during the real-time running on the graphic
screen since they are provided in a form of finished Active X.
In addition, the Graphic Page can be used by inserting external Active X control as a role of ActiveX’s container.
InfoU Graphic Objects include Alarm Viewer, Trend, List Trend, Recipe Viewer and Gauge Control and it is
planned to add new objects continuously.
11.1 How to Use Graphic Object
11.1.1 Object Insert
(1) To insert an object immediately, select a relevant shortcut icon on the tool bar.
(2) Select on the tool menu of the graphic editor.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-2
(3) Select an object.
1) iuAlarmViewer: Alarm Viewer
2) iuTrendViewer: Trend Viewer
3) iuNumericalTrend: List Trend Viewer
4) iuRecipeViewer: Recipe Viewer
5) iuArcGaugeX: Gauge Control
(4) The selected object is inserted. The default screen is as follows.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-3

11.1.2 Script Use
It is possible to organize a more diverse and simple screen by controlling the method and properties of the object
inserted from the graphic script.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-4
11.2 Alarm Viewer
The Alarm Viewer is an Active X module that searches and displays the occurrence details of alarms and events
from the alarm server and performs various functions such as Filtering Search, Backup Alarm File Search and
Print.
11.2.1 Prerequisite and Environment
Alarm properties can be set up only after the ActiveX module is inserted to the InfoU graphic editor.
Alarm properties such as update cycle, alarm color, alarm/event item can be selected. Since those alarm
properties have been already set up with default values, they act with those default values if the user does not set
up additionally.
The property values are saved and then displayed on the alarm/event monitoring screen when the screen opens
in the runtime environment.
The engineering values are inserted in the following order on the alarm viewer.
If is selected without selecting on the InfoU explorer, those values are immediately inserted.
11.2.2 Screen Configuration
(1) Engineering Screen
The following screen appears after the alarm viewer is inserted.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-5

(2) Runtime Screen
If default trend settings are completed on the engineering screen above and then, the runtime is executed,
the screen shows that data values are changed over time.
The splash screen shows real-time alarms and it is for searching alarms, system alarms and events.
1) Tool Bar
Results of tool bar, which consists of necessary functions for operating the viewer, and search are
presented in text.
2) Status Display
The current search status is displayed in text.
3) Alarm/Event List
Alarm and event details searched from the Alarm Server are displayed in the Grid.
Various colors are displayed to distinguish progress alarm, system alarm, event, recovery alarm and Ack
alarm to let the user easily identify them. Colors are as follows and text and background colors can be
changed.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-6
11.2.3 Real-time Function
(1) Real-time Alarm Search ( )
All of the real-time alarms and events that currently take place are searched.
The number that marks real-time alarms is the value decided from alarm server settings and the number of
process alarms and system alarms is twice of the number of tags and 500 is the default value of events.
Real-time alarms become invisible in the list through Alarm Recovery and Alarm Ack. That is, the alarm list is
updated every second.
(2) History Alarm Search ( )
All of the real-time alarms and events that have taken place are searched
All of the alarms that have taken place are displayed in the chronicle order such as occurred alarms,
recovered alarms, acknowledged alarms and events including invisible alarms in the real-time alarm list.
The storing reference for history alarms is decided from alarm server settings and the default values are set
up to save up to 10,000 process alarms for 3 years, up to 5000 system alarms for 3 years and up to 5000
events for 3 years.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-7

(3) Viewer Settings ( )
Setting values of the current alarm viewer can be changed.
The setting window will be further explained later.
(4) History Inquiry Setting Screen ( )
It is used when the user wants to search history alarms after filtering by conditions.
The history searching setting window will be further explained later.
(5) Alarm retrieval using the history search bar
Through this function, a user can conveniently retrieve history alarms by filtering the start and end time with
the search bar.
(6) Print ( )
The screen is printed.
Select a printer on the Print window and click on Properties button to set up whether to print vertically or
horizontally. Information is outputted from the selected printer.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-8
(7) Individual Alarm Ack ( )
The currently selected alarm is acknowledged. For individual alarm ack, double click after selecting an alarm
to acknowledge it.
For event and history alarms, Ack is not available.
(8) Page Ack ( )
All of the alarms in the current page are acknowledged.
For event and history alarms, Ack is not available.
(9) Save as Excel File ( )
Occurred alarms are saved in Excel files. Press Save button and insert a file name for each alarm to be
saved.
(10) Backup File Import ( )
The alarm backup files saved on the server or other storage devices can be imported and viewed in a list.
Detailed functions on Load Backup File are described later.
(11) Sound Stop ( )
Basically, sound is generated upon the occurrence of alarm, and this function is to stop the sound. If another
new alarm occurs, sound is regenerated. To stop sound for the entire alarms, alarm settings shall be modified
on the engineering program.
(12) Start ( ) and Stop ( )
Buttons to start and stop updating the alarm list in real-time.
(13) Process Analysis
This function is to move the alarm that takes place on the real-time alarm list to the history alarm list for
analyzing. Select an alarm from the real-time alarm list and press the right side of the mouse to display the
following menu. If Process Analysis is selected here, it moves the relevant alarm, which will be highlighted in

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-9

red, to the history alarm list for analyzing.
The following screen shows the result of moving to the history alarm list.
(14) Cross Reference
Cross Reference makes the screen move to the graphic screen to which the selected alarm belongs.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-10
If an alarm is selected in the real-time alarm list and the right side of the mouse is clicked to select Cross
Reference, the following Cross Reference screen is displayed. It is possible to move to the place the user
wants to go.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-11

11.2.4 Settings
If the right side of the mouse is clicked on Alarm Viewer ocx and the ‘Properties’ menu is selected, the setting
window appears. The same setting screen is used for the engineering screen and the run-time screen. In addition,
once property values are saved on the engineering screen, those values will be continuously valid however, if
those property values are changed on the runtime screen, the changed values are applied only to the runtime
screen. The changed values are cancelled if the runtime stops and the property values set up on the engineering
screen are applied.
(1) Filtering Setting Items
Application range of Alarm viewer can be configured by filtering setting items such as Select Alarm and
Group Filtering.
1) Select Alarm
You can set the alarm type to be displayed in the alarm viewer.
2) Display Limit
You can set the maximum number of list alarms to be displayed in the alarm viewer.
3) Group Filtering
You can determine whether applying the group filtering and which group you will view. When selecting the
group filtering, the only relevant group will be applied to the alarm viewer and displayed. If you do not
select the group filtering, it will be applied to the whole alarm tags and displayed.
4) Detail String Flitering
In the alarm viewer, it is the function to filter detailed characters for the alarm group name. “;” is the
separator in word unit and “+” is the separator in string unit. For example, if you type “UT;FA+Grp” on the
above screen and press the detailed character filtering button, AlmGrp_UT and the group name of
AlmGrp_FA will be automatically set in the alarm group name.
5) Tag History Filtering
Tag history filtering is applied to tag names generated in the history retrieval setting window of the graphic
runtime and the only corresponding alarm is displayed. “;” is the separator in word unit and “+” is the
separator in string unit.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-12
(2) Alarm Display Item
It is the function to choose alarm items that you want to see in the alarm viewer. There are 18 alarm items;
tag name(event), occurrence time, alarm group(occurrence area), tag type, alarm(event) type, grade, current
value(status), previous value(status), message, description, recovery time, recognizing user, recognizing time,
unit, user definition 1, user definition 2, user definition 3, user definition 4. The number next to the item is the
column size of the item in the alarm viewer and it can be changeable. Double-click the item and just input the
desired size.
1) >> Button
Move the marked item from the entire list to the selected list.
2) << Button
Move the unmarked item from the entire list to the selected list.
3) -> Button
Move from the entire list to the selected list.
4) <- Button
Move from the selected list to the entire list.
5) TOP Button
Move the marked location on the selected column from the selected list to the top left.
6) ▲ Button
Move the marked location on the selected column from the selected list to the next cell on the left side.
7) ▼ Button
Move the marked location on the selected column from the selected list to the next cell on the right side.
8) BT Button
Move the marked location on the selected column from the selected list to the end on the right side.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-13

(3) General
1) Real-Time Interval
Enter a time to update the viewer. Alarms are searched on the relevant severs at the entered time
and a list is displayed.
2) Scroll
Select whether to scroll or not on the viewer.
3) Show Toolbar
Set ‘Show/Hide toolbar’ of the viewer.
4) Show Searchbar
Set ‘Show/Hide history search bar’ of the viewer.
5) Show Statebar
Set ‘Show/Hide status bar’ of the viewer.
6) Mini Alarm
Select whether to use mini alarms.
If mini alarms are used, tool bars or scroll do not exist.
7) Color
Select each background color and text color of Process Alarm, System Alarm, Event, Recovery
Alarm and Ack Alarm.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-14
(4) Font
Decide Font, Style and Size to be displayed on the alarm viewer list.
11.2.5 Filtering
As a function used when the user wants filter history alarms with several conditions and searches only the history
alarms that meet those conditions, it proceeds filtering as follows.
(1) Select items to filter and search with the input condition ‘And’ condition.
(2) The alarms that meet the search conditions are displayed on the alarm list.
(3) The timer stops automatically.
(4) To return to the real-time search, click on Real-Time Alarm Search button.
The Filtering Search Screen is as following

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-15

1) Search Alarm Type/Event
Select one among Process Alarm, System Alarm and Event to search.
2) Occurrence Time (From)
Only the alarms that have occurred since the occurrence time can be searched.
3) Occurrence Time (To)
Only the alarms that had occurred before the occurrence time can be searched.
4) Tag Name
Designate the tag name to search. Click on Name button to display the tag browser screen to select a tag
from it.
5) Tag/Alarm Type
Select either Analog Tag or Digital Tag and then, select an alarm kind that fits to it to search. If Digital Tag
is selected, the following screen appears.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-16
6) Select an alarm group
Select an alarm group to search.
7) Alarm Level
Only the alarms higher than the entered alarm level are searched. Levels 1 through 99 are available.
8) Ack Level
Only the alarms higher than the entered tag priority are searched. Levels 1 through 99 are available.
11.2.6 Other Functions
(1) Alarm Ack
As a function to acknowledge (Ack) the occurred alarm, it is available to acknowledge not only by alarm but
also by page unit.
For individual alarm Ack, double click after selecting an alarm or press [Ack] button on the tool bar. It is also
available to press the right button of the mouse. For Event and History Alarm, Ack is not available.
For Page Ack, press [Page Ack] button on the tool bar to acknowledge all of the alarms seen in the current
page.
(2) Process Analysis
This function is to move the alarm that takes place on the real-time alarm list to the history alarm list for
analyzing. Process Analysis is useful when viewing the alarms before and after the occurred alarm in the
real-time.
Select an alarm on the real-time alarm list and press the right side of the mouse to display the following menu.
Select Process Analysis from the menu to move the relevant alarm to the history alarm list for analyzing.
Once moved to the history alarm list, the selected alarm is highlighted in red for convenient identification.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-17

The following screen shows the result of moving to the history alarm list.
1) Cross Reference
This function is to make the screen move to the graphic screen to which the selected alarm belongs.
This function helps to immediately identify at which object the current alarm takes place and analyze the
current situation by moving to the screen.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-18
Select an alarm on the real-time alarm list and press the right side of the mouse to display the following
menu. Select Cross Reference from the menu to display the following Cross Reference screen. If the user
selects one among the screens to which the occurred alarm belongs, it moves to the relevant screen.
Select a screen and double click the mouse to move to the screen.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-19

2) Backup Alarm Import
If Backup Alarm Import button is selected, the following screen appears. The list shows backup files on
the saving path. If a list is selected and Ok button is pressed, a list of the alarms in the backup files is
displayed.
11.2.7 How to Use Script
(1) Function List

Function Name	Function Declaration
AckPageAlarm	long AckPageAlarm(void)
AckRecentAlarm	long AckRecentAlarm(void)
AckSelectAlarm	long AckSelectAlarm(void)
DisplayHistoryAlarm	long DisplayHistoryAlarm(void)
DisplayRealAlarm	long DisplayRealAlarm(void)
ExportToExcel	long ExportToExcel(void)
LoadPeriodSearch	void LoadPeriodSearch(LPCTSTR strFrom, LPCTSTR strTo)
SetAlarmGroupList	void SetAlarmGroupList(LPCTSTR strGroupList)
SetAlarmList	long SetAlarmList(long alarmKind, LPCTSTR str)
SetDetailStringFiltering	void SetDetailStringFiltering(LPCTSTR strGroupList)
SetHistoryList	long SetHistoryList(long alarmKind, LPCTSTR str)
SetFilteringOption	long SetFilteringOption(ushort almType, LPCTSTR startTime, LPCTSTR endTime, LPCTSTR tagName, short tagType, short almKind, short almOccurType, short almGrade, short ackGrade, LPCTSTR almGroup)
SetTagHistoryFiltering	void SetTagHistoryFiltering(LPCTSTR strTagFilter)
ShowConfigDlg	void ShowConfigDlg(void)
ShowFilteringDlg	long ShowFilteringDlg(void)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-20

StartSound	long StartSound(void)
StopAlarm	long StopAlarm(long bFlag)
StopSound	long StopSound(void)
PrintList	long PrintList(void)

(2) Function Description

AckPageAlarm Function
Description	It is used when the user wants to acknowledge the entire alarms seen on the current page of the alarm viewer.
Syntax	long AckPageAlarm(void)
Reference	To acknowledge the entire alarms on the page AckPageAlarm ()

AckRecentAlarm Function
Description	It is used to recognize the currently visible latest alarm in the alarm viewer.
Syntax	long AckRecentAlarm(void)

AckSelectAlarm Function
Description	It is used to recognize the currently selected alarm in the alarm viewer.
Reference	long AckSelectAlarm(void)

DisplayHistoryAlarm Function
Description	It is used to display history alarms in the alarm viewer.
Syntax	long DisplayHistoryAlarm(void)

DisplayRealAlarm Function
Description	It is used to display real time alarms in the alarm viewer.
Syntax	long DisplayRealAlarm(void)

ExportToExcel Function
Description	It is used when the user wants to export the alarms taken place on the alarm viewer to Excel.
Syntax	long ExportToExcel(void)
Reference	To export the occurred alarms to Excel ExportToExcel ()

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-21

LoadPeriodSearch Function
Description	It is used to retrieve the section with the start time and end time in the alarm viewer.
Syntax	void LoadPeriodSearch(LPCTSTR strFrom, LPCTSTR strTo) strFrom: Search from start time strTo: Search to end time

SetAlarmGroupList Function
Description	This function is to allow the user to search only the alarm groups he/she wants and make them appear on the relevant list. With this function, the user can see the list by alarm groups in the early stages.
Syntax	void SetAlarmGroupList(LPCTSTR strGroupList) strGroupList: Insert the alarm groups in a form of string values. Be careful about distinguishing one alarm group from the other with “;” and not forgetting to insert “;” at the end.
Reference	To see AlarmGroup_1 and AlarmGroup_2 SetAlarmGroupList (“AlarmGroup_1;AlarmGroup_2;”)

SetAlarmList Function
Description	This function is to allow the user to select an alarm kind to make it appear on the relevant list. With this function, the user can see the real-time alarm list by kinds in the early stages.
Syntax	long SetAlarmList(long alarmKind, LPCTSTR str) alarmKind: Enter an alarm kind. Insert the following values according to alarm kinds. 0 - All 1 - Process Alarm 2 - System Alarm 3 - Process Alarm + System Alarm 4 - Event 5 - Process Alarm + Event 6 - System Alarm + Event str: enter empty value (“”).
Reference	To see a process alarm list SetAlarmList(1, “”)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-22

SetDetailStringFiltering Function
Description	It is the function to apply the string filtering value for the desired alarm groups only of the alarm viewer and retrieve and display them on the list.
Syntax	void SetDetailStringFiltering(LPCTSTR strGroupList) strGroupList: Input the string filtering value of the alarm group name to retrieve. “;” is the separator in word unit and “+” is the separator in string unit.
Reference	When you want to view the alarm groups called Group_1 and Group_2 with the string. SetAlarmGroupList (“Group_1;Group_2;”)

SetHistoryList Function
Description	This function is to allow the user to select an alarm kind to make it appear on the relevant list. With this function, the user can see the history alarm list by kinds in the early stages.
Syntax	long SetHistoryList(long kind, LPCTSTR str) kind: Enter an alarm kind. Insert the following values according to alarm kinds. 0 - All 1 - Process Alarm 2 - System Alarm 3 - Process Alarm + System Alarm 4 - Event 5 - Process Alarm + Event 6 - System Alarm + Event Str: enter empty value (“”).
Reference	To see a process alarm list out of history alarm lists SetHistoryList(1, “”)

SetFilteringOption Function
Description	This function is to filter and see alarms by kind or group with several filtering options. This function applies only to history alarms. It does not apply to real-time alarms.
Syntax	long SetFilteringOption(ushort almType, LPCTSTR startTime, LPCTSTR endTime, LPCTSTR tagName, short tagType, short almKind, short almOccurType, short almGrade, short ackGrade, LPCTSTR almGroup) almType: Enter an alarm kind. Insert the following values according to alarm kinds. 0 - All 1 - Process Alarm 2 - System Alarm

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-23

3 - Process Alarm + System Alarm
4 - Event
5 - Process Alarm + Event
6 - System Alarm + Event
startTime: Write a start time to search. Write a string value in a form of “2007/08/17.”
Enter empty value (“”) if the user wants to search regardless of the start time.
endTime: Write an end time to search. Write a string value in a form of “2007/08/17.”
Enter empty value (“”) if the user wants to search until now.
tagName: Write a tag name to search. Enter empty value (“”) to search the entire tags.
tagType: Enter a tag type. Enter 1 for analog tags and 2 for digital tags.
almKind: Enter 0.
almOccurType: A parameter to select one from occurrence, recovery or Ack of alarm and search
Enter the following value.
1 - Occurrence / Recovery / Ack
2 - Occurrence / Recovery
3 - Occurrence / Ack
4 - Occurrence
5 - Recovery / Ack
6 - Recovery
7 - Ack
almGrade: Enter an alarm grade to search.
ackGrade: Enter an ack grade to search.
almGroup: Enter an alarm group to search.
If the user wants to search multiple groups, he/she needs to distinguish one group from the other
with “;”.
If empty value or 0 is entered for each parameter, searching is conducted regardless of the
conditions of the relevant parameter.

Reference

To search the recovered alarms and ack alarms among the alarms that took place in
Alarm_Group1 from August 15 through 17, 2007
SetFilteringOption (0, “2007/08/15”, “2007/08/17”, “”, 0, 0, 5, 0, 0, “Alarm_Group1”)

SetTagHistoryFiltering Function
Description	It is the function to apply the string filtering value for the desired history tags of the alarm viewer and retrieve and display them on the list.
Syntax	void SetTagHistoryFiltering(LPCTSTR strTagFilter); strTagFilter: Input the string filtering value of the tag history to retrieve. “;” is the separator in word unit and “+” is the separator in string unit.
Reference	When you want to view the history alarm tag called Tag_1 and Tag_2 with the string. SetAlarmGroupList (“Tag_1;Tag_2;”)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-24

ShowConfigDlg Function
Description	The configuration setting window of the alarm viewer is shown.
Syntax	void ShowConfigDlg(void)
Reference	To show the configuration setting window ShowConfigDlg()

ShowFilteringDlg Function
Description	The filtering search window of the alarm viewer is shown.
Syntax	long ShowFilteringDlg(void)
Reference	To show the filtering search window ShowFilteringDlg ()

StartSound Function
Description	It is used to generate the sound when an alarm occurs.
Syntax	long StartSound(void)
Reference	When you want to turn on the alarm sound StartSound ()

StopAlarm Function
Description	It is used when stopping for a while or restarting the alarm viewer.
Syntax	long StopAlarm(long bFlag) bFlag: – To stop the alarm: True – To start the alarm: False
Reference	To stop the alarm StopAlarm(True) To restart the alarm StopAlarm(False)

StopSound Function
Description	It is used when stopping alarm sound.
Syntax	long StopSound(void)
Reference	To stop alarm sound StopSound ()

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-25

PrintList Function
Description	It is used when printing the alarms that take place on the alarm viewer.
Syntax	long PrintList(void)
Reference	To print the occurred alarms PrintList ()

11.3 Trend Viewer
This Trend Viewer is an Active X module that displays charts monitoring online and logging data on the tags
registered in the Trend.
As a screen to monitor changes in tag values over time, this Trend Viewer is an Active X module that displays
online tag data graphs as well as logging data graphs stored in the logging server.
In addition, this Trend can be used in analyzing changes in logging data.
11.3.1 Prerequisite and Environment
Trend properties can be set up only after the ActiveX module is inserted to the InfoU graphic editor.
Channel assignment, tag assignment, X axis/Y axis value input and other tag properties to be monitored are
designated in advance as Trend properties
Channels or tags are not basically assigned to the trend status inserted in the graphic editor. It is essential to
display the Property Window before setting up the property values needed to run the Trend.
After the property values are saved, the Trend Monitoring Screen appears upon the opening of the screen under
the Run time environment.
The engineering values are entered in the following order on the Trend viewer.
If is selected from the tools, immediate inserting can be performed.
11.3.2 Screen Configuration
(1) Engineering Screen
If Trend is inserted and a tag to be monitored is selected and then settings are all completed, the following
screen appears. The screen in this figure shows that three tags are selected and gradation effect is applied.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-26
(2) Runtime Screen
If default trend settings are completed on the engineering screen above and then, the runtime is executed,
the screen shows that data values are changed over time.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-27

11.3.3 Settings
If the right side of the mouse is clicked on the Trend and the ‘Active X Properties’ menu is selected, the setting
window appears.
The same setting screen is used for the engineering screen and the runtime screen. But, the runtime screen does
not have Grid Settings and Toolbar Selection functions.
In addition, once property values are saved on the engineering screen, those values will be continuously valid
however, if those property values are changed on the runtime screen, the changed values are applied only to the
runtime screen. The changed values are cancelled if the runtime stops and the property values set up on the
engineering screen are applied.
(1) General
The Engineering Screen and the Runtime Screen have the same general functions.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-28
1) Title
Designate a title of the trend.
2) Show Top Toolbox/Show Lower Toolbox
Set up whether to display Trend Toolbox on the top or the bottom during the running. Both can not be
selected at the same time and it is allowed neither of them is selected. ‘Show Lower Toolbox’ has been
selected as the default value.
3) Show Data Grid
Select whether to show or hide data grid during the running. The following figure shows the screen when
‘Show Data Grid’ is not selected. ‘Show Data Grid’ has not been selected as the default value.
a. Multiple Trend
Select ‘Multiple Trend.’

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-29

In general trends, the axis that takes the lowest value among the minimum values as the min value
and the highest value among the maximum values as the max value is commonly used. However, if
‘Multiple Trend’ is selected, any axis can be used individually.
A general trend screen is as following.
A Multiple Trend screen that selects x-axis is as following.
A Multiple Trend screen that selects y-axis is as following.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-30
Multiple trends can use Axis Group.
Axis Group is a function to re-divide several channels into desired groups to view them.
It is used as following.
- Check ‘Use Axis Group.
- Input the number and press ‘Apply’ button.
- Once it moves to ‘Axis Group’ tap upon the ‘Apply’ button, Axis Groups as much as the inputted
number are activated. Input the min value and max value here.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-31

If it is set up that Channel 1 and 2 belong to Axis Group 1 and Channel 3 belongs to Axis 2, the
following screen appears.
4) Refresh Cycle
Designate a refresh cycle. One second has been set up as the default value.
5) Color
Select a background color and set up ‘Apply Gradient.’ If ‘Apply Gradient’ is selected,
the background color is not applied. In addition, it needs to set up ‘Start Color’ and 'End Color’.
6) Border Style
Select a Border Style for the relevant trend.
7) Trend Type
Select either YT Trend or XY Trend.
If YT Trend is selected, x axis indicates time and Y axis shows tag values while if XY Trend is
selected, both X and Y axis consist of tag values.
(2) Channel
The Engineering Screen and the Runtime Screen have the same Channel functions.
Up to 20 channels are provided in the Trend. There is at least one channel and it is available to designate
Tag Kind, Title, Color, Marker, Tag, Line Style and Connection for each channel.
If one channel is an online tag, the rest channels have to be online tags. Likely, if one channel is a logging tag,
the rest channels have to be logging tags.
Also, if any logging data needs to be saved or searched, the logging tag should be selected and used. Online
tags do not provide the logging function.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-32
1) Channel Add/Delete
A channel is added or deleted. At least one or more than one but not more than 20 channels can be
selected.
2) Tag Kind
Select either Logging Tag or Online Tag.
3) Title
Designate a title of the channel.
4) Line Width
Select a Line Width of the channel. Numbers O through 4 are available.
5) Color
Decide color of the channel.
6) Marker
As a point to indicate the tag value of the relevant channel, the following shapes are available.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-33

7) Tag Select
Assign a tag to the channel. One tag can be assigned to one channel.
If a logging tag is selected, the logging tag browser where the associated logging group is set up is called
while the online tag browser is called for an online tag.
Be cautious that logging data can be searched only when a logging tag is selected.
If a tag is selected, the tag’s minimum value and maximum values are displayed. These min/max values
apply to Y-axis values for Y axis settings.
* ’Logging Tag Select’ screen
* ‘Online Tag Select’ screen
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-34
8) Line Style
Select one among Solid, Dash and Dot.
9) Connection
Select one among Straight Line, Soft Line and Staircase Type.
10) Display
This function becomes active only when a statistics tag is selected. For analog tags, select one value
among current value, min value, max value, average value, sum and sample and for digital tags, select
one value among current value, On count, On Time, Total count and sample. If the tag is not a statistics
tag, it becomes inactive.
* Analog Tag
* Digital Tag

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-35

(3) X Axis
The Engineering Screen and the Runtime Screen have the same X axis functions.
If XY Trend is selected on the General tap, setting items for YT Trend become inactive while those for XY
Trend become inactive if YT Trend is selected.
1) Common
a. Show X Axis
Decide whether to show or hide X Axis.
b. Label Mark
Select whether to mark labels on X axis or decide a title for identification.
c. Title
Decide whether to mark a title on X axis.
2) YT Trend
a. Time Display
Decide one among various Time Display types.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-36
b. Direction
Select either ‘Left->Right’ or ‘Right->Left.
c. Range (Span)
Save a range of X-axis values. Input a value directly or select one from the range window.
Input time and the unit is second.
3) Shift Settings
The Shift function refers to moving the current value to the left as much as the shift setting value of x axis
if the graph goes to the end. If the user wants this function, he/she needs to set up Shift and press ‘Apply’
button. Available values are from 0 through 100 %. Shift has not been set up as the default value and it
starts after drawing a range of X axis.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-37

4) History retrieval
In the case of Trend, basically, history retrieval is done at a distance of regular time. When selecting the
current time, history retrieval will be performed based on the current time.
5) XY Trend
a. Minimum/Maximum
Specify the min/max value of the relevant tag to be marked on X-axis. Only one tag can be on X axis.
b. Tag Select
Assign a tag to the channel. If a logging tag is selected, the logging tag browser where the associated
logging group is set up is called while the online tag browser is called for an online tag. Logging data
can be searched only when a logging tag is selected.
* ’Logging Tag Select’ screen
* ‘Online Tag Select’ screen
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-38
(4) Y Axis
The Engineering Screen and the Runtime Screen have the same Y axis functions.
1) Channel
Show the channels that are assigned to Y axis.
2) Display
Select either show/hide Y axis.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-39

3) DB Max/Min Value
DB Max/Min Value is used instead of user’s max/min value.
4) Auto scale
For Y-axis’s min./max. value of each channel, use the min./max. value of the currently occurring channel.
5) Ratio (%)
Display Y axis value in Ratio not in tag value. If Display in Ratio is selected for even one Y axis, Y axis is
displayed in percentage unless Multi Trend has selected. Also, if this item is selected, moving with the
mouse becomes impossible along Y axis.
6) Alarm Limit Value
If this item is selected, HH value and LL value of tag alarm are drawn in lines and Alarm Limit
Value is displayed.
HH value and LL value are not visible.
7) Use of typical value
It sets the min./max. value of a specific channel as the typical axis and displays them. It is not applied to
the multi trend.
8) Direction
Select either ‘Down->Up’ or ‘Up->Down’.
9) Minimum/Maximum
Set up max/min value needed to show Y axis. Tag’s max/min value has been set up as the default value.
10) Use Tag Information
Show tag information of the channel, which has been set up on Channel tap. Tag name and tag’s
max/min value are displayed.
11) Label Display
Select whether to display label and how to mark the title.
12) Grid Count
Grid Count is the number of lines for Y axis values visible on the screen. This value is adjusted to display
max/min value. But, this value may not be adjusted in case that Y axis is too narrow to display channels.
(5) Axis Group
This tap becomes active when ‘Multi Trend’ is selected on the General tap and Axis Group is applied.
Input the min/max value and title if necessary for each Axis Group.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-40
(6) Grid
This Grid setting function is only available on the Engineering Screen. It is not displayed on the Runtime
Screen. It consists of General for color settings and Tag Grid for tag grid item and order settings.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-41

1) General
a. Grid Color
Select a color of grid border.
b. X Axis Grid
Select Line Width and Grid Color for X Axis Grid.
c. Y Axis Grid
Select Line Width and Grid Color for Y Axis Grid.
2) Tag Grid
Select alarm items to display on the viewer.
‘Select Items’ include Pen, Tag Name, Acquisition Cycle, Acquisition Time, Current Value, Minimum,
Maximum, Zero, Span, Tag Kind, Status and Tag Description.
Numbers next to items indicate the column size of each item on the Trend Viewer and they are
changeable. Double click on the item to change and insert a new size.
a. >> Button
Move the marked item from the entire list to the selected list.
b. << Button
Move the unmarked item from the entire list to the selected list.
c. -> Button
Move from the entire list to the selected list.
d. <- Button
Move from the selected list to the entire list.
e. TOP Button
Move the marked location on the selected column from the selected list to the top left.
f. ▲ Button
Move the marked location on the selected column from the selected list to the next cell on the left side.
g. ▼ Button
Move the marked location on the selected column from the selected list to the next cell on the right
side.
h. BT Button
Move the marked location on the selected column from the selected list to the end on the right side.
(7) Toolbar
Select Toolbar (menus).
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-42
1) Start
This is a common function that applies to both online trends and logging trends,
Once trend monitoring starts, data is renewed every second and 5 minutes is set as the time for X axis.
To view the current screen again during the logging search, press this button and the current time screen
is displayed.
This Start button can not be selected as the default value.
2) Stop
Trend Monitoring stops. This function is available only for logging trends. That is, this function exists only
when logging tags are selected and online trends do not have this function.
This Stop button can not be selected as the default value like the Start button.
3) Show Setting Window
Setting values of the current trend can be changed. This is a common function that applies to both online
trends and logging trends.
This Setting Window has been described before.
4) Zoom-in
The current trend screen is enlarged twice to search data. Zoom-in makes both of X axis and Y axis
enlarged twice. This is a common function that applies to both online trends and logging trends.
5) Zoom-out
The current trend screen is reduced twice to search data. Zoom-in makes both of X axis and Y axis
reduced twice. This is a common function that applies to both online trends and logging trends.
6) 1:1 Zoom
This function is used to return the enlarged or reduced trend screen into its original size -100% screen.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-43

This is a common function that applies to both online trends and logging trends.
7) Partial Zoom
The trend screen is partly zoomed in/out to search data. A part of the trend screen is dragged with the
mouse and it becomes enlarged as soon as the mouse is released. At this time, both X axis and Y axis
are enlarged.
This is a common function that applies to both online trends and logging trends.
8) Save as Excel File
Convert and save the current trend being monitored into a csv file.
The csv file can be opened in Excel and it can be viewed as normal text.
9) Print
Print the current trend being monitored. In printing, the background screen is changed in white color.
10) Load properties
It shows the saved trend property setting file in the form of a list. If you select the desired property
settings, they will be applied to the current trend. For more details, refer to ‘Load/Save Properties’.
11) Marker
If Marker button is pressed, a yellow marker line is displayed and values of channels are also listed on the
right screen. If the right button of the mouse is pressed on the marker, the channel value can be seen in a
tool tip type. To see another channel value, select it on the right screen. At this time, the marker color is
the same with the channel color.
To prevent the bar appeared on the screen from re-appearing, click on Marker button one more time. This
is a common function that applies to both online trends and logging trends.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-44
12) Logging Trend (Logging Time Range)
Input logging conditions (period and sampling conditions) to search past data. The logging search will be
further explained later. This function is available only for logging trends.
13) 1 Hour Logging
View 1 hour logging data including the current time. For example, if it is 10:20, the logging data between
10 and 11o’clock are viewed. This function is available only for logging trends.
14) 2 Hour Logging
View logging data in the time range where the current time belongs to by dividing 24 hours into 0~2
o’clock, 2~4 o’clock, 4~6 o’clock, 20~22 o’clock and 22~midnight. For example, if it is 10:20, the logging
data between 10 o’clock and noon are viewed. This function is available only for logging trends.
15) 3 Hour Logging
View logging data in the time range where the current time belongs to by dividing 24 hours into 0~3
o’clock, 3~6o’clock, 6~9o’clock,18~21 o’clock and 21~midnight. For example, if it is 10:20, the logging
data between 9 o’clock and noon are viewed. This function is available only for logging trends.
16) 6 Hour Logging
View logging data in the time range where the current time belongs to by dividing 24 hours into 0~6
o’clock, 6~12o’clock, 12~18o’clock and 18~midnight For example, if it is 10:20, the logging data between
6 o’clock and noon are viewed. This function is available only for logging trends.
17) 12 Hour Logging
View logging data in the time range where the current time belongs to by dividing 24 hours into 0~noon
and noon~ midnight. For example, if it is 10:20, the logging data between 0 o’clock and noon are viewed.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-45

This function is available only for logging trends.
18) 1 Day Logging
View today’s logging data. This function is available only for logging trends.
19) 1 Week Logging
View this week’s logging data. The period is from Monday through the midnight of Sunday. This function
is available only for logging trends.
20) 1 Month Logging
View this month’s logging data This function is available only for logging trends.
21) Load Backup File
The trend backup files saved on the server or other storage devices can be imported and viewed in a list.
Detailed functions on Load Backup File are described later.
11.3.4 Logging Search
This is a function to select logging search conditions. The following Logging Period Search window is displayed
upon the click on Logging Search button.
The saved section indicates the start and end time of saving the whole data. You can determine the start and end
time referring to this. Trend can express the data values up to 3600 and if it exceeds the limit, the data will be
displayed through the automatic sampling.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-46
※ Difference between logging search and online search
For online search, the mouse can be moved along the axis. Y axis can be selected with the mouse and moving is
available with mouse wheel, mouse drag or keyboard arrow. For logging search, any axis can not be moved and
only data in the search range are displayed.
11.3.5 Others
(1) Save as Excel File
‘Save as Excel File’ is a function to save data on the current screen in a csv files.
(2) Print
The current trend screen is printed. Basically, the screen is changed from black to white when printing.
(3) Properties Load/Save
You can import and save the properties applied to the trend in the format of a special file. They can be
applied to the graphic editor/runtime. You can also individually import the saved file using the script.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-47

1) Property Load
In the Property Settings window, if you click the toolbar button of ‘Property Load’ or ‘Import Settings’, the
saved trend property file will be displayed in the format of a list as below. If a user selects the desired
property, it will be applied to the trend.
11.3.6 How to Use Script
(1) Function List

Function Name	Function Declaration
AddChannel_Archive	long AddChannel_Archive(long channelNo, LPCTSTR modelName, LPCTSTR tagName, double minValY, double maxValY)
AddChannel_ArchiveEx	long AddChannel_ArchiveEx(long channelNo, BSTR modelName, BSTR tagName, double minValY, double maxValY, long LineWidth,

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-48

long LineColor, long LineStyle, long LineConnection, BSTR Labels)
AddChannel_RealTime	long AddChannel_RealTime(long channelNo, LPCTSTR tagName, double minValY, double maxValY)
AddChannel_RealTimeEx	long AddChannel_RealTimeEx(long channelNo, BSTR tagName, double minValY, double maxValY, long LineWidth, long LineColor, long LineStyle, long LineConnection, BSTR Labels)
AddTrendChannel	long AddTrendChannel(LPCTSTR dataSource, long channelNo, long modelID, LPCTSTR modelName, long tagID, LPCTSTR tagName, long minValueY, long maxValueY)
ApplyTrend	void ApplyTrend(void)
ApplyProperty	long ApplyProperty(VARIANT_BOOL bFlag)
DeleteTrendChannel	long DeleteTrendChannel(LPCTSTR channelStr, long channelNo)
GoFirstTrend	long GoFirstTrend(void)
GoLastTrend	long GoLastTrend(void)
GoNextTrend	long GoNextTrend(void)
GoPreviousTrend	long GoPreviousTrend(void)
Loadhistory12h	void Loadhistory12h (void)
Loadhistory1day	void Loadhistory1day (void)
Loadhistory1h	void Loadhistory1h (void)
Loadhistory1month	void Loadhistory1month (void)
Loadhistory1week	void Loadhistory1week (void)
Loadhistory2h	void Loadhistory2h (void)
Loadhistory3h	void Loadhistory3h (void)
Loadhistory6h	void Loadhistory6h (void)
LoadHistoryTrend	void LoadHistoryTrend(long year, long month, long week, long day, long hour, BOOL bFlag)
LoadPeriodDataStartTrend	void LoadPeriodDataStartTrend(BSTR strFrom, BSTR strTo)
LoadPeriodTrend	long LoadPeriodTrend(long days, BOOL bFlag)
LoadProperty	void LoadProperty(BSTR FileName)
Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend	long Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend(long type, long days, VARIANT_BOOL bFlag)
LoadPeriodDataTrend	long LoadPeriodDataTrend(LPCTSTR strFrom, LPCTSTR strTo, long bSample, LPCTSTR bFlag)
PauseTrend	void PauseTrend(void)
PrintTrend	void PrintTrend(void)
SaveProperty	void SaveProperty(BSTR FileName)
SetAlarmLimit	long SetAlarmLimit(long chanNo, VARIANT_BOOL bFlag, BSTR reserved)
SetAutoScale	long SetAutoScale(long chanNo, VARIANT_BOOL bFlag, BSTR reserved)
SetAxisXStartSpan	void SetAxisXStartSpan(VARIANT_BOOL bStartFromNowTime, long XSpan)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-49

SetChannelMinMax	long SetChannelMinMax(long channelNo, double minValue,double maxValue)
SetTrendGridVisible	long SetTrendGridVisible(long isVisible)
SettSaveasexcel	void SettSaveasexcel(void)
SetZoom100	void SetZoom100 (void)
SetZoomIn	void SetZoomIn(void)
SetZoomOut	void SetZoomOut (void)
SetZoomRect	void SetZoomRect (void)
ShowMarkerValue	long ShowMarkerValue(void)
ShowSettingLoad	void ShowSettingLoad(void);
ShowTrendProperty	void ShowTrendProperty(void)
StartTrend	void StartTrend(void)

(2) Function Description

AddChannel_Archive Function
Description	This function is to add a channel in a logging group name or a tag name to the trend if the tag is a logging trend.
Syntax	long AddChannel_Archive(long channelNo, LPCTSTR modelName, LPCTSTR tagName, double minValY, double maxValY) channelNo: Enter LONG-type numbers as the number of the channel to be added. modelName: Enter the logging group name of the logging tag to be added. This is a string value. tagName: Enter the name of the logging tag to be added. This is a string value. minValY: Enter DOUBLE-type numbers as the tag’s minimum value. maxValY: Enter DOUBLE-type numbers as the tag’s maximum value. If minValY and maxValY is -999, the minimum value and maximum value of DB will be automatically set; if minValY and maxValY is 0, it will be set as an automatic scale.
Reference	To add three channels to the Trend AddChannel_Archive(1, “SCADA_SEC”, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VRS”, 0, 400) AddChannel_Archive(2, “SCADA_SEC”, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VST”, 0, 400) AddChannel_Archive(3, “SCADA_SEC”, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VTR”, 0, 400)

AddChannel_ArchiveEx Function
Description	The history trend is the function to add channels to the trend with the model name and tag name.
Syntax	long AddChannel_ArchiveEx(long channelNo, LPCTSTR modelName, LPCTSTR tagName, double minValY, double maxValY, long LineWidth, long LineColor, long LineStyle, long LineConnection, BSTR Labels) channelNo: Enter the number of LONG type for the channel No. to add.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-50

modelName: Enter the model name of the archive tag to add. It is the string value.
tagName: Enter the tag name of the archive tag to add. It is the string value.
minValY: Enter the number of DOUBLE type for the tag’s minimum value.
maxValY: Enter the number of DOUBLE type for the tag’s maximum value.
LineWidth: Enter the number of LONG type for the line thickness of the channel to add.
LineColor: Enter the number of LONG type for the line color of the channel to add.
LineStyle: Enter the number of LONG type for the line style of the channel to add.
LineConnection: Enter the number of LONG type for the line connection style of the channel
to add.
If minValY and maxValY is -999, the minimum value and maximum value of DB will be
automatically set; if minValY and maxValY is 0, it will be set as an automatic scale.

Reference

To add three channels to the trend
AddChannel_ArchiveEx(1, “SCADA_SEC”, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VRS”, 0, 400, 2, RGB(255,0,0),
0, 1)
AddChannel_ArchiveEx(2, “SCADA_SEC”, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VST”, 0, 400, 400 ,2,
RGB(255,255,0), 0, 1)
AddChannel_ArchiveEx(3, “SCADA_SEC”, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VTR”, 0, 400, 400, 2,
RGB(0,0,0), 0, 1)

AddChannel_RealTime Function
Description	This function is to add a channel in a tag name to the trend if the trend is an online tag. But, in most cases, online monitoring is possible with logging tags, therefore, AddChannel_Archive is more widely used than this function.
Syntax	long AddChannel_RealTime(long channelNo, BSTR tagName, double minValY, double maxValY) channelNo: Enter LONG-type numbers as the number of the channel to be added. tagName: Enter the name of the online tag to be added. This is a string value. minValY: Enter DOUBLE-type numbers as the tag’s minimum value. maxValY: Enter DOUBLE-type numbers as the tag’s maximum value. If minValY and maxValY is -999, the minimum value and maximum value of DB will be automatically set; if minValY and maxValY is 0, it will be set as an automatic scale.
Reference	To add three channels to the trend AddChannel_RealTime (1, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VRS”, 0, 400) AddChannel_RealTime (2, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VST”, 0, 400) AddChannel_RealTime (3, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VTR”, 0, 400)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-51

AddChannel_RealTimeEx Function
Description	It is the function to add the channel to the trend with the tag name in the real-time trend. However, in most cases, real-time monitoring can be performed through the archive tag so the AddChannel_Archive function is used more widely than this function.
Syntax	long AddChannel_RealTimeEx(long channelNo, BSTR tagName, double minValY, double maxValY, long LineWidth, long LineColor, long LineStyle, long LineConnection, BSTR Labels) channelNo: Enter the number of LONG type for the channel No. to add. tagName: Enter the tag name of the real-time tag to add. It is the string value. minValY: Enter the number of DOUBLE type for the tag’s minimum value. maxValY: Enter the number of DOUBLE type for the tag’s maximum value. LineWidth: Enter the number of LONG type for the line thickness of the channel to add. LineColor: Enter the number of LONG type for the line color of the channel to add. LineStyle: Enter the number of LONG type for the line style of the channel to add. LineConnection: Enter the number of LONG type for the line connection style of the channel to add. If minValY and maxValY is -999, the minimum value and maximum value of DB will be automatically set; if minValY and maxValY is 0, it will be set as an automatic scale.
Reference	To add three channels to the trend AddChannel_RealTimeEx (1, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VRS”, 0, 400, 2, RGB(255,0,0), 0, 1) AddChannel_RealTimeEx (2, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VST”, 0, 400, 2, RGB(255,255,0), 0, 1) AddChannel_RealTimeEx (3, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VTR”, 0, 400, 2, RGB(0,0,0), 0, 1)

AddTrendChannel Function
Description	This function is to add a channel to the trend. But, this function is rarely used because the user needs to input ID information on the logging group and tag as parameters. It is recommended to use AddChannel_Archive if the logging group ID or tag ID is unknown.
Syntax	long AddTrendChannel(LPCTSTR dataSource, long channelNo, long modelID, LPCTSTR modelName, long tagID, LPCTSTR tagName, long minValueY, long maxValueY) dataSource: Enter the following string values to identify whether the tag to be added is a logging tag or an online tag. - Logging Tag: “Archive” - Online Tag: “OnLine” channelNo: Enter LONG-type numbers as the number of the channel to be added. modelID: Enter LONG- type numbers as the logging group ID of the logging tag to be added. modelName: Enter the logging group name of the logging tag to be added. This is a string value. tagID: Enter LONG- type numbers as the tag ID of the logging tag to be added.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-52

tagName: Enter the tag name of the online tag to be added. minValY: Enter DOUBLE-type numbers as the tag’s minimum value. maxValY: Enter DOUBLE-type numbers as the tag’s maximu value. If minValY and maxValY is -999, the minimum value and maximum value of DB will be automatically set; if minValY and maxValY is 0, it will be set as an automatic scale.
Reference	To add three channels to the Trend AddTrendChannel("Archive", 1, 9, "INV1_SEC", 2710, "SOLAR.INV_1.1_AI_CT", 0, 327) AddTrendChannel("Archive", 2, 9, "INV1_SEC", 2714, "SOLAR.INV_1.1_AI_VO", 0, 450) AddTrendChannel("Archive", 3, 9, "INV1_SEC", 2713, "SOLAR.INV_1.1_AI_PW", 0, 60)

ApplyTrend Function
Description	This function is to make the monitoring start after adding a channel to the trend.
Syntax	void ApplyTrend(void)
Reference	ApplyTrend ()

ApplyProperty Function
Description	This function is to apply the trend properties to the trend after changing them.
Syntax	long ApplyProperty(VARIANT_BOOL bFlag) bFlag: Input TRUE
Reference	ApplyProperty(TRUE)

DeleteTrendChannel Function
Description	This function is to delete a certain channel or the entire channels from the trend.
Syntax	long DeleteTrendChannel(LPCTSTR channelStr, long channelNo) channelStr: Enter the channel name to be deleted. channelNo: Enter the channel number to be deleted. But, when deleting the entire channels, enter empty character (“”) in channelStr and ‘0’ in channelNo.
Reference	To delete ‘Channel 3’ from the trend (in case that the channel name is known) DeleteTrendChannel (“Channel3”, 3) To delete ‘Channel 3’ from the trend (in case that the channel name is unknown) DeleteTrendChannel (“”, 3) The above two methods are used because there are same tags in channels. To delete the entire channels from the trend DeleteTrendChannel (“”, 0)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-53

GoFirstTrend Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve sectional history for the next setting time based on the start of the first logging time.
Syntax	long GoFirstTrend(void)

GoLastTrend Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve sectional history for the previous time based on the latest logging time.
Syntax	long GoLastTrend(void)

GoNextTrend Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve sectional history for the next time based on the current logging time.
Syntax	long GoNextTrend(void)

GoPreviousTrend Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve sectional history for the previous time based on the current logging time.
Syntax	long GoPreviousTrend(void)

Loadhistory12h Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous 12 hours based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory12h (void)

Loadhistory1day Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous day based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory1day (void)

Loadhistory1h Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous an hour based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory1h (void)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-54

Loadhistory1month Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous a month based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory1month (void)

Loadhistory1week Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous a week based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory1week (void)

Loadhistory2h Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous two hours based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory2h (void)

Loadhistory3h Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous three hours based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory3h (void)

Loadhistory6h Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous six hours based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory6h (void)

LoadHistoryTrend Function
Description	This function is to search logging data in a designated time zone. Enter year, month, week, day, hour to set the start and end time of a certain time zone and search logging data in the time zone. Enter a number in year, moth, week and day and enter 0 in the rest. Make bFlag TRUE to search data on a specific day/month/year or make it FALSE to search them as of the current time.
Syntax	void LoadHistoryTrend(long year, long month, long week, long day, long hour, BOOL bFlag) year: Enter the year to search in LONG-type numbers. month: Enter the month to search in LONG-type numbers. week: To search data in a certain week, enter 1. If not, enter 0.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-55

day: Enter the day to search in LONG-type numbers.
hour: Enter the hour to search in LONG-type numbers.
bFlag: To search data on a specific day/month/year, enter TRUE. If not, enter FALSE.

Reference

To search logging data in the time zone in which a certain date belongs to
Year Search - LoadHistoryTrend(2007, 0, 0, 0, 0, TRUE)
Month Search - LoadHistoryTrend(2007, 5, 0, 0, 0, TRUE)
Week Search - LoadHistoryTrend(2007, 5, 1, 0, 0, TRUE)
Day Search - LoadHistoryTrend(2007, 5, 0, 13, 0, TRUE)
Hour Search- LoadHistoryTrend(2007, 5, 0, 13, 10, TRUE)
For One Hour Search as of the current time,
LoadHistoryTrend(0, 0, 0, 0, 1, FALSE)
For 2-Hour Search as of the current time,
LoadHistoryTrend(0, 0, 0, 0, 2, FALSE)
For 6-Hour Search as of the current time,
LoadHistoryTrend(0, 0, 0, 0, 6, FALSE)

LoadPeriodTrend Function
Description	As a function to search data in a certain period, it presents One Hour Search, One Day search, One Week Search and One Month Search as of the current time.
Syntax	long LoadPeriodTrend(long days, BOOL bFlag) days – Enter the following as parameters for searching. One Hour Search: 1 One Day search: 2 One Week Search: 3 One Month Search: 4 bFlag – Input TRUE..
Reference	For One Hour Search, LoadPeriodTrend (1, TRUE) For One Day Search, LoadPeriodTrend (2, TRUE) For One Week Search, LoadPeriodTrend (3, TRUE) For One Month Search, LoadPeriodTrend (4, TRUE)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-56

Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend Function
Description	As a function to search data in a certain period, it presents Hour Search, One Day search, One Week Search and One Month Search as of the current time. For Hour Search, 1, 2, 3, 6 and 12 hour search are available.
Syntax	long Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend (long type, long days, VARIANT_BOOL bFlag) type – Enter the following as period parameters for searching. One Hour Search: 1 One Day Search: 2 One Week Search: 3 One Month Search: 4 days – This parameter is applied only when One Hour Search is entered for type. Enter 1, 2, 3, 6 or 12 to search 1, 2, 3, 6 or 12 hour search. bFlag – Input TRUE.
Reference	For One Hour Search after selecting Hour Search, Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend(1, 1, TRUE) For One Day Search, Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend(2, 0, TRUE) For One Week Search, Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend(3, 0, TRUE) For One Month Search, Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend(4, 0, TRUE)

LoadPeriodDataStartTrend Function
Description	It is the function to look up the section. You just need to enter the start and end time to look up.
Syntax	void LoadPeriodDataStartTrend ()
Reference	To search data from 13 o’clock on February 11, 2008 to 14 o’clock on February 11 LoadPeriodDataStartTrend (“2008/02/11 13:00:00”, “2008/02/11 14:00:00”)

LoadPeriodDataTrend Function
Description	As a function to search data in a certain period, if the user inputs the Start time and End time, this function searches logging data during the period.
Syntax	long LoadPeriodDataTrend(LPCTSTR strFrom, LPCTSTR strTo, long bSample, LPCTSTR bFlag)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-57

strFrom – Enter the following type as the Start time. Number 0 through 24 are used for Time
Display.
“2008/02/14 11:00:00”
strTo – Enter the following type as the End time. Number 0 through 24 are used for Time Display.
“2008/02/14 11:10:00”
bSample – Decide whether to display data after applying sampling. Enter 0 as the default value.
bFlag – This is a reserve parameter variable. Enter“”.

Reference

To search data from 13 o’clock on February 11, 2008 to 14 o’clock on February 11,
LoadPeriodDataTrend(“2008/02/11 13:00:00”, “2008/02/11 14:00:00”, 0, “”)
Remember that there is empty space between day and time.

LoadProperty Function
Description	It is the function to import the saved property file.
Syntax	void LoadProperty (BSTR FileName)
Reference	LoadProperty (“file name”)

PauseTrend Function
Description	It is the function to stop the real-time lookup.
Syntax	void PauseTrend(void)

PrintTrend Function
Description	It is the function to print out the current trend screen
Syntax	void PrintTrend(void)

SaveProperty Function
Description	It is the function to save the set properties as a file.
Syntax	void SaveProperty (BSTR FileName)
Reference	SaveProperty (“file name”)

SetAlarmLimit Function
Description	It is the function to determine whether applying the alarm limit value to the channel to be specified.
Syntax	long SetAlarmLimit(long chanNo, VARIANT_BOOL bFlag, BSTR reserved)
Reference	SetAlarmLimit (1,True, “”)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-58

SetAutoScale Function
Description	It is the function to determine whether applying the automatic scale to the channel to be specified.
Syntax	long SetAutoScale(long chanNo, VARIANT_BOOL bFlag, BSTR reserved)
Reference	SetAutoScale (1,True, “”)

SetAxisXStarSpan Function
Description	It is the function to determine whether setting the min. value of the X-axis as the current time with the interval.
Syntax	void SetAxisXStartSpan(VARIANT_BOOL bStartFromNowTime, long XSpan)
Reference	SetAxisXStartSpan (True,300)

SetChannelMinMax Function
Description	It is the function to set the minimum and maximum value of the channel.
Syntax	long SetChannelMinMax(long channelNo, double minValue, double maxValue)

SettSaveasexcel Function
Description	It is the function to show the dialog box where you can save the data displayed in the trend as the Excel file.
Syntax	void SettSaveasexcel(void)

SetZoom100 Function
Description	It is the function to show the trend screen at the ratio of 100%.
Syntax	void SetZoom100 (void)

SetZoomIn Function
Description	It is the function to zoom in the trend screen.
Syntax	void SetZoomIn(void)

SetZoomOut Function
Description	It is the function to zoom out the trend screen.
Syntax	void SetZoomOut (void)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-59

SetZoomRect Function
Description	It is the function to zoom in the trend screen partially.
Syntax	void SetZoomRect (void)

ShowMarkerValue Function
Description	This function is to show marker visible properties of the trend.
Syntax	void ShowMarkerValue()
Reference	ShowMarkerValue ()

ShowSettingLoad Function
Description	It is the function to load the property.
Syntax	void ShowSettingLoad ()
Reference	ShowSettingLoad ()

ShowTrendProperty Function
Description	This function is to show the property window of the trend.
Syntax	void ShowTrendProperty()
Reference	ShowTrendProperty(TRUE)

StartTrend Function
Description	It is the function for real-time lookup based on the established screen cycle.
Syntax	void StartTrend(void)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-60
11.4 List Trend Viewer
As a screen to monitor changes in tag values over time, this List Trend Viewer is an Active X module that displays
online data as well as logging data stored in the logging server.
11.4.1 Prerequisite and Environment
List trend properties can be set up only after the ActiveX module is inserted to the InfoU graphic editor. Channel
assignment, tag assignment and other tag properties to be monitored are designated in advance as List Trend
properties. Channels or tags are not basically assigned to the list trend status inserted in the graphic editor. It is
essential to display the Property Window before setting up the property values needed to run the List Trend. After
the property values are saved, the List Trend Monitoring Screen appears upon the opening of the screen under the
Run time environment.
The engineering values are entered in the following order on the List Trend viewer. If is selected from the
tools, immediate inserting can be performed.
11.4.2 Screen Configuration
(1) Engineering Screen
If List Trend is inserted and a tag to be monitored is selected and then settings are all completed, the
following screen appears. The screen in this figure shows that three tags are selected.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-61

(2) Runtime Screen
If default list trend settings are completed on the engineering screen above and then, the runtime is executed,
the screen shows that data values are changed over time.
11.4.3 Settings
If the right side of the mouse is clicked on the List Trend and the ‘Active X Properties’ menu is selected, the setting
window appears. The same setting screen is used for the engineering screen and the run-time screen. But, the
runtime screen has Channel Setting function only. In addition, once property values are saved on the engineering
screen, those values will be continuously valid however, if those property values are changed on the runtime
screen, the changed values are applied only to the runtime screen. The changed values are cancelled if the
runtime stops and the property values set up on the engineering screen are applied.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-62
(1) General
The Engineering Screen and the Runtime Screen have the same general function.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-63

1) Show Top Toolbox/Show Lower Toolbox
Set up whether to display Trend Toolbox on the top or the bottom during the running. Both can not be
selected at the same time and it is allowed neither of them is selected. ‘Show Lower Toolbox’ has been
selected as the default value.
2) Time Display
Select whether to show/hide Time Display column on the screen. ‘Hide Time Display’’ has not been
selected as the default value.
3) Grid (Value Display)
The user may select a method to display grid value.
Default : Display the default vale.
#### : Do not display decimal points regardless of tag DB
####.0 : Indicate down to one decimal point regardless of tag DB.
####.00 : Indicate down to two decimal points regardless of tag DB.
####.000 : Indicate down to three decimal points regardless of tag DB.
####.0000: Indicate down to four decimal points regardless of tag DB.
#,### : Do not display decimal points regardless of tag DB and indicate digit with comma.
#,###.0 : Indicate down to one decimal point regardless of tag DB and indicate digit with comma
#,###.00 : Indicate down to two decimal points regardless of tag DB and indicate digit with comma.
#,###.000 : Indicate down to three decimal points regardless of tag DB and indicate digit with comma.
#,###.0000: Indicate down to four decimal points regardless of tag DB and indicate digit with comma..
4) Refresh Cycle
Designated a refresh cycle. One second has been set up as the default value.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-64
(2) Channel
The Engineering Screen and the Runtime Screen have the same Channel functions. Up to 20 channels are
provided in the List Trend. There is at least one channel and it is available to designate tags for each channel.
If one channel is an online tag, the rest channels have to be online tags. Likely, if one channel is a logging tag,
the rest channels have to be logging tags. Also, if any logging data needs to be saved or searched, the
logging tag should be selected and used. Online tags do not provide the logging function.
1) Channel Add/Delete
A channel is added/deleted. At least one or more than one but not more than 20 channels can be
selected.
2) Tag type
Select either Logging Tag or Online Tag.
3) Tag Select
Assign a tag to the channel. One tag can be assigned to one channel.
If a logging tag is selected, the logging tag browser where the associated logging group is set up is called
while the online tag browser is called for an online tag.
Be cautious that logging data can be searched only when a logging tag is selected.
If a tag is selected, the tag’s minimum value and maximum values are displayed. These min/max values
apply to Y-axis values for Y axis settings.
* ’Logging Tag Select’ screen

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-65

* ’Online Tag Select’ screen
4) Description
Describe the selected tag. If any description has already been written, this description is displayed
instead of the tag name on the grid. If not, the tag name is displayed. If any tag description has been
recorded in the tag DB, that description is displayed even the user skips this item.
5) Statistics Value Display
This function becomes active only when a statistics tag is selected. For analog tags, select one value
among current value, min value, max value, average value, sum and sample and for digital tags, select
one value among current value, On count, On Time, Total count and sample. If the tag is not a statistics
tag, it becomes inactive.
* Analog Tag
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-66
* Digital Tag
6) Time Display
Select a time type to display on the grid.
7) History retrieval
In the case of Trend, basically, history retrieval is done at a distance of regular time. When selecting the
current time, history retrieval will be performed based on the current time.
(3) Font
Decide Font, Style and Size to be displayed on the list trend viewer list.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-67

(4) Trigger
This Trigger is a function used to run the list trend only when the base tag for trigger is True.
If ‘Apply Trigger Tag’ is clicked, the trigger tag item becomes active. Press ‘Tag Select’ to select a tag. At this
time, be cautious that the tag should be corresponding to the tag kind designated during the channel settings.
Usually, they are corresponding to each other and the Tag Selection Window is displayed but, if Tag Kind is
changed latter, trigger setting items shall be checked.
If the value of a trigger tag is O, that is, if it is False, the List Trend does not show any tag value. It shows tag
values only the value is not O.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-68
(5) Toolbar
Select toolbar (menus).
1) Start ( )
This is a common function that applies to both online trends and logging trends,
Once trend monitoring starts, data is renewed every second and 5 minutes is set as the time for X axis.
To view the current screen again during the logging search, press this button and the current time screen
is displayed.
This Start button can not be selected as the default value.
2) Stop ( )
Trend Monitoring stops. This function is available only for logging trends. That is, this function exists only
when logging tags are selected and online trends do not have this function.
This Stop button can not be selected as the default value like the Start button.
3) Show Setting Window ( )
Setting values of the current trend can be changed. This is a common function that applies to both online
trends and logging trends,
This Setting Window has been described before.
4) Logging Trend (Logging Time Range) ( )
Input logging conditions (period and sampling conditions) to search past data. Click on the relevant icon
to display the following window.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-69

‘Saved Section’ shows the starting time and the end time to save the entire data and this is referred when
deciding the start time and the end time. The following figure shows that ‘One Hour Search’ is selected
and executed.
This function is available only for logging trends.
5) 1 Hour Logging ( )
View 1 hour logging data including the current time. For example, if it is 10:20, the logging data between
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-70
10 and 11o’clock are viewed. This function is available only for logging trends.
6) 2 Hour Logging ( )
View logging data in the time range where the current time belongs to by dividing 24 hours into 0~2
o’clock, 2~4 o’clock, 4~6 o’clock, 20~22 o’clock and 22~midnight. For example, if it is 10:20, the logging
data between 10 o’clock and noon are viewed. This function is available only for logging trends.
7) 3 Hour Logging ( )
View logging data in the time range where the current time belongs to by dividing 24 hours into 0~3
o’clock, 3~6o’clock, 6~9o’clock, 18~21 o’clock and 21~midnight. For example, if it is 10:20, the logging
data between 9 o’clock and noon are viewed. This function is available only for logging trends.
8) 6 Hour Logging ( )
View logging data in the time range where the current time belongs to by dividing 24 hours into 0~6
o’clock, 6~12o’clock, 12~18o’clock and 18~midnight For example, if it is 10:20, the logging data between
6 o’clock and noon are viewed. This function is available only for logging trends.
9) 12 Hour Logging ( )
View logging data in the time range where the current time belongs to by dividing 24 hours into 0~noon
and noon~ midnight. For example, if it is 10:20, the logging data between 0 o’clock and noon are viewed.
This function is available only for logging trends.
10) 1 Day Logging ( )
View today’s logging data. This function is available only for logging trends.
11) 1 Week Logging ( )
View this week’s logging data. The period is from Monday through the midnight of Sunday. This function
is available only for logging trends.
12) 1 Month Logging ( )
View this month’s logging data This function is available only for logging trends.
13) Section Search ( )
When you applying the history retrieval, you can look up the section using the section retrieval function.
a. If you press the very left button, the screen will be moved to the start time stored in the current DB
server.
b. If you press the second button, the screen will be moved to the previous section as far as the lookup
distance from the current section. It can be movable to the very beginning.
c. If you press the third button, the screen will be moved to the next section as far as the lookup distance
from the current section. It can be movable to the very end.
d. If you press the very right button, the screen will be moved to the current time. The section retrieval
function is available only when applying the history retrieval. The function is not available in the realtime monitoring status, available only in the history trend.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-71

11.4.4 How to Use Script
(1) Function List

Function Name	Function Declaration
AddChannel_Archive	long AddChannel_Archive(long channelNo, LPCTSTR modelName, LPCTSTR tagName, LPCTSTR tagDesc)
AddChannel_RealTime	long AddChannel_RealTime(long channelNo, LPCTSTR tagName, LPCTSTR tagDesc)
AddTrendChannel	long AddTrendChannel(LPCTSTR dataSource, long channelNo, long modelID, LPCTSTR modelName, long tagID, LPCTSTR tagName, LPCTSTR tagDesc)
ApplyTrigger	void ApplyTrigger(bApply, modelName, tagName)
GoFirstTrend	long GoFirstTrend(void)
GoLastTrend	long GoLastTrend(void)
GoNextTrend	long GoNextTrend(void)
GoPreviousTrend	long GoPreviousTrend(void)
Loadhistory12h	void Loadhistory12h (void)
Loadhistory1day	void Loadhistory1day (void)
Loadhistory1h	void Loadhistory1h (void)
Loadhistory1month	void Loadhistory1month (void)
Loadhistory1week	void Loadhistory1week (void)
Loadhistory2h	void Loadhistory2h (void)
Loadhistory3h	void Loadhistory3h (void)
Loadhistory6h	void Loadhistory6h (void)
LoadHistoryTrend	void LoadHistoryTrend(long year, long month, long week, long day, long hour, BOOL bFlag)
LoadPeriodTrend	long LoadPeriodTrend(long type, BOOL bFlag)
Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend	long Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend(long type, long hours, ARIANT_BOOL bFlag)
LoadPeriodDataTrend	long LoadPeriodDataTrend(LPCTSTR strFrom, LPCTSTR strTo, long bSample, LPCTSTR bFlag)
PauseTrend	void PauseTrend(void)
PrintTrend	void PrintTrend(void)
SaveCSV	void SaveCSV(LPCTSTR Filename)
SettSaveasexcel	void SettSaveasexcel(void)
SetVisibleChanGrid	long SetVisibleChanGrid(LPCTSTR strTagName, long chanNo, long bFlag)
ShowTrendProperty	void ShowTrendProperty(void)
StartTrend	void StartTrend(void)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-72
(2) Function Description

AddChannel_Archive Function
Description	This function is to add a channel in a logging group name or a tag name to the list trend if the tag is a logging list trend.
Syntax	long AddChannel_Archive(long channelNo, LPCTSTR modelName, LPCTSTR tagName, LPCTSTR tagDesc) channelNo: Enter LONG-type numbers as the number of the channel to be added. modelName: Enter the logging group name of the logging tag to be added. This is a string value. tagName: Enter the name of the logging tag to be added. This is a string value. tagDesc: Enter the description of the logging tag to be added. If there is no value, use the description value of the tag DB and if there is a value, use it. This is a string value.
Reference	To add three channels to the List Trend AddChannel_Archive(1, “SCADA_SEC”, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VRS”, “VRS”) AddChannel_Archive(2, “SCADA_SEC”, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VST”, “VST”) AddChannel_Archive(3, “SCADA_SEC”, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VTR”, “VTR”)

AddChannel_RealTime Function
Description	This function is to add a channel in a tag name to the trend if the trend is an online tag. But, in most cases, online monitoring is possible with logging tags, therefore, AddChannel_Archive is more widely used than this function.
Syntax	long AddChannel_RealTime(long channelNo, BSTR tagName, LPCTSTR tagDesc) channelNo: Enter LONG-type numbers as the number of the channel to be added. tagName: Enter the name of the online tag to be added. This is a string value. tagDesc: Enter the description of the logging tag to be added. If there is no value, use the description value of the tag DB and if there is a value, use it. This is a string value.
Reference	To add three channels to the List Trend AddChannel_RealTime (1, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VRS”, “VRS”) AddChannel_RealTime (2, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VST”, “VST”) AddChannel_RealTime (3, “SCADA.UT_EHV02.VTR”, “VTR”)

AddTrendChannel Function
Description	This function is to add a channel to the list trend. But, this function is rarely used because the user needs to input ID information on the logging group and tag as parameters. It is recommended to use AddChannel_Archive if the logging group ID or tag ID is unknown.
Syntax	long AddTrendChannel(LPCTSTR dataSource, long channelNo, long modelID, LPCTSTR modelName, long tagID, LPCTSTR tagName, LPCTSTR tagDesc)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-73

dataSource: Enter the following string values to identify whether the tag to be added is a logging
tag or an online tag.
- Logging Tag: “Archive”
- Online Tag: “OnLine”
channelNo: Enter LONG-type numbers as the number of the channel to be added.
modelID: Enter LONG- type numbers as the logging group ID of the logging tag to be added.
modelName: Enter the logging group name of the logging tag to be added. This is a string value.
tagID: Enter LONG- type numbers as the tag ID of the logging tag to be added.
tagName: Enter the name of the online tag to be added. This is a string value.
tagDesc: Enter the description of the logging tag to be added. If there is no value, use the
description value of the tag DB and if there is a value, use it. This is a string value.

Reference

To add three channels to the List Trend
AddTrendChannel("Archive", 1, 9, "INV1_SEC", 2710, "SOLAR.INV_1.1_AI_CT", “CT”)
AddTrendChannel("Archive", 2, 9, "INV1_SEC", 2714, "SOLAR.INV_1.1_AI_VO", “VO”)
AddTrendChannel("Archive", 3, 9, "INV1_SEC", 2713, "SOLAR.INV_1.1_AI_PW", “PW”)

ApplyTrigger Function
Description	This function is to apply the trigger tag properties to the list trend. A value appears unless the trigger value is O (True). If the value is O, it is not displayed.
Syntax	void ApplyTrigger(bApply, modelName, tagName) bApply : - Trigger is applied: True - Trigger is not applied: False modelName: Make sure to enter the logging group name if the list trend is logging. If the user fails to enter the logging group name, noting is recorded because the trigger tag can not be searched. tagName: Enter the tag name.
Reference	ApplyTrigger(TRUE, “SCADA_SEC”, “Update”): In case that a tag, whose logging group is “SCADA_SEC”and name is“Update,”is designated as a trigger tag.

GoFirstTrend Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve sectional history for the next setting time based on the start of the first logging time.
Syntax	long GoFirstTrend(void)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-74

GoLastTrend Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve sectional history for the previous setting time based on the latest logging time.
Syntax	long GoLastTrend(void)
GoNextTrend Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve sectional history for the next setting time based on the current logging time.
Syntax	long GoNextTrend(void)

GoPreviousTrend Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve sectional history for the previous setting time based on the current logging time.
Syntax	long GoPreviousTrend(void)

Loadhistory12h Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous12 hours based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory12h (void)

Loadhistory1day Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous day based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory1day (void)

Loadhistory1h Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous an hour based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory1h (void)

Loadhistory1month Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous a month based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory1month (void)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-75

Loadhistory1week Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous a week based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory1week (void)

Loadhistory2h Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous two hours based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory2h (void)

Loadhistory3h Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous three hours based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory3h (void)

Loadhistory6h Function
Description	It is the function to retrieve the history for the section of previous six hours based on the current logging time.
Syntax	void Loadhistory6h (void)

LoadHistoryTrend Function
Description	This function is to search logging data in a designated time zone. Enter year, month, week, day, hour to set the start and end time of a certain time zone and search logging data in the time zone. Enter a number in year, moth, week and day and enter 0 in the rest. Make bFlag TRUE to search data on a specific day/month/year or make it FALSE to search them as of the current time.
Syntax	void LoadHistoryTrend(long year, long month, long week, long day, long hour, BOOL bFlag) year: Enter the year to search in LONG-type numbers. month: Enter the month to search in LONG-type numbers. week: To search data in a certain week, enter 1. If not, enter 0. day: Enter the day to search in LONG-type numbers. hour: Enter the hour to search in LONG-type numbers. bFlag: To search data on a specific day/month/year, enter TRUE. If not, enter FALSE.
Reference	To search logging data in the time zone in which a certain date belongs to, Year Search - LoadHistoryTrend(2007, 0, 0, 0, 0, TRUE) Month Search - LoadHistoryTrend(2007, 5, 0, 0, 0, TRUE)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-76

Week Search - LoadHistoryTrend(2007, 5, 1, 0, 0, TRUE)
Day Search - LoadHistoryTrend(2007, 5, 0, 13, 0, TRUE)
Hour Search- LoadHistoryTrend(2007, 5, 0, 13, 10, TRUE)
For One Hour Search as of the current time,
LoadHistoryTrend(0, 0, 0, 0, 1, FALSE)
For 2-Hour Search as of the current time,
LoadHistoryTrend(0, 0, 0, 0, 2, FALSE)
For 6-Hour Search as of the current time,
LoadHistoryTrend(0, 0, 0, 0, 6, FALSE)

LoadPeriodTrend Function
Description	As a function to search data in a certain period, this presents One Hour Search, One Day search, One Week Search and One Month Search as of the current time.
Syntax	long LoadPeriodTrend(long days, BOOL bFlag) type: Enter the following as parameters for searching. - One Hour Search: 1 - One Day search: 2 - One Week Search: 3 - One Month Search: 4 bFlag – Input TRUE.
Reference	For One Hour Search, LoadPeriodTrend (1, TRUE) For One Day Search, LoadPeriodTrend (2, TRUE) For One Week Search, LoadPeriodTrend (3, TRUE) For One Month Search, LoadPeriodTrend (4, TRUE)

Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend Function
Description	As a function to search data in a certain period, Hour Search, this presents One Day search, One

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-77

Week Search and One Month Search as of the current time. For Hour Search, 1, 2, 3, 6 and 12 hour search are available.
Syntax	long Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend (long type, long hours, VARIANT_BOOL bFlag) type: Enter the following as period parameters for searching. - One Hour Search: 1 - One Day search: 2 - One Week Search: 3 - One Month Search: 4 hours: This parameter is applied only when One Hour Search is entered for type. Enter 1, 2, 3, 6 or 12 to search 1, 2, 3, 6 or 12 hour search. bFlag – Input TRUE.
Reference	For One Hour Search after selecting Hour Search, Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend(1, 1, TRUE) For One Day Search, Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend(2, 0, TRUE) For One Week Search, Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend(3, 0, TRUE) For One Month Search, Load_ArchivePeriod_Trend(4, 0, TRUE)

LoadPeriodDataTrend Function
Description	As a function to search data in a certain period, if the user inputs the Start time and End time, this function searches logging data during the period.
Syntax	long LoadPeriodDataTrend(LPCTSTR strFrom, LPCTSTR strTo, long bSample, LPCTSTR bFlag) strFrom: Enter the following type as the Start time. Number 0 through 24 are used for Time Display. “2008/02/14 11:00:00” strTo: Enter the following type as the End time. Number 0 through 24 are used for Time Display. “2008/02/14 11:10:00” bSample: Decide whether to display data after applying sampling. Enter 0 as the default value. bFlag: This is a reserve parameter variable. Enter“”.
Reference	To search data from 13 o’clock on February 11, 2008 to 14 o’clock on February 11, LoadPeriodDataTrend(“2008/02/11 13:00:00”, “2008/02/11 14:00:00”, 0, “”) Remember that there is empty space between day to time.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-78

PauseTrend Function
Description	It is the function to pause the real-time lookup.
Syntax	void PauseTrend(void)

PrintTrend Function
Description	It is the function to print out the current list trend screen.
Syntax	void PrintTrend(void)

SaveCSV Function
Description	It is the function to show the dialog box where you can save the data displayed in the list trend as the Excel file.
Syntax	void SaveCSV(LPCTSTR Filename) Filename: File name for save as

SettSaveasexcel Function
Description	It is the function to show the dialog box where you can save the data displayed in the list trend as the Excel file.
Syntax	void SettSaveasexcel(void)

SetVisibleChanGrid Function
Description	This function is to show or hide channels.
Syntax	long SetVisibleChanGrid(LPCTSTR strTagName, long chanNo, long bFlag) strTagName: Enter the tag name of the channel to be shown or hidden. chanNo: Enter the number of the channel to be shown or hidden. bFlag: Input True if the channel is to be shown or input False if it is to be hidden.
Reference	ShowTrendProperty(TRUE)

ShowTrendProperty Function
Description	This function is to show the property window of the trend.
Syntax	void ShowTrendProperty()
Reference	ShowTrendProperty(TRUE)

StartTrend Function
Description	It is the function for real-time lookup based on the established screen cycle
Syntax	void StartTrend(void)

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-79

11.5 Recipe Viewer
This Recipe Viewer is an Active X module that displays the recipe contents set up during the engineering and has
Recipe Control, Dynamic Data Loading and Dynamic Data Saving function.
11.5.1 Prerequisite and Environment
The ActiveX module is inserted to the InfoU graphic editor. The recipe viewer displays the data that have been set
up during the engineering and does not have its own property.
The recipe viewer is executed in the following order. If is selected from the tools, immediate inserting can
be performed.
11.5.2 Screen Configuration
(1) Engineering Screen
The following screen appears after the recipe viewer is inserted.
(2) Runtime Screen
If the above Engineering Screen is executed on the runtime, the screen is as follows.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-80
11.5.3 Real-Time Function
(1) Setting Data Diplay
The recipe viewer is largely divided into the upper Operation Set part and the lower setting data display and
select part. The user may conduct various operations by selecting a recipe model and each unit and data
item and combining them properly and the selected items are displayed on the upper Operation Set part.
During the runtime, a recipe model list is displayed on the left and if a certain model is selected, the
associated recipe units and data to the selected model appear.
* In case that only a recipe model is selected

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-81

If recipe units and data are selected, the selected items are displayed on 'Operation Set’ as seen in the figure.
(2) Refresh ( )
If Refresh button is selected, the existing operations are cleared and it is converted to the initial screen.
(Only the model list is displayed)
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-82
(3) Tag Value Load ( )
If models and units are selected, ‘Tag Value Load’ becomes active. If this button is selected, the tag values
displayed on the Operation Set are loaded from the real-time data service module and they are displayed on
the Operation Set. In this status, the user may control the recipe since its requirements (model + unit + data)
are met and also save this data in the DB. Of course, it is also available to edit it directly on the data cell of
‘Operation Set’ to control and save it in the DB.
(4) Recipe Control ( )
For Recipe Control, each Model, Unit and Data should be selected. Of course, if some data are secured
through Tag Value Load instead of selecting data, Recipe Control is also possible even in such a case.
Recipe Control is possible only when the current user’s authority is higher than the required authority
according to the recipe model.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-83

If Recipe Control is performed, the following dialog box appears to confirm the function.
For ‘Control Results,’ two options-Returns or No Return-are presented. Select one and press OK to perform
the Recipe Control. If the user has an insufficiently high authority to control the recipe model, he/she may not
control it.
(5) Recipe Data Save ( )
The recipe viewer presents a function to save recipe data during the runtime. But, only up to 64 recipe data
can be saved in a model. The user may load the corresponding values to the unit displayed on the Operation
Set from the real-time data service and save them through the recipe viewer or input data directly to cells to
save them.
When saving data, use the same data name as set up on the Operation Set and if other recipe data has the
same name, it is updated. If the data name item is empty, the default string value of “year + month+ day +
hour+ minute+ second + msecond” is given as a data name.
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-84
(6) Recipe Control Result
The control result can be received if “Return” has been set during the Recipe Control (But, this is applied only
when it is not under the web environment). The following screen is displayed automatically if the Recipe
Control Result is received from I/O Manager.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-85

11.5.4 How to Use Script
(1) Function List

Function Name	Function Declaration
SelectRecord	short SelectRecord(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR UnitName, LPCTSTR DataName)
ControlWorkingSet	short ControlWorkingSet(short nMode)
ControlSet	short ControlSet(short nMode, LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR UnitName, LPCTSTR DataName)
LoadDynamic	short LoadDynamic(void)
ChangeWSDataName	short ChangeWSDataName(LPCTSTR DataName)
SaveData	short SaveData(void)
SelectRecord	short SelectRecord(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR UnitName, LPCTSTR DataName)
ControlWorkingSet	short ControlWorkingSet(short nMode)
ControlSet	short ControlSet(short nMode, LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR UnitName, LPCTSTR DataName)
LoadDynamic	short LoadDynamic(void)
ChangeWSDataName	short ChangeWSDataName(LPCTSTR DataName)
SaveData	short SaveData(void)
SelectRecord	short SelectRecord(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR UnitName, LPCTSTR DataName)
ControlWorkingSet	short ControlWorkingSet(short nMode)
ControlSet	short ControlSet(short nMode, LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR UnitName, LPCTSTR DataName)
LoadDynamic	short LoadDynamic(void)
ChangeWSDataName	short ChangeWSDataName(LPCTSTR DataName)
SaveData	short SaveData(void)
SelectRecord	short SelectRecord(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR UnitName, LPCTSTR DataName)
ControlWorkingSet	short ControlWorkingSet(SHORT nMode)

(2) Function Description

SelectRecord Function
Description	This function is to make WorkingSet organized by selecting model name, unit name and data name. Model name is an essential item while unit name and data name are optional. If this function is executed, the relevant items are selected on the Recipe Viewer Control to form WorkingSet.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-86

Syntax	short SelectRecord(LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR UnitName, LPCTSTR DataName) ModelName: As the name of the model to be selected and it is a string value. UnitName: As the name of the unit to be selected and it is a string value. DataName: As the name of the data to be selected and it is a string value.
Reference	Recipe Model Name: Coffee vending machine, Unit Name: Vending machine on the1 floor, Data Name: Milk coffee is selected, SelectRecord(“Coffee vending machine”, “Vending machine on the1 floor”, “milk coffee”) To select only model and unit except data, SelectRecord(“Coffee vending machine”, “Vending machine on the1 floor”, “”)

ControlWorkingSet Function
Description	A function used when controlling recipe with the WorkingSet data that have been already selected. Controlling is performed only model, unit and data are all equipped with. For local system (not web), it is available to select whether to receive the control result or not.
Syntax	short ControlWorkingSet(short nMode) nMode: A flag whether to receive the control result or not. (1: Won't receive , 2: Will receive)
Reference	To perform controlling WorkingSet (Will receive), ControlWorkingSet(2) To perform controlling WorkingSet (Won't receive), ControlWorkingSet(1)

ControlSet Function
Description	A function used to perform controlling through a certain method without selecting directly on the recipe viewer control. Internally, this function derives the same result as SelectRecord and ControlWorkingSet are executed simultaneously.
Syntax	short ControlSet(short nMode, LPCTSTR ModelName, LPCTSTR UnitName, LPCTSTR DataName) nMode: A flag whether to receive the control result or not. (1: Won't receive , 2: Will receive) ModelName: As the name of the model to be selected and it is a string value.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-87

UnitName: As the name of the unit to be selected and it is a string value. DataName: As the name of the data to be selected and it is a string value.
Reference	Recipe Model Name: Coffee vending machine, Unit Name: Vending machine on the1 floor, Data Name: Milk coffee is selected, (Not received the result), Controlset(1, “Coffee vending machine”, “Vending machine on the1 floor”, “milk coffee”)

LoadDynamic Function
Description	This function is to load tag values that belong to the unit member from the InfoU real-time server controlling without using the values that have been set up during the engineering. This function can be executed only when model and unit are selected.
Syntax	short LoadDynamic(void)
Reference	With this function, it is possible to load real-time values of a tag and save them as recipe data or re-control them.

ChangeWSDataName Function
Description	This function is to rename the recipe data of WorkingSet.
Syntax	short ChangeWSDataName(LPCTSTR DataName) DataName: As the name of the data to be selected and it is a string value.
Reference	With this function, the name of the data shown on the current WorkingSet can be modified. This function only helps to modify the name seen on the screen and does not mean to save it in the DB. After this function is used, the data can be saved in the DB with the following SaveData function.

SaveData Function
Description	This function is to save the recipe data displayed on the WorkingSet.
Syntax	short SaveData(void)
Reference	This function is to save the data seen on the current WorkingSet in the DB. At this time, use the data name on the WorkingSet of the recipe viewer control for the name of the saved data. This name is changeable by using ChangeWSDataName function. If the same data name already exists in the DB, a new data value is renewed in the DB, If the same data name does not exists in the DB, a new recipe data is added to the DB. Also, if any recipe data name is not given, a new name is created and saved by combining time such as year, month, day, hour, minute, second and msecond.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-88
11.6 Gauge Control
This Gauge Control is an ActiveX module to display and monitor the registered tag information in a type of gauge
that fits well to the user’s purpose by selecting or setting up a proper gauge. A gauge can be formed in various
types by designating basic range or degree.
11.6.1 Prerequisite and Environment
Gauge properties can be set up only after the ActiveX module is inserted to the InfoU graphic editor. Gauge
properties broadly consist of General and Ticks. Since those gauge properties have been already set up with
default values, they act with those default values if the user does not set up additionally.
The Gauge Control is executed in the following order. If is selected from the tools, immediate inserting can
be performed.
11.6.2 Screen Configuration
(1) Engineering Screen
The following screen appears after the Gauge Control is inserted.
(2) Runtime Screen
If the above Engineering Screen is executed on the runtime, the screen is as follows.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-89

11.6.3 Property Settings
(1) General
1) Tag Name
Enter a tag name to be gauged. A tag name can be designated with ‘Search’ ( ) button on the right. Its
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-90
update cycle is the same with the screen cycle of the InfoU graphic editor.
2) Sample List
Various gauge samples are presented to fit to the user’s purpose.
3) Range
Designate a gauge range, that is, enter the min/max value.
4) Degrees
Designate a gauge degree, that is, enter the start degree and the range degree.
5) Title
Designate a gauge title and color.
6) Border
Designate background color and border style.
(2) Ticks
1) Pointer
Designate a gauge pointer style and color.
2) Tick Label
Designate a tick label color and style (Reverse, Decimal).
3) Pointer Hub
Designate whether to show the pointer hub or not and decide its size and color.
4) Tick
Designate the size of the Major Tick and Minor Tick and color.
5) Tick Background Color
Designate the tick background color and the user may set up an additional risk reference value to
designate a risk color.
If not checked, the background color is set up to display.

Chapter 11 Graphic Object

11-91

11.7 How to Use External ActiveX
External ActiveX can be inserted and used on the graphic editor.
Here, Window Media Player OCX is used as an example of external The same way can be applied to other
ActiveX.
11.7.1 How to Use
Insert the ActiveX module into the InfoU graphic editor. You can run the Window Media Player Control based on
the below procedures.
(1) Select in the tool menu of the graphic editor.
(2) Select a ‘Window Media Player’
Chapter 11 Graphic Object
11-92
(3) If you select the ‘Window Media Player’, it will be inserted.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-1

Chapter 12 Alarm Management
Alram function in HMI system, including the InfoU, is important.
This section describes about the process dealing with alarm, configuration of alarm group and alarm service.
12.1 Alarm Kind and Rules
Alarm settings are available only for analog and digital tags in the InfoU and alarms are processed only when the
relevant tag value is normal.
Each alarm is prompted or cancelled according to the following rules.

Tag Type	Alarm Type	Alarm Kind	Occurrence rule	Cancel rule
Analog	Limit Alarm	HH Alarm	The alarm occurs when the tag value is more than HH	The alarm is cancelled if HH alarm has previously occurred and the tag value is less than HH.
HI Alarm	It occurs when the tag value is more than HI but less than HH.	It is cancelled if HI alarm has previously occurred and the tag value is less than HI or more than HH.
LO Alarm	It occurs when the tag value is more than LL but less than LO.	It is cancelled if LO alarm has previously occurred and the tag value is less than LL or more than LO
LL Alarm	It occurs when the tag value is less than LL	It is cancelled if LL alarm has previously occurred and the tag value exceeds LL
Change Value Alarm	Change Value Alarm	It occurs when the tag value is significantly changed from the past value by more than the baseline value.	It is cancelled if the Change Alarm has previously occurred and the tag value is changed from the past value by less than the baseline value.
Gap Alarm	Main Gap Alarm	It occurs when the tag value is different from the base value by more than the Main Gap Value.	It is cancelled if the Main gap Alarm has previously occurred and the tag value is different from the base value by less than Main Gap Value
Sub Gap Alarm	It occurs when the tag value is different from the base value by more than the Sub Gap Value but less the than Main Gap Value.	It is cancelled if the Sub gap Alarm has previously occurred and the tag value is different from the base value by more than the Main Gap Value or less than the Sub Gap Value.
Digital	Digital Alarm	ON Alarm	It occurs when the tag value is “On.”	It is cancelled if the On Alarm has previously occurred and the tag value is Off.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-2

OFF Alarm	It occurs when the tag value is “Off.”	It is cancelled if the Off Alarm has previously occurred and the tag value is On
ON  OFF Alarm	It occurs when the tag value is changed from On to Off.	Occurrence and cancellation takes place at the same time
OFF  ON Alarm	It occurs when the tag value is changed from Off to On	Occurrence and cancellation takes place at the same time
Alarm When Changed	It occurs when the tag value is changed	Occurrence and cancellation takes place at the same time

12.1.1 Analog Alarm
There are three types of analog tags; Limit Alarm, Variation Alarm, Gap Alarm.
There are four types of Limit Alarms; HH, HI, LO, LL alarm. The Gap Alarm can be divided into the Main Gap
Alarm and the Sub. Gap Alarm.
(1) Limit Alarm
The border alarm is used most among other alarms for analog tags.
The user may set up four border values such as HH, HI, LO and LL for the border alarm when tag
engineering. If the user divides the region corresponding to the tag values horizontally and locates the
baseline values to relevant regions, the relevant alarm occurs when the tag value is in the corresponding
region and it is cancelled when the tag value is out of the region.
Each border alarm occurs in each corresponding region under the following condition:
* HH Alarm: The tag value is in HH region.
* HI Alarm: The tag value is in HI region
* LO Alarm: The tag value is n LO region
* LL Alarm: The tag value is in LL region

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-3

In addition, if any alarm Deadband value is set up, the Deadband rule applies according to the change trend
of the tag value.
The following figure shows a simple example of this.
(2) Change Value Alarm
The change alarm occurs when the current tag value is significantly changed from the past tag value by more
than the allowed change value designated to each tag property item.
Similarly, if the change alarm occurs and then, the tag value is changed afterward but it does not reach the
designated value, the alarm is cancelled. This alarm is set to ensure the tag value is not change significantly.
The alarm Deadband rule does not apply to the change alarm.
As shown in the below figure, the horizontal △t means the collecting cycle (not absolute time) and △V
means the difference in values. If the variations between the previous value and the current value exceed the
variation value, the corresponding alarm will occur.
Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-4
(3) Gap Alarm
The gap alarm occurs when the delta rule of the Main and Sub Gap applies based on the baseline value.
Similarly to the border alarm, the alarm Deadband rule applies to the gap alarm.
The gap alarm is similar to the border alarm but several differences are as follows:
-There is no upper or lower border. It is only divided into the Main and Sub Gap.
-The base value can be set with an absolute value or a relative value (tag).
12.1.2 Digital Alarm
Digital alarms occur only for digital tags and they occur according to the previous value and the current value,
consisting of five types such as On->On Alarm, Off Alarm, On->On->Off Alarm, Off->On->On Alarm, Alarm When
Changed.

Alarm Kind	Description
ON Alarm	The alarm occurs when the tag value is On. The alarm is cancelled when the tag value is Off.
OFF Alarm	The alarm occurs when tag value is Off The alarm is cancelled when the tag value is On
ON  OFF Alarm	The alarm is occurred and cancelled at the same time when the tag value is changed from On to Off.
OFF  ON Alarm	The alarm is occurred and cancelled at the same time when the tag value is changed from Off to On.
Alarm When Changed	The alarm is occurred and cancelled at the same time when the tag value is changed.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-5

12.1.3 Alarm Delay
(1) Alarm Delay Description
Alarm delay is a function to delay the occurrence of an alarm when some abnormal value is produced in the
site by assigning a certain delay time to each tag and comparing the value after the specified time and the
one before the initial occurrence of the alarm to prompt an alarm in stead of prompting an alarm immediately
when some abnormal value is produced.The alarm delay diagram is as follows
(2) Alarm Delay settings
You need to set the following two items to use the Alarm Delay function. First of all, enter the delay time value
in the alarm setting property window when editing tags. This value should be set for each tag individually.
Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-6
The alarm delay time is applied all alarms of the relevant tag. Then, for the item to be set next, in the bin
directory of the InfoU installation directory, open the iuDataProcess.ini file with a notepad or other editing
tools.
After setting the value of the following item as TRUE in the ini configuration file, save it.

DP_ALARMDELAY_FLAG=TRUE

If you start up the InfoU runtime, you can check the alarm delay time is applied.

Notice

Setting the alarm delay time may cause considerable load when applying it to the InfoU runtime.
Alarm delay time settings should be used only if absolutely necessary.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-7

12.2 Alarm Group Settings
If any alarm occurs, alarm sounding, printing, sending SMS and sending e-mail are carried out as actions against
the relevant alarm. Those actions are set up for each alarm group. Therefore, several tags are registered in one
alarm group and if any alarm occurs in one of the registerd tags, the designated actions to the group are
performed.
12.2.1 Alarm Group Management
(1) Basic Settings
Select ‘Alarm Management’ from InfoU Exploerer. If there are alarm groups that have been already registered,
the alarm group list appears under the ‘Alarm Management.’ If one alarm group is selected, information on
the alarm group is displayed.
Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-8
1) Add
Click the right key of the mouse and check ‘Add’ menu.
An empty box in the Alarm Group Settings’ is displayed.
If a new name is designated to the existing alarm group without any modification, a new alarm group is
registered..
2) Edit
Click the right key of the mouse after selecting an alarm group and check ‘Edit.’
Selecting an alarm group itself plays the same role as selecting ‘Edit’ does.
Existing settings are displayed in the ‘Alarm Group Settings’’
After modifying settings, finish editing with saving.
3) Delete
Select an alarm group to delete. Click the right key of the mouse and check ‘Delete’ menu.
The selected alarm group is deleted.
(2) Alarm group property window
If you select the alarm group name in the alarm group list or select the [Edit] menu, the settings of the alarm
group will be displayed in the alarm group property widow on the right side. For the description on each item,
refer to [Alarm Group Settings].

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-9

12.2.2 Alarm Group Settings
The alarm group setting screen is as below.
The single setting items at the top of the screen are saved only when you press the [Apply] button in the middle.
After the single items setting is saved, multiple setting times such as printer and receiving user, tag list, etc. are
activated. The multiple setting items are automatically saved.
(1) General

Items	Description
Name	Input name of the alarm group. If changing the existing name, the group is automatically acknowledged additionally
Description	Input description of the alarm group

Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-10
(2) Level and Ack Process

Items	Description
Alarm Group	Select the level of alarm group. (1 ~ 10)
Ack User	Select a level of the acknowledged users(1 ~ 255)
Ack Process	If ‘Ack Process’ is selected, any alarm can not be deleted from the alarm list without the user’s acknowledgement. Even though it has been set up in the ‘Alarm Settings’ that any alarm can be deleted without acknowledgement, ‘Ack Process’ check should have priority over those settings.

(3) Alarm Sound

Items	Description
Alarm Sound	In case of the occurrence of any alarm, output of a wave file is set up for a particular group.
Alarm Level	Alarm sound is generated only when the alarm level is higher than the designated alarm level.
Alarm Sound No.	Select the number of alarm sound. (Unlimited / No Sound)
File	Select an alarm sound to generate. Select a wave file.

(4) Send E-mail

Items	Description
Send E-mail	Select whether to use Send E-Mail in case of the occurrence of any alarm in the current group..
Title	Input a title of the mail when sending e-mail on alarm information
Return Address	Input e-mail address of the sender when sending e-mail on alarm information.

(5) Auto Print

Items	Description
Auto Print	Select whether to use Auto Print in case of the occurrence of any alarm in the current group.
Alarm Level	Auto Print is processed only when the alarm level is higher than the designated alarm level.

(6) Send SMS

Items	Description
Send SMS	Select whether to use SMS in case of the occurrence of any alarm in the current group.
Return Phone Number	Input the phone number of the sender who will be displayed when sending SMS.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-11

(7) Printer
Indicate a printer to be used for alarm output.
Be cautious that only line printers are supported in this system.
(8) Receiving User
Send e-mail or SMS to the registered users. The User must be registered previously when to use.
(9) Link Tag Settings
Link Tag Settings are to register a tag to an alarm group. For this, select a tag from the additional tag browser
and register it. If any alarm occurs in the selected tag here, the actions that have been designated to the
corresponding alarm group are processed.
If the tag browser is displayed, select a tag to add to the list. It is also available to select multiple tags.
Once selecting is completed, the selected tag is added to the Link Tag list.
If you want to delete tags from the alarm group, after selecting the tag on the tag list screen of the alarm
setting window, press the [Delete] button to remove the registered tag. Deleting the alarm tag in the alarm
group setting window is just the function to cancel tag registration, it does not mean the registered tag is not
actually deleted.
Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-12
12.3 Alarm Service
When the events such as occurrence and cancellation of alarms are generated in the InfoU runtime, the alarm
service items describe how a user recognizes it by various means and manage them.
12.3.1 Alarm Sound
Among alarm service items, the alarm sound is related to sounds. It shows you how to generate the preset sound
and recognize and manage it when an alarm occurs.
(1) Occurrence of alarm sound
When the sound is set for the alarm group including the tag where the alarm occurred, the relevant WAVE
file will be output. In the real-time alarm list, the sound is generated in the order of age with the highest
priority (low level value). When a user recognizes the alarm tag, the alarm sound will be cleared.
(2) Alarm sound stop
You can stop the alarm sound by using the ‘Sound Stop’ function of the alarm viewer or the script. However,
this is temporary suspension, namely, the sound conditions of the tag targeted by the alarm sound are not
cleared. After stopping the sound, if a user commands restart of sound, the sound will resume for the
previous alarm tag.
When the alarm is sounded, the sound will stop in the following cases.
[Cases to stop the alarm sound]

Sound stop cases	Description
When the alarm sound is recognized	If a user recognizes the alarm, the sound will stop. Then, the next alarm of the real-time alarm list will be sounded.
When full recognition is done	If a user recognizes alarms fully, all currently occurring alarms will be recognized. It means sound occurrence conditions on the real-time alarm will be removed. After that, when a new alarm subject to sound occurs, it will be sounded.
When the alarm is deleted from the real-time alarm list	The alarm sound is intended for the real-time alarm list. When the alarm is deleted from the real-time list, the alarm will stop. Then, the next target will be selected and sounded.
Sound stop button / stop script	When a user stops the sound through the ‘Sound Stop’ button of the alarm viewer or the script, the sound will be suspended. This is just the temporary pause function of the sound so it does not mean the alarm sound will be removed completely. If you execute the ‘Sound Start’ command, the alarm will be sounded again.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-13

(3) Alarm sound settings
The alarm sound engine gets the desired alarm group data from the real-time list on the specified cycle and
generates sound. If you want to generate sound targeting the cycle to check the tags for alarm sound or the
desired alarm group only, you can specify actions of the sound engine by editing the setting file.
Open [InfoU project folder]- [Config folder] –[iuAlarm.ini file] using a notepad, etc.
The item related to the alarm sound is [iuAlarmAgent] section and you can specify the following items.

Items	Description
SoundAlarm groupFilter	By using the vertical line(vertical bar), set the alarm group to generate the sound as the condition. The default is ALL(whole groups). For example, if you want to set up “AlmGroup1” and “AlmGroup2”, set as follows. SoundAlarm groupFilter =AlmGroup1\|AlmGroup2 If you want to target the alarm group “A”, “B”, “C”, set as follows. SoundAlarm groupFilter=A\|B\|C If you want to target all alarm groups rather than specifying a certain alarm group, set as ALL. SoundAlarm groupFilter=ALL
SoundAlarmScanTime	Set the cycle to communicate with the alarm server. The unit is a millisecond. If the set value is too small, it may lower the performance of the InfoU system. SoundAlarmScanTime=2000

12.3.2 Common Items for Alarm Service
The items required for the line printer output, sending out mails and SMS are performed through common and
individual items of [InfoU project folder]- [Config folder] –[iuAlarm.ini file].
(1) AS_CONFIG section
Through AS_CONFIG section, you can specify the common and individual items to perform printer, mail and
SMS functions.

Items	Description
PrinterColSize	It specifies the line printer’s column length (printer).
ValuePrecision	It specifies the decimal points when using the value (common).

Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-14
(2) Column specified items (common)
They are the basic items to specify columns for services.
The rule of “column name=length” is applied.

Column definition	Description	Remarks
TAG_NAME	Tag name
ALM_TIME	Time	When the columns are specified for mail and SMS functions, enter the time of alarm occurrence. For the printer, enter the occurrence/recovery time according to the occurrence/recovery. [Format] YYYY/MM/DD HH24:MI:SS.MMM 2013/05/31 11:19:46.971
ALM_TYPE	Alarm type	PROCESS / SYSTEM / EVENT
ALM_AREA	Alarm group	-
TAG_TYPE	Tag type	ANALOG / DIGITAL
ALM_KIND	Alarm kind	HH / HI / LO / LL Change Val, Main Gap / Sub Gap OFF / ON / ONOFF / OFFON / CHANGE
ALM_LEVEL	Alarm level	-
ALM_CURVAL	Current value	-
ALM_PREVVAL	Previous value	-
ALM_MSG	Message	Occurring string / Recovery string
ALM_INFO	Tag information	-
UNIT_ONOFF	Unit ON/OFF STRING	In the case of the analog tat, unit is output. In the case of the digital tag, ON/OFF string is output.
USER_DEF1	User definition 1	-
USER_DEF2	User definition 2	-
USER_DEF3	User definition 3	-

12.3.3 Automatic Printout of the Line Printer
It is the function to print out the items automatically with the registered line printer when an alarm occurs and is
cleared. A user can perform the desired functions by specifying the item and length to print out and by editing
[InfoU project folder]- [Config folder] –[iuAlarm.ini file]. Then, you can specify the column and length using
[AS_COLLIST_PRINTER] section of the ini file. For using column, refer to the column specified items (common).

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-15

Example of Use) [AS_COLLIST_PRINTER] section of the iuAlarm.ini file

[AS_COLLIST_PRINTER]
ALM_TIME=25
ALM_TYPE=10
TAG_NAME=30
ALM_KIND=10
TAG_TYPE=10
ALM_CURVAL=20
ALM_MSG=20
UNIT_ONIFF=10

12.3.4 Mail Sending
It is the function to send out the alarm details to a user’s e-mail account, when the alarm occurs in the nfoU. The
InfoU sends out an e-mail to users through the external mail server (SMTP server). This section describes how to
set up the items to use the mail sending function stage by stage.
(1) Project option settings
Select the [Alarm E-Mail Notify] option in [System Settings]- [Project Property] of the InfoU engineering.
Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-16
(2) User Settings
After registering the user in [User Settings] of the InfoU engineering, put a check the e-mail and reception
columns.
(3) Alarm property settings
You can set up the following items in [System Settings]  [Alarm Property] of the InfoU engineering.

Item	Description
Mail server	Enter the mail server address. Ex.) Google : smtp.gmail.com
Mail Verification	If authentication is required, put a check Mail Verification.
Mail ID	Enter the ID of a mail account.
Password	Enter the password of a mail account.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-17

Notice

The InfoU adopts the external mail server to use mail function. The setting items of mail server means the foresaid
mail server. (Not the final destination of the mail)
☞ As shown in the fig., if you set the SMTP server as smtp.gmail.com, the flow of the mail data is as below.

Occurrence of
InfoU alarm



Via the mail server
(smtp.gmail.com)
(Using the account hong@gmail.com)



Arriving at the destination
(user E-mail)
(hong@naver.com)

(4) SSL Settings
The majority of the previous SMTP servers were confined to simple SMTP mail servers without the security
function. However, recently, the importance of security has been strengthened so the existing simple SMTP
mail servers gradually disappear. In the InfoU, you can set the mail server using the SSL(Secured Socket
Layer). To set up the SSL mail server, you can perform the function by editing [InfoU project folder]- [Config
folder] –[iuAlarm.ini file] (SSL section).
[SSL Section]

Item	Description
SSLUse	To use the SSL function, the value should be set as 1.
SSLPort	Specify the port used for the SSL mail server. (Ex.) For Google mail server: 465

Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-18
[Example of Use]
(5) Alarm group settings
Alarm group settings related to mail transmission are as follows.
For the overall settings of other alarm groups, refer to the items of [Alarm Group Settings].

Item	Description
Send E-mail (check)	When an alarm occurs, put a check this to use the mail transmission function.
Title	Set up the mail title.
Return Address	Set up the address of the mail to be sent out.
Receiving user	When the alarm occurs in the tag registered in the alarm group, you need to register the user who will receive the mail. It should be preregistered in User Settings.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-19

(6) Mail tag item settings
When an alarm occurs, the tag items received by a mail are similar to those of a printer.
You can choose the desired item by editing [InfoU project folder]- [Config folder] –[iuAlarm.ini file]. Then,
specify the column and length through the [AS_COLLIST_EMAIL] section of the Ini file. For using column,
refer to the column specified items (common).

[AS_COLLIST_EMAIL]
TAG_NAME =-1
ALM_LEVEL=-1
ALM_LEVEL=-1
ALM_CURVAL=-1

Notice

☞ When setting the column length as -1, the whole length of the tag column data is used instead of being cut
in the specified length.
☞ Unlike a printer or SMS with the limit on the whole length, an e-mail has no limit so you can input -1.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-20
12.3.5 SMS Transmission
It is the function to send a text message to a user’s cell phone through the external CDMA modem when an alarm
occurs.
The InfoU adopts BSM-856R model that is the external CDMA modem made by Telit wireless solutions.
After purchasing the modem, you need to enroll in the telecom companies to start up the service. Then, you can
perform SMS functions only when the modem is connected to a computer through RS-232C
[BSM-856R]
LSIS does not sell this device directly so for more details on purchasing the modem and starting services, refer to
the manufacturer’s website.
This section describes how to set up SMS functions stage by stage on the guess that your external CDMA modem
is normally opened and connected to a computer.
(1) Project Option Settings
Select the [Alarm SMS Notify] option in [System Settings]- [Project property] of the InfoU engineering.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-21

(2) User Settings
After registering the user in [User Settings] of the InfoU engineering, put a check the cell phone and SMS.
(3) Alarm Property of System Settings
You can set up the following items in [System Settings]  [Alarm Property] of the InfoU engineering.

Item	Description
Telecom Company	SKT:BSM-856
COM PORT	Select the communication port connected to the external CDMA modem.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management
12-22

Notice

Recently, most of the computers do not have a serial port.
In this case, you can set up the serial port function using the USB port.
After purchasing USB and connecting it to a serial cable, if you install the driver, the system will work normally.
Then, the COM PORT No. will be registered and displayed in the device manager.
In the below fig., select [COM6] for InfoU settings.

(4) Alarm Group Settings
Alarm group settings related to SMS transmission are as follows.
For the overall settings of other alarm groups, refer to the items of [Alarm Group Settings].

Item	Description
Send SMS(check)	In order to use the SMS transmission function when an alarm occurs, put a check this.
Return Phone Number	Set the return phone number.
Receiving user	When the alarm occurs in the tag registered in the alarm group, you need to register the user who will receive the SMS. It should be preregistered in User Settings.

Chapter 12 Alarm Management

12-23

(5) SMS Tag Item Settings
When an alarm occurs, the tag items forming SMS are similar to those of a printer.
You can choose the desired item by editing [InfoU project folder]- [Config folder] –[iuAlarm.ini file]. Then,
specify the column and length through the [AS_COLLIST_SMS] section of the Ini file. However, in the case of
SMS (Short Message Service), the length of contents is limited so you need to specify the proper size of each
item. For using column, refer to the column specified items (common).
Example of Use) [AS_COLLIST_SMS] section of the iuAlarm.ini file

[AS_COLLIST_SMS]
TAG_NAME=20
ALM_KIND=10
ALM_MSG=10

Chapter 13 Logging Management

13-1

Chapter 13 Logging Management
Important data needed for logging management can be managed under the data logging group created in
accordance with the user’s purpose.
It is possible to assign one tag data to multiple logging groups for diverse data analyses.
● Inquiry of Logging Data
Data can be inquired from Trend, Report or List Trend, and API, which can be inquired from script, is provided.
● Automatically calculated statistics/integrated data
Statistics/integrated data are created without the use of additional scripts or applications.
● Backup
Backup is available for all of the logging groups and backup files can be inquired from Trend and List Trend.
13.1 Logging Type
The logging group editor sets up a logging group that the history server will collect during the Runtime and various
logging data are acquired and saved based on the logging group.
13.1.1 Logging Type
Logging groups can be divided into Cycle, Statistics, Accumulation, String, Event, Selective Log and Event String
groups depending on their type and they are acquired and saved in either periodic or event way.

Logging Group Type	Description
Cycle	Tag values are acquired in a certain cycle.
Statictics	Statistics data on the designated tag are created periodically.
Accumulation	Statistics data on the accumulation values of the tag in which values have been accumulated are created periodically.
String	String tag values are acquired in a certain cycle.
Event	Tag values are acquired in an event way according to event conditions.
Selective Log	Tag values are acquired periodically according to event conditions.
Event String	String tag values are acquired in an event way according to event conditions.

The following data can be inquired from Report or Trend according to the type of the logging group.

Logging Group Type	Description
Cycle	Analog (Current Value), Digital (Current Status)
Statictics	Analog (Current Value, Min Value, Min Time, Max Value, Max Time, Average Value), Digital(On Count, Operation Time, Change Count)
Accumulation	Analog (Change Amount, Current Value)
String	String(Current Value)

Chapter 13 Logging Management
13-2

Event	Analog (Current Value), Digital(Current Status)
Selective Log	Analog (Current Value), Digital (Current Status)
Event String	String(Current Value)

13.1.2 Calculation Method for Logging Data
[HDD capacity calculation method for data collection]
Up to 40 tags can be registered in one logging group and 40 tag values can be saved at the same time with one
saving.
Each logging group can save the following amount of data for one time:
● Cycle Logging: 1,048 byte
● Statistics and Accumulation: 3,768 byte
● Stirng Logging: 5,768 byte
Needed disc capacity: Data to be saved per time x logging count
● If it is planned to save data every second for one day under cycle logging,
1,048 X (60 X 60 X 24) = 90,547,200 byte (about 86.35 MB)
● If it is planned to save statistics data every hour for one year,
3,768 X (24 X 365) = 33,007,680 byte (about 31.47 MB)
● If it is planned to save string data every minute for one month,
5,768 X (60 X 24 X 31) = 257,483,520 byte (about 245.55 MB)

Chapter 13 Logging Management

13-3

13.2 Logging Settings
13.2.1 Configuration Interface
If [Tool] – [Logging Management] is selected from the InfoUD menu, a screen as seen in [Figure] appears.
Or, this screen can be displayed by selecting [Logging Management] from the InfoU explorer.
This screen consists of the following components:
(1) Logging Group Tree View
Logging group items are displayed in the InfoU explorer. The kinds of logging groups and the logging groups
set up by the user are displayed in the tree. Logging groups can be newly added, edited or deleted by clicking
on the right button of the mouse.
(2) Logging Group Property Settings
Properties of the set up logging group are displayed. Adding and editing logging groups are also available.
Acquisition method items are displayed differently depending on the kinds of the logging groups and they can
be saved by clicking on “Apply” button.
Chapter 13 Logging Management
13-4
(3) Logging Tag List
Tags registered in the logging group are displayed in a list form.
The acquired tags can be registered or deleted with “Add Tag” or “Delete Tag,”
13.2.2 Add, Edit and Delete
By clicking the right button of the mouse on the “Logging Management” of the InfoU explorer, logging groups can
be added, edited or deleted.
(1) Add
A new logging group is added. If “Add” is selected and the initialized right screen is filled in with new information,
properties of the newly added logging group can be set up.
The logging group can be saved if “Apply” button is clicked after setting up is completed.
Detailed settings for each logging group type are explained below.
(2) Edit
Properties of the existing logging group are edited. The changed contents are saved if “Apply” button is clicked
after property editing is completed.
Also, properties can be edited on the right view screen if the relevant item is selected with the mouse.
※ A new logging group can be added by changing only the name of the existing logging group on the editing
screen. At this time, the same property information as that of the previously displayed data will be saved.
(3) Delete
The selected logging group is deleted.

Chapter 13 Logging Management

13-5

13.2.3 General
Logging group settings are carried out through the following two steps:
(1) Logging Group Settings
An acquisition method is set up along with logging group type, logging group name and logging group
description, and storage and backup of logging groups are also set up. Up to 256 logging groups can be set
up in a project.
Especially, a sufficient space shall be secured in the hard disc when setting backup.
Acquisition methods are displayed on different setting screens depending on the type of logging groups.
1) Logging Group Type: Select one among Cycle, Accumulation and String.
2) Logging Group Name: Input a name to identify the relevant logging group. Up to 31 letters are available to
input.
3) Logging Group Description: Input description on the logging group. Up to 63 letters are available to input.
4) Saving path: It is used to change the saving path. When this is empty, the file is automatically saved to
the default path ("Project/TagLog/LoggingGroupName") so it is recommended not to set this item.
5) Path Selection Button: Click the button to display the path selection dial log.
6) Acquisition Cycle: Select a cycle to acquire data. Acquisition cycle may set up differently depending on
the type of the logging group.
7) Storage Period: Set up a storage period of the history file. For storage period, select one between number
1 and 100 and for unit, select one among time, day and month.
8) Number of files: The logging files are created as you enter and if the number exceeds the limit, the file will
be deleted in order of age.
9) Apply: The inputted information on the logging group is saved.
Chapter 13 Logging Management
13-6
The storage period of the file depending on the archiving cycle is as below.

Archiving cycle	Storage period	Number of files	Max. of storage period
1 ~ 30sec	1day	1 ~ 90	90day
1 ~ 30min	1month	1 ~ 36	3year
1 ~ 12hour	1year	1 ~ 3	3year
1day	1year	1 ~ 3	3year

Notice

☞ Storage period settings
The “storage period” is fixed in accordance with the "archiving cycle" of the logging group.
Instead, you can set to create multiple logging files and the files are automatically connected to query.
To extend the storage period, you just set the “number of files” as long as you want.
Accordingly, the total logging period is “storage period” X “number of files”.
The logging file is created one by one as many as the number of files set during logging and if the number
exceeds the limit, the oldest logging file will be deleted to maintain the number of files.
The default storage path of the file is Project/TagLog/Logging group name (when the “saving path” is a blank).
If you input the “saving path”, the file will be saved to the specified location.

(2) Tag Settings
Once adding logging groups is completed, select a tag that will acquire logging data.
One logging group can save up to 40 tags.
1) Add Tag: Select a tag to save from the tag selector.
2) Delete Tag: Delete the selected tag.

Chapter 13 Logging Management

13-7

13.2.4 Cycle
The minimum acquisition cycle is one second so that this cycle is suitable for fast real-time data logging and it is
mainly used for inquiring sequential values from Trend or Report.
The current value (analog) and the current status (digital) can be inquired.
During the runtime, cycle logging groups are acquired and saved on time.
Ex) If the acquisition cycle is set 2 seconds, logging data are saved every 0, 2, 4, , …, seconds.
Acquisition Settings: Select a cycle and unit. The following cycles can be selected for each unit:

Unit	Available cycles
sec	1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30
min	1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30
hour	1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12
day	1

13.2.5 Statistics
The minimum acquisition cycle is one second so that this logging group type can automatically calculate and save
various statistics data.
It is used to identify data status for a certain period and mainly used for inquiring statistics status from Report or
Trend.
The following data can be inquired.
Analog: current value, min value, min time, max value, max time, average value
Digital: ON count, ON time, change count
Chapter 13 Logging Management
13-8
During the runtime, statistics logging groups are acquired and saved on time.
Ex) If the acquisition cycle is set 2 minutes, logging data are saved every 0, 2, 4, …, minutes.
Acquisition Settings: Select a cycle and unit. The following cycles can be selected for each unit:

Unit	Available cycles
min	1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30
hour	1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12
day	1 ~ 31
month	1 ~ 12

13.2.6 Accumulation
Tags that have accumulation property such as power gauge and fuel indicator are registered and the change
amount for a certain period is calculated and saved.
Change amount for every hour, day or month, that is, consumption amount can be inquired without using any
additional scrip or memory tag.
The following data can be inquired.

Tag Type	Data
Analog	change amount, current value

Chapter 13 Logging Management

13-9

Accumulation statistics data for the accumulation logging group are automatically created every hour, day and
month.
The created accumulation logging groups are classified into _HOUR, _DAY and _MONTH.
During the runtime, accumulation logging groups are acquired and saved on time.
Ex) Data are acquired and saved on the hour for hourly logging groups, at 00:00:00 every day for daily logging
groups and at 00:00:00 on the first day of every month for monthly logging groups.
※ Only analog tags can be set up as accumulation logging groups.
13.2.7 String
During the runtime, string logging groups are acquired and saved on time.
Ex) If the acquisition cycle is set 2 seconds, logging data are saved every 0, 2, 4, , …, seconds.
※ Only string tags can be set up as string logging groups.
Chapter 13 Logging Management
13-10
Acquisition Settings: Select a cycle and unit. The following cycles can be selected for each unit:

Unit	Available cycles
sec	1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30
min	1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30
hour	1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12
day	1

13.2.8 Event
This logging group type is used for saving tag values according to event conditions. Here, changes in digital tag
values play a role in constructing event conditions and these digital tags are called trigger tags. Event logging
groups save the values of 40 tags that belong to the logging groups according to changes in trigger tags.
Event logging groups are set up as follows:
● Trigger Tag: Digital Tag
● Logging: Analog, Digital Tag
● Storage Method: Saved only one time when any event takes place
Event conditions available to be set up in trigger tags are as follows:
● When it is triggered off -> on
● When it is triggered on -> off
● When it is changed on <--> off

Chapter 13 Logging Management

13-11

13.2.9 Selective Log
It is used to save the tag value periodically depending on the event condition. The event condition means the
variation of a digital value that is called the action tag. While the variations of the selective storing logging group
and the condition persist, 40 tag values belonging to the logging group are saved periodically.
Event logging groups are set up as follows:
● Trigger Tag: Digital Tag
● Logging: Analog, Digital Tag
● Storage Method: Saved periodically while the conditions of trigger tags remain when any event takes place.
● Storage Cycle: One second ~ one hour
Event conditions available to be set up in trigger tags are as follows:
● Saved periodically when it is triggered off -> on
● Saved periodically when it is triggered on -> off
Chapter 13 Logging Management
13-12
13.2.10 Event String
It is used to save the string tag value depending on the event condition. The event condition means the variation of
a digital value that is called the action tag. In the event logging group, 40 tag values are saved together
depending on variations of the action tag.
You can set the event string logging group as below.
● Trigger Tag: Digital tag
● Logging: String tag
● Storage method: Saves only 1 time when event occurs
The configurable event conditions in the action tag are as follows.
● When trigger to Off  On
● When trigger to On  Off
● When changes to On  Off

Chapter 14 Script

14-1

Chapter 14 Script
The user can implement various functions he/she needs by writing programs freely.
Since this program is of the Visual Basic Script Type, the user can implement various functions by directly using
the internal functions provided in a type of OLE in addition to general functions provided by the Visual Basic Script:
● VB Script support
● COM, OLE Object Import
● VB Style Text Color and Dot Operation support
● Script grammar error check
The registered script is implemented during the runtime according to the Trigger rule defined in the 'Action Trigger.’
14.1 Start
If “Edit Script” from menu or “Script” from the InfoU explorer is selected, the following script list is displayed.
Chapter 14 Script
14-2
Click the right button of the mouse to show Add, Edit and Delete menu.
● Add : A new script is added. Double click on the empty item, the new input screen is displayed.
● Edit : The selected script is edited. If the item is double clicked, the edit screen is displayed
● Delete : The selected script is deleted.
14.2 Editor Screen
The script editor screen is of Modaless dialog type and it is constructed as follow:
If other item is selected from the above script list while the screen is displayed, information on the selected script is
displayed.
Except the following cases, script modifications along with other changes during the runtime are all reflected at the
same time.
● When a script is added as a new one
● When the option ‘Tag Name Deliver’ is changed
● When the ‘Action Trigger’ is redefined

Chapter 14 Script

14-3

(1) Script Name
● The script name is displayed.
● If the script is renamed and saved, a new script is created and added automatically.
● Any two scripts shall not have the same name.
● Any script name can not be changed when the function option ‘Tag Name Deliver’ is selected.
(2) Script Description
● Input description on the script.
(3) Tag Name Delivery
● Tag names can be delivered in script functions during the runtime.
● Be cautious that the contents that are still written is initialized and the mode is changed if this Tag Name
Delivery is selected.
● The tag name shall be the same with the one used when any “action upon the alarm status” or “action upon
the change in tag values” takes place.
● For details, refer to ‘Hot to use script.
(4) Check Error
● The script that is still written is checked for grammar errors.
● Only grammar errors are detected and neither logical errors nor error data during the runtime can detected.
● If any error is detected, it is displayed on the ‘Script Error Message window’ and the error type and the line
on which the error is detected are displayed in the status bar on the bottom of the editor.
Chapter 14 Script
14-4
(5) Input Tag
● The tag list of the current project is displayed and if a tag is selected, the relevant tag name is inputted on
the editor window.
(6) OK
●The script is checked for grammar errors and if any error is not found, the script is saved and the screen
is ended.
(7) Cancel
● Any modification is cancelled and the screen is ended.
(8) Apply
● The script is checked for grammar errors and if any error is not found, what has been edited is saved.
(9) Editor Toolbar
● The script is implemented on the editor screen and debugging work is also available. For details, refer to
‘How to use.’

Chapter 14 Script

14-5

14.3 How to Use
This explains how to register and use the script.
14.3.1 Use of Internal Fuctions
● Declare iuInterFuncOleSvr objects as follows and assign them by using Set command.
● If “.”(Dot) is inputted in a declared object variant, available functions are displayed upon the Dot Operation.
● Since even the function parameter as seen in the figure below is displayed, it ensures convenient inputting.
Chapter 14 Script
14-6
14.3.2 Tag Name Delivery
A script function is registered as a ‘Tag Name Delivery’ script function and processes to trigger actions are
explained on the ‘Action Trigger’ screen.
● Select ‘Tag Name Delivery’ option on the ‘Script’ screen.
● A sub-routine function (AlarmSend) is created with the same name with that of the script inputted among ‘”Main”
function scripts. At this time, Korean letters can not be used for script names.
● sTagName is declared as a Public variant and the Main function is structured to deliver variants upon the call of
subroutine function.
● vTagName converted to the parameter of AlarmSend(vTagName As Variant) function in the subroutine function
view can be used as a tag name.
● Since the process to deliver the actual tag name can not be carried out on the editor screen while debugging is
performed, debugging can be done in a method of inputting variant values manually with a formula by directly
substituting each tag name on the execution screen.

Chapter 14 Script

14-7

● Then, ‘Action Trigger’ is set up to execute the selected script on the ‘Action Trigger’ screen.
● Select a trigger type on the Action Trigger’ screen. Available action trigger types for “Tag Name Deliver” are
“Alarm Status” and “Tag Value Change.”
● Select and assign a script available for “Tag Name Deliver” as following when selecting a work subject.
Chapter 14 Script
14-8
14.3.3 Editor Debugging
Debugging methods are explained on the ‘Script’ screen.
The inquiry of correct results is ensured only when debugging is worked while the Runtime is executed to have
internal functions act correctly.
The following screen represents one of the script debug screen. Click on [2], [8], [9] and [10] on the ‘Script’ to show
the followings.
(1) Browse Object
● Methods and Parameters of the referred ActiveX object are displayed.
● As default settings, information on the InfoU Function is displayed.

Chapter 14 Script

14-9

(2) Start/Resume:
● The user may execute a script on the editor (Since the execution of a correct function is ensured only when
it is executed during the runtime, a code shall start for debugging).
(3) Pause
● The script that is being played is paused.
(4) End
● The script that is being played is ended and the debug mode is terminated.
(5) Toggle Break
● A break point shall be either selected or cancelled.
● When setting a break point, it should be ensured that it stops at the break point to perform debugging.
(6) Evaluate Expression
● If a variant selected and clicked on the editor window, values are displayed on [12] immediate window.
Chapter 14 Script
14-10
(7) Show Current Statement
● The current statement is shown when executing.
(8) Step Into
● Each line of the scrip is executed one by one. If any ‘Sub Routine’ exists in the relevant line, it steps into the
sub routine for debugging.
(9) Step Over
● The script statement is executed step by step. If any ‘Sub Routine’ exists, it moves to the next step after the
sub routine is executed and its result is returned.
● If any break point exists in the sub routine, it stops at the break point.
(10) Step Out
● It gets out of the current step and goes to upper procedure after completely executing all of the current
functions and loop statements.
● If any break point exists in the sub routine, it stops at the break point.
(11) Edit User Dialog
● This dialog box editor can not be selective during the debugging and it is activated only in the ‘Edit’ mode.
● InfoU does not support this dialog box in the runtime environment.
(12) Immediate
● This ‘Immediate’ window is used as follows.
- Result value when clicking on [6] Evaluate Expression
- Show the return valued of debug.Print
- Change variant values when any ‘Immediate’ formula is inputted.
(13) Watch
● Variants are assigned and function or expression values can be inquired.
● For assigning, select a variant and click the right side of the mouse to select Debug-->Add Watch.

Chapter 14 Script

14-11

(14) Stack
● The call list of the current execution line is shown.
(15) Menu Function
● If the right side of the mouse is clicked, a menu is shown and it has functions available in the debug mode
as well as functions available in the Edit mode.
(16) Help
● Help’ is available for overall information on various functions and script languages provided by the editor.
Chapter 14 Script
14-12

Chapter 14 Script

14-13

14.3.4 How to use DLL
How to use external DLL functions in the script is explained.
DLL API use: It is an example of declaration of ‘Sleep’ function included in System KERNEL32.DLL.
14.3.5 How to use OLE object
It is an example of file ‘Open and Write’. (Refer to examples in Demo projects.)
… … …
Chapter 14 Script
14-14
14.3.6 Error Handling
It is an example of how to handle errors (Refer to examples in Demo projects.)
Write On Error statement on the top of the error to be handled. If any error occurs below the On Error statement, it
moves to the Error Handle Statement written next to Goto Statement.
Since On Error statement is effective until it meets with the next On Error statement, ‘Error Handle’ is possible
according to work steps by writing the On Error statement at several locations.
By using the ‘On Error Resume Next Statement’, the next codes can be performed seamlessly even any minor
error occurs.

Chapter 14 Script

14-15

14.4 Runtime Debug
By providing the debug screen during the Runtime, this ensures the user inspects the current execution status of
the script and check for any operational and logical error.
● Execution
Click the right side of the mouse on the InfoU tray icon during the Runtime to select ‘Scrip Debug’ from the
pop-up menu and show the screen below.
Chapter 14 Script
14-16
The output written in Debug.Print [expr] on the ‘Script’ screen is displayed as a result during the runtime

Chapter 14 Script

14-17

● Runtime Debugging
This screen is displayed as the highest window.
-Debug: Select whether to conduct debug works,
-Scroll: Scroll the screen to show the latest list.
-System: Select whether to execute script except Debug.Print construction.
-Logging: Save debugging contents in the Log folder on the current project path.
-Include: The letters to be displayed are filtered and displayed.
-Exclude: The letters to be excluded are filtered and displayed.
-Highlight: The contents included as inputted letters are highlighted with colors.
-Include, Exclude and Highlight can be overlapped by using [;].
-Save: The current settings and the debug screen size are saved and the current conditions will be
displayed on the screen in the next execution.
-Hide: The debug screen is hid.
-Clear: All of the lists currently displayed are deleted.
-Debug Exit: The runtime debug is ended and the screen is closed.

Chapter 15 Function

15-1

Chapter 15 Function
Various default functions are presented to perform various actions in the InfoU system. The following list shows
functions that can be used for Script and OLE Automation.
15.1 Funtion Inquire
After logging in withInfoUD.exe, select ‘Function’ under ‘Script’ on the InfoU Explorer’ To see detailed information
on a certain function, select and click on the relevant function with mouse. Then, input ‘Return Value’ of the
relevant function on the 'Function Detail Information’ screen to display a list that shows the properties and
description of each parameter requested in the relevant function in regular sequence

Notice

☞ For the example of the internal function and detailed usage, refer to ‘Internal Functions’ of the
Appendix.

Chapter 16 Action Trigger

16-1

Chapter 16 Action Trigger
Action Trigger is set up during the runtime to execute input and output works of the script, recipe and database.
The relevant application can be executed by setting up Action Trigger according to ‘Schedule’, ‘Tag Value Chang’
or ‘Alarm Status’.
One-stop settings for various application actions at one place ensure an effective and systematic control.
16.1 Start
If ‘Action Trigger’ in the menu or ‘Edit Script’ in the InfoU explorer is selected, the list of action trigger is
displayed as follows:
Click the right button of the mouse on the list of Action Trigger to show Add, Edit and Delete menu.
● Add: A new action trigger is added. Double click on the empty item to display the new input screen.
● Edit: The selected action trigger is edited. Double click an item to display the edition screen.
● Delete: Delete the selected action trigger.
Chapter 16 Action Trigger
16-2
16.2 Configuration
16.2.1 General Information
The edition screen of action trigger is of the dialog type and it is organized as follows:
If other item is selected from the above action trigger list while the screen is displayed, information on the
selected action trigger is displayed.
Any modification, which may be created during the edition of action trigger, is not reflected during the runtime and
it is applied after the runtime is restarted.
(1) Name
● The action trigger name is displayed.
● If the action trigger is renamed and saved, a new action trigger is created and added automatically.
● Any two action trigger s shall not have the same name.
(2) Description
Input description on the action trigger.
(3) Run
It displays whether to execute the script actions during the runtime.
(4) Type
The script actions are triggered by one of the following condition according to the designated settings:

Chapter 16 Action Trigger

16-3

● Schedule
● Tag Vale Change
● Alarm Status
(5) Operation and Order
Select an operation to execute among the defined actions and designate the order.
Click the right side of the mouse on the list to show the menu below.
● Add: Click an additional menu or double click to show a screen for selecting a new operation.
● Delete: Delete the selected operation from the list.
You can select the task item in the below screen.
There are 3 types of task items; “script”, “recipe”, “DB works”.
If you select the type of task items on the right side, the type will be displayed on the list.
Chapter 16 Action Trigger
16-4
1) Script list
In case of the script, whether forwarding the tag name is displayed.

Notice

☞ In the task item, you can just select the script.
☞ You can add, delete and edit the script in the below script menu.

Chapter 16 Action Trigger

16-5

2) Recipe list
The recipe is based on the tree type of the model, unit and data; you can just select the item of the lowest
level only.

Notice

☞ In the task item, you can just select the recipe.
☞ You can add/delete/edit the recipe in the below recipe setting menu.

Chapter 16 Action Trigger
16-6
3) DB operation item

Notice

☞ In the task item, you can just select the DB operation items.
☞ You can add/delete/edit the DB operation in the below DB operation menu.

Chapter 16 Action Trigger

16-7

16.2.2 Schedule
(1) General Information
If ‘Schedule' is selected for ‘Type’,
Designate Schedule’ becomes activated and here, one of [Once], [Periodically], [Daily],[Weekly], [Monthly]
and [Holiday] can be selected.
(2) Once
Chapter 16 Action Trigger
16-8
● Designate Start Date: If ‘Designate Start Date’ is selected, it is allowed to input date and time to start the
selected operation and it is executed only once at the designated time.
● System Status: The operation is executed according to the system’s management status over the project.
- Project Start
- Project Close
- Redundancy Switch
(3) Periodically
● Start Date/Time: Time point at which the periodic cycle actions start
● Cycle: Input a cycle of actions.
● End Date/Time: Designate date and time to stop actions.
(4) Daily
● Start Date/Time: Time to start daily actions. If any time interval is not set up, actions are executed only once
at the relevant time.
● End Date: Designate date to stop actions

Chapter 16 Action Trigger

16-9

● End Time/Cycle: Input ‘End time’ and a cycle of actions executed from the time to execute to the time to
end.
(5) Weekly
● Set Day: Select a day to execute actions. Multiple choices are allowed.
● Start Time: Time to start actions on the relevant day. If any time interval is not set up, actions are executed
only once at the relevant time.
● Endtime/Cycle: Input ‘End time’ and a cycle of actions executed from the time to execute to the time to end.
(6) Monthly
● Select Day: Select a day to execute actions in the relevant month. Click the mouse on a day to select and
the selected day is highlighted in yellow.
● Start Time: Time to start actions on the relevant day and If any time interval is not set up, actions are
executed only once at the relevant time.
● End Time/Cycle Setting: Input ‘End time’ and a cycle of actions executed from the time to execute to the
time to end.
Chapter 16 Action Trigger
16-10
(7) Hoilday
● Start Time: Time to start actions on the relevant date and If any time interval is not set up, actions are
executed only once at the relevant time. It is possible to include Saturday.
● End Time/Cycle: Input ‘End time’ and a cycle of actions executed from the time to execute to the time to
end.
16.2.3 Tag Value Change
● Type: Select [Tag Value Change].

Chapter 16 Action Trigger

16-11

● Tag Name: If [3] is clicked, the tag selection screen is displayed and the tag name is inserted in box for tag
name if one of tags is selected.
● Tag Selection Button: Click on this button to display the screen below and select a tag on the screen.
● Conditional Expression: Conditional Expression of the inputted tag value.
- [Change Value]: The operation is conducted if the tag value is changed. Not available to set up
Conditional Expression. Not available to input values
- [ = ]: The action is performed if the tag value is equal to the set-up value.
- [ <> ]: The condition is implemented when the tag value is different form the set-up value
- [ > ]: The condition is implemented when the tag value is higher than the set-up value
- [ >= ]: The condition is implemented when the tag value is higher or equal to the set-up value
- [ < ]: The condition is implemented when the tag value is lower than the set-up value
- [ <= ]: The condition is implemented when the tag value is lower or equal to the set-up value
● AND / OR: Implemented when Conditional Expression 1 and Conditional Expression 2 are AND(OR).
Chapter 16 Action Trigger
16-12
16.2.4 Alarm Status
● Type: Select [Alarm Status]
● Tag Alarm: Set up actions for each tag upon the occurrence of alarm.
● Alarm Group: Set up actions for each tag that belongs to an alarm group upon the occurrence of alarm.
● The following items are displayed according to the mode of Tag Alarm and Alarm Group:
- Tag Name: Click on [5] to display the tag selection screen and input the selected tag name on the
screen.
- Alarm Group: Click on [5] to display the alarm group selection screen and input the selected alarm group
name on the screen.
● Tag/Alarm Group Selection: Click to display the ‘Tag/Alarm Group Selection’ screen and select a tag
(alarm group) on the screen.

Chapter 16 Action Trigger

16-13

● Alarm Type: Available alarm types are displayed differently between digital and analog tags.
- Digital
- Analog
- Alarm Group
Chapter 16 Action Trigger
16-14
16.3 Holiday Settings
(1) Start
If ‘Holiday Settings’ in the menu or the InfoU explorer is selected, the list of action trigger is displayed as
follows:
Click the right button of the mouse on the list of Action Trigger to show Add, Edit and Delete menu.
● Add: A new action trigger is added. Double click on the empty item to display the new input screen.
● Edit: The selected action trigger is edited. Double click on the item is double clicked to display the edition
screen.
● Delete: Delete the selected action trigger.

Chapter 16 Action Trigger

16-15

(2) Edition Screen
The holiday setting edition screen is of modaless dialog type and it is constructed as follows:
If other item is selected from the above action trigger list while the screen is displayed, information on the
selected action trigger is displayed.
. ●
Holiday Name: The selected holiday name is displayed or other holiday name can be newly inputted.
● Date: Input the holiday date.
● Yearly: Set up whether it is repeatedly executed every year or only one time.
● Solar/Lunar: Select either Solar or Lunar
● Calendar: If a date is selected, the date is inputted in the box for holiday date.
● OK: The contents newly designated are saved and the screen is closed.
● Cancel: The contents newly designated are not saved and the screen is closed.
● Apply: The contents newly designated are saved and the work is continued.

Notice

☞ Any modification, which may be created during the edition of action trigger, is not reflected during the
runtime and it is applied after the runtime is restarted.

Chapter 17 User Settings

17-1

Chapter 17 User Settings
Users are registered for each project and only the registered users are allowed to use InfoU. That is, the registered
users are given authority to access to various InfoU functions but their access to some InfoU functions is limited
according to their level of authority.
● Alarm Notification Function
The users registered in Alarm Group are notified through e-mail or SMS in case of the occurrence of any
alarm.
● Limited Functions by Level
The same as tag levels (1~255), the users are assigned level 1 through 255 and according to this level, their
authority to execute and use various InfoU functions such as tag control, inquiry and alarm
acknowledgement is limited.
17.1 Setting Screen
(1) Start
Select User Settings in the InfoU explorer or the menu.
(2) User List
A list of the registered users is displayed to allow the user to delete or modify.
Chapter 17 User Settings
17-2

Notice

☞ Admin: System administrator’s account as the user registered basically. This account can not be
changed except password.

(3) User Settings
When newly registering a user or modifying, input information on the user..
1) Essential Information
a. User ID: Input User ID.
b. Password: Input password.
c. Confirm Password: Re-input password for confirmation.
2) Level (1~255)
Select a level. Level 1 through level 255 is available.
3) Basic Information
a. Name: Input the user name.
b. Description: Give additional information except the user name.
4) Contract
a. Company: The usesr’s company
b. Phone No.: Contactable wire telephone number
c. Cell Phone: User’s mobile phone number. This information is essential if Option SMS receiving
has been selected.
d. E-mail: User’s e-mail information. This information is essential if Option e-mail receiving has been
selected.
e. SMS: Check √ in the box if the user wants to receive alarm information through SMS in case of
the occurrence of alarm in the alarm group the user is registered in.
f. E-mail: Check √ in the box if the user wants to receive alarm information through e-mail in case of
the occurrence of alarm in the alarm group the user is registered in
5) New
The user information is initialized to allow the user to input new information.
6) Save
The registered new information or modified information is saved.
In case of new registration, the user is added to the list.
7) Delete
The selected user’s information in the list is deleted from DB.

Chapter 18 Recipe

18-1

Chapter 18 Recipe
Recipe is a function used when producing various products on the same production/process line according to the
prescribed values and it defines a model and controls the process with the combination of component tags (units)
and defined values (data). As a method used for large varieties but in small volumes, this function is applicable to
various fields.
18.1 Component
To perform the recipe functions, the user needs to understand model, unit and data concept.
18.1.1 Model
It defines a recipe template on the same production/process line and it also defines a model and its components
(items). After a model is defined, settings on the model items are not changeable if units and data have been
already inputted
18.1.2 Unit
It defines a tag collection subordinated to the defined model and it also defines the tags that have the same
number with that of the defined items for the model. That is, it has information on the set for the actually controlled
points.
18.1.3 Data
It defines a data set subordinated to the defined model and it also defines the actually controlled values.
● Example of Recipe Definition – Coffee Vending Machine

When a person is about to drink a cup of coffee from the vending machine, he/she needs to define its model.
The coffee vending machine (model) consists of three components- coffee, cream and sugar (item).
If the vending machine is in the building, its physical location (unit) has to be defined as a vending machine on the
first floor or a vending machine on the second floor.
Then, the person needs to decide whether to drink black coffee, cream coffee or cream and sugar coffee and
define data on the amount of coffee, milk or sugar that will be actually inserted.
If the person wants to drink a cup of milk coffee from the second floor vending machine, he/she can drink the
coffee he/she wants at the place he/she wants with three combinations of model (coffee vending machine), unit
(second floor) and data (milk coffee).

Chapter 18 Recipe
18-2
18.2 Settings
Select ‘Tool’-‘Recipe Settings’ in the InfoU menu to display the screen as seen in [Figure].
A list of the registered recipe models appears on the screen and detailed information on the relevant model can be
viewed or edited through double clicking on each item or pop-up menu.
The following pop-up menu appears upon the click on the list screen.
● Add : This is a menu used when a new recipe model is registered. A blank screen appears if this menu is
selected.Up to 64 models can be registered.
● Edit: This is a menu used when the information on the selected model is viewed or modified.
● Delete: If selected, a window appears to ask the user to confirm deleting. If “Yes” is selected, the relevant model
is deleted and the units and data that belong to the model are also deleted.

Chapter 18 Recipe

18-3

18.2.1 Model Information
A screen to set up a recipe model. Item on the model and three items such as item, unit and data are divided with
taps.
(1) Property
● Name: Register a name of the model. Duplication is not allowed.
● Control Level : Input a control level 1 through 255. The level of the InfoU user shall be higher than the
control level of the recipe model to control the recipe (Level 1 is the highest one and Level 255 is the lowest
one).
● Description: Register description on the recipe model.
● Item Information: Register items (components) that consist of the model. Up to 64 items are available to
register for one model.
- Item Name: A name of the item
- Data Type: Nature of the item data. Select one among Analog, Digital and String.
- Item Description: Description on the item
(2) Function Button
● Cell Mode
- Select Line: An option used when selecting an item as a line mode.
Chapter 18 Recipe
18-4
- Edit: An option used when editing grids. The user may directly input information on the grid by double
clicking on the grid or selecting ‘Edit’ button.
● Up: It is activated upon the selection of an item and used for moving the selected item to higher order..
● Down: It is activated upon the selection of an item and used for moving the selected item to lower order.
● Delete Item: It is activated upon the selection of an item and used for deleting the selected item..

Notice

☞ If the linked unit or data is added after a model is defined, the model can not be modified.

18.2.2 Unit Information
A screen to register a recipe unit
Here, a unit means a tag collection and 10 tags and memory tags can be used.
First, items that have been defined for a certain model appear on the unit screen and unit tags suitable for each
item type are registered for the relevant unit.
An editing method to directly input in each cell is used.
Up to 64 unit sets are available for registering (64 unit sets per model).
As seen above, since the item number available to register for one model is 64, total 64 X 64 tags can be
registered on the unit definition screen.

Chapter 18 Recipe

18-5

(1) Property
● Unit Name: Register a name of the unit.
● Unit: A screen to register units (tags) suitable for the item type defined for the model.
Directly input the tag name in the cell or click the cell […] button to select a tag to register.
If […] button is clicked, the tag selection screen appears and if a tag is double clicked on the tag selection
screen, the screen disappears and the tag is marked on the grid.
(2) Function Button
● Delete: The currently selected unit name is deleted.
Chapter 18 Recipe
18-6
18.2.3 Data Information
A screen to register a recipe data
Here, data mean the values that are actually controlled. Register a value suitable for the item type defined for the
model. An editing method to directly input in each cell is used as done for unit information.
Up to 64 data per model are available for registering.
(1) Property
● Data Name: Register a name of the data..
● Data: Define the control value suitable for the item type defined for the model..
(2) Function Button
● Delete: The currently selected data name is deleted.

Chapter 18 Recipe

18-7

18.3 Recipe Runtime
To use recipe functions online, InfoU provides two methods- one is to use OCX components and the other is to
use the internal functions. In addition, they can be used in the Script and Action Trigger.
Recipe functions that can be performed in the Runtime are broadly divided into three functions; Working Set, Realtime Data Inquiry and Saving, and Recipe Control.
18.3.1 Function
(1) Working Set Composition (Working Set)
● The recipe uses a virtual collection concept called working set.
● The recipe’s essential components are model, unit and data. Those three components are combined to
perform recipe control.
● For OCX, relevant components are clicked in the list to form a working set and the internal functions
corresponding to each function have been already defined.
(2) Real-time Data Inquiry and Saving
● This is a function to import the defined tags for the unit from the real-time server during the runtime to form
a working set.
● The working set is formed with models and units and this function does not only import the predefined data
from DB but also inquire the current tag values.
● Surely, the real-time data can be saved in DB. But, only up to 64 data are available per model.
OCX does not provide the 'Delete’ function.
(3) Recipe Control
● The purpose of forming a working set is to perform recipe control.
● Recipe control is ready for performing once the combination of the prescribed model, unit and data (realtime data) is equipped with.
● Recipe viewer OCX can perform simple control in InfoU as well as direct control is also available by using
data saved the control DB using the working set.
18.3.2 Recipe Viewer OCX
Recipe Viewer OCX provides specialized functions at control. For detailed functions, refer to ‘Recipe Viewer of
Graphic Object”.
18.3.3 Internal Function
Recipe functions can be implemented by internal functions.
For internal functions that can perform recipe functions during the runtime, refer to ‘Function Help.

Chapter 19 Database

19-1

Chapter 19 Database
19.1 Database Connection
This Database Connection is a function to connect this InfoU system to universal database systems such as
SQLServer and Oracle by using Microsoft OLE DB interface.
InfoU can define up to 64 connections.
For Database Operation, it is necessary to define connection with external databases in advance and the
connection is used as follows.
19.1.1 Demo
Select ‘Tool’- ‘Database Connection’ in the InfoUD menu, the screen as seen in the [Figure] below is displayed.
This ‘Database Connection’ menu is displayed on the lower-level of the Database Operation.
A list of the registered database for ‘Database Connection’ appears on the screen and detailed information on the
relevant database can be viewed or edited through double clicking on each item or pop-up menu.
The following pop-up menus appear upon the click on the list screen.
Chapter 19 Database
19-2
(1) Add
● This is a menu used when a new database is registered for ‘Database Connection’. If this menu is
selected, an empty screen is displayed.
● Up to 64 databases can be registered for ‘Database Connection.’.
(2) Edit
● This is a menu used when the information on the selected database is viewed or modified.
● If one of existing databases is renamed and saved, the database is automatically added and saved as a
new database.
(3) Delete
● If selected, a window appears to ask the user to confirm deleting. If “Yes” is selected, the relevant database
is deleted from the ‘Database Connection’ list and the ‘Database Operation’ that belongs to the database is
also deleted..
19.1.2 Database Connection Settings
This screen is the one to define ‘Data Connection.’ Double click on the list or select the pop-up menu to display the
following screen. Each item and button is explained as follows
(1) Connection Name
● Register its own name for identification and any duplicated name is not allowed.

Chapter 19 Database

19-3

(2) Active
● This ‘Database Connection’ is attempted only for activated data when the database engine is running. The
user may register several Data Connections and designate this ‘Activate’ option only to the necessary
connections to prevent the external database support from being wasted unnecessarily.
(3) OLE DB Provider
● Register OLE DB providers. The combo box shows the list of the registered OLEDB providers in the local
computer and the user may either select one from the list or input the name of the OLEDB provider directly
on the combo box..
(4) Connection String
● Register a Connection String used for the relevant OLEDB provider. (If the user does not know a
Connection String, he/she may create a file with extension ‘.udl' and double click it to display a screen to
define ‘OLEDB Data Connection.’ If the user opens the .udl file on the notepad after setting up each item as
shown on the screen, he/she may check whether the Connection String has been saved. The user may
copy and register this syntax. But, he/she needs to select [Allow saving password] on the checkbox of
[Connect] tap to ensure the password is also saved when the .udl file is saved).
(5) Connection Time Limit (Second)
● Register a limit time when attempting connection with the designated database. The user needs to input a
value higher than 0. If 0 is inputted, connecting is attempted endlessly until it is finally succeeded..
(6) Description
● Input description on the ‘Data Connection.’.
(7) Make
● Click ‘Make’ button to display a screen to define ‘OLEDB Data Connection.’ If [OK] button is clicked after
setting Connection Strings in the order, those are automatically registered on the 4) Connection String text
box. (If Check box [Allow saving password] is selected on the [Connection] tap, the password can be
included in those Connection Strings.)
[Figure :Screen of Data Link Properties]
Chapter 19 Database
19-4
19.2 Database Operation
Database Operation is a function to ensure the InfoU system links to universal database systems such as SQLServer and
Oracle. That is, the user can record and save InfoU tag values in an external database or import records from the external
database to map to InfoU tag values.
For Database Operation, the user may use the predefined Database Connection and register up to 256 operations.
19.2.1 Operation Type
Database Operation can be divided into ‘SELECT’ Operation and ‘ETC’ Operation according to operation
properties.
(1) SELECT
● This operation is to import records from an external database and save them in InfoU tag values.
(2) ETC
● This operation is to record and save InfoU tag values in an external database.
19.2.2 Demo
Select ‘Tool’- ‘Database Operation’ in the InfoUD menu to display the following screen..
A list of the registered database operations is displayed on the screen. If an item is double clicked or selected from

Chapter 19 Database

19-5

the pop-up menu, the detailed information on the relevant operation can be viewed or modified.
The following pop-up menu appears upon the click on the list screen.
(1) Add
● A menu to be used when registering a new database operation. An empty screen appears if this menu is
selected. Up to 256 database operations can be registered
(2) Edit
● This is a menu used when the information on the selected database operation is viewed or modified.
(3) Delete
● If selected, a window appears to ask the user to confirm deleting. If “Yes” is selected, the relevant database
operation is deleted.
19.2.3 Database Operation Settings
A screen to define ‘Database Operation’ Database Operation can be divided into ‘SELECT’ operation used to
import data from an external database and set up them as tag values and ‘ETC’ operation used to conduct
operation for an external database with the InfoU tag data.
[Figure : Example of SELECT Operation (Input Tag)]
Chapter 19 Database
19-6
(1) Operation Name
● This is the name of a database operation and it has a unique value.
(2) Connection Name
● Select a name of the Database Connection to be used for the relevant operation.
● The Connections set up in the Database Connection Settings are displayed on the combo box. If no
Connection is set up, the database operation can not be saved. (Set up ‘Database Connection’ first to
define ‘Database Operation’)
(3) Operation Description
● Describe the operation.
(4) Operation Type
● Specify a type of the Operation.
● For ‘SELECT’, input and output tag taps are activated on the ‘‘Connection Tag Setting’ window.
● For ‘ETC’, only output tag tap is activated on the window (The input tag is not activated)
(5) Start Row
● When a record set is imported from a database, the user can define a record start number that will be a
baseline when extracting data of the record set (The value shall not less than 1)
● For example, if there are five record sets and the start row is 1, tag mapping starts from the first record
while if the start row is designated 2, it starts from the second record, skipping the first record.
(6) SQL Text
● Input a proper SQL syntax (Refer to the following detailed information on SELECT and ETC)
(7) Tag Name
● The tag name that will record errors if the operation fails.
(8) Value
● The tag value that will record errors if the operation fails.
(9) Input Tag
● This menu is activated only when ‘SELECT’ is selected.
● It is used when importing external data and controlling them with tag values.
● It is used when importing external data and controlling them with tag values.
● Date of the record set is applied in the order of input.
(10) Output Tag
● This menu is activated only when ‘SELECT’ and other is selected.
● Up to 64 tags per operation can be registered.
● It is used when carrying out operations external data with InfoU tag data.
● Input order is not important. (Tag reservation numbers of SQL syntax and registered output tag numbers
are mapped.)
● If the same tag reservation numbers are repeated in the SQL syntax, the corresponding tags to
those numbers are also repeated.
(11) Delete
● Delete the selected tag.
(12) Up
● Move the selected tag one step up.

Chapter 19 Database

19-7

(13) Down
● Move the selected tag one step down.
[Figure : EXAMPLE OF SELECT OPERATION(Output Tag)]
(14) SELECT
● It is used only when the operation type is ‘SELECT’.
● The column name next to ‘SELECT’ is mapped with the tag defined on the phase of Input Tag one by one.
● Tag reservation numbers ([digit]) derived from FROM clause or WHERE clause are mapped with the output
tags.
● Tag reservation numbers (numbers higher than 1) are recorded in positive numbers.
● Tag reservation numbers or the registered tag values (digit, character..) are expressed properly such as
using quotation marks in the SQL syntax according to properties of each DB.
(ex.1) In case that tag values to be used are digits: SELECT COL1 FROM TAB1 WHERE ID = [1]
(ex.2) In case that tag values to be used are characters: SELECT COL1 FROM TAB1 WHERE ID ='[1]’
● The record set to be inquired starts from the location where the Start Row is registered and controlling tag
values starts from that location.
● Controlling tag values is applied in the order of being registered for input tags (It is not necessarily matched
between the data number and the input tag number)
Chapter 19 Database
19-8
● Example of application

Case	SQL	Input Tag	Query Result	Tag Value Control Result
If the input tag number is less than the inquiry data number (Start Row 1)	SELECT ID, NAME FROM TABLE1	Tag01 Tag02 Tag03	ID NAME ----------------------- 1 Hong Gil Dong 2 KooSangYeop 3 SCOTT	Tag01 = 1 Tag02 = Hong Gil Dong Tag03 = 2
If the input tag number is less than the inquiry data number (Start Row 2)	SELECT ID, NAME FROM TABLE1	Tag01 Tag02 Tag03	ID NAME ----------------------- 1 Hong Gil Dong 2 KooSangYeop 3 SCOTT	Tag01 = 2 Tag02 = Hong Gil Dong Tag03 = 3
If the input tag number is more than the inquiry data number	SELECT ID, NAME FROM TABLE2	Tag01 Tag02 Tag03 Tag04 Tag05 Tag06	ID NAME ----------------------- 1 Hong Gil Dong 2 KooSangYeop	Tag01 = 1 Tag02 = Hong Gil Dong Tag03 = 2 Tag04 = KooSangYeop

[Figure: Example of ETC Operation]

Chapter 19 Database

19-9

(15) ETC (INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE)
● It is used only when the operation type is ‘ETC.’
● It can not used for input tags.
● Tag reservation numbers ([Number]) used in this syntax are mapped with output tags
● Tag reservation numbers are recorded in positive numbers equal to or higher than 1.
● Tag reservation numbers or the registered tag values (digit, character.) are expressed properly such as
using quotation marks in the SQL syntax according to properties of each DB.
(ex.1) In case that tag values to be used are digits: INSERT INTO TAB1 VALUES([1], [2])
(ex.2) In case that tag values to be used are characters: INSERT INTO TAB1 VALUES(‘[1]’, ‘[2]’)
● Example of application

Case	SQL	Output tag and value	Query Result
If tag reservation numbers are matched with output tags	INSERT INTO TABLE1 VALUES ([1], [2], ‘[3]’)	[1] Tag01 20 [2] Tag02 30 [3] Tag03 40	INSERT INTO TABLE1 VALUES (20, 30, ‘40’)
If tag reservation numbers are not matched with output tags	UPDATE HYTAG SET VALUE = [1] WHERE NAME = ‘[2]’ AND TIME = [3]	[2] Tag01 50 [1] Tag02 Dong	UPDATE HYTAG SET VALUE = 50 WHERE NAME = ‘Dong’ AND TIME = [3]
If tag reservation numbers are repeated	INSERT INTO TABLE1 VALUES ([1], [2], [1])	[1] Tag01 20 [2] Tag02 30	INSERT INTO TABLE1 VALUES (20, 30, 20)

Chapter 19 Database
19-10
19.3 Database Runtime
Database Runtime plays a role in performing operations linked to external databases during the Runtime by using
the Connect Data and Operation Data set up during the engineering.
The user can perform Database Runtime Function in the stages of ‘Script’ or 'Action Trigger,’.
The log of the database work is daily created as the .csv file in the log folder of the project path.
This log includes the information on success/failure of the external database, success of each database work with
the error information. If database task does not work normally, a user can open this file to determine the exact
cause.

Chapter 19 Database

19-11

19.3.1 Function
(1) SELECT
● This function is to inquire data from the external database and control them as InfoU’s internal tag data.
● Even though the inquired data number is not equal to that of the registered input tags, it can control them by extracting
common data.
(2) ETC
● This function is to record and save InfoU tag values in an external database. SQL syntaxes supported by each
database can be used in various ways.
19.3.2 Internal Function
The internal functions that perform database operations are supported. For details and how to use, see ‘Help’ of
‘Internal Function.’.

Chapter 20 Report

20-1

Chapter 20 Report
InfoU Report is to inquire the logging data defined in the logging group and create or output Excel files at a
designated time. It can be outputted at any desired interval such as hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or
freely.
● Conveniently create similar reports with the report copy function.
● Report layout formation is easy to use with dragging and dropping function.
● Editing is also available with copying/pasting to Excel.
● Since Excel is used, graph, diagram, formula, statistics and other functions supported by
Excel program can be utilized.
● Since the tags used for report can be cross-referred, it is possible to check which tags are used when deleting or
modifying tags.
● This manual is based on Microsoft Excel 2007.
20.1 Start
Select ‘Report’ from the menu or the InfoU explorer to display the report list.
Double click the list to execute Excel to make a report.
Chapter 20 Report
20-2
20.1.1 Report Menu
InfoU Report is produced with ActiveX COM and executed on the MS Excel menu and if it is normally installed, the
following [Report] menu items are displayed to allow the user to select “Connect InfoU Project”menu.

Notice

☞ In case [Additional Functions][InfoU report] menu is not displayed, take measures base d on the below
procedures.

(1) Options of Excel
1) Click [File]  [Options]

Chapter 20 Report

20-3

2) Click [Trust Center]  [Trust Center Settings]
3) Click [Add-ins], uncheck the all options
Chapter 20 Report
20-4
4) The following menu appears upon the selection of “Connect InfoU Project”if InfoU has been installed and
it is available to download basic projects.

Chapter 20 Report

20-5

20.1.2 New
If [New] is selected from the menu, a screen for creating a new report for basic projects or the current project
appears.
(1) Menu
If [New] is selected, the following dialog box appears.
If the highest-level folder is selected and the right side of the mouse is clicked, the following pop-up menu
appears.
1) New Folder: A new folder is created below the selected item.
2) New Report: The following screen appears to create a new report.
Chapter 20 Report
20-6
Select the report icon and click the right side of the mouse to display the following pop-up menu.
3) Delete: Delete the selected report.
4) Rename: Change the report name.
5) Report Copy: A report can be copied or moved to other folder.

Chapter 20 Report

20-7

20.1.3 Report Property Settings
(1) Edit
1) Edit: Click Edit button to change the properties of the report.
2) Apply: The changed properties are saved.
3) Cancel: The edition is cancelled.
4) Next: The properties are saved and the next step [Report Layout] is displayed.
5) Help Window: If the relevant item is selected, instruction and information on its properties are displayed.
(2) Property
1) Report Name: (16 letters) A name to identify the report. Any two reports do no have the same name in the
same folder. It is used to distinguish one from the other.
2) Description: (49 letters) In case that it is obscure to distinguish one from the other only by their names,
the user may record details on the report.
3) Type: For regular reports (hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, annually reports), the [Report Interval] property
on the bottom is automatically set up while for free reports, the user needs to select an interval. If a value
area is selected, a list box showing report types is displayed to allow the user to select one among them.
4) Format File: Reports are made in Excel file format with functions edited by the user. Therefore, Excel file
(.xls) or Excel format file (.xlt) shall be designated.
Click one of the right folder icons to display a selection screen. Then, select a file and click Open button
to make the relevant file name automatically inserted. If these files are selected in the project folder,
Chapter 20 Report
20-8
previous project paths are omitted and saved and if other paths except them are selected, the computer
name is also automatically added and displayed.
5) Report Cycle: Only Free Report can be set up a cycle to create a report. Data are collected according to
the following cycle and once data are collected, a report is created.
Ex.1) Cycle of daily report = 1 day, Scan cycle = If it is set up one hour, one daily report is created once
24 set of one hour data are collected.
Ex.2) Cycle of daily report = 1 day, Scan cycle = If it is set up 15 minutes, one daily report is created once
96 set of 15-minute data are collected.
6) Scan Cycle: An interval displayed in the report as a time distance to collect data. If the clock mouse on
the right side of the relevant item is clicked, the following screen appears to allow the user to select a
cycle.

Chapter 20 Report

20-9

7) Report Base time: A report is written from the set up time on the set up date. Scan Cycle is the same with
Report Cycle. That is, a report is created on ‘the set up time every report cycle’ based on the time to write
a report.
8) Printing: It displays whether to execute ‘Auto Print.’ If ‘No’ is selected, ‘Auto Print’ is not executed and the
following output time is ignored.
9) Printing Start Time: A report is outputted from the set up time on the set up date. For example, if it is set
up as seen in the following figure, output or backup of the relevant report is executed at noon.
10) File Backup: It displays whether to execute ‘Report Backup.’ Backup is executed at the same time at the
same interval with the ‘Printer Output’ above. If ‘No’ is selected, backup is not executed while if ‘Yes’ is
selected, the user needs to designated a backup path.
Chapter 20 Report
20-10
11) Backup Path: Select a backup path on the screen and press ‘Ok’ button. If these files are selected in the
project folder, previous project paths are omitted and saved and if other paths except them are selected,
the computer name is also automatically added and displayed.
12) Storing Period: The user may set up a period to store backup data. If this period passes, the backup data
is automatically deleted.
13) Writer: Record a person who writes the report.
(3) Copy / Move
Select ‘Report Copy’ from the menu below to display the following screen.

Chapter 20 Report

20-11

1) Destination Path: Designate a path to which a report is copied or moved.
2) Report Name: Designate a report name to be created after being copied. If the same name already exists,
a new report is created in a form of [report name] (1).
3) After modifying the report properties, the user may select [Auto Print Information Renew] from the main
menu to apply the modified information online.
4) OK: It performs the settings
5) Cancel: It performs exits the screen without changes.
20.2 Layout
20.2.1 Report Layout
Once ‘which tag is outputted on which date/time is defined, the next step is to define which type the outputted
report has. Open the Excel file defined as a format file and display the layout setting screen.
(1) Layout term description: Each item on the Report Layout screen is described.
(2) Number of sheet: Set up the Excel sheet number of the relevant report. (Up to 5 sheets are available)
(3) Auto column width adjust: The row distance of each cell is automatically adjusted and displayed.
(4) Show Tag Name/Show Tag Description: During the tag edition, the selected tag name or description is
Chapter 20 Report
20-12
automatically displayed. To select a tag name or description, press the cell next to the check box.
(5) Unit: During the tag edition, properties of the selected tag unit are automatically displayed.
(6) Statistics value: A desired statistics value is automatically computed and displayed. Statistics values are
displayed on the report in the same order with the one currently displayed and if any specific statistics value
is not selected, they are moved up one row and displayed.
(7) The statistics values computed here will be those of cells and they are the same with the ones for which
expressions are used. To obtain more precise data statistics values than the actual ones, it is desirable to
designate data statistics values to cell tags and display them.
20.2.2 Sheet Property
Set up a layout for each sheet.

Chapter 20 Report

20-13

(1) Sheet Name: Designate and save a name of the Excel sheet when saving a report backup.
(2) Sheet Print: Set up whether to output the sheet.
(3) Created Date Cell: Designate a cell to display the date on which the report is created.
Click on to display the following screen and input cell address by clicking the relevant cell of Excel.
(4) Sequential Data Settings
It is the report having the form that multiple tags are repeated at a regular time interval such as daily report,
monthly report, annually report, etc. It has the same property so you can register report tags in the sequential
settings.
1) Sheet tag: It displays the number of the currently set sequential data.
2) Start cell location: It displays the location where the sequential data will start. You can specify the location
of the start cell by selecting of the data area.
3) Archiving cycle: It displays the archiving cycle of the logging data that will be output as the sequential data.
4) Tag column preview: If you click , you can preview the currently set layout and check the settings.
(5) Data area
It shows the shape of the start cell where the value is displayed depending on the layout property settings.
1) In case nothing is selected
The value is output and displayed in the start cell.
2) In case ‘Show Tag Name’(description) is selected
Chapter 20 Report
20-14
After the tag name is output in the start cell, the value is output and displayed from the next cell (Raw).
3) In case ‘Show Tag Name’, ‘Show Unit’ are selected
After the tag name and unit are output in the start cell, the value will be output and displayed from the
next cell (Raw).
4) If you click , the below message box will show up. When you click the relevant cell of Excel, the cell address will
be input and the locaiton where the sequential data starts will be specified.
(6) Sequential data tag input:
You can set the tag list to be displayed as the sequential data.
1) If you select the logging collection model in the upper right corner, the tag list and operation types
belonging to the relevant collection model will be displayed.
2) After selecting the targeted tag, add it to the list through Drag & Drop. (For deleting the tag, Drag & Drop
in the opposite direction)
3) If you click the header of each list, the relevant column will be sorted.

Chapter 20 Report

20-15

4) Copy/Paste: If you click with the right mouse button, the below menu will show up. After copying the list,
you can Edit, Paste, Insert and Append it in excel and clipboard.
a. Insert Empty Cell: If you want to add the column where the data is not displayed, select ‘Insert Empty
Cell’. Then, the column is not populated by the data so you can use the arithmetic function of Excel.
(7) Individual Data Settings
Unlike the Sequential Data Settings, Individual Data Settings can be used when you want to display the
report tag in the specific cell of the sheet. Accordingly, after inputting the tag of the logging group, you should
set the required time to output the data in the desired time.
Chapter 20 Report
20-16
1) After selecting the targeted tag among the report tags on the right side, add it to the individual setting list
through Drag & Drop (For deleting the tag, Drag & Drop in the opposite direction)
2) If you click the clock icon displayed in the required time column of the tag to which you want to apply
individual settings, the below screen will show up.
For multiple selections, you can apply the same settings to the chosen cell tag.
3) The above screen describes the method how to bring the data from the point in the past based on the
acquisition time of the report of the individual settings. It reads the previous data for the time of
N* archiving cycle. If you enter “0” into the acquisition time, the data will be queried and output. Namely,
if “00h 00m 00s” is the output time of the report, the data of the cell will be 00h 00m 00s. In the case of
“12”, the data of 12 hours earlier than “00h 00m 00s” will be queried and output.
4) Setting the Beginning (end) of the month/Beginning (end) of the year
The below screen is available only when the archiving cycle is a DAY or a MONTH. The configurable
items are as below.
a. If the archiving cycle is a DAY: "today", "yesterday", "beginning of the month", "end of the last month"
b. If the archiving cycle is a MONTH: "this month", "last month", "beginning of the year", "end of last year"
When setting as Today (Month), the same result as the set value “0” of the above acquisition time will
be output.

Chapter 20 Report

20-17

5) Event logging output settings
a. In the case of the event logging, the number of data output is not fixed. The trigger time and current
value can be output.
If you click the clock icon displayed in the required time column of the tag to which you want to apply
individual settings, the below screen will show up.
b. If you select the tag type other than the event logging, the below message will be displayed.
c. For the event time, the trigger occurrence time of the tag defined from the event logging group is
displayed in the cell.
d. When multiple tags are searched, starting from the specified cell position, in the direction of
Col (horizontal) or Row (vertical), the data is displayed in the sequential order.
e. Order settings New: The latest occurrence is first displayed, Old: The first occurrence will be first
displayed, FromTo: It is displayed in [On time – Off time] format.
f. In case the acquisition time of the report is 00, when you select [1 day before], [for 1 day], the event
occurrence data between 00:00 of the last day and 00:00 of today will be displayed. This condition is
proper for the daily report.
g. In case the acquisition time of the report is 00, when you select [3 hours before], [for 1 hour], the event
occurrence data between 20:00 of the last day and 21:00 of today will be displayed.
h. The below figure shows the example of outputting the event logging report.
Chapter 20 Report
20-18
6) Copy/Paste: If you click with the right mouse button, the below menu will show up. After copying the list,
you can Edit, Paste, Insert, Append it in Excel.
7) When inputting the cell position, there is inconvenience of clicking one by one for setting so it can be
used when you input the cell tag having certain rules. For example, when the position value of the
selected cell tag is $B$30”, after selecting 5 ones, if you select [Sequential input of row(vertical)], $B$31”
~ “ $B$34 ” will be automatically input in regular order; if you select [Sequential input of
column(horizontal)], $B$31” ~ “$B$34”will be automatically input in regular order.
(8) History Data Collection Model
A list of the data collection models registered in the history data collection models.
1) Red Color: Collection models corresponding to the report data creation cycle. That is, they are data
collection models that have one -hour collection cycle in case of daily reports.
2) Blue Color: Collection models that can create reports even though they are not corresponding. That is,
they are data collection models that have collection cycle less than one hour and multiples of integers
(one minute, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, etc).
3) White Color: Collection models that can not be applied to continual tag data areas.
4) If a certain collection model is selected, a list of tags that belong to the model is displayed at the bottom
and the data kinds available to select vary according to the properties of the collection model.

Logging Group	Analog	Digital	Remarks
Cycle	Current value	Current status	Minimum collection 1second Mainly used for the history trend at fast time intervals(less than 1minute)
Statistics	Current value, Min value,	On count, Running time,	Minimum collection 1 minute Min value,

Chapter 20 Report

20-19

Max value, Min time, Max time, Average value, Total value, Sampling count	Change count	Max value, Min time, Max time, Operation cycle 1 minute Mainly used for report of trend more than time unit
Accumulation	Change value, Sampling count	Not supported	Collection cycle: 1hour, 1day, 1month When tag data has incremental properties such as accumulation electric power meter or flow meter, data fluctuation is saved for each time unit.
Event	Trigger Time, Current Value	Trigger Time, Current Value	Display the trigger time and the current value of that time.

When an item is selected, the tag list to which the relevant collection model belongs and its data kind is
displayed in the bottom list. The continual tags are limited to the available tags to be set up according to the
report preparation rules but, individual data cells can be entered with any tag regardless of cycle or model
kind.
(9) Tag List
As a tag list of the collection models selected above, it can be set up by dragging and dropped to the
continual data or individual data table.
(10) Back
The screen moves back to the property edition screen after edition is stopped.
(11) Ok
The settings are saved and the screen is closed.
(12) Cancel
The edition work is stopped and the screen is closed.
(13) Apply
Settings are saved.
Chapter 20 Report
20-20
20.3 Report Open
If [Open] is selected from the report main menu. The report list screen is displayed as seen in the figure below. All
of the report information defined is displayed on this screen.
The following actions can be applied to the list.
● Click on the header of each column to rearrange the column contents in the ascending or descending order.
(The arrangement order is displayed while the direction of the arrow displayed on the column header is changed)
● The column is rearranged if a certain column is clicked and held while moving the clicked column before other
column.
● Double click on the border of the column on the right side to make the width of the column automatically adjusted.
● If some contents are not visible on a cell, bring the mouse on the cell to view all of the hidden part.
● Select an item and click the right side of the mouse to pop up available menus.
20.3.1 Edit
Two steps of [New] are editable individually. That is, operations such as property edition and layout are available
individually.
(1) Property Edit: The report property edition screen is displayed to allow the user to set up properties.
(2) Layout: The report layout edition screen is displayed to allow the user to set up properties.

Chapter 20 Report

20-21

20.3.2 Report View
This function ensures not only the newly saved or created reports are properly searched but also the data retained
by the history data collection model are searched during a certain period the user wants.
(1) Database
Reports are automatically printed or saved as backup files periodically. This section explains a function to
view reports in the time zone the user wants on the screen unlike printer outputs. This function can run only in
the runtime mode.
1) Format File
A setup Excel format file is opened and the [Progressing Report View] screen is displayed.
Chapter 20 Report
20-22
2) Report Data Collection status
The data saving status of the history data collection models set up in the current report is displayed in a
form of list and the list can be referred by the user when he/she searches data and each column is
described as follows:
a. Logging Group: The name of the data Logging Group.
b. Acquisition Cycle: Data collection cycle of the relevant collection model.
c. Number of records: The number of the stored data until now.
d. First Saving time: The oldest data time
e. Last Saving Time: The latest data time
3) Refresh: The list is renewed with the latest information.
4) Select Requested Time: Select a time period to inquire.
5) Data Storage Period: The blue upper bar shows the period during which all of the data can be displayed
while the red bottom bar shows the period during which at least one data can be displayed.
6) Reference Date Designate: Set up data in the desired time zone by pressing and holding the slider knob
of [Demand Time Select] and moving the mouse.
7) Reference Time: Enter and set up a reference time when the user wants to inquire.
8) Before/After: Previous or next data to the reference time can be inquired if either Previous or Next is
selected.
9) OK: Data in the selected time zone are outputted (report cycle/collection cycle).
10) Cancel: The inquiry is stopped and the screen is closed.
11) Help: The user can be received on the information on how to inquire database reports.
12) The data inquiry results are as follows:

Chapter 20 Report

20-23

(2) Created Report
Periodic backup report files are inquired. Click on the menu to display the following screen.
Chapter 20 Report
20-24
At first, the created report list of the selected report models from the previous report list is displayed at the
bottom [2],
1) Report List: The report list defined in the current project is displayed.
a. Click on the list header to arrange the created reports in the order and each column is described as
follows:
b. Type: Types of the report (Daily report, monthly report, free report, etc….)
c. Report Name: The report name including its folder is displayed.
d. Backup Folder: As the path in which report backup files are saved, the project path displays the
corresponding path and any path other than the project path displays the entire paths including computer
name.
2) Created Report: If the above report model item is selected, the report file list in which the relevant backup
path is created appears.
3) Open: The report file selected from the bottom list is opened. The same actions are triggered by double
click.

Chapter 20 Report

20-25

20.3.3 Refresh Auto Output Information
If [Refresh Auto Output Information] is clicked from the Report Main Menu after the report properties are
modified, the modified contents are applied online.
This function is executed only in the runtime mode and it renews the report operation list by sending the
Renewal Command to the report scheduler responsible for auto output and backup of the report after the
report completes its modification process.
20.3.4 View History Information
If ④ [History Information View] is selected from the report main menu after Report Properties are edited, the
following screen appears.
If it is executed only in the runtime mode and the data save status of the history data collection models can
be inquired and data can be renewed if [Refresh] button is clicked.
Chapter 20 Report
20-26
20.3.5 How to Use during the Runtime
During the runtime, a report can be defined on the plant screen and [Created File] report view is called.
Refer to ‘Help’ of ‘Graphic Script.’

Chapter 21 Utility

21-1

Chapter 21 Utility
21.1 Unit
A function to set up unit for tag analog values such as length, width, current or voltage
(1) Start
Select‘Unit Message Registration’in the menu or the InfoU explorer.
A list of the registered units is displayed as seen in the figure below and the setting screen is shown on the
bottom.
Chapter 21 Utility
21-2
(2) Settings
1) Unit
●Input a unit. If any existing unit is selected and changed, the changed unit is automatically added as
a new unit.
●Up to 63 Korean letters and 126 Alphabet letters can be inputted and this item is one of essential
information to be inputted.
2) Description
●Up to 127 Korean letters and 254 Alphabet letters can be inputted for this item and this item is
allowed to be omitted.
●Briefly explain on the inputted unit.
3) New
●If this button is selected, [Unit] and [Descirption] are initialized to allow the user to input a new unit.
4) Save
●If [Save] button is selected, the inputted unit is saved and it is shown on the notice window.
5) Delete
●Select [Delete] button to delete the selected unit display it on the notice window.
●It is also available to select multiple items in the list and delete them at once.

Chapter 21 Utility

21-3

21.2 Alarm Message Registration
A function to register a string to be displayed in case of the occurrence or recovery of alarm
(1) Start
Select ‘Alarm Message Registration’ in the menu or the InfoU explorer.
A list of the registered alarm messages is displayed as seen in the figure below and the setting screen is shown on
the bottom.
Chapter 21 Utility
21-4
(2) Settings
1) Type
●Select a type of the occurred alarm.
●Four types such as [Common], [Occurrence], [Cancellation] and [User Customs] are available and this
information is mandatory.
2) Message
●Input a string to be displayed in case of the occurrence of alarm.
●Up to 63 Korean letters and 126 Alphabet letters can be inputted and it is one of essential information to
be inputted.
3) New
●The existing [Message] is initialized to allow the user to input a new message.
4) Save
●If [Save] button is selected, the inputted message is saved and it is shown on the notice window.
5) Delete
●Select [Delete] button to delete the selected item display it on the notice window.
●It is also available to select multiple items in the list and delete them at once.

Chapter 21 Utility

21-5

21.3 On/Off Display Message Registration
A function to set up a string to be displayed regarding to On/Off of the tag digital value.
(1) Start
Select ‘On/Off Display Message Registration’ in the menu or the InfoU explorer.
A list of the registered On/Off messages is displayed as seen in the figure below and the setting screen is
shown on the bottom.
Chapter 21 Utility
21-6
(2) Settings
1) Type
●Three types such as [Common], [On (1)] and [Off (0)] are available and this information is mandatory
●Up to 63 Korean letters and 126 Alphabet letters can be inputted and it is one of essential information to
be inputted.
2) String
●Input a string to be displayed.
●Up to 63 Korean letters and 126 Alphabet letters can be inputted and it is one of essential information to
be inputted.
3) New
●The existing [String] is initialized to allow the user to input a new one.
4) Save
●Select [Save] button to save the inputted On/Off string and display it on the notice window.
5) Delete
●Select [Delete] button to delete the selected item display it on the notice window.
●It is also available to select multiple items in the list and delete them at once.

Chapter 21 Utility

21-7

21.4 LSIS Program Registration
A function to register GLOFA-GM programs such as GMWIN.exe, PLC products of LS Industrial System, in the
InfoUD to execute GMWIN programs and also to import information on the point engineered by GMWIN.exe in
form of tag information
(1) Start
Select ‘LS IS Program Registration’ in the menu or the InfoU explorer.
A screen as seen in the figure below is displayed and [Add] and [Delete] button appear on the bottom.
Chapter 21 Utility
21-8
(2) Add
1) Select [Add] button to display the [Open] dialog box. Select GMWIN.exe-LS PLS program-on the [Open]
dialog box.
2) Once the selection is completed, the following menu is created on the InfoU Explorer.
3) Run
If [GMWIN Run], one of registered programs, is selected on the [InfoU Explorer], GMWIN.exe
Program is run.

Chapter 21 Utility

21-9

21.5 LS PLC Tag Import
(1) Start
Select ‘LSPLC Tag Import’ in the menu and tool explorer and then, run it.
(2) Import a LS PLC Tag
If [LS PLC Tag Import] is selected on the InfoU Explorer, menu bar or tool bar, the screen above is displayed.
Chapter 21 Utility
21-10
1) GLOFA, XGK or XGI communication channels registered in the current project are displayed (GLOFAEnet/Cnet/Loader, XGK-Enet/Cnet, XGI-ENet/CNet).
2) If a communication channel is selected, a list of the stations registered in the relevant channel is
displayed.
3) The PLC type of the currently selected communication channel is displayed.
4) The path of the PLC engineering file to be imported is is displayed.
5) A PLC engineering file can be slected.
6) For GMWIN files, a *.sym file, for XG5000 engineering files, a *.csv file can be slected according to their
types.
a. Select an engineering file of the relevant PLC project.
b. Click on [Open] to display the tag list below on the screen.

Chapter 21 Utility

21-11

7) Save a PLC Tag
a. Select [IO Device] and [Device Name] to save.
b. Select the LS PLC Application through mouse drag or Ctrl + LClick, Shift + LClick, Grid RowColumn
Header (Select All).
c. Click on [Save] button.
Chapter 21 Utility
21-12
- If you select the menu, [Tag Management] you can check the tag list belonging to the IO
Device/equipment selected during storage
- The program name created during the PLC engineering operation is inputted as a tag group and
variables are inputted as individual tags.

Chapter 21 Utility

21-13

Data types are saved according to PLC data types as follows:

PLC Type	Tag Type	Device Type
tBOOL	BOOL	BOOL
tBYTE	UINT8	UINT8
tWORD	UINT16	UINT16
tDWORD	UINT32	UINT32
tLWORD	DOUBLE	UINT64
SINT	INT8	INT8
tINT	INT16	INT16
DINT	INT32	INT32
LINT	DOUBLE	INT64
USINT	UINT8	UINT8
tUINT	UINT16	UINT16
UDINT	UINT32	UINT32
ULINT	DOUBLE	UINT64
REAL	FLOAT	FLOAT
LREAL	DOUBLE	DOUBLE
TIME	UINT32	UINT32
tDATE	UINT16	UINT16
TIME_OF_DAY	UINT32	UINT32
DATE_AND_TIME	DOUBLE	UINT64
PLC_STRING	STRING	STRING
BIT	BOOL	BOOL
NIBBLE	UINT8	BIT4
DIRECT_TYPE	Not supported
ENUM_TYPE
ENUM_MEMBER
ARRAY_TYPE
ARRAY_MEMBER
STRUCTURE_TYPE
STRUCTURE_MEMBER
FB_NAME
LABEL_TYPE
VAR_ARRAY_MEM
FB_OUTPUT
NOTYPE
VAR_TYPE_NUM

Chapter 21 Utility
21-14
21.6 Application Registration
A function to register other programs of the computer in which InfoUD is installed in InfoUD to run external
programs.
(1) Start
Select and run ‘LS IS Program Registration’ in the menu or the InfoU explorer.
A screen as seen in the figure below is displayed and [Add] and [Delete] button appear on the bottom.

Chapter 21 Utility

21-15

(2) Add
1) Select [Add] button to display the [Open] dialog box and select *.exe of the program to be registered on
the [Open] dialog box.
2) The list above is displayed and the relevant program is registered as an icon in the Application
Registration menu of the InfoU Explorer.
3) Run: Click on the icon to run the relevant program.
(3) Delete
1) Select a program to delete and select [Delete] button to display the dialog box
2) Once deleting is completed, the ‘Delete Notice’ window appears and the sub item that used to be
displayed on the [InfoU Explorer] is also deleted.

Chapter 22 Cross Reference

22-1

Chapter 22 Cross Reference
The correlation of the registered tags such as graphic file, history settings (collection model), alarm group and
report can be inquired on one screen. Especially, it has a function to detect any wrong use of deleted tags so that
it is possible to conduct more effective engineering operations and in addition.
22.1 Function and Property

Functions	Descriptions
Tag Use Trace	It is possible to inquire information on the modules used for each tag at one place and the use details of each tag can be traced conveniently.
Filtering	Through filtering by tag, the correlation can be inquired only among the desired tags.
File Save	The inquired contents are saved in CSV files to make it possible to edit and output in various types of documents.
Inquiry Function by tag or by module	Two types of correlation inquiry screens are presented, one is to compile the used modules by tag and the other is to compile the used tags by module.
Jump	This jump function, which enables to skip to the graphic editor.

Chapter 22 Cross Reference
22-2
22.2 Cross Reference DB Creation
In order to use the cross reference, you need to create the DB manually after completing all engineering works.
After engineering works, if you run the cross reference, the blank screen will show up as below.
To create the cross reference DB, click the [DB Creation] button.
The cross reference module retrieves the engineering data and creates the cross reference DB. The cross
reference DB is the self-DB collecting correlations between modules and tags. In addition, afterward, if you
perform InfoU engineering works such as addition and edition of tags and graphic pages, etc., the details will not
be automatically applied to the cross reference DB so you should create the database manually.

Chapter 22 Cross Reference

22-3

The screen of the cross reference is composed of the following items.

Items	Descriptions
DB creation time	It indicates the time that the cross reference DB is created. You can determine whether the cross reference DB is up to date or whether it needs to be created by comparing the creation time after engineering works.
DB creation	It is the button to create the cross reference DB.
By tag	It is the tab to retrieve the created data by tag.
By module	It is the tab to retrieve the created data by module.
Summary	It shows the summarized information of the created data. You can correct the wrong engineering tasks by checking the normal and error tags.
Filtering	It retrieves the cross reference DB by tag.
Save File	It saves the retrieved details to the CSV file.
View All	It is used to move to the ‘View All’ screen after filtering.
Close	It closes the cross reference screen.

Chapter 22 Cross Reference
22-4
22.3 Engineering Function
You can perform the below functions using the created cross reference DB.
22.3.1 Search by Tag
The ‘Search by tag’ is the basic screen of the cross reference, which displays the tags used during engineering
based on the tag name.
If you expand each tag, you can see which module is using the tag.
22.3.2 Search by Module
The function develops graphic screen, trend group, report settings, logging settings, tag used for the module of the
alarm group based on the module.
If you expand each module, you will see which module is using the tag.(‘Trend Group’ is not currently used, it is
the spare item specified for further expanding function).
The development order from each module to tags is as below.

Chapter 22 Cross Reference

22-5

Module	Development
Graphic screen	Graphic page file(*.ivd)  object  tag and dynamic properties
Report Settings	Report name  Sheet name  vale and tag types
Logging Settings	Logging group types  logging group name  tag
Alarm Group	Alarm group name  tag

22.3.3 Filtering
It is the function to search the cross reference DB by tag name.
If you click the [Filtering] button, the below screen where you can enter the tag name will show up.
Chapter 22 Cross Reference
22-6
A user can enter the tag name directly or select the tag by clicking the tag browser button[…]. Then, if you execute
the [Search] function, the cross reference DB will be retrieved by the tag name and the result will be displayed.
In order to return to the previous full screen, click the [View All] button.
22.3.4 Error Tag Search
The cross reference provides the function to detect wrongly linked tags.
For error tag search, click the [Filtering]  [Error Tag Information] button.
Error tags may be generated due to the following causes.
■ In case non-existent tag is registered during engineering.
■ In case the used tags are deleted after engineering works such as graphics, report, etc.
The below figure shows there is an error with the CHEM.Refining.CD303DTEMP tag. This tag is misused in the
“Chemical_DC2.ivd” graphic page file and the figure shows non-exist tag is applied in the TagValue17 object of the
file of the relevant page.

Chapter 22 Cross Reference

22-7

22.3.5 Jump Function
If you double-click the item on the cross reference window, you can move to the relevant module through the Jump
Function. The Jump Function is provided for the graphic screen only. If you click the object in the tree of the cross
reference window, the page will be opened and the focus will move to the relevant object.
Drawing the graphic page is composed of drawing each object, mapping dynamic properties into each object. After
graphic page works are done, each tag mapping is linked within the graphic object and it is not visible to a user
directly.
In many case, there are from tens of tags to thousands of tags mapped in one graphic page. If there is no cross
reference function, you need to open each object one by one and check the tag manually. Through the Jump
Function of the cross reference, you can perform such tasks more effectively.
This section describes the process from error tag search to finding the graphic object.
Chapter 22 Cross Reference
22-8
If you double-click “Line32 – Color” in the previous error tag information screen, the graphic page screen will be
open with the situation that the Line32 object is selected.
The area marked by a red arrow indicates the object is selected.
After clicking with the right mouse button on the object selected by a focus, if you run the [View Dynamic
Properties] menu, you will see the tag called [CHEM.Refining.CD303DTEMP] is set in [Display Value] of the [Tag
Value 17] object.

Chapter 22 Cross Reference

22-9

22.3.6 Save File
It is the function to save the results of the cross reference search to the CSV file.
If you press the [Save File] button in the search window, the dialog box asking the storage location will show up.
If you enter the file name and save it, the result of the cross reference retrieval will be saved to the CSV file.
This file can be used for various purposes such as engineering summary report, etc.
Chapter 22 Cross Reference
22-10
In addition, you can save the specific tag only using the filtering function or run [Save File] after searching error
tags. In this case, the tag list displayed on the screen will be saved.
After running [Error Tag Information] in the [Filtering] menu, click the [Save File] button.
If you open the saved results in excel, you can see the below figure.
If you open the saved results in a notepad, you can see the below figure.

Chapter 22 Cross Reference

22-11

22.4 Runtime Function
After engineering works are done, the created cross reference DB can be used for the plant screen of the InfoU
runtime, tag view, alarm popup menu, graphic object, etc.
For the description on the cross reference function in the runtime, refer to [Cross Reference Functions] of the
[Graphic Runtime] manual.

Chapter 23 Web

23-1

Chapter 23 Web
23.1 InfoU Web Configuration
23.1.1 Prerequisite
(1) The web functions can be realized in the Microsoft Windows-based system and support Internet Explorer 6.0
or higher.
(2) In the Windows XP or earlier version, among the components, the Internet Information Service (IIS) should be
pre-installed and be running. For the method how to install the Internet Information Service (IIS) in Windows
XP, refer to [InfoU Web Q&A Collection] of the Appendix. (In the Windows 7 or higher version, if the IIS is not
pre-installed, it will be installed automatically.)
(3) InfoU HMI Server has been installed.
(4) The table shown below, whether supports the web functions by OS.

Operation System	Availability	Concurrent connected user	Pre-installation of IIS
Windows ME, 2000 Server or less	X	-	N/A
Windows XP	Home Edition	X	-	Windows XP
Professional	O	5 Users
Windows 2003 Server	O	Default 5 Users For additional users, follow the OS License	X
Windows Vista	Home Edition	X	-	Windows Vista
Professional	O	5 Users
Business	O
Ultimate	O
Windows 7	Home Edition	X	-	Windows 7
Professional	O	5 Users
Business	O
Ultimate	O
Windows 2008 Server	O	Default 5 Users For additional users, follow the OS License	X
Windows 2008 Server R2	O	For Windows 2008 Server R2, only 64bit is produced	X

(5) You need the license key that can support the web function.
Chapter 23 Web
23-2
23.1.2 Configuration Procedures
(1) To use the web functions of the InfoU, the installation should be done based on the below procedures.
1) Put a check the items supporting web functions in [InfoU Engineering][Project Property] [Option].
2) Run the InfoU Web Navigation Management to set the Web Navigator Site.
3) Register the user and set the default screen by logging in with the InfoU (Admin account) in the InfoU
Web screen.
4) When you log in with the registered user in the InfoU Web screen, the web monitoring screen will be
displayed.

Notice

For your information, the manual was written in Windows 7 Enterprise K 32 Bit and Internet Explorer 9.
In case the Internet Explorer version is different from the Internet Explorer 9, the screen may differ slightly.
For errors occurred during installation or unexpected problems during operation, refer to [InfoU Web Q&A
Collection] of the Appendix.

23.2 Creatiing InfoU Web Site
This Site Automatic Setup ensures even an inexperience user who does not have any expertise in web servers or
website formation can configure a website easily and assess to the InfoU HMI system through the web browser
from anywhere. The user can form a site he/she wants and create a new website. In addition, he/she may add a
virtual folder to the existing website.
23.2.1 Execution of the Navigation Management
(1) Run the InfoU Web Navigator by selecting [Start][All Programs][InfoU] [InfoU-Web] 
[Navigation management].

Chapter 23 Web

23-3

(2) Brief information on the program is displayed on the splash screen.
1) If the IIS7 is not installed, in Windows 7, it is installed automatically as below.
a. Message confirming installation of the IIS7
To the install the IIS7, click the [Install] button.
b. Message on the progress of IIS7 installation
When the installation proceeds is done 100%, it will be switched into the next screen automatically.
Chapter 23 Web
23-4
2) If the prerequisite is not satisfactory or automatic installation of the IIS7 is not performed normally, the
below error message will be displayed and the program will not proceed any more. For more details on
the error message and solutions, refer to [InfoU Web Q&A Collection] of the Appendix.

Chapter 23 Web

23-5

23.2.2 Creating New Website
In the Internet Information server (IIS), you can create the website that you can directly manage. If there is no
history of creating the InfoU Web site in the past, [Create New Website] is automatically selected as shown below.
You can create websites as many as you want and manage them by site.

Notice

☞Before creating a new web site, if you check the information of [IIS(Internet Information Service)
Administrator] in [Start]  [Control Panel]  [System and Security]  [Administrative Tools], currently, only
the basic website exists.

Chapter 23 Web
23-6
(1) After selecting [Create New Website], click the [OK] button.
(2) After selecting [Create New Website], click the [Next] button.
(3) Enter the site name and port No. that the InfoU Web user wants. After entering the desired name of the new
website, click the [Next] button. The default access port is set as 80. If another web server is operated by 80
access port, a user can set other port No. depending on the environment.

Chapter 23 Web

23-7

In the 64bit OS of Windows 7 or more, the default port is set as [7777] since the phenomenon that the default
website is initialized into the basic site every time you reboot the system. You can freely change and use the
port.
(4) To create the new website, click on [Create] button.
(5) The progress of creating the new website is shown on the program bar.
(6) The message of [Successfully created new website] is displayed.
Chapter 23 Web
23-8
(7) After creating the new web site, click the [Exit] button.

Chapter 23 Web

23-9

(8) When you check the information of [IIS(Internet Information Service) Administrator] in [Start] 
[Control Panel]  [System and Security]  [Administrative Tools], you will see the new web site
InfoU_WebNavigator is created. Currently, the default website is suspended and the InfoU_WebNavigator is
running.
Chapter 23 Web
23-10
(9) After creating a new web site, you need to access to ‘http://localhost’ or ‘http://user ip’. If you use a different
port other than the default one, 80 port, you need to enter the using port into the address.
Ex.) http://user ip:8080
777

Notice

☞When creating a new web site, if you enter a different port other than the default port(80), you need to
access to the web address including the entered port.
Ex.) http://localhost:7777
☞In Windows 7 64Bit OS, the default port is set as 7777 so if you want to apply another port, you need to
enter the desired port when creating a new website.

Chapter 23 Web

23-11

Chapter 23 Web
23-12
23.2.3 Get Project Information
You can get the project information such as graphics and report file, etc. by selecting the project of the InfoU HMI
server. To get the project information, the InfoU HMI server should be preinstalled. Then, you can get the
graphic.ivd file and Report.xsl, information related cross reference.
If you create a new website, the project information is automatically obtained so you do not need separate works.
However, when the graphics or report file is added or changed, you should execute [Get Project Information] to
apply the variations to the nfoU Web newly.
(1) When [Get Project Information] is selected
If the InfoU Web site has already been created, [Get Project Information] is automatically selected.
(2) The projet name of the current InfoU server appears and the screen turns to the next step screen upon the
click on [OK].
(3) You can see the message showing ‘the project information loading is in progress’.

Chapter 23 Web

23-13

(4) Once the current InfoU server project is successfully distributed to the InfoU Website, the following success
message window appears

Notice

☞In case the server does not have the report file, you will get the warning message; ‘No report files to
distribute to InfoU website’. This is just a warning message so distribution for the remaining files except
the report file will continue.
☞To prevent the below warning message, you just need to put the prepared report file into the server.
The report file is located under the currently running project with the report name.
Ex.) C:InfoUProjectDemoReport

Chapter 23 Web
23-14
23.2.4 Adding the Virtual Folder on the Existing Website
If it is difficult to add and operate a new website in the current system since the existing site has been already
running, you can add the virtual folder under the existing one to manage the InfoU Web site.
(1) Select ‘Adding virtual folder on existing website’ in the below screen and press the [Next] button.
(2) You can enter the desired alias for the virtual folder that will be added. Then, the virtual folder is created on
the site that is currently running. In the InfoU Web, basically, the site is created with InfoU_WebNavigator
name and the virtual folder is created on the site. If you want to change the default website, refer to [InfoU
Web Q&A Collection] of the Appendix.

Chapter 23 Web

23-15

(3) Set the directory that will be added to the virtual folder. The default directory is set as Web Navigator under
the directory where the InfoU system is installed. Ex.) C:InfoUWeb Navigator
Click the [Search] button to select the directory that you want to specify as the virtual folder. The default
setting is the InfoU Web folder so you can proceed with this without any changes. After setting the virtual
folder, click the [Next] button.
Chapter 23 Web
23-16
(4) Then, you will get the message; the virtual folder is successfully added to the web server.
1) If the virtual directory with the same name is already being used.
2) If the virtual directory is successfully created on the website.
(5) Click the [Exit] button to end the program.

Chapter 23 Web

23-17

(6) If you check the information in [Start]  [Control Panel]  [System and Security]  [Administrative Tools] 
[IIS(Internet Information Service) administrator], you will see the InfoUWeb that is a virtual folder is newly
created on the existing web site.
Chapter 23 Web
23-18
(7) To access to the site, you need to connect to ‘http://user ip: port/virtual folder’ name. If you use a different port
other than the default one, port 80, you need to enter the address including the using port.
Ex.) http://localhost/InfoUWeb

Chapter 23 Web

23-19

23.2.5 Creation of a Website in Addition to the Existing One
(1) After selecting [Create New Website], click the [OK] button.
(2) If you installed the InfoU Web site previously and the InfoU default web site already exists, the below
message will show up.
To create a new website additionally besides the existing website, click the [OK] button. If you want to exit the
program without creating a new one, just click the [Cancel] button.
(3) After selecting [Create New Website], click the [Next] button.
Chapter 23 Web
23-20
(4) Enter the site name and port No. that the InfoU Web user wants. After entering the desired name of the new
website, click [Next] button. The default access port is set as port 80.
If another web server is operated by 80 access port, a user can set other port No. depending on the
environment.
1) If you enter the same name as the existing website name, you will get the warning message as shown
below.
2) Select the existing website and click the [Delete] button. Then, press the [OK] button.

Chapter 23 Web

23-21

3) After deleting the existing website, click the [OK] button.
4) If you want to use the entered default information, just click the [Next] button. To change the website
name and port newly, after entering the desired name and port , click the [Next] button.
Chapter 23 Web
23-22
(5) Click the [Create New Website] button.
(6) You can get the message; creating a new website is under progress.
(7) Then, the below message will show up; [New website is successfully created]
(8) After creating a new website, click the [Exit] button.

Chapter 23 Web

23-23

(9) If you check the information in [Start]  [Control Panel]  [System and Security]  [Administrative Tools] 
[IIS (Internet Information Service) administrator], you will see the new website InfoUWebTwo is additionally
created. If you add the website newly, the previous website will stop and instead, the new one will be
operated. You can also operate several sites with different ports.
Chapter 23 Web
23-24
(10) After creating a new web site, you need to access to ‘http://localhost’ or ‘http://user ip’. If you use a different
port other than the default one, 80 port, you need to enter the using port into the address.
Ex.) http://user ip:8080

Chapter 23 Web

23-25

23.3 InfoU Website Configuration
23.3.1 Overview
To use the web-based HMI function of the InfoU, you need to register the user account and the default screen.
23.3.2 Prerequisite
(1) The InfoU web site should be created through [Navigation Management] and the web server should be
running.
(2) InfoU real-time operation should be executed.
(3) The InfoU WebHMI server is running.
23.3.3 Login Screen
(1) Enter the user ip into the web browser address bar. If you did not use the default port “80” when creating the
InfoU web site, you need to enter the used port No. together.
Ex.) http://localhost or http://userip:7777
(2) Log in to the InfoU for initial settings. The default password of the InfoU is just “InfoU” and the default
administrator account is InfoU/InfoU. They are case-sensitive so must be entered correctly. It is
recommended that you use a new administrator account or change the password for further security.
Chapter 23 Web
23-26
(3) Description of Login Screen Menu
Enter the user ID and password after logging in the InfoU Website on the web browser. If the user is not
authorized or the password is not correct, the error message is displayed.
1) Error Message when login fails
a. If the user ID is not correct
b. If the password is not correct
c. If there are communication problems or other issues for the solutions, refer to appendix 6, InfoU Web
Q&A Collection.
(4) Screen Mode Select
The user may select either 1024*768 or 1280*1024 mode as the optimized mode.
(5) Send Mail to Administrator
If the user ID or password is forgotten, send e-mail to the administrator

Chapter 23 Web

23-27

(6) If the message on installing additional functions of ActiveX is the displayed at the bottom of the page after
login, press the [Install] button.
(7) If the security warning message is displayed as below, press the [Run] button.
Chapter 23 Web
23-28
(8) If the security warning message on ActiveX installation is displayed, press the [Install] button.
(9) The components to execute the program are installed.

Chapter 23 Web

23-29

(10) When logging in to the website for the first time after installation.
1) When logging in to the website with a administrator account:
When you log in to the site for the first time, there is no plant screen registered in the server. If there is no
plant screen registered in the server, you will get the message; “No plant files registered currently in the
DB Server. Register a plant file to set as a default screen. It will soon redirect to
[Plant Screen Registration] page automatically after 5 minutes. Wait a minute please.”
Chapter 23 Web
23-30

Chapter 23 Web

23-31

2) When logging in to the website with a general user account
a. If you log in to the site with the general user account for the first time, you will get the message; “No
plant files registered currently in the DB Server. Ask the administrator a plat file to set as a default
screen. Please, use again after setting a default plant file. Close the browser you currently opened.”
As shown in the message, you need to request the administrator to register the plant file to set as a
default screen, then, log in to the site.
Chapter 23 Web
23-32
b. After logging in to the site with an administrator account, select the user who will register the default
plant screen in [System Management][User Information]. If you click the ID, the user information
screen will show up. In the dialog box of [User Management–User Modification], set the default
screen. Under the situation of [Default screen: Nothing], click the list box in [Default Screen Settings]
and select the plant screen to be set as the default.

Chapter 23 Web

23-33

23.3.4 System Management
(1) Register the monitoring screen by clicking the [System Management] icon.
Chapter 23 Web
23-34
(2) If you log in to the sire for the first time, when the ActiveX and components are completely installed, the web
setting screen will be displayed as below.
1) If the default screen is not set, the below message will be displayed and it will move to the system setting
screen automatically. Otherwise, if you click the [System Management] icon, the screen will show up.

Chapter 23 Web

23-35

(3) Plant Screen Registration
Select the plant file to be monitored and click the ‘Registration’ button. You can select and register multiple
plant files for monitoring.
If you click the [Registration] button, the message asking whether registering the selected plant file(s) will be
displayed.
Chapter 23 Web
23-36
(4) Default Page Settings
1) You can specify the default screen that you want.
2) After selecting the screen in the upper list, click the [Default Screen Settings] button.
3) Single default screen can be specified for each user and it is impossible to set multiple screens.
The message confirming whether you will set the plant file as the default screen will be displayed.

Chapter 23 Web

23-37

4) In the registration status, you can see the plant file that is set as the default screen is displayed as
[Default Screen].
Chapter 23 Web
23-38
(5) New User Registraion
1) Register a general user.
2) The “*” mark means the required input items.
3) If a general user does not enter the default screen settings, the default screen set by the administrator will
be displayed.
4) If the default screen is selected, the default screen specified by the user who logs in to the site is
displayed.
5) The default screen can be separately set depending on the user.
The message notifying whether a user is normally registered will show up.

Chapter 23 Web

23-39

When you log in to the page with the newly registered user ID and password, the plant screen specified
by the user will show up as the default screen.
Chapter 23 Web
23-40
(6) User Search
1) You can search users to monitor and control the plant screen.
2) If you click the user ID, you can check and edit the detailed information of the user.

Chapter 23 Web

23-41

23.3.5 Monitoring Web User
(1) Enter the ID and password of the registered user and then, click the [Go] button.
Chapter 23 Web
23-42
(2) If the security message asking whether executing ActiveX is displayed at the bottom of the page, click the
[Allow] button.

Chapter 23 Web

23-43

(3) If the message box related to firewall security is displayed, click the [Allow access] button.
Chapter 23 Web
23-44
(4) The default screen specified by the user who logs in to the site is displayed in the Internet Explorer web
browser
1) The message on loading the plant screen shows up.

Chapter 23 Web

23-45

2) The main plant screen specified by a user is displayed.
23.3.6 Main Screen
This InfoU Plant main screen shows the relevant user’s ID and the current system time after the user is
successfully logged in. Click on a menu to show the functions the menu can perform on the InfoU Plant main
screen. At first right after log in, the initial Plant screen which has been set up when the user registered the Plant
Screen is loaded.
Chapter 23 Web
23-46
(1) Logout
If you press the logout button, you will log out from the InfoU (administrator) account and the login screen will
be displayed.
(2) Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow
It pretypifies the Up/Down/Left/Right screen depending on the hierarchy diagram of the currently registered
plant screen. (The function is not available in the current system.)
1) Currently, the available function is the middle arrow only. If you click the middle arrow, the plant screen
that is set as the default screen will be displayed in the main screen.
(3) Zoom In/Zoom Out
It zooms in and out the currently displayed plant screen. (The function is not available in the current system.)

Chapter 23 Web

23-47

(4) Plant Explorer
It shows the plant screens registered by a user in the format of tree structure. If you click the plant screen file,
the plant screen will be displayed in the main screen. This function is useful to preview the whole plant
screens.
Chapter 23 Web
23-48
(5) View All
As a menu that makes the plant, trend, alarm, report screen better manageable, this menu show the entire
menus on a single screen. (The function is not available in the current system.)
(6) System Management
Through this menu, a new user is created and the management and plant screen is registered.
(7) Full Mode
The plant screen is shown in a full screen without administrator’s system menu. The plant screen is displayed
in a new browser.

Chapter 23 Web

23-49

Chapter 23 Web
23-50
(8) Close Window
It closes the current window to log out.

Chapter 23 Web

23-51

23.4 Web HMI Server
The Web HMI Server is to play a role in extending to access to the InfoU HMI through web. To present HMI service
through the web, the Web HMI Server has to run on the server side. To make the Web HMI Server run normally, the InfoU
project should run. Also, to access to the Web HMI Server, the Internet Information Server has to be installed and relevant files
needed for the HMI service should be copied and installed.
If the system runs, the tray icons are created and Show Screen, Hide Screen, Settings and Exit function are performed through
the pop-up menu.
23.4.1 Operation Settings
The Web HMI Server ( )runs automatically if the web is set up on the project option. Select ‘View
Screen’ menu from the Tray Icons to display the following screen.

Hide this operation screen.

The Web HMI Server stops.

Chapter 23 Web
23-52

The total number of request for connection from the client is displayed.

The number of remaining requests from the client, which has not been processed, is displayed.

The total number of the created threads in the thread pool is displayed to process connection.

The number of operating threads after being assigned the current work is displayed.

The number of standby threads in the thread pool is displayed.

This button is used when opening the server setting screen to change setting values.

23.4.2 Server Settings
If you execute “Settings” menu in the tray icon or click the “Settings” button in the operation screen, you can see
the Server Settings window as below.

Set up a server port.

Set up a timeout time (milliseconds) used for connecting to TCP/IP Socket.
When setting up, make sure to take into account of some delay due to the network status.

Set up a size of the request queue.

As the address of the PC where the InfoU HMI is located, it has been set up with “127.0.0.1”as the default address.

Set up the number of the created threads during the first running.

Set up the maximum number of the available threads to be created in the thread pool.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-1

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24.1 System Environment Settings
24.1.1 Cancel Network Security
Since data shall be exchanged on the network to configure Redundancy and Client Server systems, all of the
related computers have to cancel their security as follows:
(1) Windows XP
① Run the security center on the control board.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-2
② Run Windows Firewall on the security center settings
③ Allow exceptions on the Windows Firewall setting screen as follows: Select “Fire and Printer Sharing” on
the Exceptions tap.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-3

④ Select ‘Advanced’ tap on the Window Firewall setting screen and click on “Settings” button of ICMP.
⑤ Select “Allow incoming echo request.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-4
⑥ It should be possible to connect to the joint folder of the partner computer.
⑦ To make it connectable even when rebooting, set up ‘Reconnect at logon’ and make it reconnect to the
relevant folder automatically when booting.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-5

⑧ Select ‘Reconnect at logon’ on the Map Network Driver.
⑨ Execute Control Board  Management Tool  Local Policies.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-6
⑩ Local Policies  Security Options  “Network Access: Execute “Sharing and security model for local
accounts”
⑪ Select“Classic – Local users authenticate as themselves”.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-7

(2) Windows7
① Enables the Windows Firewall in control panel
a. Click [System and Security]  [Windows Firewall].
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-8
b. Click [Windows Firewall]

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-9

② Configuration of File and Printer Sharing
a. Click [Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall]
b. Select the [File and Printer Sharing] for setting as shown in the picture.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-10
③ “ICMP” settings
a. Click [Advanced Settings] in the Windows Firewall setting screen.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-11

b. Double-click [Inbound Rules]  [File and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4-In)], Private, Public]
c. In the property window of [File and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4-In)], put a check
[General tab]  [General]  [Enable] options.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-12
④ Setting the access to the shared folder of the computer acting as a partner
a. Check the shared folder of the computer through the explorer.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-13

b. In order to access to the folder even during rebooting the computer, set the connection with the
network driver. Then, you can access to the folder automatically when booting the computer.
c. In network driver connection settings, put a check [Reconnect at logon].
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-14
⑤ Configuration of Local Security Policy
a. Click [Control Panel]  [System and Security]  [Administrative Tools]
b. Click [Control Panel] [Administrative Tools]
c. Double-click the [Local Security Policy]
d. Double-click [Network access: Sharing and security model for local accounts]

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-15

e. Select [General - Local users authenticate as themselves] in the [Local Security Setting] tab.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-16
24.2 Redundancy Settings
24.2.1 Procedure
a. Set up the system network environment allowing data communication.
b. Create Project: Create a server project.
c. Select Redundancy Option: Click on ‘Redundancy’ option on the project Property settings.
d. Set up Redundancy: Save redundancy settings.
e. Duplicate Redundancy Project: Duplicate the redundancy project on the current server in the partner server.
At this time, the settings of the partner server are automatically changed.
f. Check the project on the partner server: Check whether the redundancy settings are correctly duplicated and if
any item (ex> serial port, etc) is differently set up from the master server, re-set up and save it.
g. Execute real-time running.
24.2.2 Create Server Project
a. When creating a new project, select ‘Server Project’ for its type.
b. Also, it is possible to change and use any existing Stand Alone project to a server project on the Project
Property setting screen.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-17

24.2.3 Project Property Settings
a. Enter the current computer’s IP Address on Network.
b. When using Line Redundancy, that is, when using two LAN cards, select ‘Line Redundancy’ and enter the
reserve IP Address.
c. Select and save ‘System Redundancy’ on Option.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-18
24.2.4 Redundancy Settings
(1) Select Menu
Select ‘Tool-System Settings-Redundancy Settings.’

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-19

(2) My Server
a. Computer Name: Enter a computer name for identification on the computer network environment.
b. Default IP Address: Enter the default IP Address.
c. Reserve IP Address: When line Redundancy option is used, enter the reserve IP Address.
d. Project Path: Enter an accessible path of the current project on the network.
e. Default Master Server: Assign a role of the master server to ‘My Server.’

Notice

☞ When two servers run simultaneously, ‘My Server’ always runs as the master server.
☞ If this option is not set up, ‘My Server’ always runs as the Standby server when two servers run
simultaneously but it runs as the Master server if 'Partner Server’ does not run.
☞ This option shall be set up for only one of two servers.
☞ If this is set up for both of them or it is set up neither of them, errors may take place.

f. Duplicate Redundancy Project: A screen on which the current project can be duplicated in the partner
server is displayed.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-20
- Project Name: The current project name is displayed.
- Path: The local Project Path of the current project is displayed.
- Saving Path: Input a project path on which the redundancy project is saved in the partner server Click
on the button to display the ‘Select File Backup Path’ screen and select a saving location.
- Copy Full Project: All of the settings various engineering files and logging data files on the current
project path are copied.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-21

Notice

☞ At this time, any data other than on the project path can not be duplicated.
☞ After engineering works, it is essential to duplicate and synchronize settings between projects
before starting another running.
☞ After this option (Copy Full Project) is cancelled, individual items can be selected and copied.

- Start Duplicate: Duplication is executed. It may take a lot of time depending on the file capacity.

Notice

☞ In case that duplication has been executed before, only the current files are updated.

(3) Partner Server
a. Computer Name: Enter a computer name for identification on the computer network environment.
b. Default IP Address: Enter the default IP Address.
c. Reserve IP Address: When line Redundancy option is used, enter the reserve IP Address. Click on the
button to select a computer on the network.
d. Project Path: Enter an accessible path of the current project on the network. Click on the button to display
the Select File Backup Path screen and select a saving location.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-22
(4) Option
a. Partner Server Serial Monitoring: Connect a serial cable to monitor the Partner Server.
b. Port No: Show the serial port number subject to connection.
c. Default Stand by Sychronize setup data when server starts: The Standby server starts after the settings of
the Master server is duplicated.
d. Setup synchronize list: When starting, a screen to select synchronization items is displayed.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-23

- Select All: All of the sub items are selected. After this option (Select All) is cancelled, individual items
can be selected and copied.
- Save: Save the settings.
- Close: Close the screen.

Notice

☞ It may take a lot of time to start the Standby server depending on the file capacity.
☞ Since most of the logging files have a large capacity, it is better to select basic settings only.

e. Delay Time: Device Switch server when error occurs on device connection: When any communication
error occurs, switching action is performed.
f. Delete: Delete redundancy settings.
g. Initialize: Return the settings to the previous ones.
h. Save: Save the settings.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-24
24.2.5 RunTime Operation
(1) System Tag
When running in the redundancy mode, a tag that shows the system status during the real-time running is
created to allow the user to monitor the current redundancy running status.
1) System tags and status codes related to redundancy
The above tag browser screen during the real-time running shows the status of each tag value as follows:

Tag Name	Description	Type
SYS_DEF_MASTER	Default Master server, 0:No 1:Yes	Digital
SYS_DEF_MASTER_NAME	Default Master server name	String
SYS_DELTA_LOADED	Time to synchronize setup files	String
SYS_FAIL_TIME	Time when server errors take place	String
SYS_LOCAL_MACHINE_NAME	Local computer name	String
SYS_PARTNER_SERVER_RUN	Partner server status, 0:Stop 1:Run	Digital
SYS_RECOVER_TIME	Time to recover the server	String
SYS_RM_DEVICE	IO Device connection status (All) 0: normal 1: fail	Digital
SYS_RM_DEVICE_FAIL_TIME	Time when IO Device connection errors take place	String
SYS_RM_RUNNING	Running server, 0:Standby 1:Run	Digital
SYS_RM_RUNNING_NAME	Running project name	String
SYS_RM_SERVER_NAME	Running server comput name	String
SYS_RM_SLAVE_NAME	Standby server comput name	String

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-25

2) Status Dispaly
By using the above system tags, each tag’s status can be displayed on the graphic screen.
- [1]: Running Server computer name
- [2]: Current server’s status and run mode
- [3]: Partner server’s status and run mode
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-26
24.3 Client-Server Settings
24.3.1 Procedure
a. Set up the system network environment allowing data communication.
b. Create Server Project: Create a server project.
c. Create Server Data File: Create a server data file that saves information on IP Address, Redundancy
Information, Joint folder name to connect to the client server project.
e. Create Client Project: Create a client project.
f. Load Server Data File: Load the server data file to connect from the client project.
g. Execute server real-time running.
h. Execute client real-time running.
24.3.2 Server Project Settings
a. When creating a new project, select ‘Server Project’ for its type.
b. Also, it is possible to change and use any existing Stand Alone project to a server project on the Project
Property setting screen.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-27

c. Enter the current computer’s IP Address on Network.
d. When using Line Redundancy, that is, when using two LAN cards, select ‘Line Redundancy’ and enter the
reserve IP Address.
e. If you want to configure the duplex server system, put a check [Option]  [System redundancy]. When
you configure the standalone system, do not put a check [Option]  [System redundancy].
f. Select ‘Tool-System Settings-Server Data Management.’
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-28
g. In case that any server data has not been saved, a server data name can be entered and the rest items
are displayed automatically and the ‘Create’ button becomes active.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-29

h. If “Create’ button is clicked, the server data file is created and the associated information is displayed on
the screen.
i. If ‘Update’ button is clicked, the changed engineering settings are updated and saved.
j. If ‘Delete’ button is clicked, the server data file is deleted
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-30
k. The file is created in “Package” among the project folders. At this time, extension “sdp” is used.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-31

24.3.3 Client Project Settings
a. When creating a new project, select ‘Client Project’ for its type
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-32
b. The client project type can not be changed.
c. Enter the current computer’s IP Address on Network.
d. When using Line Redundancy, that is, when using two LAN cards, select ‘Line Redundancy’ and enter the
reserve IP Address.
e. Select ‘Tool-System Settings-Server Data Management.’

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-33

f. In case that any server data has not been saved, any information is not displayed and a button is activated
to explore server data files.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-34
g. Select a server data file to connect to.
h. The information loaded from the selected server data file is displayed and 'Load' button become active.
i. Click on ‘Load’ to copy the needed server data file to the local computer. At this time, it may take a lot of
time depending on the file capacity.

Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server

24-35

j. Once loading and duplicating the server data file are completed, information is displayed on the list and
‘Delete’ button becomes active.
Chapter 24 Redundancy and Client Server
24-36
k. The file is created in “Package” among the project folders.
l. If ‘Delete’ button is clicked, the server data file is deleted.

Notice

☞ At this time, the copied filed in the “Package” folder are not deleted.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-1

Chapter 25 Mobile
The InfoU mobile is based on the Client/Server structure. The mobile designer and mobile server are installed at
the server side; mobile Client (app) is installed in mobile devices (smart phone, tablet, etc.) at the client side.
The plant screen drawn by the mobile designer is serviced through the mobile server. The mobile client can
remotely monitor and control the field conditions by accessing to the mobile server.
25.1 Mobile Designer
The InfoU Mobile Graphic Editor (hereinafter referred to as mobile designer) is the graphic editor that provides
various functions to make monitoring screens.
25.1.1 Startup
(1) Functions
1) Various graphic object tools are provided. (line, polyline, polycurve, rectangle, Rounded Rectangle, ellipse,
image, text, tag value)
2) Diverse animations and user action functions are provided by setting dynamic properties.
(horizontal/vertical size, horizontal/vertical movement, color, blink, visible, rotation, writing tag values, etc.)
3) Various resolution can be applied depending on the mobile device’s screen and it also supports the multiresolution.
4) It provides the Control Unable/Enable function by user authority.
5) You can register the tags to be used in the mobile client by setting service tags. (tag group, alarm, trend
group)
(2) Startup
You can select [InfoU]  [Utility]  [Mobile Designer] in the program list to start up the mobile designer.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-2
Then, the mobile designer will run as below.

Notice

To run the mobile designer, .NET 4.0 full version should be installed.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-3

(3) Configuration
The mobile designer is the system development tool, which defines and sets the system components
required by the InfoU mobile Client such as screen composition, definition of dynamic properties, setup of
project services, etc.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-4
The descriptions on the screen components of the mobile designer are as follows.

Main menu: You can use the functions provided by the InfoU mobile graphic editor.

Standard tool and object, form tools: They are the icons of standard tools frequently used in the
graphic editor and object tools required to make a page, tools required to define the properties of texts
and lines.

Project File Explorer: It expresses the currently working project as a tree, which is composed of
several resolutions for each page.

Page editing screen: It is the screen to edit the page. You can draw images using diverse objects and
define user actions such as definition of dynamic properties, etc.

Color tool: You can conveniently specify the color of the page and object through this tool.

Object property window: You can change the properties of each object.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-5

25.1.2 Mobile Server Project
1) Creation of the project
Create the mobile server project.
Run [File]  [New Project] in the main menu.
Input “Project name”, “Project path”, “Creator”, “Project description” and click the “Create” button to
make a new project. In this case, “Creator” and “Project description” can be omitted.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-6
After the project is created, the window to add the page and resolution will be displayed as above. Input
the “Page Name” and set the width and height of the page. Then, when you click the “Save” button, the
page will be created.
You can also create the page and resolution by running the “Add” menu after executing the popup menu
in the “Project File Explorer” window.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-7

2) Close Project
It closes the mobile server project.
If you run [File]  [Close Project] in the main menu, the project will be closed and it will be switched into
the initial screen.
3) Open Project
It can open the mobile server project to perform tasks.
If you run [File]  [Open Project] in the main menu, the dialog box to select the file will show up.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-8
After selecting the mobile project file, if you click the “Open” button, the project will be open. The
extension of the InfoU mobile project is “*.imp”.
25.1.3 Mobile APP Page
The mobile app page is the monitoring screen used for the mobile client. There are so various types of mobile
clients with their own diverse resolutions. Even in the same mobile client, different resolution documents are
required to provide the best monitoring screen depending on each viewpoint. Accordingly, the mobile app page
should be expressed as several resolution documents even in the same monitoring screen. The InfoU mobile app
page is composed of various resolution documents.
1) Add Page
It creates the mobile app page.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-9

Run the “Add” menu by executing the popup menu in the “Project File Explorer” window.

Enter the page name.

You can select the pre-programmed resolution. If you click the “…”button, the window for resolution
management will be displayed. Then, you can add/delete the desired list.

You can set up any resolution discretionally.

You can change the width and height of the resolution.

If you press the “Save” button, 1 mobile app page and 1 resolution document will be created.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-10
2) Edit Page
You can edit the name of the mobile app page.
If you select “Edit” in the popup menu, the information window will be displayed. When you press the “OK”
button in the information window, the ‘Edit Page’ window will be displayed. If you enter a new page name
in the edition window and click the“Save” button, the page name will be modified.

Notice

In case the previous page name was applied to the dynamic property of transition, if you edit the page
name, the relevant dynamic property will not run. Namely, if you edit the page name, you need to change
the settings of the dynamic property of the page transition.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-11

3) Delete Page
It deletes the mobile app page. The mobile app page is composed of resolution documents. If the
resolution documents are all deleted, the relevant mobile app page will also be deleted.
You can delete the resolution document by running “Delete” in the popup menu.

Notice

If there are several resolution documents, when you run “Delete”, the selected resolution document only
will be deleted.

25.1.4 Resolution Document
It is the document that expresses the mobile app page with a specific resolution. The mobile app page can have
multiple resolution documents to realize the screen optimized for the devices with various resolutions.
1) Add Resolution Document
It adds the resolution document to the mobile app page.
Run “Add” in the popup menu of the mobile app page.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-12
After setting the resolution of the resolution document, if you click the “Save” button, the document will
be added.

Notice

You cannot repetitively add the resolution document with the same resolution.

2) Edit resolution document
It edits the resolution of the resolution document.
You can run “Edit” in the popup menu of the resolution document.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-13

If you edit the resolution (width, height) and click the “Save” button”, the modified resolution will be saved.

Notice

If the resolution document to edit is open, edition works can be performed only after closing the relevant
document.

3) Delete Resolution Document
It deletes the resolution document from the mobile app page.
You can urn “Delete” in the popup menu of the resolution document.

Notice

Refer to the following instructions to delete the resolution document.
☞ In case there is one resolution document in the mobile app page, when you delete the resolution
document, the mobile app page will also be deleted.
☞ In case the resolution document to be deleted is open, deletion works can be performed only after
closing the document.

4) Open Resolution Document
You can open the resolution document and perform drawing works by double-clicking the resolution
document in the project file explorer.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-14
5) Close Resolution Document
To close the resolution document, click with the right mouse button on the tab of the open resolution
document.
6) Zoom In Resolution Document
To zoom in the resolution document, select [View]  [Zoom In] in the main menu.
Double-click the resolution
d t
Click with the right mouse

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-15

7) Zoom Out Resolution Document
To zoom out the resolution document, select [View]  [Zoom Out] in the main menu.
8) View the original of the resolution document
To view the original size of the resolution document select [View]  [1:1 ratio] in the main menu.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-16
9) Scrolling of resolution document
Under the status of Zoom In, you can move the screen while you click with the right mouse button on the
resolution document. When scrolling starts, the mouse cursor will be changed into the shape of ( )
standing for movement.
25.1.5 Object
1) Line
It displays the linear object.
For drawing a line, you can select [Insert]  [Figure]  [Line] in the main menu or select the icon in the
shape of “Line” from the toolbar.
The properties of the linear object are as follows.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-17

● LEFT coordinate, TOP coordinate: Coordinate values of the upper left corner of the object
● Width, Height: Width and height of the object
● Filled: You can determine whether filling the inside of the object with the background color.
It is not available in the line object.
● BackColor: You can select the color to fill the inside of the object. It is not available in the line object.
● ForeColor: You can select the color of the object.
● Line thickness: You can select the thickness of the line forming the object.
● Start point X coordinate, start point Y coordinate: Coordinate value of the upper left corner of the
object
● End point X coordinate, end point Y coordinate: Coordinate value of the bottom right corner of the
object

Notice

There is no limit on the range of value input, however, please note that you need to consider the screen
size. If you input too large value, it will be displayed outside of the screen so the object may not be
displayed on the screen or cut off.

Chapter 25 Mobile
25-18
2) Polyline
It displays the polyline object.
For drawing a polyline, you can select [Insert]  [Figure]  [Polyline] in the main menu or select the
icon in the shape of “Polyline” from the toolbar. You can draw a figure in the manner of clicking the mouse
and adding a dot. To exit Drawing Polyline, click with the right mouse button.
The properties of the polyline object are as follows.
● LEFT coordinate, TOP coordinate: Coordinate values of the upper left corner of the object
● Width, Height: Width and height of the object
● Filled: You can determine whether filling the inside of the object with the background color.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-19

● BackColor: You can select the color to fill the inside of the object.
● ForeColor: You can select the color of the object.
● Line thickness: You can select the thickness of the line forming the object.
● Path Close: If it is TRUE, the open object will become the closed one; If it is FALSE, the closed
object become the open one.
< Path Close: False> < Path Close: True>
3) Polycurve
It displays the polycurve object.
For drawing a polycurve, you can select [Insert]  [Figure]  [Polycurve] in the main menu or select
the icon in the shape of “Polycurve” from the toolbar. The drawing method is the same as the polyline.
The properties of the polycurve object are as follows.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-20
● LEFT coordinate, TOP coordinate: Coordinate values of the upper left corner of the object
● Width, Height: Width and height of the object
● Filled: You can determine whether filling the inside of the object with the background color.
● BackColor: You can select the color to fill the inside of the object.
● ForeColor: You can select the color of the object.
● Line thickness: You can select the thickness of the line forming the object.
● Path Close: If it is TRUE, the open object will become the closed one. If it is FALSE, the closed object
become the open one. The way of Path Close is the same as the polyline’s.
4) Rectangle
It displays the rectangle object.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-21

For drawing a rectangle, you can select [Insert]  [Figure]  [Rectangle] in the main menu or select
the icon in the shape of “Rectangle” from the toolbar.
The properties of the rectangle object are as follows.
● LEFT coordinate, TOP coordinate: Coordinate values of the upper left corner of the object
● Width, Height: Width and height of the object
● Filled: You can determine whether filling the inside of the object with the background color.
● BackColor: You can select the color to fill the inside of the object.
● ForeColor: You can select the color of the object.
● Line thickness: You can select the thickness of the line forming the object.
5) Rounded Rectangle
It displays the Rounded Rectangle object.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-22
For drawing a Rounded Rectangle, you can select [Insert]  [Figure]  [Round rectangle] in the main
menu or select the icon in the shape of “Rounded Rectangle” from the toolbar.
The properties of the Rounded Rectangle object are as follows.
● LEFT coordinate, TOP coordinate: Coordinate values of the upper left corner of the object
● Width, Height: Width and height of the object
● Filled: You can determine whether filling the inside of the object with the background color.
● BackColor: You can select the color to fill the inside of the object.
● ForeColor: You can select the color of the object.
● Line thickness: You can select the thickness of the line forming the object.
● Rounding: You can set the round value of a vertex. The greater the value is the bigger the rounding
area is.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-23

<Rounding: 20> <Rounding: 50>
6) Ellipse
It displays the ellipse object.
For drawing an ellipse, you can select [Insert]  [Figure]  [Ellipse] in the main menu or select the icon
in the shape of “Ellipse” from the toolbar.
The properties of the ellipse object are as follows.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-24
● LEFT coordinate, TOP coordinate: Coordinate values of the upper left corner of the object.
● Width, Height: Width and height of the object
● Filled: You can determine whether filling the inside of the object with the background color.
● BackColor: You can select the color to fill the inside of the object.
● ForeColor: You can select the color of the object.
● Line thickness: You can select the thickness of the line forming the object.
7) Image
It displays the image object.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-25

To insert an image into the screen, you can select [Insert]  [Image] in the main menu or select the icon
in the shape of “Image” from the toolbar. After clicking with the mouse on the position to insert the image,
if you select the targeted image file in the dialog box for file selection, the image will be inserted into the
page. The available image formats are “bmp”, “gif”, “jpg”, “png”, tiff”, etc.
The properties of the image object are as follows.
● LEFT coordinate, TOP coordinate: Coordinate values of the upper left corner of the object
● Width, Height: Width and height of the object
● Transparent color: You can set the color to transparentize.
● Size to Fit: If it is TRUE, the image object size will be fit to the image size. In case users change the
image object size randomly, it will be displayed as FALSE.
8) Text
It displays the text object.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-26
To insert a text, you can select [Insert]  [Text] in the main menu or select the icon in the shape of “Text”
from the toolbar.
The properties of the text object are as follows.
● LEFT coordinate, TOP coordinate: Coordinate values of the upper left corner of the object
● Width, Height: Width and height of the object
● Filled: You can determine whether filling the inside of the object with the background color.
● BackColor: You can select the color to fill the inside of the object.
● ForeColor: You can select the color of the object.
● Text: You can specify the text of the object.
● String Alignment: You can select the text alignment of the object.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-27

9) Tag value
It displays the tag value object.
To insert the tag value object, you can select [Insert]  [Tag Value] in the main menu or select the icon
in the shape of “Tag Value” from the toolbar. If you select the tag through the dynamic property setting
(value display), the tag value will be displayed.
The properties of the tag value object are as follows.
● LEFT coordinate, TOP coordinate: Coordinate values of the upper left corner of the object
● Width, Height: Width and height of the object
● Filled: You can determine whether filling the inside of the object with the background color.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-28
● BackColor: You can select the color to fill the inside of the object.
● ForeColor: You can select the color of the object.
● String Alignment: You can select the text alignment of the object
25.1.6 Dynamic Properties
You can set the dynamic properties of the object.
Click with the right mouse button on the object to run the popup menu. If you run “Define Dynamic Properties” in
the popup menu, the window for setting dynamic properties will be displayed. The dynamic properties
accompanying the animation are basically linked with tags. If you select the “…” button next to the tag name, the
tag selection window will show up and then, double-click the targeted tag.
Double-click to select the tag

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-29

Notice

The instructions related to dynamic properties are as follows.
☞ The dynamic properties should be set for each object.
☞ The dynamic property can be visible only when the relevant property is checked.
☞ You can set up the multiple dynamic properties for one object.

1) Horizontal size
It sets the dynamic property whose size varies in the horizontal direction.
● Tag Name: You can select the tag that receives the input value for displaying the dynamic properties.
● Direction: You can select the direction to move.
● Data Variation Range: You can enter the range of tag input value used for dynamic properties. For
example, if you set the minimum value (50), the maximum value (100), when the tag value is between
50 and 100, the dynamic properties will be displayed. Although there is no limit on the rage of input
value, you need to consider the range of the input tag value.
● Size Variation Range (%): You can enter the size variation range by percent (%). The input value
should be between 0 and 100.
● Animation (vertical size property will be changed): You can select animation effects among the
below tree types.
-Linear: It is displayed according to the value without any special animation effects.
-Bounce: It shows the bounce effect at the last part.
-Elastic: It shows the elastic effect on the move.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-30
The speed indicates the time required to display the animation. The smaller the value is, the faster the
dynamic properties are displayed. The input value should be between 0 and 100.

Notice

The animation property of the horizontal size dynamic property is also used for the vertical size dynamic
property. Therefore, if you change the animation property of the former, the animation property of the latter
will also be changed.

2) Vertical size
It sets the dynamic property whose size varies in the vertical direction.
● Tag Name: You can select the tag that receives the input value for displaying the dynamic properties.
● Direction: You can select the direction to move.
● Data Variation Range: You can enter the range of tag input value used for dynamic properties. For
example, if you set the minimum value (50), the maximum value (100), when the tag value is between
50 and 100, the dynamic properties will be displayed. Although there is no limit on the rage of input
value, you need to consider the range of the input tag value.
● Size Variation Range (%): You can enter the size variation range by percent(%). The input value
should be between 0 and 100.
● Animation (horizontal size property will be changed): You can select animation effects.
Refer to the horizontal size dynamic property.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-31

Notice

The animation property of vertical size dynamic property is also used for the horizontal size dynamic
property. Therefore, if you change the animation property of the former, the animation property of the latter
will also be changed.

3) Horizontal movement
It sets the dynamic property moving in the horizontal direction.
● Tag Name: You can select the tag that receives the input value for displaying the dynamic properties.
● Direction: You can select the direction to move.
● Data Variation Range: You can enter the range of tag input value used for dynamic properties. For
example, if you set the minimum value (50), the maximum value (100), when the tag value is between
50 and 100, the dynamic properties will be displayed. Although there is no limit on the rage of input
value, you need to consider the range of the input tag value.
● Movement Variation Range (pixel): You can input the size variation range by pixel. There is no limit
on the range of value input, however, you need to consider the screen size. If you input too large value,
it will be displayed outside of the screen so the object may not be displayed on the screen or cut off.
● Animation (Vertical move property will be changed): You can select animation effects.
Refer to the horizontal size dynamic property.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-32

Notice

The animation property of the horizontal movement dynamic property is also used for the vertical
movement dynamic property. Therefore, if you change the animation property of the former, the animation
property of the latter will also be changed.

4) Vertical Movement
It sets the dynamic property moving in the vertical direction.
● Tag Name: You can select the tag that receives the input value for displaying the dynamic properties.
● Direction: You can select the direction to move.
● Data Variation Range: You can enter the range of tag input value used for dynamic properties. For
example, if you set the minimum value (50), the maximum value (100), when the tag value is between
50 and 100, the dynamic properties will be displayed. Although there is no limit on the rage of input
value, you need to consider the range of the input tag value.
● Movement Variation Range (Pixel): You can input the size variation range by pixel. There is no limit
on the range of value input, however, you need to consider the screen size. If you input too
large value, it will be displayed outside of the screen so the object may not be displayed on the screen
or cut off.
● Animation (Horizontal move property will be changed): You can select animation effects.
Refer to the horizontal size dynamic property.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-33

Notice

The animation property of vertical movement dynamic property is also used for the horizontal movement
dynamic property. Therefore, if you change the animation property of the former, the animation property of
the latter will also be changed.

5) Color
It sets the dynamic properties changing the color.
● Tag Name: You can select the tag that receives the
input value for displaying the dynamic properties.
● Baseline Value Settings: Select the color to be
displayed based on the value.
If you press the“Insert Row” button, you can add the
value range and color.
If you press the “Delete Row” button, the last line will be
deleted.
6) Blink
It sets the blinking dynamic properties.
● Tag Name: You can select the tag that receives the
input value for displaying the dynamic properties.
● Blink Condition: You can select the condition to display
the blinking dynamic properties.
● Blink Interval: You can select the time interval to
display blink. The smaller the value is, the faster the
property blinks. The input value should be between 0
and 100.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-34
7) Visible
It sets the visible dynamic properties.
● Tag Name: You can select the tag that receives the
input value for displaying the dynamic properties.
● Visible Condition: You can select the condition to
display the visible dynamic property.
8) Rotation
It sets the rotating dynamic properties.
● Tag Name: You can select the tag that receives the
input value for displaying the dynamic properties.
● Rotation Direction: Select the rotation direction.
● Data Variation Range: You can enter the range of tag
input value used for dynamic properties. For example, if
you set the minimum value (50), the maximum value
(100), when the tag value is between 50 and 100, the
dynamic properties will be displayed. Although there is
no limit on the rage of input value, you need to consider
the range of the input tag value.
● Center of Rotation: Select the center of rotation. For
the absolute coordinate, you need to input the value
between 0 and 9999. In the case of rotation based on
the absolute coordinate, depending on the position of
the center point, the object rotates outside of the
screen and may not be displayed on the screen
● Rotation Range (Angle): You can set the rotation
range according to the input value. The input value
should be between 0 and 9999.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-35

9) Display Value
It sets the dynamic properties to display the tag value.
● Tag Name: You can select the tag that receives the
input value for displaying the dynamic properties.
● Value Display Type: You can select the type to display
the value.
10) Frame animation
It sets the playing conditions and speed of the GIF animation.
● Tag Name: You can select the tag that receives the
input value for displaying the dynamic properties.
● Playing Condition: You can determine whether paying
the animation when the tag value is TRUE; when the tag
value is FALSE.
● Animation Speed: Set the playing speed by 100 msec.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-36
11) Touch: Open Page
When touching the object, the screen will be turned to the set page.
● Action: Select "Open Page”.
● Open Page: Among pages registered in the project,
select the page to turn.
12) Touch: Write Digital Value
When touching the object, the tag value will be changed into the selected digital value.
● Action: Select "Write Digital Value”.
● Tag Name: Select the tag to be used for writing
value.
● Write Value: Select the type of ‘Write Value’.
Set: Writing TRUE vale
Reset: Writing FALSE value
Toggle: Writing the reverse of the current value

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-37

13) Touch: Set Value
When touching the object, the tag value will be changed into the input analog value.
● Action: Select “Set Value”.
● Tag Name: Select the tag to be used for setting value.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-38
25.1.7 Service Settings
You can set the items required for the mobile project service.
Run [Tool]  [Service Settings] in the main menu.
1) Project
You can set the basic items for the mobile project service.
● Monitoring Screen Settings: You can select the initial page that will be displayed first when starting
the monitoring screen among the registered projects.
● Monitoring Screen Logo Image: You can register the logo image in the format of bmp, gif, jpg, png, tiff.
The logo image can be omitted.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-39

2) Network
You can set the IP address and port No. of the mobile server.
● Service IP: You can input the service IP address or host name URL. It is used as the access address in
the mobile app.
● Service Port and Internal Port: You can set the port No. between 1 and 65535.

Notice

The instructions for network settings are as follows.
☞ In case the entered port No. is used in other processes, the server program does not work properly so
make sure to avoid confliction of port No. during setting.
☞ Make sure to enter the service IP address.

Chapter 25 Mobile
25-40
3) User
You can set the ID and password to be used when accessing to the mobile server in the mobile Client.
When registering a new user through the “Add New User” button, you can set the user name, ID and
password, user authority. For the User Authority, you can choose one between Monitoring and
Monitoring/Control. You can selectively “Edit” or “Delete” the registered users.

Notice

The ‘User Name’ is used for management only. When accessing to the mobile server, you need to “ID”
and “password”. “ID” can be deleted but cannot be modified.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-41

4) Service tag
You can register the tag used for the mobile client.
If you click the “Add” button, the tag selection window will be displayed.
After choosing the targeted tag in the tag selection window, if you click “Add” button, the tag will be
registered. Selecting several tags should be done with pressing the “Shift” key. The registered tags are
used for monitoring tag values and creating trend groups in the mobile app.

Notice

To select tags, the InfoU project containing the relevant tag should be executed in runtime or be loaded
from the InfoU engineering.

Chapter 25 Mobile
25-42
25.2 Mobile Server
The mobile server provides the services to transmit the data of the mobile project and InfoU to the mobile client.
(1) Execution of the mobile server
You can run the mobile server in the mobile designer.
To run the mobile server select [Tool]  [Service Update] in the main menu of the mobile designer or select
the “Service Update” icon in the toolbar. In this case, the project loaded to the mobile designer is serviced by
the mobile server.
Otherwise, you can directly run “InfoUMServer.exe” in the InfoUin folder. In this case, the serviced project is
the mobile project that was serviced last. If there is no service history, the server starts up only and you can
select the project in the popup menu of the server.
When the mobile server starts, the icon will be created in the taskbar and the starting message will be
displayed.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-43

(2) Selection of the mobile project
You can change the targeted project for service using ‘Select Project File’ menu of the mobile server.
To run the popup menu, clcik with the right mouse button on the icon of the taskbar of the mobile server. Then, run “Select
Project File” in the popup menu. After choosing the mobile project file in the dialog box to open the mobile project, if you
click the “Open” button, the selected project will be applied.
(3) Stop and Start of Mobile server
You can stop or start the mobile service.
To run the popup menu, click with the right button on the icon of taskbar of the mobile server. Then, run “Stop
Server” in the popup menu to stop the service. For the suspended server, you can resume the service by
running “Start Server” in the popup menu.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-44
(4) Exit of the mobile server
You can exit the mobile server.
To run the popup menu, click with the right mouse button on the icon of the taskbar of the mobile server. If
you run “Exit” in the popup menu, the mobile server will end.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-45

25.3 Mobile Client
The InfoU mobile app that is installed and executed in the smartphone or tablet acts as the client for the mobile
server. The mobile Client (app) receives the project information serviced by the mobile server and performs
monitoring.
In Google Play Store, search for the “XGT InfoU” and find “XGT InfoU mobile” app, then, install it. If you run the
installed “InfoU mobile” app by touching, the initial screen will show up.

Notice

For normal operation of the mobile client, the InfoU runtime and mobile server should be running.

Chapter 25 Mobile
25-46
(1) Addition of the project
You can add the mobile project.
Run the “project” icon in the initial screen.

If you touch the “Menu” item in the right upper corner of the project selection screen, the menu bar will
be displayed at the bottom of the app screen.

Run “Add” in the menu bar at the bottom of the screen.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-47

Name: Enter the project name.

Server IP address: Enter the IP address or host name URL of the PC where the mobile server runs.

Port: Enter the set port No. into the mobile server project.

Interval (communication cycle): Input the communication cycle of the mobile server. The input value
should be between 500 ~ 10,000(0.5~10 sec.).

Draw By DPI: It displays the screen drawn in the mobile designer based DPI of the client device.

Fix Screen Ratio: It displays the screen created in the mobile designer with the proper ratio.

Show Logo: Select whether displaying the logo or not.

Background Alarm: Select whether displaying the background alarm when the mobile client program
is hidden.

Background Alarm Interval: Set the cycle of checking the background alarm.

Retry Count: Set the number of times to retry when communication fails during checking the
background alarm.

ID: Enter the ID for accessing to the mobile server. You can access to the mobile server only when the
ID is registered in the mobile server project.

Password: Enter the password for accessing to the mobile server.

Confirm Password: To confirm the password, reenter the password.

Notice

The instructions for setting the project are as follows.
☞ The smaller the communication cycle value is, the more frequent communication with the mobile server
is and the faster the updating speed is. However, please note that it may also increase the battery
consumption.
☞If ‘Draw By DPI’ is ON, the most suitable resolution document will be displayed based on the screen
size of the mobile device. If ‘Draw By DPI’ is OFF, the most suitable resolution document will be
displayed based on the resolution of the mobile device.

Chapter 25 Mobile
25-48
(2) Deletion of the project
You can delete the mobile project.

Select the “Menu” button in the upper right corner of the project selection screen.

If you select “Delete”in the menu bar at the bottom, the set name displayed in the project list will be
changed into red.

Select the project to delete.

If you press the “Yes” button in the information window, the project will be deleted.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-49

(3) Addition of tag groups
You can check and control tags in real time by setting the tag group.

Run the “Tag” icon on the initial screen. The “Tag” icon is activated only when you access to the
mobile server.

Choose the “Menu” button in the window to select the tag group.

Select “Add” in the menu bar at the bottom.

In the tag selection screen, check the tag that you want to check and enter the group name.

Save the tag group by selecting the “Save” button in the upper right corner of the tag selection screen.

Chapter 25 Mobile
25-50
(4) Deletion of tag groups
You can delete the tag group.

Choose the “Menu” button in the tag group selection screen.

If you select “Delete” in the menu bar at the bottom, the tag group name displayed in the tag group list
will be changed into red.

Select the group to delete in the tag group list.

Press the “Yes” button in the information window to delete the tag group.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-51

(5) Monitoring tag values
You can select the tag group and monitor the changes of tag values.

Run the “Tag” icon in the initial screen. The “Tag” menu is activated only when you access to the
mobile server.

Choose the tag group to monitor in the tag selection screen.

(6) Control of tag values
You can control the tag values.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-52

In the real-time tag value, double-touch the area where the targeted tag value is displayed

Enter the desired value in the window to write the tag value.

Choose the “OK” button.

Then, you can see the control value is reflected.

(7) Real-time alarm check
You can check the alarm in real time.
Run the “Alarm” icon in the initial screen. The “Alarm” icon is activated only when you access to the mobile
server. In the Real-time Alarm window, you can check the currently occurring alarm. If you have a large
number of occurring alarms, the alarms will be dividedly displayed in several pages. You can move to the
next page by pressing the paging button.
1) Alarm Groups Settings
You can filter alarms by group and check them through alarm group settings.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-53

If you touch the menu button in the upper right corner of the real-time alarm page, the menu bar will be
displayed at the bottom.

When you select “Alarm Groups Settings” in the menu bar at the bottom, the alarm group settings
window will be displayed. In the alarm group settings window, check whether using the group filter.
After checking the targeted group, if you press the “Save” button, the details will be applied.

2) Filter Selection
Through Filter Selection you can filter alarms by type and check them.
After setting the type and status of the alarm, if you press the “Save” button, the filter will be applied.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-54
(8) Background Alarm Notice
In case the mobile client is hidden, you can get the background alarm notice. However, in order to use this
function, you need to check “Use Background Alarm” in the mobile client project settings.
When an alarm occurs, the background alarm will be displayed as above.
(9) Monitoring screen
You can monitor/control the field conditions by downloading the screen drawn in the mobile designer.
Run the “Monitoring Screen” icon in the initial screen. The “Monitoring Screen” icon is activated only
when you access to the mobile server. It can display various screens as below.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-55

(10) Trend
You can monitor the variations of the tag data in real time by setting the trend group.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-56
Run the “Trend” icon in the initial screen. The “Trend” icon is activated only when you access to the
mobile server. If you select the desired trend group, the trend monitoring screen will be displayed.
1) Addition of trend groups
You can add the trend groups.

If you choose the ‘Menu’ in the trend group selection page, the menu bar will be displayed at the
bottom.

If you select “Add” in the menu bar at the bottom, the tag selection page will show up.

Enter the group name and choose the tag to monitor. Then, if you press the “Save” button, the group
will be created. The number of tags that you can choose is up to 2EA.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-57

2) Deletion of trend groups
You can delete the trend group.
After selecting the “Menu” on the top, press the “Delete” button in the menu bar at the bottom. Select the
trend group to delete. If you press the “Yes” button in the information window, the selected trend group
will be deleted.
(11) Information
If you run the “Information” icon in the initial screen, you can check the version information of the mobile client.
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-58
(12) Exit
Run the “Exit” icon in the initial screen. If you press the “Yes” button in the information window, you can
terminate the mobile client.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-59

25.4 Mobile Network Settings
When operating the service with a router, you can set up the service as follows.
(1) IP setting for the mobile project service
For the IP address to set the mobile project service, enter the external IP address of the router. When using
the DDNS, enter the host name URL. (Example of entering the host name URL: mserver.iptime.org)
Chapter 25 Mobile
25-60
(2) Setting port-forwarding of the router
For example, when accessing to the 5055 service port from the outside, set up the forwarding to 5055 port of
the internal IP 192.168.0.70. The internal IP is the private IP address of the server PC where the InfoU mobile
server is installed, which is given by the router. It can be checked by running the ipconfig in the command
window. The internal IP should be handled so as not to be changed through manual settings in the router.
Otherwise, in the network address property, you can enter the internal IP manually to fix it.
The port-forwarding should be respectively set up for the service port and internal port.
The internal port of service settings is used to update the service of the mobile server in the mobile designer.

Chapter 25 Mobile

25-61

(3) Mobile app address settings
For project settings of the mobile app, enter the IP address of the router for the server IP address and enter
the service port where port-forwarding is done for the port value. If the service address is host name URL,
enter the relevant URL into the server IP address. Ex) mserver.iptime.org

Appendix 1 Modbus Server

A1-1

Appendix 1 Modbus Server
The Modbus sever program sends the tag information of the InfoU using the Modbus protocol. The editor and
runtime (run-time module) are separated.
It targets the current project of the InfoU so if there is no using project, you cannot execute the Modbus sever.
1.1 Modbus Server Editor
1.1.1 Execute Editor
Run the iuModServerE.exe program in the InfoUin folder.
If you run the editor, the below screen will show up. When executing the editor for the first time, there is no
registered information (Device Property) so the window where you can input the registered information will also be
displayed.
Appendix 1 Modbus Server
A1-2
1.1.2 Registered Information
If you select [Project]  [Registered Information] in the upper menu or click the “registered information” button in
the lower left side, you can run the ‘Registered Information’ window. You can also edit/enter the registered
information by executing the ‘Registered Information’ window in the same way.
The composition of the registered information window is as below.

Appendix 1 Modbus Server

A1-3

● Project settings (Project Information)
It displays the information of the currently used InfoU project.
- Name: Name of the currently used InfoU project
- Location: Location where the currently used InfoU project is stored
- Refresh Interval (ms): Data update cycle. It is entered in 1/1000 sec. (msec).
- ID: InfoU Modbus Server’s ID

Notice

☞ You cannot change the InfoU project with this editor. To change the InfoU project, after changing the
project in InfoUD, you need to rerun this editor.

● Register settings (Coil Status)
The Modbus Register used in InfoU are as below.
- 0x00: Coil Status (digital)
- 0x01: Discrete Inputs (digital)
- 0x03: Input Registers (analog)
- 0x04: Holding Registers (analog)
You can respectively specify the Start Address and Count for the above registers.
- Start Address: Start No. of the Register
- Count: Number of Registers

Notice

☞ If you change the number of registers, the DB of the register will be reset so you must be careful. You are
recommended to preset the sufficient number of registers before entering them.

Appendix 1 Modbus Server
A1-4
1.1.3 Tag Setting
(1) Add Tag
If you select the register to edit and click the ‘Add Tag’ button, the tag selection window will be executed as
below.

Notice

☞ For the Coil Status(0x00) and Discrete Inputs(0x01) Register, you can input the digital data only.
☞ For the Input Registers(0x03) and Hold Registers(0x04), you can input the analog data only.

Appendix 1 Modbus Server

A1-5

Select the tag that you want to register and click the OK button.

Notice

☞ If “Include Tag Field” is checked in the left menu, you can select just one tag. For multi-selection of
tags, “Include Tag Field” should be unchecked.

You can see three tags are input to the Coil Status Register. At this time, the start address is automatically
input considering the tag size every time the tag is added.
Appendix 1 Modbus Server
A1-6
In the above figure, the start address (Register No.) of each tag is as below.

Register No.	Tag
0	Monitoring screen.DEMO_monitoring screen_StationOK
1	Monitoring screen.Dig1
2	Monitoring screen.Dig2

(2) Delete Tag
After selecting the tag that you want to delete from registered tags, if you click the ‘Delete Tag’ on the right
side, the tag will be deleted.
After deletion, the start address of the remaining tags are automatically modified considering the tag size.

Appendix 1 Modbus Server

A1-7

(3) Edit Tag
After selecting the tag that you want to edit from the registered tags, if you click the “Edit Tag” button on the
left side, the menu where you can edit the information of the selected tag will be displayed on the screen. You
can edit items of the effective length/Wordswap depending on the tag type.
Appendix 1 Modbus Server
A1-8
1.1.4 Copy / Paste Clipboard
(1) Copy to Clipboard
You can copy the tag registered in the editor to a clipboard. If you select the desired tag from the registered
tags by dragging it and click with the right mouse, the below popup menu will show up. If you click [Copy] in
the popup menu, the information of the selected tag will be copied to the clipboard.
Through the editor, you can copy the details saved in the clipboard and paste it to Excel.

Appendix 1 Modbus Server

A1-9

Notice

☞ The tag information copied from a clipboard is the tag name and Wordswap information. When pasting
them to Excel, the left column indicates the tag name and the right column indicates the Wordswap
information.

(2) Paste from Clipboard
You can edit the information of the tag to be registered in Excel and copy it to the clipboard.
After selecting the register for the tags treated in Excel, if you click with the right mouse button on the tag
registration, the below popup menu will show up. If you click [Paste] in the popup menu, the tags processed
in Excel will be added to the editor.
Appendix 1 Modbus Server
A1-10

Notice

☞ When processing the tag information in Excel, the tag should be registered in the InfoU Project with the
right spelling and style.
☞ Depending on the property of the register, you need to separate digital/analog data for Paste.
- For the Coil Status (0x00) and Discrete Inputs (0x01) Register, you can input the digital data only.
- For the Input Registers (0x03) and Hold Registers (0x04), you can input the analog data only.

Appendix 1 Modbus Server

A1-11

1.1.5 Export to CSV file
You can export the whole tags registered in the editor to the CSV file at once.
After selecting [Project]  [Export] in the upper menu, you can save the CSV file with the desired path and file
name as below.
Appendix 1 Modbus Server
A1-12
When you open the saved CSV file, you can see the information of the Register No., Tag name and Wordswap, is
saved as shown below.

Notice

The start address (Register No.) registered by Register is as blow.
☞ Coil Status(0x00) 0, 1, 2, …
☞ Discrete Inputs(0x01) 10000, 10001, 10002, …
☞ Input Registers(0x03) 30000, 30002, 30004, …
☞ Hold Registers(0x04) 40000, 40002, 40004, …

Appendix 1 Modbus Server

A1-13

You can copy the second and thirtd row of the desired tags from the CSV file generated by ‘Export’ and paste
them to the editor through a clipboard.
Appendix 1 Modbus Server
A1-14
1.2 Modbus Server Runtime
1.2.1 Execute Runtime
You can run the iuModServerR.exe program in the InfoUin folder.
Or you can click [Run-time]  [Execute Run-Time] in the upper menu of the editor.
If there is no information edited by the editor, the runtime will not work with the below warning message.

Appendix 1 Modbus Server

A1-15

If the normal file exists, the file is read and the below runtime screen will be executed. Then, it will be switched
over the Modbus standby mode.
1.2.2 Runtime Menu
(1) Open Project
If you click [Project]  [Open Project] in the upper menu of the runtime window, you can reread the
configuration file treated by the editor

Notice

☞ If the file is edited by the editor while the runtime is executed, it is not applied immediately so you need
to reread it.

Appendix 1 Modbus Server
A1-16
(2) Start Project
Click [Project]  [Start Project] in the upper menu of the runtime window and scan the InfoU data periodically
based on the cycle (Refresh Interval) set by the editor. Then, the information is transmitted at the request of
the Modbus Client.
(3) Stop Project
Click [Project]  [Stop Project] in the upper menu of the runtime window and exit the provision of data for the
InfoU.
(4) Recoding Log
You can check the communication packet by clicking [Log]  [Start Recoding Log] in the upper menu of the
runtime window.

Appendix 1 Modbus Server

A1-17

(5) Save Recoding Log
If you click [Log]  [Save Recoding Log] in the upper menu of the runtime window, you can save the log as a
file with the desired path and name.

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server

A2-1

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
2.1 Introduction
OPC is intended to standardize communication with various industrial devices under the Microsoft window
operation system. This operates based on COM/DCOM functions of the window operation system, consisting of
two kinds of software- OPC Client software such as InfoU and OPC Server software. This session explains how to
use the Company’s OPC Server that can exchange data through OPC (OLE for Process Control)- method
communication. LS InfoU OPC Server presents a Configuration Program to select tags acquired from LSIS OPC
DA Server, which will provide data during the runtime, and OPC DA Server. The Configuration Program contains
monitoring function for local and remote diagnosis with its own InfoU OPC Server.
2.2 Install Program
2.2.1 Installation
The program is installed according to the following sequence.
(1) Install .NET Framework 2.0
Run “dotnetfx.exe”.
(2) Install Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 Run Time library”
Run “vcredist_x86.exe”
(3) Install LS InfoU OPC DA Server”
1) Run “LSISOPC Server For InfoU_V_1_4.exe”
2) Select “Yes” to “Accept” all of the terms of the License Agreement for using “Microsoft Visual C++ 2005
Run Time library”.
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
A2-2
3) Select the "Setup” type
- Complete: All program features will be installed.
- Custom: Only the selected features by the user will be installed.

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server

A2-3

4) Choose a destination location. When changing the default folder, press “Change” button to select a folder
where setup files will be installed.
5) Press “Install” button to start installing.
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
A2-4
6) Press“Finish” button and exit installation.

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server

A2-5

2.2.2 Modify/Repair/Remove Program
(1) Modify
1) Run “LSISOPC Server For InfoU_V_1_4.exe”
2) Decide whether to install or remove each program. If the check box is selected, the relevant program is
installed or it not, it is removed.
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
A2-6
3) Click on“Next”to run and complete modifying.
4) Press “Finish” button and complete the installation.

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server

A2-7

(2) Repair
1) Run “LSISOPC Server For InfoU_V_1_4.exe” file.
2) To reinstall all program features installed by the previous setup, select “Repair.”
3) Click on“Next”to run and complete repairing.
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
A2-8
4) Press “Finish” button and complete the installation.
(3) Remove
1) Run “LSISOPC Server For InfoU_V_1_4.exe”file.
2) Select “Remove”to remove all OPC programs related to installation.

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server

A2-9

3) To remove, click on “Yes” button.
4) Press “Finish” button and complete the installation.
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
A2-10
2.3 Configuration of Default Screen
Select [Start]  [All Programs]  [LSIS OPC Server APPLICATION]  [LSIS OPC SETUP AND DIAGNOSTICS]
on the operation display line.
The program above has OPC DA Server Configuration and OPC DA Server Monitoring features. Among them, this
shows a monitoring screen during the execution. If “Configuration” tap is selected from the program, it becomes
available to select a tag list to be provided by the server as a configuration screen for OPC DA Server.
2.3.1 Configuration

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server

A2-11

(1) Toolbar (OPC Project)
1) New OPC Project: Contain information on new tags to be acquired in the runtime and create a new OPC
project.
2) Save OPC Project: Save a new or modified OPC project.
3) Open OPC Project: Load an existing OPC project to be acquired by OPC DA server in the runtime.
(2) Toolbar (Channel)
1) Add a channel, that is, set up one infoU project to be executed on other computer for each channel.
2) Delete the selected channel.
3) Delete all of the channels registered with OPC project.
4) Check the selected channel for its communication status.
5) Load tag information on the selected channel from InfoU project.
6) Load the created CSV from InfoUD and set up tags.
(3) Channel Window
View the tag DB loaded from the selected channel’s InfoU project in a tree view.
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
A2-12
(4) Channel Property Window
1) Channel Name: The channel name should be a unique one. It helps the user to identify InfoU project.
2) Device Name: It lets the user know it is LSIS InfoU.k
3) IP Address: Set up the computer’s IP address where InfoU project runs.
4) Project Name: Set up the name of a project which is currently running on InfoU.
5) Project Path: Set up a location where InfoU project exists.
6) Update Cycle(ms): Set up a cycle to import tag values from InfoU.
7) Update Mode: Decide whether to provide real tag values on InfoU or simulation in OPC DA Server.
(5) Tag List Window

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server

A2-13

(6) Description Window
Description on each field of the Property Window is displayed.
2.3.2 Monitoring
(1) Toolbar
1) : Connect to LSIS InfoU OPC Server.
2) : Disconnect to LSIS InfoU OPC Server.
3) : Start monitoring.
4) : Stop monitoring.
(2) Tag Window
This window shows all of the tag lists registered with the connected LSIS InfoU OPC Server and allows the
user to select only the tags to be monitored.
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
A2-14
(3) Monitoring Window
This window shows the selected tags’ values.
(4) Log Window
1) This window shows the log information generated during the monitoring.
2) : Delete the contents from the log list.
3) : Export log information to a file.

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server

A2-15

2.4 OPC Project Configuration
2.4.1 Create New OPC Project
(1) Create project
To create a new OPC project, click on .
(2) Add channel
To add a channel to the OPC project, click on .
(3) Channel property
On the created channel property window, select basic information on InfoU project to be acquired from LS
InfoU OPC DA Server and a cycle to acquire data.
1) Channel Name: The channel name should be a unique one. It helps the user to identify InfoU project.
2) Device Name : It lets the user know it is LSIS InfoU.
3) IP Address : Set up the computer’s IP address where InfoU project runs.
4) Project Name : Set up the name of a project which is currently running on InfoU.
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
A2-16
5) Project Path : Set up a location where InfoU project exists.
6) Update Cycle(ms) : Set up a cycle to import tag values from InfoU.
7) Update Mode : Decide whether to provide real tag values on InfoU or simulation in OPC DA Server.
8) To check a channel for its communication status, click on .
9) To load a tag list from the channel to register, click on . Or, click on to select a relevant CSV
file created on InofUD and import it.
10) Click on to create Configuration File(LSISOpcDaServer.config.xml), a OPC project.
Configuration File is created at the position where the program is installed and this file is loaded to import
tag data when LSIS InfoU OPC DA Server starts running.

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server

A2-17

2.4.2 Open or Modify OPC Project
(1) Open OPC Project
Select to import Configuration File (LSISOpcDaServer.config.xml), one of existing OPC
projects.
(2) Channel property
Update the Project Name, Project path or IP Address on the channel property window.
(3) Save OPC Project
Click on to save the modified information on OPC project in Configuration file
(LSISOpcDaServer.config.xml).
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
A2-18
2.5 Run Monitoring
2.5.1 Connect LS InfoU OPC Server / Start Monitoring
(1) Connect OPC Server
1) Click on tool bar. The following window appears to allow the user to select an OPC server to
be connected to.
2) To select Local, click on “Connect” button. To select Remote, press “Remote” radio button and directly
input the name of a computer on which LS InfoU OPC Server runs or input the name through the browser
and then, click on “Connect” button.

Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server

A2-19

3) Select a tag to be monitored through the tag Window. Register the selected tag with the monitoring
Window.
4) Click on toolbar. The following window appears to allow the user to select an interval
to update tag data from LS InfoU OPC Server. Input seconds for interval and select OK button.
5) Start monitoring after making the tag window inactive because it is impossible to select additional tags to
be monitored any more. The monitoring window shows the results of monitoring on tag data.
Appendix 2 LSIS InfoU OPC Server
A2-20
2.5.2 Disconnect LS InfoU OPC Server / Stop Monitoring
(1) To stop monitoring, click on .
(2) To stop connecting to the LSIS InfoU OPC Server, click on .
2.6 DCOM Configuration
Please refer to the "Appendix3 OPC DCOM Configuration" of InfoU manual.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-1

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
To connect to the OPC server in the remote computer, you need to set up DCOM. There are computer settings
and settings for the LS InfoU OPC DA server for DCOM Settings. This section describes DCOM settings in
Windows 7 and the similar procedures are required for another OS.
3.1 Windows 7 Configuration
3.1.1 Common (Client&Server) Settings
Common settings should be done for both the Client and the Server. You need to set up them in the Client PC and
the Server PC respectively based on the below procedures.
(1) User Account
1) User Account Control Settings
Select [Control Panel]  [User Account]  [User Account Control Settings]
Change the control value into “Never Notify” in the [User Account Control Settings] window. Then, restart
Windows.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-2
2) User Name and Password Setting
To operate the OPC function normally, the user should be registered in the Client PC and Server PC
under the same name with the same password. In addition, you need to log in to the Client PC and
Server PC with the same account.
(2) Install OPC Core Components
Download the “OPC Core Components Redistributable” and install it to the PC. You are recommended to
download the file of the latest version according to the specifications of the PC.
(3) Component Services Setting
1) Computer Setting
After entering “dcomcnfg” in [Start]  [Run], click the [OK] button.
Then, “Component Services” window will be displayed as below. Expand the “Component Services” by
clicking the Console Root, click the [Computer]. Click with the right mouse on [Computer]-[My Computer]
and run the [Properties] menu.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-3

Put a check “Check local store when choosing partition for user” in the [Options] tab.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-4
Put a check “Enable Distributed COM on this computer” in the [Default Properties] tab.
Add the “Everyone” account to “Access Permissions” of the [COM Security] tab and [Edit Limits] of
“Launch and Activation Permissions” and [Edit Default] . Then, set the access permission as “Permissions
for Everyone”.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-5

Add the “Everyone” account to [Edit Limits] of “Access Permission” and [Edit Default]. Then, set the
access permission as “Permissions for Everyone”.
Add the “Everyone” account to the [Edit Limits] of “Launch and Activation Permission” and [Edit Default].
Then, set the access permission as “Permissions for Everyone”.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-6
Put a check “Use local coordinator” in the [MSDTC] tab.
After the settings are completed, press the [Apply]  [OK] button and exit the task.
2) OpcEnum Setting
Select [Components Service]  [Computer]  [My Computer]  [DCOM Configuration].
Select “OpcEnum” and click with the right mouse to pick [Properties].

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-7

In the [OpcEnum Properties] window, set the details of [General], [Location] tabs as shown below.
After setting all items of the [Security] tab as “Customize”, press the [Edit] button to add the “Everyone”
account to all permissions. Then, set the access permission as “Permissions for Everyone”.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-8
Select “system account (services only)(S)” in the [ID] tab.
After settings are completed, press the [Apply]  [OK] button and exit the task.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-9

(4) Firewall Setting
1) Add Program (OpcEnum)
Run [Control Panel]  [Windows Firewall].
Click “Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall” on the left side.
Press the [Allow another program] button and then, press [Browse] button in the ‘Add a program’ window.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-10
Add the file C:WindowsSystem32OpcEnum.exe

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-11

3.1.2 Client Settings
After setting the PC in accordance with the instructions of “Common (Client & Server) Setting”, perform the
additional settings based on the below procedures.
(1) Firewall Setting
1) Inbound Rule Setting (Add Port: 135)
Run [Control Panel]  [Windows Firewall] and select [Advanced Settings].
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-12
Select [Inbound Rules] on the left side and click [New Rules] on the right side.
Select the “port” for the rule type that you want to create and click the [Next] button.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-13

Select the “TCP” to be applied to the new rule and set the port as “Specific local ports”. Then, enter “135”
and click the [Next] button.
Select “Allow the connection” for the specified task item, click the [Next] button.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-14
Put a check “Domain”, “Private”, “Public” in the profile items and click the [Next] button.
Put a check “Domain”, “Private”, “Public” in the profile items and click the [Next] button.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-15

3.1.3 Server Settings
After setting the PC based on “Common (Client & Server) Setting” and perform the additional settings based on
the below procedures.
(1) Install LSIS OPC Server
Install the “LSIS OPC Server For InfoU” program.
(2) Component Service Setting
1) LSIS OPC Server Setting
After entering “dcomcnfg” in [Start]  [Run], press the [OK] button.
After selecting [Computer]  [My Computer]  [DCOM Configuration], click with the right mouse button
on the “LSIS OPC Data Access Server” of the right list and run the [Properties] menu.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-16
Set the [General] tab and [Location] tab as below.
After setting all items of the [Security] tab as “Customize”, press the [Edit] button to add the “Everyone”
account to all permissions. Then, set the access permission as “Permissions for Everyone”.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-17

Select “The interactive user” in the [ID] tab.
2) RemoteRegistry Setting
After selecting [Services(local)] in the Dcomcnfg setting window, click with the right button on the “Remote
Registry” of the right list and select the ‘Properties’.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-18
Set “Start type” as “Automatic” in the [General] tab.
(3) Firewall Setting
1) Add Program (LSIS DA Server)
Run [Control Panel]  [Windows Firewall].
Click “Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall ” on the left side.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-19

Press the [Allow another program] button. Then, select “LSIS OPC DA Server” in the list of ‘Add a
program’ window and press the [Add] button.
2) Inbound Rule Setting (Add Port: 135-139)
Run [Control Panel]  [Windows Firewall] and click “Advanced Settings” on the left side.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-20
Select [Inbound Rules] on the left side and click [New Rules] on the right side.
Select the “Port” for the rule type that you want to create and click the [Next] button.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-21

Select the “TCP” to be applied to the new rule and set the port as “Specific local ports”. Then, enter “135-
139”and click the [Next] button.
Select “Allow the connection” for the specified action items and click the [Next] button.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-22
Put a check “Domain”, “Private”, “Public” in the profile items and click the [Next] button.
Enter the name and description of the newly defined rule.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-23

3.2 Windows XP Configuration
3.2.1 Client Settings
(1) Default
● The user needs to set up DOM to use the OPC servers installed on the remote PC.
● DCOM is set up as the following procedure and the local PC and the remote PC are also applied the same
settings as DCOM.
● The following description is about DCOM settings in the window XP and for the DCOM settings in other OS,
any similar type is used.
● The same account shall be registered for both of the local PC and remote PC and the same password shall
be used for both of them.
● The local PC and remote PC shall be accessed with the same account.
● The firewall in the remote PC shall be cancelled to log in to the system.
● To use the OPC servers installed in the remote PC, basic OPC files shall be installed in the local PC.
(Install the OPC Core Components Redistributable program first. Visit www.opcfoundation.org)
(2) Component Service Settings
● Input “dcomcnfg” in the window and press OK.
● The following “Component Services” window will appear.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-24
● Find “My Computer” and execute “Properties” menu.
● The following “My Computer Properties” window will appear.
● Select “Default Properties”tap.
● Check √ in the checkbox of “Enable Distributed COM on this computer”.
● Select “Connect” for “Default Authentication Level” item.
● Select “ID” for “Default Impersonation Level” item.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-25

● Select”COM Security” tap.
● To set up “Access Permissions”, press “Edit Limits” and “Edit Default” to set up as follow:
- Edit Limits: Check √ in both of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Access” and
“Remote Access”to permit ANONYMOUS LOGON and Authenticated Users.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-26
● Edit Default: - Edit Limits; Check ¡îin both of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Access” and
“Remote Access” to permit INTERACTIVE, NETWORK and SYSTEM users to log in.
● To set up “authorization to launch and activate”, press “Edit Default” and set up as follow:
- Edit Limits: Check √ in all of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Launch”, “Remote Launch”,
“Local Activation” and “Remote Local Activation” to permit Authenticated Users to launch and
activate.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-27

● Edit Default: Check √ in all of the boxes under” Allow” for “Local Launch”, “Remote Launch”,”Local
Activation” and “Remote Local Activation” to permit INTERACTIVE, NETWORK and SYSTEM users to
launch and activate.
● In the next step, DOM settings are carried out on the OPC server to be used.
● The user needs to set up the OPC server he/she wants to use according to the following procedure:
● Find the OPC server the user wants to use and execute “Properties” menu.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-28
● Select “Connect” for “Authentication Level” from “General” tap.
● Select “Security” tap.
● Select “Use Default” for “Launch and Activation Permissions.”
● Select “Use Default” for “Access Permissions.”

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-29

● Select “Identity” tap.
● Select “The Interactive User.”
(3) Firewall Settings
● The above Windows Firewall window is displayed.
● Select “Off (not recommended)”.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-30
● Select “Advanced” tap.
● Click “Settings” button for ICMP.
● Check “Allow incoming echo request”.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-31

(4) Security Settings
● Execute [Control Board]  [Management Tool]  [Local Policies].
● [Local Policies]  [Security Options]  “Network Access: Execute “Sharing and security model for local
accounts”.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-32
● Select“Classic – Local users authenticate as themselves”.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-33

3.2.2 Server Settings
DCOM configuration is necessary to connect to OPC server on the remote computer. For DCOM configuration,
there are computer configuration and LS InfoU OPC DA Server configuration. In this appendix, configuration is
explained with an example of DCOM configuration on the Window XP service Pack 2 and similar procedure
applies to other OSs, too.
Basic Procedure)
- The local computer and the remote computer should be registered with the same account, sharing the same
password.
- The local computer and the remote computer should be logged in with the same account
- To use OPC DA Server on the remote computer, basic OPC files have been installed on the local computer.
(1) Firewall Setting
● Select“Start  Control Board  Security Center  Window Firewall”. “On (recommended)”has been set up
as the default configuration. This configuration is recommended to protect the computer from Microsoft and
OPC. However, select“Not Use” for OPC communication or follow the instruction below:
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-34
● Select “Exceptions” tap and press “Add Program” as below.
● Select “Browse” button to register LSISOpcDaServer.exe and LSOPCDiagnosticsSetuipApp.exe
the runtime and the configuration program of LSIS InfoU OPC DA Server respectively.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-35

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-36
● Add TCP Port 135 to initialize DOCM communication. Click on “Add Port” button on “Exceptions” tap of
Windows Firewall.
● Input the following items on “Add a Port” window.
- Name: DCOM
- Port Number: 135
- “TCP” Select radio button

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-37

(2) DCOM Setting
1) Computer Setting
● Input [Start]  [Run]  “DCOMCnfg” and then, press “OK” button.
● “Component Services” window is displayed as below. Click on Console Root to enlarge the Component
Services and then, click on My Computer.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-38
● Find ”My Computer” item and run ”Properties” menu.
● Set up designated values for the following items on “Default Properties” tap as below.
- "Enable Distributed COM on this computer”: Check “Use.”
- Default Authentication Level: Connect.
- Default Impersonation Level: ID
● After selecting “COM Security” tap, set up “Access Permission” and “Launch Permission” as below.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-39

● For “Access Permission,” set up “Security Limits” and “Default Security.”
- Security Limits: After adding ANONYMOUS LOGIN, Everyone and Authenticated Users to ‘Group
or User Names’ item, Check √ in all of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Assess” and
“Remote Access”.
- Default Security: Check √ in all of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Access” and
“Remote Access” for Everyone, INTERACTIVE, NETWORK and SYSTEM user.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-40
● For “Launch Permission,” set up “Security Limits” and “Default Security” as below.
- Security Limits: Check √ in all of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Launch”, “Remote
Launch”, “Local Launch” and “Remote Launch” for ANONYMOUS LOGON and
Authenticated Users.
- Default Security: Check √ in all of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Launch”, “Remote
Launch”, “Local Launch” and “Remote Launch” for Everyone, INTERACTIVE, NETWORK
and SYSTEM user.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-41

2) LSIS InfoU OPC Server Setting
● After entering [Start]  [Run]  “DCOMCnfg”, press “OK” button.
● “Component Services” window is displayed as below. Click on Console Root to enlarge the Component
Services and then, click on Computers. Find My Computer and set up properties.
● Double click on “DCOM Config.”
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-42
● Set up properties on “OpcEnum” to permit ANONYMOUS LOGON. (If “OpcEnum”is not used, Remote
Access by any anonymous user is not permitted.)
● Find “OpcEnum” from the list and run “Properties” menu.
● Set up “None” for ”Authentication Level” on ”General” tap of “OpcEnum Property” Window.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-43

● Select “Security” tap.
● After selecting “User Specified” for ”Launch Permission” and pressing “Edit” button, set up as below.
-“Group or User Names”: Check √ in all of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Launch”,
“Remote Launch”, “Local Launch” and “Remote Launch” for each user.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-44
● After setting up “Access Permission” and pressing “Edit” button, set up as below.
-“Group or User Names”: Check √ in all of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Access” and
“Remote Access” for each user.
● After clicking on “ID” tap, select “The system account (services only)”.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-45

● Find” LSIS OPC Data Access 3.0 Server” from the list and run “Properties” menu.
● “LSIS OPC Data Access 3.0 Server Property” Window is displayed.
● Maintain “Default” for “Authentication Level” item on “General” tap.
Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration
A3-46
● Select “Security” tap.
● After selecting “User Specified” for” Launch Permission” and pressing “Edit” button, set up as below.
-“Group or User Names”: Check √ in all of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Launch”,
“Remote Launch”, “Local Activation” and “Remote Activation” for each user.

Appendix 3 OPC DCOM Configuration

A3-47

● After setting up “Access Permission” and pressing “Edit” button, set up as below.
-“Group or User Names”: Check √ in all of the boxes under “Allow” for “Local Access” and
“Remote Access” for each user.
● Set up “Use Default” for “Configuration Authority”.
● After selecting “Identity” tap, select “The interactive user”.
● After clicking on “Apply” button, press “OK” button.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-1

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
4.1 Script Function of Microsoft Script Engine

Function Name	Form
Abs	Function Abs(Number)
Array	Function Array(ArgList)
Asc	Function Asc(String As String)
Atn	Function Atn(Number As Double) As Double
CBool	Function CBool(Expression) As Double
CByte	Function CByte(Expression) As Byte
CCur	Function CCur(Expression) As Currency
CDate	Function CDate(Expression) As Date
CDbl	Function CDbl(Expression) As Double
Chr	Function Chr(CharCode As Long
CInt	Function CInt(Expression) As Integer
CLng	Function CLng(Expression) As Long
Cos	Function Cos(Number As Double) As Double
CreateObject	Function CreateObject(Class As String)
CSng	Function CSng(Expression) As Single
CStr	Function CStr(Expression) As String
Date	Function Date() As Date
DateAdd	Function DateAdd(Interval As String, Number As Double, Date)
DateDiff	Function DateDiff(Interval As String, Date1, Date2, [FirstDayOfWeek As VbDayOfWeek = vbSunday], [FirstWeekOfYear As VbFirstWeekOfYear = vbFirstJan1])
DatePart	Function DatePart(Interval As String, Date, [FirstDayOfWeek As VbDayOfWeek = vbSunday], [FirstWeekOfYear As VbFirstWeekOfYear = vbFirstJan1])
DateSerial	Function DateSerial(Year As Integer, Month As Integer, Day As Integer)
DateValue	Function DateValue(Date As String)
Day	Function Day(Date)
Eval	Function Eval(Expression As String)
Exp	Function Exp(Number As Double) As Double
Filter	Function Filter(InputStrings As Array, Value As String [, Include As Boolean [, Compare As VbCompareMethod = vbBinaryCompare]]])
Fix	Function Int(Number)
FormatCurrency	Function FormatCurrency(Expression[,NumDigitsAfterDecimal [, [,UseParensForNegativeNumbers [,GroupDigits]]]])
FormatDateTime	Function FormatDateTime(Date[, NamedFormat])

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-2

FormatNumber	Function FormatNumber(Expression [,NumDigitsAfterDecimal [,IncludeLeadingDigit [,UseParensForNegativeNumbers [,GroupDigits]]]])
FormatPercent	Function FormatPercent(Expression[,NumDigitsAfterDecimal [,IncludeLeadingDigit [,UseParensForNegativeNumbers [,GroupDigits]]]])
GetObject	Function GetObject([PathName], [Class])
Hex	Function Hex(Number)
Hour	Function Hour(Time)
InputBox	Function InputBox(Prompt, [Title], [Default], [XPos], [YPos], [HelpFile], [Context]) As String
InStr	Function InStr([Start], [String1], [String2], [Compare As VbCompareMethod = vbBinaryCompare])
InStrRev	Function InStrRev([Start], [String1], [String2], [Compare As VbCompareMethod = vbBinaryCompare])
Int	Function Int(Number)
IsArray	Function IsArray(VarName) As Boolean
IsDate	Function IsDate(Expression) As Boolean
IsEmpty	Function IsEmpty(Expression) As Boolean
IsNull	Function IsNull(Expression) As Boolean
IsNumeric	Function IsNumeric(Expression) As Boolean
IsObject	Function IsObject(Expression) As Boolean
Join	Function Join(List As Array[, Delimiter As String])
LBound	Function LBound(Arrayname[, Dimension As Number])
LCase	Function LCase(String)
Left	Function Left(String, Length As Long)
Len	Function Len(Expression)
LoadPicture	Function LoadPicture([filename], [widthDesired As Long], [heightDesired As Long], [flags As LoadPictureConstants = Default]) As IpictureDisp
Log	Function Log(Number As Double) As Double
LTrim	Function LTrim(String)
Mid	Function Mid(String, Start As Long, [Length])
Minute	Function Minute(Time)
Month	Function Month(Date)
MonthName	Function MonthName(Month As Number[, Abbreviate As Boolean])
MsgBox	Function MsgBox(Prompt, [Buttons As VbMsgBoxStyle = vbOKOnly], [Title], [HelpFile], [Context]) As VbMsgBoxResult
Now	Function Now()
Oct	Function Oct(Number)
Replace	Function Replace(Expression As String, Find As String, ReplaceWith As String [, Start As Number[, Count As Number[, Compare As VbCompareMethod = vbBinaryCompare]]])

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-3

Right	Function Right(String, Length As Long)
Rnd	Function Rnd([Number]) As Single
RGB	Function RGB(red, green, blue)
Round	Function Round(Expression[, NumDecimalPlaces])
RTrim	Function RTrim(String)
ScriptEngine	Function ScriptEngine() As String
ScriptEngineBuildVersion	Function ScriptEngineBuildVersion As Number
ScriptEngineMajorVersion	Function ScriptEngineMajorVersion Function As Number
ScriptEngineMinorVersion	Function ScriptEngineMinorVersion Function As Number
Second	Function Second(Time)
Sgn	Function Sgn(Number)
Sin	Function Sin(Number As Double) As Double
Space	Function Space(Number As Long)
Split	Split(Expression[, Delimiter As String [, Count As Number[, Compare As Number]]])
Sqr	Function Sqr(Number As Double) As Double
StrComp	Function StrComp(String1, String2, [Compare As VbCompareMethod = vbBinaryCompare])
String	Function String(Number As Long, Character)
StrReverse	Function StrReverse(String)
Tan	Function Tan(Number As Double) As Double
Time	Function Time() As Date
TimeSerial	Function TimeSerial(Hour As Integer, Minute As Integer, Second As Integer)
TimeValue	Function TimeValue(Time As String)
Trim	Function Trim(String)
TypeName	Function TypeName(VarName) As String
UBound	Function UBound(Arrayname[, Dimension As Number])
UCase	Function UCase(String)
VarType	Function VarType(VarName) As VbVarType
Weekday	Function WeekDay(Date, [FirstDayOfWeek As VbDayOfWeek = vbSunday])
WeekdayName	Function WeekdayName(Weekday As Number, Abbreviate As Boolean, FirstDayOfWeek As Number)
Year	Function Year(Date)

Abs Function
Description	The absolute value of a number is returned.
Syntax	Abs(number) The factor of a number should be a valid expression. If the number has the value zero, null is returned. And if the number is a non-initialized variable, 0 is returned

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-4

Reference

The absolute value of a number shows only its size without code. For example, in both Abs(-1)
and Abs(1), 1 is returned.
In the following example, Abs Function calculates the absolute value of a number.
Dim MyNumber
MyNumber = Abs(50.3) '50.3 is returned
MyNumber = Abs(-50.3) '50.3 is returned

Array Function
Description	A Variant including Array is returned
Syntax	Array(arglist) The arglist factor consists of values distinguished with pauses and it designates the Array factor included in the Variant to this value. If any factor is not designated, Array whose length is 0 is created.
Reference	This notation is used when referring to variable elements consisting of variable names next to a bracket that has index numbers indicating essential elements. For example, the first statement creates variable A equal to Variant. The second statement designates Array to variable A. The last statement designates a value that includes the variable’s second Array element. Dim A As Variant A = Array(10,20,30) B = A(2) The minimum limit of the Array created with this Array Function is decided with the minimum limit that Option Base statement designates. The lower limit of the Array created with this Array Function is decided with the lower limit that Option Base statement designates or the name of the Array Function is decided with the name of the Form Library (ex: VBA.Array). Once the name is designated with the Form Library, this Array Function is not influenced by Option Base statement anymore. Even Variants not declared by Memo Array can include Array. Variant variables can include all forms of Array except fixed-length string forms and customized forms. Even though Variant Form including Array is different from Array, whose element is of variant form in terms of concept, the elements of the relevant Array can be equally accessed.

Asc Function
Description	ANSI character code corresponding to the first character of a string is returned.
Syntax	Asc(string) The string factor should be a valid character expression. If there is no character in the string,

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-5

Runtime errors take place.

Reference

Asc returns the ANSI character code of the first character of each string as seen in the following
example.
Dim MyNumber
MyNumber = Asc("A") '65 is returned.
MyNumber = Asc("a") '97 is returned.
MyNumber = Asc("Apple") '65 is returned.
Memo
AscB Function uses Byte data that the string has. AscB does not return the character code of the
first character but the first Byte of the character. AscW Function is provided for 32bit platforms
using Unicode characters. Since this Function returns the character codes of Unicode, it is not
necessary to convert Unicode to ANSI code..

Atn Function
Description	The arctangent of a number is returned.
Syntax	Atn(number) The number factor should be a valid expression.
Reference	This Atn Function uses the ratio between lengths of two sides of a right triangle and returns alternate angles in radian unit. This ratio is obtained by dividing the length of the side facing the relevant angle by the length of the side adjacent to this angle. The results are ranged between pi/2 and pi/2 radian. To convert angle to radian, multiply angle by pi/180 and to convert radian to angle, multiply radian by 180/pi. In the following example, Atn calculates pi value. Dim pi pi = 4 * Atn(1) ' Calculate pi value.. Memo : Atn Function is a reverse triangle function of Tan that returns the ratio between two sides of a right triangle by using angle as a factor. Do not confuse Atn with cotangent, a reverse tangent (1/tangent)..

CBool Function
Description	The expression converted to a Boolean subtype of Variant is returned.
Syntax	CBool(expression) The expression factor should be a valid expression.
Reference	If the expression is 0, False is returned or if not, True is returned. This expression can not be

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-6

interpreted into number values and Runtime errors take place.
In the following example, CBool Function converts the expression to Boolean. If the expression is
not 0, CBool returns True or if it is 0, It returns False
Dim A, B, Check
A = 5: B = 5 ' Initialize variables.
Check = CBool(A = B) ' Check gets True.
A = 0 ' Define a variable.
Check = CBool(A) ' Check gets False

CByte Function
Description	The expression converted to a Byte subtype of Variant is returned.
Syntax	CByte(expression) The expression factor should be a valid expression. Reference

Typically, if a code is created with a subtype of conversion function, the operation result can be
seen in a particular data type rather than in a basic data type. For example, If Cbyte is used for
call, single precision, double precision or integer arithmetic operation, Byte arithmetic operation is
carried out.
If CByte Function is used, other types of data can be converted to a Byte subtype widely used
throughout the world. For example, symbols identified with different digit numbers such as
symbols identified with a number in the thousands are properly recognized according to the
locale settings of the computer.
If an expression exceeds the tolerance range of Byte subtype, errors take place. In the following
example, Cbyte Function converts the expression to Byte.
Dim MyDouble, MyByte
MyDouble = 125.5678 ' MyDouble is equal to Double.
MyByte = CByte(MyDouble) ' MyByte gets value 126

CCur Function
Description	The expression converted to a Currency subtype of Variant is returned.
Syntax	CCur(expression) The expression factor should be a valid expression.
Reference	Typically, if a code is created with a subtype of conversion function, the operation result can be seen in a particular data type rather than in a basic data type. For example, if Ccur is used for an integer arithmetic operation, a call arithmetic operation is executed. If CCur Function is used, other types of data can be converted to a widely-used Currency subtype throughout the world. For example, symbols identified with different digit numbers such

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-7

as symbols identified with a number in the thousands are properly recognized according to the
locale settings of the computer.
In the following example, CCur Function converts the expression to Currency.
Dim MyDouble, MyCurr
MyDouble = 543.214588 ' MyDouble is equal to Double.
MyCurr = CCur(MyDouble * 2) ' The value multiplied MyDouble by 2 (1086.429176) is
converted to Currency (1086.4292).

CDate Function
Description	The expression converted to a Date subtype of Variant is returned
Syntax	CDate(date) The date factor should be a valid expression.
Reference	If IsDate Function is used, it is decided whether to convert a date factor into date or time. CDate Function recognizes numbers within the tolerance range of date as well as date literal and time literal. If number is converted to date, the integer part is converted to date. The fractional part of number is converted to time of the day that starts from the midnight. CDate Function recognizes date type according to the computer’s locale settings. If any unrecognized date type is provided, it is impossible to decide a correct order of year, month and day. It is also impossible to recognize the marked date type in detail even though there is a corresponding string to the day of the week. In the following example, CDate Function converts a string to date. Typically, it is not good to use the date and hard coded time with strings as seen in this example. Instead, it is better to use date and time literal such as #10/19/1962# or #4:45:23 PM#, MyDate = "October 19,1962" ' Decide date. MyShortDate = CDate(MyDate) ' It is converted to Date data type. MyTime = "4:35:47 PM" ' Decide time MyShortTime = CDate(MyTime) ' It is converted to Time data type

CDbl Function
Description	The expression converted to a Double subtype of Variant is returned.
Syntax	CDbl(expression) The expression factor should be a valid expression.
Reference	Typically, if a code is created with a subtype of conversion function, the operation result can be seen in a particular data type rather than in a basic data type. For example, if CDbl or CSng is used for a call or integer arithmetic operation, single or double precision arithmetic operation is carried out.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-8

If CDbl Function is used, other types of data can be converted to a widely-used Double subtype
throughout the world. For example, symbols identified with different digit numbers such as
symbols identified with a number in the throusands are properly recognized according to the
locale settings of the computer.
In the following example, CDbl Function converts the expression to Double.
Dim MyCurr, MyDouble
MyCurr = CCur(234.456784) ' MyCurr is equal to Currency.
MyDouble = CDbl(MyCurr * 8.2 * 0.01) ' The result is converted to Double

Chr Function
Description	A character related to the designated ANSI character code is returned.
Syntax	Chr(charcode) The charcode factor is a number to identify characters
Reference	Numbers 0 through 31 are equal to the ASCII standard codes that can not be printed. For example, Chr(10) returns line feed characters. In the following example, Chr Function returns the character related to the designated ANSI character. Dim MyChar MyChar = Chr(65) ' A is returned. MyChar = Chr(97) ' a is returned. MyChar = Chr(62) ' > is returned. MyChar = Chr(37) ' %i s returned. Memo ChrB Function uses Byte data that the string has. 1Byte is always returned rather than 1Byte or 2Byte characters. ChrW Function is provided for 32bit platforms using Unicode characters. Since the factor of this Function is a Unicode character code, it is not necessary to convert ANSI to Unicode

CInt Function
Description	The expression converted to an Integer subtype of Variant is returned
Syntax	CInt(expression) The expression factor should be a valid expression.
Reference	Typically, if a code is created with a subtype of conversion function, the operation result can be seen in a particular data type rather than in a basic data type. For example, if CInt or CLng Function is used for call, single precision or double precision arithmetic operation, integer arithmetic operation is carried out. If CInt Function is used, other types of data can be converted to a widely-used Integer subtype

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-9

throughout the world. For example, symbols identified with different digit numbers such as
symbols identified with a number in the throusands are properly recognized according to the
locale settings of the computer.
If an expression exceeds the tolerance range of Integer subtype, error takes place.
In the following example, CInt Function converts the value to integer.
Dim MyDouble, MyInt
MyDouble = 2345.5678 ' MyDouble is equal to Double.
MyInt = CInt(MyDouble) ' MyInt gets value 2346.
Memo
Cint is different from Fix or Int Function that does not round off but cut away decimal points. If the
decimal point is exactly 0.5, CInt Function always rounds off the nearest even number. For
example, 0.5 is rounded off to 0 and 1.5 is rounded off to 2.

CLng Function
Description	The expression converted to a Long subtype of Variant is returned.
Syntax	CLng(expression) The expression factor should be a valid expression.
Reference	Typically, if a code is created with a subtype of conversion function, the operation result can be seen in a particular data type rather than in a basic data type. For example, if CInt or CLng Function is used for call, single precision or double precision arithmetic operation, integer arithmetic operation is carried out. If CLng Function is used, other types of data can be converted to a widely-used Long subtype throughout the world. For example, symbols identified with different digit numbers such as symbols identified with a number in the throusands are properly recognized according to the locale settings of the computer. If an expression exceeds the tolerance range of Integer subtype, errors take place. In the following example, CLng Function converts the value to Long. Dim MyVal1, MyVal2, MyLong1, MyLong2 MyVal1 = 25427.45: MyVal2 = 25427.55 ' MyVal1 and MyVal2 are Doubles. MyLong1 = CLng(MyVal1) ' MyLong1 gets value 25427. MyLong2 = CLng(MyVal2) ' MyLong2 gets value 25428. Memo CLng Function is different from Fix or Int Function that does not round off but cut away decimal points. If the decimal point is exactly 0.5, CLng Function always rounds off the nearest even number. For example, 0.5 is rounded off to 0 and 1.5 is rounded off to 2.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-10

Cos Function
Description	The cosine of an angle is returned
Syntax	Cos(number) The number factor should be a valid expression showing the angle in a radian.
Reference	Cos Function uses angles and returns the ratio between two sides of a right triangle that is, the ratio between the length of the adjoining side and the length of the oblique side of each angle. The results are between -1 through 1. To convert angle to radian, multiply angle by pi/180 and to convert radian to angle, multiply radian by 180/pi. In the following example, Cos Function returns the cosine value of the angle. Dim MyAngle, MySecant MyAngle = 1.3 ' Define an angle in a radian value. MySecant = 1 / Cos(MyAngle) ' Caculate the Secant value.

CreateObject Function
Description	A reference for an automatic object is created and returned
Syntax	CreateObject(class) The class factor uses Syntax servername.typename and gets the following factors Description on factor servername: the name of an application program providing objects. typename: The type or class of an object to be produced.
Reference	An automatic server provides at least more than one object type. For example, the word processing program provides application program objects, document object and toolbar objects. To create automatic objects, designate the returned object from CreateObject Function as an object variable. Dim ExcelSheet Set ExcelSheet = CreateObject("Excel.Sheet") This code starts an application program while creating the relevant object, that is, Microsoft Excel spread sheet. Once the object is created, the object can be referred by using customized variables. In the following example, properties and methods of the new object are accessed by using ExcelSheet object variables and Excel objects including Application objects and ActiveSheet.Cells collections. The application examples are as follows: ' Make Excel program appear through Application objects. ExcelSheet.Application.Visible = True ' Put the relevant text on the first cell of the sheet. ExcelSheet.ActiveSheet.Cells(1,1). Value = "Column A , Row 1."

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-11

' Save the sheet.
ExcelSheet.SaveAs "C:DOCSTEST.XLS"
' Close Excel program by using ‘Quit’ method of the Application object.
ExcelSheet.Application.Quit
' Release the object variable.
Set ExcelSheet = Nothing

CSng Function
Description	The expression converted to a Single subtype of Variant is returned
Syntax	CSng(expression) The expression factor should be a valid expression.
Reference	Typically, if a code is created with a subtype of conversion function, the operation result can be seen in a particular data type rather than in a basic data type. For example, if CDbl or CSng is used for a call or integer arithmetic operation, single or double precision arithmetic operation is carried out. If CSng Function is used, other types of data can be converted to a widely-used Single subtype throughout the world. For example, symbols identified with different digit numbers such as symbols identified with a number in the throusands are properly recognized according to the locale settings of the computer. If an expression exceeds the tolerance range of Byte subtype, errors take place. In the following example, CSng Function converts the value to Single. Dim MyDouble1, MyDouble2, MySingle1, MySingle2 ' MyDouble1 and MyDouble2 are Doubles. MyDouble1 = 75.3421115: MyDouble2 = 75.3421555 MySingle1 = CSng(MyDouble1) ' MySingle1 gets value 75.34211. MySingle2 = CSng(MyDouble2) ' MySingle2 gets value 75.34216.

CStr Function
Description	The expression converted to a String subtype of Variant is returned
Syntax	CStr(expression) The expression factor should be a valid expression.
Reference	Typically, if a code is created with a subtype of conversion function, the operation result can be seen in a particular data type rather than in a basic data type. For example, if CStr is used, the result is expressed in a String. If CStr Function is used instead of Str Function, other types of data can be converted to a widely used String subtype throughout the world. For example, symbols identified with different digit numbers are properly recognized according to the computer’s locale settings. The data used in an expression decide the returned results as seen in the table.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-12

Expression Data	CStr Returned Result
Boolean	String containing True or False
Date	String containing simplified date by computer settings.
Null	Runtime error
Empty	String whose length is 0 ("")
Error	String showing error number next to word ‘Error’
Other	String containing numbers
In the following example, CStr Function converts the value to String. Dim MyDouble, MyString MyDouble = 437.324 ' MyDouble is equal to Double. MyString = CStr(MyDouble) ' MyString gets value "437.324.".

Date Function
Description	The Date of the current system is returned.
Syntax	Date
Reference	In the following example, Date Function returns the Date of the current system. Dim MyDate MyDate = Date ' MyDate gets the date of the current system.

DateAdd Function
Description	The Date that adds the designated time interval is returned.
Syntax	DateAdd(interval, number, date) DateAdd Function Syntax has following factors. Description on Factor The value of the interval factor is as follows:
interval	A mandatory factor. A literal expression indicating the date that adds interval. For the value, refer to the following settings.
number	A mandatory factor. A numerical expression of the interval number to be added. In the numerical expression, a positive number refers to a future date while a negative number refers to a past date.
date	A mandatory factor. Variant or literal indicating the date that adds interval.
Setting	Description
yyyy	Year

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-13

q	Quarter
m	Month
y	Year(As of one year)
d	Day
w	Weekday
ww	Week(As of one year)
h	Hour
n	Minute
s	Second
Reference	If DateAdd Function is used, it is possible to add the designated time interval to the date or subtract it from the date. For example, if DateAdd Function is used, it is possible to calculate the date that will be in 30 days from today or the time that will be in 45 minutes from the current time. To add a certain day to the date, use year("y"), day("d") or weekday("w"). In DateAdd Function, any wrong date is not returned. In the following example, one month is added to January 31. NewDate = DateAdd("m", 1, "31-Jan-95") In this case, DateAdd Function returns 28-Feb-95 rather than 31-Feb-95. If the date is 31-Jan-96, 29-Feb-96 is returned because year 1996 is a leap year. If the date to be calculated is before AD 100, errors take place. If it is not a number of Long value, the nearest integer shall be rounded off before calculation.

DateDiff Function
Description	The difference between two dates is returned
Syntax	DateDiff(interval, date1, date2 [,firstdayofweek[, firstweekofyear]]) DateDiff Function Syntax has following factors.
Factor	Description
interval	A mandatory factor. A literal expression of interval used to calculate the difference between Date 1 and Date 2. For the value, refer to the following settings.
date1, date2	A mandatory factor. Two dates used to calculate in the date expression.
firstdayofwee k	An optional factor. Sunday is deemed as the day of the week if any Constant is not designated to indicate which day of the week. For the value, refer to the following settings.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-14

firstweekofye ar	An optional factor. A constant indicating the first week of the year. If not indicated, the week that contains January 1 is deemed as the first week in the year. For the value, refer to the following settings.
Description on Factor interval: A mandatory factor. A literal expression of interval used to calculate the difference between Date 1 and Date 2. For the value, refer to the following settings. date1, date2: A mandatory factor. Two dates used to calculate in the date expression. firstdayofweek: An optional factor. Sunday is deemed as the day of the week if any Constant is not designated to indicate which day of the week. For the value, refer to the following settings. firstweekofyear: An optional factor. A constant indicating the first week of the year. If not indicated, the week that contains January 1 is deemed as the first week in the year. For the value, refer to the following settings Settings The value of the interval factor is as follows: The value of the firstweekofyearl factor is as follows:
Setting	Description
yyyy	Year
q	Quarter
m	Month
y	Year(As of one year)
d	Day
w	Weekday
ww	Week(As of one year)
h	Hour
n	Minute
s	Second
Constant	Value	Description
vbUseSystem	0	NLS(National Language Support). Use API settings
vbSunday	1	Sunday(Default Value)
vbMonday	2	Monday
vbTuesday	3	Tuesday
vbWednesday	4	Wednesday
vbThursday	5	Thursday
vbFriday	6	Friday
vbSaturday	7	Saturday

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-15

Description on Constant Value
Constant	Value	Description
vbUseSystem	0	NLS(National Language Support). Use API settings
vbFirstJan1	1	Start from the week that contains January 1 (Default Value)
vbFirstFourDays	2	Start from the week that contains the first four days in the new year.
vbFirstFullWeek	3	Start from the week that contains the first full week (7 days) in the new year.
Reference	If DateDiff Function is used, it is possible to know the time difference between two dates. For example, if DateDiff Function is used, it is possible to calculate the day number between two dates or the week number between today and the end of the year. To calculate the day number between Date 1 and Date 2, use year ("y") or day ("d") as of the year. If interval is expressed with weekday ("w"), DateDiff Function returns the week number between two dates. If date1 is on Monday, DateDiff Function calculates how many Mondays are there by date2. That is, date2 is calculated instead of date 1. But, if interval is expressed with week ("ww"), DateDiff Function returns the calendar week numbers between two dates. That is, the Sunday number is calculated between date1 and date2. In DateDiff Function, if date2 is on Sunday, it calculates date2 but, if date1 is also on Sunday, it does not calculate date1. If date1 is latter than date2, DateDiff Function returns a negative number. The firstdayofweek factor has influence on the calculation using interval symbols such as "w" and "ww." If date1 or date2 is a date literal, the designated year becomes the permanent element of the relevant date. But, if a pair of quotation marks (" ") is place around date1 or date2 and the relevant year is omitted, the current year shall be inserted to the user code whenever date1 or date2 expression is calculated. The code that can be used for the next year can be written in this way. If December 31 is compared to the next January 1, DateDiff returns 1 to the year ("yyyy") factor even only one day is elapsed. In the following example, DateDiff Function indicates the elapsed days until now from the given date. Function DiffADate(theDate) DiffADate = "Elapsed Day: " & DateDiff("d", Now, theDate) End Function

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-16

DatePart Function
Description	The designated part of a given date is returned.
Syntax	DatePart(interval, date[, firstdayofweek[, firstweekofyear]]) DatePart Function Syntax has following factors. Settings The value of the interval factor is as follows: The value of the firstweekofyear factor is as follows:
factor	Description
interval	A mandatory factor. A literal expression of the time interval to be returned. For the value, refer to the following settings.
date	A mandatory factor. A date expression to be calculated.
firstdayof week	An optional factor. Sunday is deemed as the day of the week if any Constant is not designated to indicate which day of the week. For the value, refer to the following settings.
firstweekofyear	An optional factor. A constant indicating the first week of the year. If not indicated, the week that contains January 1 is deemed as the first week in the year. For the value, refer to the following settings.
Settings	Description
yyyy	Year
q	Quarter
m	Month
y	Year (As of one year)
d	Day
w	Weekday
ww	Week(As of one year)
h	Hour
n	Minute
s	Second
Constant	Value	Description
vbUseSystem	0	NLS(National Language Support). Use API settings
vbSunday	1	Sunday(Default Value)
vbMonday	2	Monday
vbTuesday	3	Tuesday
vbWednesday	4	Wednesday
vbThursday	5	Thursday
vbFriday	6	Friday

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-17

vbSaturday	7	Saturday
Description on Constant Value
Constant	Value	Description
vbUseSystem	0	NLS(National Language Support). Use API settings
vbFirstJan1	1	Start from the week that contains January 1 (Default Value)
vbFirstFourDays	2	Start from the week that contains the first four days in the new year.
vbFirstFullWeek	3	Start from the week that contains the first full week (7 days) in the new year.
Reference	If DatePart Function is used, the date is calculated and a certain time interval is returned. For example, it is possible to calculate a weekday or the current time by using DatePart. The firstdayofweek factor has influence on the calculation using interval symbols such as "w" and "ww." If the date is a date literal, the designated year becomes the permanent element of the relevant date. But, if a pair of quotation marks (" ") is place around the date and the relevant year is omitted, the current year shall be inserted to the user code whenever the date expression is calculated. The code that can be used for the next year can be written in this way. The following example shows Quarter of the relevant year by using DatePart Function and date. Function GetQuarter(TheDate) GetQuarter = DatePart("q", TheDate) End Funtion

DateSerial Function
Description	The Date subtype of Variant of the designated year, month and day is returned.
Syntax	DateSerial(year, month, day) DateSerial Function Syntax has following factors Reference
Factor	Description
year	Numbers 100 through 9999 or a numerical expression
month	All expressions
day	All expressions

For example, to designate a certain date such as December 31, 1991, the number of each
DateSerial factor should be within the tolerance range of the relevant. That is, for day, it should
be one from the first day through the thirty first day and it should be one from January through
December for month. But, the counter date of each factor can be designated by using a

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-18

numerical expression showing the year, month or day before and after a particular date.
The following example uses a numerical expression instead of an absolute date number. Here,
DateSerial Function returns the date subtracted one day from the first day(1-1) on the month two
months before August (8-2) in the year 10 years before 1990 (1990-10).
DateSerial(1990 - 10, 8 - 2, 1 - 1)
If the value of the year factor is one from 0 through 99, it is interpreted from 1900 through 1999.
In all other year factors except that, a four-digit number such as 1800 is used.
If the tolerance range of the factor is exceeded, it goes to the next bigger unit For example, if the
thirty fifth day is designated, it is calculated to which day of one month according to the
applicated year. But, if a certain factor exceeds range -32,768~32 and 767 or a date designated
directly or through an expression by using three factors. Errors take place.

DateValue Function
Description	The Date subtype of Variant is returned.
Syntax	DateValue(date) Typically, the date factor is a literal expression indicating from January 1, 100 to December 31, 9999 and the expression shows the date, time or date/time in this range Reference

If the date factor contains time information, DateValue Function does not return the information.
However, some wrong information such as "89:98" is in the date factor, errors take place.
If the date factor is a string that has only the numbers divided by valid date separating symbols,
DateValue Function recognizes year, month and day according to the simplified date marking
type of the computer settings. Also, it is possible to recognize an accurate date that contains the
formal or informal date name. For example, DateValue Function recognizes December 30,
1991 or Dec 30, 1991 as well as 2/30/1991 or 12/30/91.
If the year part is omitted from the date factor, DateValue Function uses the current year as set
up on the computer.
In the following example, DateValue Function converts a string to date. It is possible to directly
assign the date to Variant variable by using the date literal (ex. MyDate = #9/11/63).
Dim MyDate
MyDate = DateValue("September 11, 1963") ' Date is returned.

Day Function
Description	The integer indicating the date from 1 through 31 is returned.
Syntax	Day(date)

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-19

The date factor is an expression showing the date. If the date factor has the value zero, Null is returned
Reference	Dim MyDay MyDay = Day("Oct 19, 1962") 'MyDay gets value 19.

Eval Function
Description	A sentence as a factor is calculated and Result Value or the stack value of variable is returned.
Syntax	Eval(Expr[, Depth]) Expr : As an expression to be operated. VB script syntax should be inputted as a string value. Depth: Numbers should be inputted. Input the value location to the local variable’s stack. If Depth = 0, the current value at the operation stage is returned and if omitted, Depth is 0
Reference	The following example shows how Eval Function is used. Ex1) Dim Guess, RndNum RndNum = Int((100) * Rnd(1) + 1) Guess = CInt(InputBox("Enter your guess:",,0)) Do If Eval("Guess = RndNum") Then MsgBox "Congratulations! You guessed it!" Exit Sub Else Guess = CInt(InputBox("Sorry! Try again.",,0)) End If Loop Until Guess = 0 Ex 2) Sub Main Dim X As String X = "Hello" Debug.Print Eval("X") 'Return Hello A End Sub Sub A Dim X As String X = "Bye" Debug.Print Eval("X") 'Return Bye Debug.Print Eval("X",1) 'Retusn the previous value of Hello End Sub

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-20

Exp Function
Description	‘e’, a root of natural logarithms raised by the multiplier is returned
Syntax	Exp(number) The number factor should be a valid expression
Reference	If the number value exceeds 709.782712893, errors take place. Constant is about 2.718282. Memo Exp Function makes up for Log Function and it is sometimes called an antilogarithm. In the following example, Exp Function returns e for angle. MyAngle = 1.3 ' Define an angle in a radian value. MyAngle = 1.3 ' Calculate the sine value of a hyperbola. MyHSin = (Exp(MyAngle) - Exp(-1 * MyAngle)) / 2

Filter Function
Description	The Array based on 0, which has a subset of String Array according to the designated filter base, is returned
Syntax	Filter(InputStrings, value[, Include[, compare]]) Filter Function Syntax has following factors Settings Comparison factors have the following values
Factor	Description
InputString s	A mandatory factor. 0ne dimension Array of the String to be searched.
value	A mandatory factor. The String to be searched.
Include	An optional factor. A boolean value showing whether to return the sub string including or excluding value. If it is True, Filter Function returns a subset of the Array corresponding to value as a sub string. If it is False, Filter Function returns a subset of the Array not corresponding to value as a sub string.
compare	An optional factor. A number value showing the comparison type to be used. For the value, refer to the following settings.
Constant	Value	Description
vbBinaryCompare	0	Run Binary Comparison.
vbTextCompare	1	Run Text Comparison.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-21

Reference

If there is no value agreed with InputStrings, Filter Function returns empty Array. If InputStrings
has the value zero or it is not one dimension Array, errors take place.
The returned Array in Filter Function has only the elements enough to contain the agreed item
number.
In the following example, Filter Function returns the Array that has "Mon" search reference.
Dim MyIndex
Dim MyArray (3)
MyArray(0) = “Sunday”
MyArray(1) = “Monday”
MyArray(2) = “Tuesday”
MyIndex = Filter(MyArray, "Mon") 'MyIndex(0) contains “Monday”

Fix Function
Description	The integer part of a number is returned
Syntax	Int(number) Fix(number) The number factor should be a valid expression. The number has the value zero, Null is returned.
Reference	Both of Int Function and Fix Function return the integer value that shows the results of removing the part after the decimal point. If the difference between Int Function and Fix Function is a negative number, Int Function returns the first negative integer that is lower or equal to the number but, Fix Function returns the negative integer that is higher or equal to the number. For example, Int Function converts -8.4 to -9 and Fix Function converts -8.4 to -8. Fix (number) Function is equal to the following expression. Sgn(number) * Int(Abs(number)) The following example shows how Int and Fix Function convert the integer part of a number. MyNumber = Int(99.8) ' 99 is returned. MyNumber = Fix(99.2) ' 99 is returned. MyNumber = Int(-99.8) ' -100 is returned. MyNumber = Fix(-99.8) ' -99 is returned. MyNumber = Int(-99.2) ' -100 is returned. MyNumber = Fix(-99.2) ' -99 is returned.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-22

FormatCurrency Function
Description	A formalized expression with the call values that use the defined call symbols on the computer’s [Control Board] is returned.
Syntax	FormatCurrency(expression[,NumDigitsAfterDecimal [,IncludeLeadingDigit [,UseParensForNegativeNumbers [,GroupDigits]]]]) FormatCurrency Function Syntax has following factors. Settings IncludeLeadingDigit, UseParensForNegativeNumbers and GroupDigits factor have the following values
Factor	Description
expression	A mandatory factor. An expression whose format is specified.
NumDigitsAfterDecimal	An optional factor. A number value indicating the number of digits after the decimal point. The Default Value is -1, showing the use of the computer’s national settings.
IncludeLeadingDigit	An optional factor. A Tristate Constant showing whether to mark 0 before a valid number after the decimal point. For the value, refer to the following settings.
UseParensForNegative Numbers	An optional factor. A Tristate Constant showing whether to place a negative value in a paranthesis. For the value, refer to the following settings.
GroupDigits	An optional factor. A Tristate Constant showing whether to identify a number with the designated group distinguishing symbols according to the computer’s national settings.
Constant	Value	Description
TristateTrue	-1	True
TristateFalse	0	False
TristateUseDefault	-2	Use of the computer’s national settings.
Reference	If more than one factor is omitted, the factor value that omits the computer’s national setting value is used. The location of the call symbols related to call values is decided by the computer’s national setting value. Memo The entire setting information except previously acted 0 (zero) on [Number] tap is on [Call] tap of [National settings].

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-23

FormatDateTime Function
Description	A formalized expression with date or time is returned
Syntax	FormatDateTime(date[,NamedFormat]) FormatDateTime Function Syntax has following factors Settings NamedFormat factor has the following settings Reference
Factor	Description
date	A mandatory factor. Specify a date expression.
NamedFormat	An optional factor. A number value showing the used date/time format. If this factor is omitted, vbGeneralDate is used.
Constant	Value	Description
vbGeneralDate	0	Mark date or time. If there is date part, mark the date in a simple date type, If there is time part, mark the time in a detailed time type. If date and time exist at the same time, mark both of them.
vbLongDate	1	Show date in the detailed date type designated by the computer’s national settings.
vbShortDate	2	Show date in the simple date type designated by the computer’s national settings.
vbLongTime	3	Show time in the time type designated by the computer’s national settings.
vbShortTime	4	Show time in 24-hr type (hh:mm).

In the following example, FormatDateTime Function designates the expression in a long date
type and exports it to MyDateTime.
Function GetCurrentDate
'FormatDateTime specifies Date in a long date type.
GetCurrentDate = FormatDateTime(Date, 1)
End Function

FormatNumber Function
Description	A formalized expression with number is returned
Syntax	FormatNumber(expression[,NumDigitsAfterDecimal [,IncludeLeadingDigit [,UseParensForNegativeNumbers [,GroupDigits]]]]) FormatNumber Function Syntax has following factors
Factor	Description
expression	A mandatory factor. An expression whose format is specified.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-24

NumDigitsAfterDecimal	An optional factor. A number value indicating the number of digits after the decimal point. The Default Value is -1, showing the use of the computer’s national settings.
IncludeLeadingDigit	An optional factor. A Tristate Constant showing whether to mark 0 before a valid number after the decimal point. For the value, refer to the following settings.
UseParensForNegativeN umbers	An optional factor. A Tristate Constant showing whether to place a negative value in a parenthesis. For the value, refer to the following settings.
GroupDigits	An optional factor. A Tristate Constant showing whether to identify a number with the designated group distinguishing symbols set up on [Control Board]. For the value, refer to the following settings.
Settings IncludeLeadingDigit, UseParensForNegativeNumbers and GroupDigits factor have the following settings
Constant	Value	Description
TristateTrue	-1	True
TristateFalse	0	False
TristateUseDefault	-2	The computer’s national settings are used.
Reference	If more than one optional factor is omitted, the factor value that omits the computer’s national setting value is used. Memo The entire setting information is on [Number] tap of [National Settings]. In the following example, FormatNumber Function specifies a number in a four-digit number of a decimal system. Function FormatNumberDemo Dim MyAngle, MySecant, MyNumber MyAngle = 1.3 ' Define an angle in a radian value. MySecant = 1 / Cos(MyAngle) ' Caculate the Secant value. . FormatNumberDemo = FormatNumber(MySecant,4) ' Specify MySecant in a four-digit number of a decimal system. End Function

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-25

FormatPercent Function
Description	An expression that has character % at the end and whose format is designated in percentage multiplied by 100 is returned.
Syntax	FormatPercent(expression[,NumDigitsAfterDecimal [,IncludeLeadingDigit [,UseParensForNegativeNumbers [,GroupDigits]]]]) FormatPercent Function Syntax has following factors. Settings IncludeLeadingDigit, UseParensForNegativeNumbers, GroupDigits factor는 have the following settings
factor	Description
expression	A mandatory factor. A formalized expression is returned.
NumDigitsAfterDecimal	An optional factor. A number value indicating the number of digits after the decimal point. The Default Value is -1, showing the use of the computer’s national settings.
IncludeLeadingDigit	An optional factor. A Tristate Constant showing whether to mark 0 before a valid number after the decimal point. For the value, refer to the following settings.
UseParensForNegativeNu mbers	An optional factor. A Tristate Constant showing whether to place a negative value in a parenthesis. For the value, refer to the following settings.
GroupDigits	An optional factor. A Tristate Constant showing whether to identify a number with the designated group distinguishing symbols set up on [Control Board]. For the value, refer to the following settings.
Constant	Value	Description
TristateTrue	-1	True
TristateFalse	0	False
TristateUseDefault	-2	The computer’s national settings are used.
Reference	If more than one optional factor is omitted, the factor value that omits the computer’s national setting value is used. Memo The entire setting information is on [Number] tap of [National Settings]. In the following example, FormatPercent Function specifies an expression in a type of percentage. Dim MyPercent MyPercent = FormatPercent(2/32) 'MyPercent gets 6.25%.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-26

GetObject Function
Description	A reference on automatic objects in the file is returned
Syntax	Syntax GetObject([pathname] [, class]) GetObject Function Syntax has following factors The class factor uses appname.objectype syntax, and its configuration element is described as follows
Factor	Description
pathname	An optional factor. A string showing the name and entire paths of a file that has the object to be searched. If pathname is omitted, class should exist.
class	An optional factor. A string showing the Class of an object.
Configuration Element	Description
appname	A mandatory factor. A string showing the name of the application program supplying the relevant object.
objectype	A mandatory factor. A string showing the class of format of the object to be created.

Hex Function
Description	A string showing the hexadecimal value of a number is returned
Syntax	Hex(number) The number factor should be a valid expression
Reference	Numbers that are not integer are rounded off to the nearest integer before calculating. Hexadecimal can be expressed by attaching &H before the numbers in a valid range. For example, &H10 expresses hexadecimal mark of decimal number 16. In the following example, Hex Function returns the hexadecimal value of a number. Dim MyHex MyHex = Hex(5) ' 5 is returned. MyHex = Hex(10) ' A Is returned. MyHex = Hex(459) ' 1CB is returned.
Number Value	Result of Hex Function
Null	Null
Empty	0
Numbers other than two value above	Hexadecimal characters less than 8

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-27

Hour Function
Description	An integer indicating the hour of a day from 0 through 23 is returned.
Syntax	Hour(time) The time factor is an expression showing time. If time has the value zero, Null is returned..
Reference	In the following example, Hour Function exports hour from the current time. Dim MyTime, MyHour MyTime = Now MyHour = Hour(MyTime) ' MyHour gets a number showing the current hour

InputBox Function
Description	It displays a prompt in the dialog box or it waits until any text is inputted or a button is pressed or it returns the inputted information
Syntax	InputBox(prompt[, title][, default][, xpos][, ypos][, helpfile, context]) InputBox Function Syntax has following factors.
factor	Description
prompt	A literal expression showing message in the dialog box. prompt is about 1,024 characters long at the most even though it varies depending on the width of the characters. If prompt is long enough to take more than two lines, the lines can be divided by carriage return character (Chr(13)), line feed character(Chr(10)) or a combination of carriage return and line feed characters (Chr(13) & Chr(10)).
title	A literal expression showing on the title line in the dialog box. If title< is omitted, the application program title appears on the tile line.
default	A literal expression basically displayed on the text box if noting is inputted. If default is omitted, an empty text box appears.
xpos	A numerical expression specifying the horizontal length from the screen left end to the dialog left end in a twip unit. If xpos is omitted, the dialog box is located in the middle on the screen.
ypos	A numerical expression specifying the vertical length from the screen upper end to the dialog upper end in a twip unit. If ypos is omitted, the dialog box is located on the point 1/3 above from the bottom of the screen.
helpfile	A literal expression identifying the ‘Help’ file to provide assistance according to the situation If helpfile is provided, it is necessary also to provide context.
context	A numerical expression identifying the Help context number as the relevant Help items designated by the author. If context is provided, it is necessary also to provide helpfile.
Reference	If both of helpfile and context are provided, [Help] button is automatically added in the dialog

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-28

box.
In InputBox Function, the contents in the text box are returned if [Ok] or Key is pressed. If
[Cancel] is pressed, string ("") whose length is 0 is returned.
In the following example, InputBox Function displays a text box and assigns string to variable.
Dim Input
Input = InputBox("Input a name")
MsgBox ("The following name is inputted: " & Input)

InStr Function
Description	The position on which a string firstly appears in other string is returned.
Syntax	InStr([start, ]string1, string2[, compare]) InStr Function Syntax has following factors Settings Comparison factors have the following values. Result Value InStr Function returns the following values.
factor	Description
start	An optional factor. A numerical expression specifying a position at which each search starts. If omitted, search starts from the first character. The start factor is Null, errors takes place. To specify Compare, the start factor is needed.
string1	A mandatory factor. A literal expression to be searched.
string2	A mandatory factor. A literal expression subject to searching.
compare	An optional factor. A number value displayed in a comparison type to be used for assessing sub strings. For the value, refer to the following settings. If omitted, Run Binary Comparison.
Constant	Val ue	Description
vbBinaryCompare	0	Run Binary Comparison.
vbTextCompare	1	Run Text Comparison.
Condition	Result of InStr Function
If the length of string1 is 0	0
If string1 is Null	Null
If the length of string2 is 0	start
If string2 is Null	Null

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-29

If there is no string2	0
If string1 has string2	The relevant location in string1
start > Len(string2)	0

Reference

In the following example, InStr searches a string.
Dim SearchString, SearchChar, MyPos
SearchString ="XXpXXpXXPXXP" ' String to be searched
SearchChar = "P" ' Search “P”
' A text comparison starts at position 4. 6 is returned.
MyPos = Instr(4, SearchString, SearchChar, 1)
' A binary comparison starts at position 1. 9 is returned.
MyPos = Instr(1, SearchString, SearchChar, 0)
' Comparison is binary by default (last argument is omitted).
MyPos = Instr(SearchString, SearchChar) ' Returns 9.
' A binary comparison starting at position 1. Returns 0 ("W" is not found).
MyPos = Instr(1, SearchString, "W")
Memo
InStrB Function uses Byte data that the string has. InStrB Function returns Byte position rather
than the position where a string appears in the other string for the first time.

InStrRev Function
Description	The position on which a string firstly appears in other string is returned at the end of the string.
Syntax	InStrRev(string1, string2[, start[, compare]]) InStrRev Function Syntax has following factors.
factor	Description
string1	A mandatory factor. A literal expression to be searched.
string2	A mandatory factor. A literal expression subject to searching.
start	An optional factor. A numerical expression specifying a position at which each search starts. If omitted, -1 is used and it means search starts at the last character If start is Null, errors takes place.
compare	An optional factor. A number value displayed in a comparison type to be used for assessing sub strings. If omitted, Run Binary Comparison. For the value, refer to the following settings.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-30

Settings Comparison factors have the following values Result Value InStrRev Function returns the following values
Constant	Valu e	Description
vbBinaryCompare	0	Run Binary Comparison.
vbTextCompare	1	Run Text Comparison.
Condition	InStrRev FunctionResult of
If the length of string1 is 0	0
If string1 is Null	Null
If the length of string2 is 0	start
If string2 is Null	Null
If there is no string2	0
If string1 has string2	The relevant location in string1
start > Len(string2)	0
Reference	In the following example, InStrRev Function searches a string. Dim SearchString, SearchChar, MyPos SearchString ="XXpXXpXXPXXP" ' String to be searched SearchChar = "P" ' Search “P” ' A binary comparison starts at position 10. 9 is returned. MyPos = InstrRev(SearchString, SearchChar, 10, 0) ' A text comparison starts at the last position. 12 is returned. MyPos = InstrRev(SearchString, SearchChar, -1, 1) ' For comparison, the Default Value is binary (The last factor is omitted). 0 is returned. MyPos = InstrRev(SearchString, SearchChar, 8) Memo InStrRev Function Syntax is different from InStr Function Syntax.

Int Function
Description	The integer part of a number is returned.
Syntax	Int(number) Fix(number)

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-31

The number factor should be a valid expression. number에 Has the value zeroNull is returned.

Reference

Both of Int Function and Fix Function return the integer value that shows the results of removing
the part after
the decimal point.
If the difference between Int Function and Fix Function is a negative number, Int Function returns
the first negative integer that is lower or equal to the number but, Fix Function returns the
negative integer that is higher or equal to the number. For example, Int Function converts -8.4 to
-9 and Fix Function converts -8.4 to -8.
Fix(number) Function is equal to the following expression.
Sgn(number) * Int(Abs(number))
The following example shows how Int and Fix Function convert the integer part of a number.
MyNumber = Int(99.8) ' 99 is returned.
MyNumber = Fix(99.2) ' 99 is returned.
MyNumber = Int(-99.8) ' -100 is returned.
MyNumber = Fix(-99.8) ' -99 is returned.
MyNumber = Int(-99.2) ' -100 is returned.
MyNumber = Fix(-99.2) ' -99 is returned.

IsArray Function
Description	A boolean value showing whether variable is Array or not is returned
Syntax	IsArray(varname) The varname factor is variable.
Reference	IsArray Function returns True if variable is Array and it returns False if variable is not Array. IsArray Function is especially useful if Variant that contains Array is used. In the following example, IsArray Function tests whether MyVariable is Array or not. Dim MyVariable Dim MyArray(3) MyArray(0) = “Sunday” MyArray(1) = “Monday” MyArray(2) = “Tuesday” MyVariable = IsArray(MyArray) ' MyVariable gets "True."

IsDate Function
Description	A boolean value showing whether an expression is converted to date is returned
Syntax	IsDate(expression) The expression factor is a literal expression that can be recognized as a date expression or date

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-32

or time

Reference

IsDate Function returns True if the relevant expression is date or it can be converted to a valid
date while if not, False is returned. Even though a date range from January 1, AD 100 to January
1, AD 9999 is valid on the Microsoft Windows, its range varies depending on the operation
system.
In the following example, IsDate Function decides whether an expression can be converted to
date.
Dim MyDate, YourDate, NoDate, MyCheck
MyDate = "October 19, 1962": YourDate = #10/19/62#: NoDate = "Hello"
MyCheck = IsDate(MyDate) ' True is returned.
MyCheck = IsDate(YourDate) ' True is returned.
MyCheck = IsDate(NoDate) ' False is returned

IsEmpty Function
Description	A boolean value showing whether Variable is initialized or not is returned
Syntax	IsEmpty(expression) The expression factor can be any expression. However, a typical expression factor is the name of a single variable because IsEmpty Function is used to ensure whether an individual variable is initialized or not Reference

IsEmpty Function returns True if the variable is not initialized or the variable is expressly
designated as Empty or False is returned. If the expression has more than two variables, False is
always returned.
In the following example, IsEmpty Function judges whether the variable is initialized.
Dim MyVar, MyCheck
MyCheck = IsEmpty(MyVar) ' True is returned.

MyVar = Null ' Assign Null.
MyCheck = IsEmpty(MyVar) ' False is returned.
MyVar = Empty ' Assign Empty.
MyCheck = IsEmpty(MyVar) ' True is returned.

IsNull Function
Description	A boolean value showing whether a Null expression has any valid date that is, it is Null or not is returned
Syntax	IsNull(expression) The expression factor can be any expression

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-33

Reference

IsNull Function retunrs True if the expression is Null that is, it have no valid date, otherwise,
False is returned. If the expression consists of more than two variables, Null that belongs to the
entire configuration variables returns True for the full expressions.
Null value means the relevant variable has no valid data. Null is different from Empty, which
shows the relevant variable is not yet initialized and it is also different from String (""), whose
length is 0 and it is sometimes called Null String.
Memo
It is decided whether an expression has Null value by using IsNull Function. In some cases, an
expression is always False even though True is expected as seen in expressions such as If Var
= Null and If Var <> Null. It becomes False because the expression itself contains Null.
In the following example, IsNull Function decides whether the variable has Null value.
Dim MyVar, MyCheck
MyCheck = IsNull(MyVar) ' False is returned.
MyVar = Null ' Designate Null.
MyCheck = IsNull(MyVar) ' True is returned.
MyVar = Empty ' Designate Empty.
MyCheck = IsNull(MyVar) ' Designate False.

IsNumeric Function
Description	A boolean value showing whether an expression can be evaluated with numbers
Syntax	IsNumeric(expression) The expression factor can be any expression Reference

If the expression is a date expression, IsNumeric Function returns False.
In the following example, IsNumeric Function decides whether the variable can be evaluated with
numbers.
Dim MyVar, MyCheck

MyVar = 53 ' Designate a value.
MyCheck = IsNumeric(MyVar) ' True is returned.
MyVar = "459.95" ' Designate a value.
MyCheck = IsNumeric(MyVar) ' True is returned.
MyVar = "45 Help" ' Designate a value.
MyCheck = IsNumeric(MyVar) ' False is returned.
Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-34

IsObject Function
Description	A boolean value showing whether an expression refers valid automatic objects is returned
Syntax	IsObject(expression) The expression factor can be any expression
Reference	IsObject Function returns True if the relevant expression is a subtype variable of Object or a customized object, otherwise, False is returned. In the following example, IsObject Function decides whether the identifier shows individual variables. Dim MyInt, MyCheck, MyObject Set MyObject = Me MyCheck = IsObject(MyObject) ' True is returned. MyCheck = IsObject(MyInt) ' False is returned

Join Function
Description	A string made by combining various sub strings included in Array is returned
Syntax	Join(list[, delimiter]) Join Function Syntax has following factors
factor	Description
list	A mandatory factor. A one-dimension Array including sub strings to be combined.
delimiter	An optional factor. A character used to separate sub strings of the returned string. If omitted, empty character (" ") is used. If delimiter is a string whose length is 0, the entire items in the list are combined without any symbol to divide them.

LBound Function
Description	The smallest subscript available in the designated Array level is returned
Syntax	LBound(arrayname[, dimension]) LBound Function Syntax has following factors
Factor	Description
arrayname	Comply with the notation rule of general variable with Array variable name
dimension	An integer showing the lower limit of the returned level is returned. Use 1 for one dimension, 2 for two dimension, etc. If dimension is omitted, 1 is deemed.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-35

Reference

LBound Function is used along with UBound Function to decide the size of Array. If UBound
Function is used, the upper limit can be known in the Array level.
The lower limit of the entire dimensions is always 0

LCase Function
Description	A string converted to decimal point is returned
Syntax	LCase(string) The string factor should be a valid character expression. If there is Null in string, Null is returned
Reference	This function converts only capital letters to small letters and makes other characters except them remain as they are without converting. In the following example, CDate Function converts capital letters to small letters. Dim MyString Dim LCaseString MyString = "VBSCript" LCaseString = LCase(MyString) ' LcaseString gets "vbscript."

Left Function
Description	Characters as many as designated from the left are returned
Syntax	Left(string, length) Left Function Syntax has following factors
Factor	Description
string	A literal expression to be returned from the character at the left end. If there is Null in string, Null is returned.
length	A numerical expression showing the character count to be returned. If it is 0, a string whose length is 0("") is returned. Their entire strings are returned if it is equal or more than the character count that is in string.
Reference	To decide the character count of string, use Len Function. In the following example, Left Function returns the first three characters of MyString. Dim MyString, LeftString MyString = "VBSCript" LeftString = Left(MyString, 3) 'LeftString gets "VBS." Memo LeftB Function uses Byte data that the string has. It designates Byte count rather than character count to be returned to length factor.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-36

Len Function
Description	The Byte count needed for saving character count or variable that is in the string is returned
Syntax	Len(string \| varname) Len Function Syntax has following factors
Factor	Description
string	A literal expression. If there is Null in string, Null is returned.
varname	It should be a valid variable name. Varname has the value zero, Null is returned.
Reference	In the following example, Len Function returns the character count of a string. Dim MyString MyString = Len("VBSCRIPT") 'MyString gets value 8. Memo LenB Function uses Byte data that the string has. Instead of returning character count to the string, LenB returns Byte count used for expressing this string.

LoadPicture Function
Description	If a picture object is returned, it can be used only on the 32-bit platform
Syntax	LoadPicture(picturename) The picturename factor is a literal expression showing the name of a picture file to be loaded
Reference	LoadPicture Function recognizes the following graphic types; bitemap files(.bmp), icon files(.ico), execution length symbolization files(.rle), meta files(.wmf), improved meta files(.emf), GIF files(.gif) and JPEG files(.jpg).

Log Function
Description	A natural logarithm of a number is returned
Syntax	Log(number) The number factor should be a valid expression more than 0
Reference	A natural logarithm is a log whose base is e. Constant e is about 2.718282. Natural logarithm logn(x) whose base is n and whose value is x can be calculated by dividing natural logarithm logn(x) by natural logarithm logn(n). Logn(x) = Log(x) / Log(n) The following example shows a customized Function that calculates Log Function whose base is 10. Function Log10(X) Log10 = Log(X) / Log(10) End Function

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-37

LTrim Function
Description	LTrim Function returns a string copy which has no left empty space or no right empty space or neither left nor right empty space
Syntax	LTrim(string) RTrim(string) Trim(string) The string factor should be a valid character expression. If there is Null in string, Null is returned.
Reference	In the following example, LTrim Function trims the left empty space, RtrimFunction trims the right empty space and Trim Function trims both of them. Dim MyVar MyVar = LTrim(" vbscript ") 'MyVar gets "vbscript ." MyVar = RTrim(" vbscript ") 'MyVar gets " vbscript." MyVar = Trim(" vbscript ") 'MyVar gets "vbscript"."

Mid Function
Description	Charaters as many as designated by string are returned.
Syntax	Mid(string, start[, length]) Mid Function Syntax has following factors
factor	Description
string	A literal expression containing the characters to be returned. If there is Null in string, Null is returned.
start	A character position at which returning starts in the string. If start factor is more than character count of string, Mid Function returns a string ("") whose length is 0 is returned.
length	Character count to be returned. If omitted or the actual character count is less than the character count of length factor including start factor, the entire characters from the start position to the end character of the relevant string shall be returned.
Reference	The character count of a string can be decided by Len Function. In the following example, Mid Function returns six characters starting from the fourth character of a string. Dim MyVar MyVar = Mid("VB Script is fun!", 4, 6) 'MyVar returns "Script."

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-38

Memo
MidB Function uses Byte data that the string has. In this Function, Byte count is designated
rather than character count.

Minute Function
Description	An integer indicating the minute from 0 through 59 is returned
Syntax	Minute(time) The time factor is an expression showing time. The time has the value zero, Null is returned
Reference	In the following example, Minute Function returns minute. Dim MyVar MyVar = Minute(Now)

Month Function
Description	The integer indicating month from 1 through 12 is returned
Syntax	Month(date) The date factor is an expression showing the date. If date has the value zero, Null is returned
Reference	In the following example, Month Function returns the current month. Dim MyVar MyVar = Month (Now) ' MyVar gets a number corresponding to the current month

MonthName Function
Description	A string showing the designated month is returned
Syntax	MonthName(month[, abbreviate]) MonthName Function Syntax has following factors.
Factor	Description
month	A mandatory factor. Number showing month such as 1 for January and 2 for February, etc.
abbreviate	An optional factor. A boolean value showing whether to display a month name in an abbreviated word type. If omitted, it become False, the Default Value, and shows its full name.
Reference	In the following example, MonthName Function returns the month name to be inputted to the date expression in an abbreviated word type. Dim MyVar MyVar = MonthName(10, True) ' MyVar gets "Oct."

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-39

MsgBox Function
Description	A value that shows whether any message is displayed in the dialog box or whether it waits until any text is inputted, or indicates the button pressed by the user is returned
Syntax	MsgBox(prompt[, button][, title][, helpfile, context]) MsgBox Function Syntax has following factors. Settings The button factor has the following settings.
Factor	Description
prompt	A literal expression showing message in the dialog box. prompt is about 1,024 characters long at the most even though it varies depending on the width of the characters. If prompt is long enough to take more than two lines, the lines can be divided by carriage return character (Chr(13)), line feed character(Chr(10)) or a combination of carriage return and line feed characters (Chr(13) & Chr(10)).
button	A numerical expression showing the kind and number of the button to be displayed, icon types to be used, the sum of values designating targets of basic button confirmation and message box. For the value, refer to the following settings. If omitted, 0 appears, the Default Value of the button.
title	A literal expression showing on the line for the title in the dialog box. If title is omitted, the application program title appears on the tile line.
helpfile	A literal expression identifying the ‘Help’ file to provide assistance according to the situation If helpfile is provided, it is necessary also to provide context. Not available in the 16-bit platform.
context	A numerical expression identifying the Help context number as the relevant Help items designated by the author. If helpfile is provided, it is necessary also to provide context. Not available in the 16-bit platform.
Constant	Value	Description
vbOKOnly	0	Display OK button only.
vbOKCancel	1	Display OK and Cancel button.
vbAbortRetryIgnore	2	Display Abort, Retry and Ingnore button.
vbYesNoCancel	3	Display Yes, No, and Cancel button.
vbYesNo	4	Display Yes and No button.
vbRetryCancel	5	Display Retry and Cancel button.
vbCritical	16	Display Critical Error Message Icon.
vbQuestion	32	Display Warning Query Icon.
vbExclamation	48	Display Warning Message Icon.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-40

vbInformation	64	Display Information Message Icon.
vbDefaultButton1	0	The first button is the default one.
vbDefaultButton2	256	The second button is the default one.
vbDefaultButton3	512	The third button is the default one.
vbDefaultButton4	768	The fourth button is the default one.
vbApplicationModal	0	An application modal. The user has to answer to the questions in the message box before continuing to work on the current application program.
vbSystemModal	4096	A system modal. All application programs aborts until the user answer to the questions in the message box.
The first group values (0-5) show the button types and numbers displayed in the dialog box. The second group (16, 32, 48, 64) shows icon types. The third group (0, 256, 512, 768) decides basic buttons and the fourth group (0, 4096) decides the modal of the message box. When the final value of the button factor is obtained by adding values, only one number is used from each group. Result Value MsgBox Function returns the following values
Constant	Value	Button
vbOK	1	OK
vbCancel	2	Cancel
vbAbort	3	Abort
vbRetry	4	Retry
vbIgnore	5	Ignore
vbYes	6	Yes
vbNo	7	No
Reference	If both helpfile and context are provide, press F1 key to see Help items for each situation. If the dialog box has [Cancel] button, pressing Esc key leads to the same results as pressing [Cancel] button. If the dialog box has [Help] button, Help items are provided for each situation. However, one of other buttons is pressed, any value is not returned. In the following example, MsgBox Function returns the value that displays the message box and explains the selected button. Dim MyVar MyVar = MsgBox ("Hello?", 65, "MsgBox Example") ' MyVar gets value 1 or 2 according to the selected button

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-41

Now Function
Description	The current date and time are returned according to the computer’s system date and time
Syntax	Now
Reference	In the following example, Now Function returns the current date and time. Dim MyVar MyVar = Now ' MyVar gets the current date and time

Oct Function
Description	An octal value of a number is returned.
Syntax	Oct(number) The number factor should be a valid expression
Reference	Numbers that are not integer are rounded off to the nearest integer before calculating Octal can be expressed by attaching &O before the numbers in a valid range. For example, &O10 shows the octal notation of decimal number 8. In the following example, Oct Function returns the octal value. Dim MyOct MyOct = Oct(4) ' 4 is returned. MyOct = Oct(8) ' 10 is returned. MyOct = Oct(459) ' 713 is returned
Value Kind of a number	Result of Oct Function
Null	Null
Empty	0
Numbers other than two value above	Octal characters less than 11

Replace Function
Description	A string that replaces the designated sub string with other sub strings is returned
Syntax	Replace(expression, find, replacewith[, start[, count[, compare]]]) Replace Function Syntax has following factors
factor	Description
expression	A mandatory factor. A literal expression containing the sub strings to be replaced.
find	A mandatory factor. A sub string to be found.
replacewith	A mandatory factor. A sub string to be replaced.
start	An optional factor. A position at which searching a sub string starts in the

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-42

expression. If omitted, 1 is deemed. It shall be used along with count.
number	An optional factor. Number to replace the sub string. If omitted, Default Value becomes -1 and replaces all of the relevant strings. It shall be used along with start.
compare	An optional factor. A number value showing the comparison type of the sub string to be used. For the value, refer to the following settings. If omitted, Default Value becomes 0 and performs binary comparison.
Settings Comparison factors have the following values Result Value Replace Function returns the following values
Constant	Value	Description
vbBinaryCompare	0	Run Binary Comparison.
vbTextCompare	1	Run Text Comparison.
Condition	Result of Replace Function
If it is expression whose length is 0	A string whose length is 0("")
If expression is Null	Error
If it is find whose length is 0	Expression copy
If it is replacewith whose length is 0	Omission of the entire sesarches for find and expression copy
start > Len(expression)	A string whose length is 0
If number is 0	expression copy
Reference	Replace Function starts at the start position and replaces at the end of the expression string, and then, returns the string. That is, the returned string as a result is not the copy of the original strings. In the following example, Replace Function returns the string. Dim MyString 'If a Binary Comparison starts at the beginning of a string, "XXYXXPXXY" is returned. MyString = Replace("XXpXXPXXp", "p", "Y") 'If a Text comparison starts at position 3, "YXXYXXY" is returned. MyString = Replace("XXpXXPXXp", "p", "Y", 3, -1, 1)

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-43

Right Function

Description	Characters as many as designated from the right are returned
Syntax	Right (string, length) Right Function Syntax has following factors.
Reference	To decide the character count of string, use Len Function. In the following example, Right Function returns characters as many as designated from the right side of the string. Dim AnyString, MyStr Memo RightB Function uses Byte data that the string has. It designates Byte count rather than character count to be returned to length factor.

Factor Description
string
A literal expression to be returned from the right end character. If there is Null in
string, Null is returned.
length
A numerical expression showing the character count to be returned. If it is 0, a
string whose length is 0("") is returned. Their entire strings are returned if it is
equal or more than the character count that is in string.
AnyString = "Hello?" 'Designate a string.
MyStr = Right(AnyString, 1) ' "?" is returned.
MyStr = Right(AnyString, 6) ' "llo?" is returned.
MyStr = Right(AnyString, 20) ' "Hello?" is returned.

Rnd Function
Description	A random number is returned
Syntax	Rnd[(number)] The number factor should be a valid expression
Reference	Rnd Function returns a value that is bigger than 0 and smaller than 1. The number value decides how Rnd Function generates random numbers In case of any given initial seed, numbers in the same sequence are generated because
Number Value	Result of Rnd Function
< 0	Every time the same number by seed number
> 0	Next random number created sequentially.
= 0	The latest random number
Omitted	Next random number created sequentially.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-44

previous numbers are used as seeds to have next sequential numbers in continual calls for Rnd
Function at each time.
Before calling Rnd, use Randomize statement and initialize the random number generator with
seed based on the system timer.
To make random integer in a given range, use the following formula:
Int((upperbound - lowerbound + 1) * Rnd + lowerbound)
upperbound refers to the biggest number and lowerbound refers to the smallest number in the
range.
Memo
To repeat the sequence of generating random numbers, call Rnd Function with negative
factors right before using Randomize with number factors. To use Randomize with the same
value, the previous sequence is not repeated.

RGB Function
Description	The integers showing RGB color values are returned.
Syntax	RGB(red, green, blue) RGB Function has following factors
factor	Description
red	A mandatory factor. Numbers 0 through 255 indicating red color elements.
green	A mandatory factor. Numbers 0 through 255 indicating green color elements.
blue	A mandatory factor. Numbers 0 through 255 indicating blue color elements.
Reference	Numbers showing RGB color values are necessary for methods and properties of the application program receiving color designation. RGB color values designate relative concentration of red, green and blue and shows particular colors. Lower Byte contains red value, middle byte contains green value and upper byte contains blue value. Even though the following Function shows the reverse byte order, it provides the same information to the application programs that need that sequence. Function RevRGB(red, green, blue) RevRGB= CLng(blue + (green * 256) + (red * 65536)) End Function For RGB Function’s factor values that exceed 255, they are deemed as 255

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-45

Round Function
Description	The number rounded off at the designated decimal place is returned
Syntax	Round(expression[, numdecimalplaces]) Round Function Syntax has following factors
Factor	Description
expression	A mandatory factor. A numerical expression to be rounded off.
numdecimalplaces	An optional factor. A number showing decimal place. If omitted, Round Function returns integers.
Reference	In the following example, Round Function rounds off a number two-digit decimal. Dim MyVar, pi pi = 3.14159 MyVar = Round(pi, 2) 'MyVar gets 3.14

RTrim Function
Description	LTrim Function returns a string copy which has no left empty space or no right empty space or neither left nor right empty space.
Syntax	LTrim(string) RTrim(string) Trim(string) The string factor should be a valid character expression. If there is Null in string, Null is returned
Reference	In the following example, LTrim Function trims the left empty space, Rtrim Function trims the right empty space and Trim Function trims both of them. Dim MyVar MyVar = LTrim(" vbscript ") 'MyVar gets "vbscript ". MyVar = RTrim(" vbscript ") 'MyVar gets " vbscript". MyVar = Trim(" vbscript ") 'MyVar gets "vbscript".

ScriptEngine Function
Description	A string showing the script language in use is returned
Syntax	Result Value ScriptEngine Function returns the following strings
String	Description
VBScript	It shows that Microsoft(R) Visual Basic(R) Scripting Edition is the current script engine.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-46

JScript	It shows that Microsoft JScript(R) is the current script engine
VBA	It shows that Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications is the current script engine

Reference

In the following example, ScriptEngine Function returns the script language in use.
Function GetScriptEngineInfo
Dim s
s = "" ' Script a string with necessary information.
s = ScriptEngine & “Version”
s = s & ScriptEngineMajorVersion & "."
s = s & ScriptEngineMinorVersion & "."
s = s & ScriptEngineBuildVersion
GetScriptEngineInfo = s 'Result is returned.
End Function

ScriptEngineBuildVersion Function
Description	The configuration version number of the script language in use is returned
Syntax	ScriptEngineBuildVersion
Reference	The returned Result Value is equal to the version information contained in the DLL of the script language in use. In the following example, ScriptEngineBuildVersion Function returns the configuration version number of the script engine. Function GetScriptEngineInfo Dim s s = "" 'Script a string with essential information. s = ScriptEngine & “Version “ s = s & ScriptEngineMajorVersion & "." s = s & ScriptEngineMinorVersion & "." s = s & ScriptEngineBuildVersion GetScriptEngineInfo = s ‘Result is returned. End Function

ScriptEngineMajorVersion Function
Description	The major version number of the script language in use is returned
Syntax	ScriptEngineMajorVersion Reference

The returned Result Value is equal to the version information contained in the DLL of the script
language in use.
In the following example, ScriptEngineMajorVersion Function returns the version number of the

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-47

script engine.
Function GetScriptEngineInfo
Dim s
s = "" 'Script a string with essential information.
s = ScriptEngine & “ Version “
s = s & ScriptEngineMajorVersion & "."
s = s & ScriptEngineMinorVersion & "."
s = s & ScriptEngineBuildVersion
GetScriptEngineInfo = s ‘Result is returned.
End Function

ScriptEngineMinorVersion Function
Description	The minor version number of the script language in use is returned
Syntax	ScriptEngineMinorVersion
Reference	The returned Result Value is equal to the version information contained in the DLL of the script language in use. In the following example, SScriptEngineMinorVersion Function returns the minor version number of the script engine. Function GetScriptEngineInfo Dim s s = "" ' Script a string with necessary information. s = ScriptEngine & “ Version “ s = s & ScriptEngineMajorVersion & "." s = s & ScriptEngineMinorVersion & "." s = s & ScriptEngineBuildVersion GetScriptEngineInfo = s ‘Result is returned. End Function

Second Function
Description	An integer indicating the second from 0 through 59 is returned
Syntax	Second(time) The time factor is an expression showing time. If the time factor has the value zero, Null is returned.
Reference	In the following example, Second Function returns the current second. Dim MySec MySec = Second(Now) 'MySec has information on the current second.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-48

Sgn Function
Description	An integer showing number sign is returned
Syntax	Sgn(number) The number factor should be a valid expression. Result Value Sgn Function returns the following values. Number Value Result of Sgn Function > 0 , 1 = 0, 0 < 0 -1
Reference	The sign of a number factor decides the result value of Sgn Function. In the following example, Sgn Function decides number signs. Dim MyVar1, MyVar2, MyVar3, MySign MyVar1 = 12: MyVar2 = -2.4: MyVar3 = 0 MySign = Sgn(MyVar1) ' 1 is returned. MySign = Sgn(MyVar2) ' -1 is returned. MySign = Sgn(MyVar3) ' 0 is returned.

Sin Function
Description	The sine value of an angle is returned
Syntax	Sin(number) The number factor should be a valid expression showing the angle in a radian
Reference	Sin Function returns the ratio between lengths of two sides by using alternate angles of a right triangle. This ratio is the one obtained by dividing the length of the count side to the relevant angle by the length of the hypotenuse of a right triangle. The returned results are ranged between -1 and 1. To convert angle to radian, multiply angle by pi/180 and to convert radian to angle, multiply radian by 180/pi. In the following example, Sin Function returns the tangent value of the angle. Dim MyAngle, MyCosecant MyAngle = 1.3 ' Define an angle in a radian value. MyCosecant = 1 / Sin(MyAngle) ' Calculate cosine value.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-49

Space Function
Description	The string that contains empty space as many as designated is returned
Syntax	Space(number) The number factor is a number of spaces to be filled in the string with.
Reference	In the following example, Space Function returns a string that contains spaces as many as designated. Dim MyString MyString = Space(10) ' A string that has 10 spaces is returned. MyString = "He" & Space(10) & "low?" ' 10 spaces are inserted between strings

Split Function
Description	One dimension Array based on 0, which contains sub strings as many as designated is returned.
Syntax	Split (expression[, delimiter[, number[, compare]]]) Split Function Syntax has following factors. Settings Comparison factors have the following values
Factor	Description
expression	A mandatory factor. A literal expression containing sub strings and distinguishing symbols. If the length of expression is 0, Split returns empty Array, that is, Array that has no configuration element and data.
delimiter	An optional factor. A string character used to identify the limit of a sub string. If omitted, empty character (" ") is deemed as a distinguishing symbol. Delimiter is 0 long, a single element containing expression strings is returned.
number	An optional factor. A number of a sub string to be returned. -1 shows that all of sub strings are to be returned.
compare	An optional factor. A number value showing the comparison type of the sub string to be used. For the value, refer to the following settings.
Constant	Value	Description
vbBinaryCompare	0	Run Binary Comparison.
vbTextCompare	1	Run Text Comparison.
Reference	In the following example, Split Function returns the string. This Function executes text comparison of distinguishing characters and returns all of sub strings.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-50

Dim MyString, MyArray
MyString = Split("VBScriptXisXfun!", "x", -1, 1)
' MyString(0) gets "VBScript".
' MyString(1) gets "is"
' MyString(2) gets value"fun!"

Sqr Function
Description	The square root of a number is returned
Syntax	Sqr(number) The number factor is a valid expression that is equal or higher than 0.
Reference	In the following example, Sqr Function calculates the square root of a number. Dim MySqr MySqr = Sqr(4) ' 2 is returned. MySqr = Sqr(23) ' 4.79583152331272 is returned. MySqr = Sqr(0) ' 0 is returned. MySqr = Sqr(-4) ' It causes runtime errors

StrComp Function
Description	The result value of comparing strings is returned
Syntax	StrComp(string1, string2[, compare]) StrComp Function Syntax has following factors. Settings Comparison factors have the following values. Result Value StrComp Function returns the following values
factor	Description
string1	A mandatory factor. A valid character expression.
string2	A mandatory factor. A valid character expression.
compare	An optional factor. A number value displayed in a comparison type to be used for assessing strings. If omitted, Run Binary Comparison. For the value, refer to the following settings.
Constant	Value	Description
vbBinaryCompare	0	Run Binary Comparison.
vbTextCompare	1	Run Text Comparison.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-51

Condition	Result of StrComp Function
If string1 is less than string2	-1
If string1 is equal to string2	0
If string1 is more than string2	1
If string1 or string2 is Null	Null

Reference

In the following example, StrComp Function returns the result of comparing strings. If the third
factor is 1, a text comparison is executed. If the third factor is 0 or omitted, a binary Comparison
is performed.
Dim MyStr1, MyStr2, MyComp
MyStr1 = "ABCD": MyStr2 = "abcd" ' Define a variable.
MyComp = StrComp(MyStr1, MyStr2, 1) ' 0 is returned.
MyComp = StrComp(MyStr1, MyStr2, 0) ' -1 is returned.
MyComp = StrComp(MyStr2, MyStr1) ' 1 is returned.

String Function
Description	The expression converted to a String subtype of Variant is returned
Syntax	CStr(expression) The expression factor should be a valid expression
Reference	Typically, if a code is created with a subtype of conversion function, the operation result can be seen in a particular data type rather than in a basic data type. For example, if CStr is used, the result is expressed in a String. If CStr Function is used instead of Str Function, other types of data can be converted to a widely used String subtype throughout the world. For example, symbols identified with different digit numbers are properly recognized according to the computer’s locale settings. The data used in an expression decide the returned results as seen in the table. In the following example, CStr Function converts the value to String.
Expression Data	CStr Returned Result
Boolean	String containing True or False
Date	String containing simplified date by computer settings
Null	Runtime error
Empty	String whose length is 0 ("")
Error	String showing error number next to word ‘Error’
Other Numbers	String containing numbers

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-52

Dim MyDouble, MyString
MyDouble = 437.324 ' MyDouble is equal to Double.
MyString = CStr(MyDouble) ' MyString gets value"437.324"

StrReverse Function
Description	The reverse string of a designated string is returned
Syntax	StrReverse(string1) The string1 factor is a string of characters in the reverse order. If string1 is a string whose length is 0(""), it returns a string whose length is 0 while if it is Null, errors takes place
Reference	In the following example, Replace Function returns a string in the reverse order. Dim MyStr MyStr = StrReverse("VBScript") 'MyStr gets "tpircSBV."

Tan Function
Description	The tangent value of an angle is returned
Syntax	Tan(number) The number factor should be a valid expression showing the angle in a radian.
Reference	Tan Function returns the ratio between lengths of two sides by using angles of a right triangle. This ratio is obtained by dividing the length of the side facing the relevant angle by the length of the side adjacent to this angle. To convert angle to radian, multiply angle by pi/180 and to convert radian to angle, multiply radian by 180/pi. In the following example, Tan Function returns the tangent value of the angle. Dim MyAngle, MyCotangent MyAngle = 1.3 ' Define an angle in a radian value. MyCotangent = 1 / Tan(MyAngle) ' Calculate cotangent Value

Time Function
Description	A Date subtype Variant showing the current system time is returned.
Syntax	Time
Reference	In the following example, Time Function returns the current system time. Dim MyTime MyTime = Time ' The current system time is returned.

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-53

TimeSerial Function
Description	The Date subtype of Variant of the designated year, month, day is returned
Syntax	TimeSerial(hour, minute, second) TimeSerial Function Syntax has following factors
Factor	Description
time	Numbers (Including 0 and 23) between 0(AM 12:00) and 23(PM 11:00) or a numerical expression
minute	All expressions
second	All expressions
Reference	To designate time such as 11:59: 59, each TimeSerial factor number should be within the tolerance range of the relevant factor. That is, it should be between 0 and 23 for time and between 0 and 59 for minute or second. However, it is also possible to designate relative time of each factor by using a numerical expression showing hour, minute and second before and after a particular time. The following example is using an expression rather than an absolute time. Here, TimeSerial Function returns the time 15 minutes before 6o’clock, that is AM 5:45. TimeSerial(12 - 6, -15, 0) If the factor exceeds the tolerance range, it goes to the next bigger unit. For example, if 75 minutes are designated, it is calculated into 1:15. But, if a certain factor exceeds range - 32,768~32 and 767 or a date designated directly or through an expression by using three factors, errors take place

TimeValue Function
Description	The Date subtype of Variant that contains time is returned
Syntax	TimeValue(time) Typically, it is the time factor as a literal expression showing time from 0:00:00 (AM 12:00:00) to 23:59:59(PM 11:59:59), therefore, an expression showing time within this range can be a time factor. The time has the value zero, Null is returned.
Reference	A valid time unit can be inputted to the 12-h or 24-h clock. That is, "2:24PM" and "14:24" are all valid time factors. If the time factor contains time information, TimeValue Value Function does not return the information. However, if the time factor has wrong date information, errors takes place. In the following example, TimeValue Function converts a string to time. If the date literal is used, it is possible to directly designate time to variant (Ex, MyTime = #4:35:17 PM#). Dim MyTime MyTime = TimeValue("4:35:17 PM") ' MyTime gets value"4:35:17 PM"

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-54

Trim Function
Description	LTrim Function returns a string copy which has no left empty space or no right empty space or neither left nor right empty space
Syntax	LTrim(string) RTrim(string) Trim(string) The string factor should be a valid character expression. If there is Null in string, Null is returned
Reference	In the following example, LTrim Function trims the left empty space, RtrimFunction trims the right empty space and Trim Function trims both of them. Dim MyVar MyVar = LTrim(" vbscript ") 'MyVar gets "vbscript." MyVar = RTrim(" vbscript ") 'MyVar gets " vbscript." MyVar = Trim(" vbscript ") 'MyVar gets "vbscript."

TypeName Function
Description	A string that provides Variant subtype information on variable is returned
Syntax	TypeName(varname) A mandatory factor. The varname factor may be any kind of variable Result Value TypeName Function returns the following values
Value	Description
Byte	Byte Value
Integer	Integer Value
Long	Long integer Value
Single	Single precision floating point number value
Double	Double precision floating point number value
Currency	Call Value
Decimal	Decimal Value
Date	Date or Time Value
String	String Value
Boolean	Boolean Value True or False
Empty	Not initialized
Null	No valid data
<object type>	Real type name of object
Object	General object

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-55

Unknown	Unknown object type
Nothing	Object variable that does not refer to object instance
Error	Error
Reference	In the following example, TypeName Function returns variable reference information. Dim ArrayVar(4), MyType NullVar = Null ' Null Designate a value. MyType = TypeName("VBScript") ' "String" is returned. MyType = TypeName(4) ' "Integer" is returned. MyType = TypeName(37.50) ' "Double" is returned. MyType = TypeName(NullVar) ' "Null" is returned. MyType = TypeName(ArrayVar) ' "Variant()" is returned

UBound Function
Description	The biggest subscript available in the designated Array level is returned.
Syntax	UBound(arrayname[, dimension]) UBound Function Syntax has following factors.
Factor	Description
arrayname	A mandatory factor. Comply with the notation rule of general variable with Array variable name
dimension	An optional factor. An integer showing the upper limit of the returned level is returned. Use integers 1 for one dimension, 2 for two dimension, etc. If dimension is omitted, 1 is deemed.
Reference	LBound Function is used along with UBound Function to decide the size of Array. If Lbound Function is used, the lower limit can be known in the Array level. The lower limit of the entire dimensions is always 0. Therefore, UBound Function returns Array values as following according to each dimension. Dim A(100,3,4)
Statement	Result Value
UBound(A, 1)	100
UBound(A, 2)	3
UBound(A, 3)	4

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-56

UCase Function
Description	A string converted to decimal point is returned
Syntax	UCase(string) The string factor should be a valid character expression. If there is Null in string, Null is returned
Reference	This function converts only capital letters to small letters and remains other characters except those as they are without converting. In the following example, UCase Function returns the capital version of a string. Dim MyWord MyWord = UCase("Hello World") ' "HELLO WORLD" is returned

VarType Function
Description	The value showing variable subtype is returned
Syntax	VarType(varname) The varname factor may be any kind of variable Result Value VarType Function returns the following values Memo It is possible to use those names in any place instead of actual values since they are the
Constant	Value	Description
vbEmpty	0	Empty(Not initialized)
vbNull	1	Null(No valid data)
vbInteger	2	Integer
vbLong	3	Long integer
vbSingle	4	Single precision floating point number
vbDouble	5	Double precision floating point number
vbCurrency	6	Call
vbDate	7	Date
vbString	8	String
vbObject	9	Automatic Object
vbError	10	Error
vbBoolean	11	Boolean Value
vbVariant	12	Variant(used only in variant Array)
vbDataObject	13	Data Access Object
vbByte	17	Byte
vbArray	8192	Array

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-57

Constant designated in the VBScript

Reference

VarType Function itself never returns the relevant Array value and shows a particular type of
Array by being combined with other values at all times. The value corresponding to Variant is
returned only when it shows that VarType Function is Array by being combined with a particular
value. For example, the integer value returned to Array is calculated to 2+8192 or 8194. If an
object that has basic properties, VarType (object) Function returns the basic properties of the
relevant object.
In the following example, VarType Function decides variable’s subtype.
Dim MyCheck
MyCheck = VarType(300) ' 2 is returned.
MyCheck = VarType(#10/19/62#) ' 7 is returned.
MyCheck = VarType("VBScript") ' 8 is returned.

Weekday Function
Description	An integer showing weekday is returned
Syntax	Weekday(date, [firstdayofweek]) Weekday Function Syntax has following factors. Settings The firstdayofweek factor has the following settings Result Value Typically, Weekday Function returns the following values
Factor	Description
date	An expression showing Date. If there is date Null in date, Null is returned.
firstdayofweek	Constant that designates the first weekday. If omitted, vbSunday is deemed.
Constant	Value	Description
vbUseSystem	0	NLS( National Language Support). Use API settings
vbSunday	1	Sunday
vbMonday	2	Monday
vbTuesday	3	Tuesday
vbWednesday	4	Wednesday
vbThursday	5	Thursday
vbFriday	6	Friday
vbSaturday	7	Saturday

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help
A4-58

Constant	Value	Description
vbSunday	1	Sunday
vbMonday	2	Monday
vbTuesday	3	Tuesday
vbWednesday	4	Wednesday
vbThursday	5	Thursday
vbFriday	6	Friday
vbSaturday	7	Saturday

Reference

In the following example, Weekday Function brings a weekday from the designated date
Dim MyDate, MyWeekDay
MyDate = #October 19, 1962# ' Designate date.
MyWeekDay = Weekday(MyDate) ' MyWeekDay gets value 6 because MyDate is on Friday

WeekdayName Function
Description	A string showing the designated weekday is returned
Syntax	WeekDayName(weekday, abbreviate, firstdayofweek) WeekDayName Function Syntax has following factors Settings The value of the firstdayofweek factor is as follows
Factor	Description
weekday	A mandatory factor. A number showing weekday. Each weekday has a different value according to firstdayofweek settings.
abbreviate	An optional factor. A boolean value showing whether weekday names are expressed with abbreviated words. If omitted, it becomes False, the Default Value, full names are displayed.
firstdayofweek	An optional factor. A number value showing the first weekday. For the value, refer to the following settings.
Constant	Value	Description
vbUseSystem	0	NLS(National Language Support). Use API settings
vbSunday	1	Sunday(Default Value)
vbMonday	2	Monday
vbTuesday	3	Tuesday
vbWednesday	4	Wednesday
vbThursday	5	Thursday
vbFriday	6	Friday
vbSaturday	7	Saturday

Appendix 4 Visual Basic Script Help

A4-59

Reference

In the following example, WeekDayName Function returns the designated day.
Dim MyDate
MyDate = WeekDayName(6, True) 'MyDate gets Fri

Year Function
Description	An integer showing year is returned
Syntax	Year(date) The date factor is an expression showing the date. If the date factor has the value zero, Null is returned
Reference	In the following example, YearFunction brings the date of the year from the designated date Dim MyDate, MyYear MyDate = #October 19, 1962# ' Designate date. MyYear = Year(MyDate) ' MyYear gets 1962

Appendix 5 Function

A5-1

Appendix 5 Function
5.1 Function Classification
5.1.1 List by Item

Item	Relevant Function
Project	LONG CloseProject ()
BSTR GetProjectName ()
BSTR GetProjectPath ()
BSTR GetProjectType ()
LONG OpenProject (BSTR szProjectName, BSTR szProjectPath)
LONG QuitProject ()
Screen	LONG ChangePage (BSTR szOldPage, BSTR szNewPage)
LONG ClosePage (BSTR szPageName)
VOID GetHWND (ULONG* hwnd)
VOID HardCopy ()
BOOL IsRunning ()
VOID OpenPage (BSTR szPageName, BSTR szPageParam)
LONG OpenPageObject (BSTR szPageName, BSTR szObjectName)
VOID Quit ()
Tag	ULONG GetTagStatus (BSTR szTagName)
BSTR GetTagStatusDesc (ULONG lTagStatus)
VARIANT GetTagVal (BSTR szTagName)
VARIANT GetTagValbyTagId (LONG lTagId)
BSTR GetTagValnStatusByTagId (LONG lTagId, VARIANT* vtTagVal, LONG lScanMode, LONG lMainQ, LONG lSubQCnt, LONG lSubQ1, LONG lSubQ2, LONG lSubQ3, LONG lSubQ4, LONG lSubQ5 )
LONG GetTagValueStatus (BSTR szTagName, VARIANT* vtTagVal)
LONG ResetStaticValue (BSTR szTagName)
VOID ShowCrossReference (BSTR szTagName)
VOID ShowRawDataInfo ()
VOID ShowSIMCfgInfo ()
VOID SetTagVal (BSTR szTagName, VARIANT vtTagVal)
LONG SetTagValEx (SHORT nMode, BSTR szTagName, VARIANT vtTagVal, BSTR szClientName, ULONG hClientHandle)
Script	VOID RunScript (BSTR szScriptName)
VOID StopScript (BSTR szScriptName)
VOID TimeOutMsgBox (BSTR Msg, BSTR Title, LONG lSec)

Appendix 5 Function
A5-2

Item	Relevant Function
Event	LONG NotifyAlarmEvent (DOUBLE llOccur, USHORT nAlmLevel, BSTR szMessage, BSTR szArea, BSTR szOUser, BSTR zInformation, BSTR szUserDefine1, BSTR szUserDefine2, BSTR szUserDefine3, BSTR szUserDefine4, BSTR szPrev, BSTR szCur, BSTR szObject)
VOID SendEmail (BSTR szMailAddTo, BSTR szMailAddFrom, BSTR szMailTitle , BSTR szMailMsg)
VOID SendSMS (BSTR szRecvPhoneNo, BSTR szCallBackPhoneNo, BSTR szSMSMsg)
Log	VOID NotifyError (USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
VOID NotifyHostError (BSTR szHostName, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
VOID NotifyHostInfo (BSTR szHostName, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
VOID NotifyHostLog (USHORT nLogType, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szHostName, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
VOID NotifyHostWarn (BSTR szHostName, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
VOID NotifyInfo USHORT nLogCategory (USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
VOID NotifyLog (USHORT nLogType, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
VOID NotifyWarn (USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
Network	BSTR ChangLine (BSTR szLineMode, BSTR szTargetLineIP)
LONG ChangeProcessServer (BSTR szProcessName, BSTR szProcessIP)
LONG ChangeServerMode (BSTR szServerMode)
LONG GetCurLine (int* nCurLine)
INT GetLineStatus (int nLineMode)
BSTR GetNodeCurIP (BSTR szNodeName)
BSTR GetServerMode ()
BOOL IsDualLine ()
System	VARIANT GetSystemTime ()
VOID ProcessSleep (LONG dwMiliseconds)
VOID RunApp (BSTR szAppPath)
VOID ShowAlarmPage (BSTR szAlarmTag)
VOID Sleep (LONG dwMiliseconds)
BSTR TimeConvert (DOUBLE dTimeValue, INT nTimeType)
Database	VOID DataExportRunWork (BSTR szWorkName)

Appendix 5 Function

A5-3

Item	Relevant Function
Recipe	LONG RecipeChangeData (BSTR ModelName, BSTR RecipeName)
LONG RecipeChangeUnit (BSTR ModelName, BSTR UnitName)
LONG RecipeControlSet (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szUnitName, BSTR szDataName)
LONG RecipeControlSetEx (SHORT nMode, BSTR szClientProgName, ULONG hClientHandle, BSTR szModelName, BSTR szUnitName, BSTR szDataName, LONG* plTransNo, SHORT* pnResult)
LONG RecipeControlWorkingSet ();
LONG RecipeControlWorkingSetEx (SHORT nMode, BSTR szClientProgName, ULONG hClientHandle, LONG* plTransNo, SHORT* pnResult);
LONG RecipeDeleteData (BSTR ModelName, BSTR RecipeName)
LONG RecipeDeleteModel (BSTR ModelName)
LONG RecipeDeleteUnit (BSTR ModelName, BSTR UnitName)
LONG RecipeLoadDynamic (BSTR ModelName, BSTR UnitName)
LONG RecipeLoadSet (BSTR ModelName, BSTR UnitName, BSTR RecipeName)
LONG RecipeSaveAsArchive (BSTR ModelName, BSTR RecipeName)
LONG RecipeSetData (BSTR ModelName, BSTR ItemName, VARIANT setValue)
Externel Device	VOID PlaySound( BSTR szWaveFile)
VOID PlaySoundFile (BSTR szSoundFile)
User	BSTR GetUserID ()
LONG GetUserLevel ()
LONG UserLogOff ()
LONG UserLogOn (BSTR szUserID, BSTR szPassWord)
Report	VOID ReportDialog ()
VOID ReportListRefresh ()
VOID ReportPrint (BSTR szReportName)
VOID ReportPrintEx (BSTR szReportName, BSTR szReqTime)
VOID ReportSchedulerHide ()
VOID ReportSchedulerShow ()

Appendix 5 Function
A5-4

Item	Relevant Function
Alarm	BOOL AckAllAlarm ()
BSTR GetAlarmCountErrInfo (LONG lCount)
LONG GetAlarmLogging (DOUBLE dtFrom, DOUBLE dtTo, BSTR szTag, BSTR szAlarmGr, LONG lAlarmType, LONG lOutCount, SAFEARRAY pszRstrTag, SAFEARRAY pszRstrGr, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtOccAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtRevAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtAckAlarm, SAFEARRAY plRnAlarmType, SAFEARRAY pszRstrMsg, SAFEARRAY *pszRstrAlarmKind)
LONG GetAlarmLoggingEx (DOUBLE dtFrom,DOUBLE dtTo,BSTR szTag, LONG nAlarmGroupCount, SAFEARRAY *pszAlarmGr,LONG lAlarmType, LONG lAlarmGrade, BSTR szAlarmKind, LONG lOutCount, SAFEARRAYpRstrTag,SAFEARRAYpRstrGr, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtOccAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtRevAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtAckAlarm, SAFEARRAY plRnAlarmType, SAFEARRAY pszRstrMsg, SAFEARRAY pszRstrAlarmKind, SAFEARRAY pdbRvOccDValue, SAFEARRAYpszRvOccSValue, SAFEARRAY **plAlarmGrade)
LONG GetAlmCount (LONG lkind, LONG lStatus)
LONG GetGroupUserInfoByTag (BSTR szTagName, LONG* , SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserID, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserName, SAFEARRAY(LONG) plMailCheck, SAFEARRAY(LONG) plSMSMCheck, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszMailAdd, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszHPhoneNo)
LONG GetHistAlmCount (LONG lkind, LONG lStatus)
LONG GetUserInfoList (LONG* lOutCount, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserID, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserName, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszDesc, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszPassword, SAFEARRAY(LONG) plUserLevel, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszHPhoneNo, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszPhoneNo, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszMailAdd)
LONG SetUserAlarm (BSTR szAlarmMessage, BSTR szAlarmGroup)
LONG SetUserAlarmEx (DOUBLE dOccur, LONG lAlarmLevel, BSTR szAlarmMessage ,BSTR szAlarmGroup, DOUBLE dCur, DOUBLE dPrev)
LONG SetUserEvent (BSTR szEventMessage)
VOID StopAlarmSound ()

Appendix 5 Function

A5-5

Item	Relevant Function
History Data	VOID GetHistDataCount (BSTR szModelName, BSTR , BSTR szDataKind, DOUBLE dRefTime, LONG lCount, LONG lDir, LONG* lResultCount, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblTimeStamp, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblNumValue, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalStatus, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalResult)
VOID GetHistDataPeriod (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szTagName, BSTR szDataKind, DOUBLE dFrom, DOUBLE dTo, LONG* lResultCount, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblTimeStamp, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblNumValue, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalStatus, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalResul)
LONG GetLoggingModelList (LONG lOutCount ,SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszModelName, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszModelDesc, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszModelType, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszArchvingCycle, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszSegmentPeriod)
LONG GetLoggingTag (BSTR szModelName, LONG lOutCount ,SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszTagName, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) *psaszTagType)
LONG SetHistData (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szTagName, BSTR szDataKind, LONG lDataCount, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblSaveTime, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblNumValue, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalTagStatus, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalResult)
I/O Driver	VOID ClearStaStatusCount (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
VOID EnableStation (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName, LONG lMode)
LONG GetCountReadSuccess (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
LONG GetCountReadTotal (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
LONG GetCountWriteSuccess (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
LONG GetCountWriteTotal (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
LONG GetStatusRunMode (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
LONG GetStatusStaOK (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
VOID ShowNetworkStatus ()
VOID ShowStationInfo ()

Appendix 5 Function
A5-6
5.1.2 List by Alphabetic Order

Alphabet	Function Name	Item
A	BOOL AckAllAlarm ()	Alarm
C	BSTR ChangLine (BSTR szLineMode, BSTR szTargetLineIP)	Network
LONG ChangeProcessServer (BSTR szProcessName, BSTR szProcessIP)	Network
LONG ChangeServerMode (BSTR szServerMode)	Network
LONG ChangePage (BSTR szOldPage, BSTR szNewPage)	Screen
VOID ClearStaStatusCount (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)	I/O Driver
LONG ClosePage (BSTR szPageName)	Screen
LONG CloseProject ()	Project
D	VOID DataExportRunWork (BSTR szWorkName)	Database
E	VOID EnableStation (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName, LONG lMode)	I/O Driver
G	LONG GetAlmCount (LONG lkind, LONG lStatus)	Alarm
BSTR GetAlarmCountErrInfo (LONG lCount)	Alarm
LONG GetAlarmLogging (DOUBLE dtFrom, DOUBLE dtTo, BSTR szTag, BSTR szAlarmGr, LONG lAlarmType, LONG lOutCount, SAFEARRAY pszRstrTag, SAFEARRAY pszRstrGr, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtOccAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtRevAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtAckAlarm, SAFEARRAY plRnAlarmType, SAFEARRAY pszRstrMsg, SAFEARRAY *pszRstrAlarmKind)	Alarm
LONG GetAlarmLoggingEx (DOUBLE dtFrom,DOUBLE dtTo,BSTR szTag, LONG nAlarmGroupCount, SAFEARRAY *pszAlarmGr,LONG lAlarmType, LONG lAlarmGrade, BSTR szAlarmKind, LONG lOutCount, SAFEARRAYpRstrTag,SAFEARRAYpRstrGr, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtOccAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtRevAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtAckAlarm, SAFEARRAY plRnAlarmType, SAFEARRAY pszRstrMsg, SAFEARRAY pszRstrAlarmKind, SAFEARRAY pdbRvOccDValue, SAFEARRAYpszRvOccSValue, SAFEARRAY **plAlarmGrade)	Alarm
LONG GetCountReadSuccess (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)	I/O Driver
LONG GetCountReadTotal (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)	I/O Driver
LONG GetCountWriteSuccess (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)	I/O Driver
LONG GetCountWriteTotal (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)	I/O Driver
LONG GetCurLine (int* nCurLine)	Network

Appendix 5 Function

A5-7

Alphabet	Function Name	Item
LONG GetGroupUserInfoByTag (BSTR szTagName, LONG* , SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserID, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserName, SAFEARRAY(LONG) plMailCheck, SAFEARRAY(LONG) plSMSMCheck, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszMailAdd, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszHPhoneNo)	Alarm
G	LONG GetHistAlmCount (LONG lkind, LONG lStatus)	Alarm
VOID GetHistDataCount (BSTR szModelName, BSTR , BSTR szDataKind, DOUBLE dRefTime, LONG lCount, LONG lDir, LONG* lResultCount, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblTimeStamp, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblNumValue, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalStatus, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalResult)	History Data
VOID GetHistDataPeriod (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szTagName, BSTR szDataKind, DOUBLE dFrom, DOUBLE dTo, LONG* lResultCount, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblTimeStamp, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblNumValue, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalStatus, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalResul)	History Data
VOID GetHWND (ULONG* hwnd)	Screen
INT GetLineStatus (int nLineMode)	Network
LONG GetLoggingModelList (LONG lOutCount ,SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszModelName, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszModelDesc, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszModelType, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszArchvingCycle, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszSegmentPeriod)	History Data
LONG GetLoggingTag (BSTR szModelName, LONG lOutCount ,SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszTagName, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) *psaszTagType)	History Data
BSTR GetNodeCurIP (BSTR szNodeName)	Network
BSTR GetProjectName ()	Project
BSTR GetProjectPath ()	Project
BSTR GetProjectType ()	Project
BSTR GetServerMode ()	Network
LONG GetStatusRunMode (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)	I/O Driver
LONG GetStatusStaOK (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)	I/O Driver
VARIANT GetSystemTime ()	System
ULONG GetTagStatus (BSTR szTagName)	Tag
BSTR GetTagStatusDesc(ULONG lTagStatus)	Tag
VARIANT GetTagVal (BSTR szTagName)	Tag
VARIANT GetTagValbyTagId (LONG lTagId)	Tag

Appendix 5 Function
A5-8

Alphabet	Function Name	Item
G	BSTR GetTagValnStatusByTagId (LONG lTagId, VARIANT* vtTagVal, LONG lScanMode, LONG lMainQ, LONG lSubQCnt, LONG lSubQ1, LONG lSubQ2, LONG lSubQ3, LONG lSubQ4, LONG lSubQ5 )	Tag
LONG GetTagValueStatus (BSTR szTagName, VARIANT* vtTagVal)	Tag
BSTR GetUserID ()	User
LONG GettUserInfoList (LONG* lOutCount, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserID, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserName, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszDesc, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszPassword, SAFEARRAY(LONG) plUserLevel, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszHPhoneNo, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszPhoneNo, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszMailAdd)	Alarm
LONG GetUserLevel()	User
H	VOID HardCopy ()	Screen
I	BOOL IsDualLine ()	Network
BOOL IsRunning ()	Screen
LONG IsHoliday (BSTR szDateTime)	System
N	LONG NotifyAlarmEvent (DOUBLE llOccur, USHORT nAlmLevel, BSTR szMessage, BSTR szArea, BSTR szOUser, BSTR zInformation, BSTR szUserDefine1, BSTR szUserDefine2, BSTR szUserDefine3, BSTR szUserDefine4, BSTR szPrev, BSTR szCur, BSTR szObject)	Event
VOID NotifyError (USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)	Log
VOID NotifyHostError (BSTR szHostName, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)	Log
VOID NotifyHostInfo (BSTR szHostName, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)	Log
VOID NotifyHostLog (USHORT nLogType, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szHostName, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)	Log
VOID NotifyHostWarn (BSTR szHostName, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)	Log
VOID NotifyInfo (USHORT nLogCategory, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)	Log
VOID NotifyLog (USHORT nLogType, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)	Log
VOID NotifyWarn (USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)	Log
O	VOID OpenPage (BSTR szPageName, BSTR szPageParam)	Screen
LONG OpenPageObject (BSTR szPageName, BSTR szObjectName)	Screen
LONG OpenProject (BSTR szProjectName, BSTR szProjectPath)	Project

Appendix 5 Function

A5-9

Alphabet	Function Name	Item
P	VOID PlaySound(BSTR szWaveFile))	External Device
VOID PlaySoundFile (BSTR szSoundFile)	External Device
VOID ProcessSleep (LONG dwMiliseconds)	System
Q	VOID Quit ()	Screen
LONB QuitProject ()	Project
R	LONG RecipeChangeData (BSTR ModelName, BSTR RecipeName)	Recipe
LONG RecipeChangeUnit (BSTR ModelName, BSTR UnitName)	Recipe
LONG RecipeControlSet (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szUnitName, BSTR szDataName)	Recipe
LONG RecipeControlSetEx (SHORT nMode, BSTR szClientProgName, ULONG hClientHandle, BSTR szModelName, BSTR szUnitName, BSTR szDataName, LONG* plTransNo, SHORT* pnResult)	Recipe
LONG RecipeControlWorkingSet ();	Recipe
LONG RecipeControlWorkingSetEx (SHORT nMode, BSTR szClientProgName, ULONG hClientHandle, LONG* plTransNo, SHORT* pnResult);	Recipe
LONG RecipeDeleteData (BSTR ModelName, BSTR RecipeName)	Recipe
LONG RecipeDeleteModel (BSTR ModelName)	Recipe
LONG RecipeDeleteUnit (BSTR ModelName, BSTR UnitName)	Recipe
LONG RecipeLoadDynamic (BSTR ModelName, BSTR UnitName)	Recipe
LONG RecipeLoadSet (BSTR ModelName, BSTR UnitName, BSTR RecipeName)	Recipe
LONG RecipeSaveAsArchive (BSTR ModelName, BSTR RecipeName)	Recipe
LONG RecipeSetData (BSTR ModelName, BSTR ItemName, VARIANT setValue)	Recipe
VOID ReportDialog ()	Report
VOID ReportListRefresh ()	Report
VOID ReportPrint (BSTR szReportName)	Report
VOID ReportPrintEx (BSTR szReportName, BSTR szReqTime)	Report
VOID ReportSchedulerHide ()	Report
VOID ReportSchedulerShow ()	Report
LONG ResetStaticValue (BSTR szTagName)	Tag
VOID RunApp (BSTR szAppPath)	System
VOID RunScript (BSTR szScriptName)	Script

Appendix 5 Function
A5-10

Alphabet	Function Name	Item
S	VOID SendEmail (BSTR szMailAddTo, BSTR szMailAddFrom, BSTR szMailTitle , BSTR szMailMsg)	Event
VOID SendSMS (BSTR szRecvPhoneNo, BSTR szCallBackPhoneNo, BSTR szSMSMsg)	Event
LONG SetHistData (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szTagName, BSTR szDataKind, LONG lDataCount, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblSaveTime, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblNumValue, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalTagStatus, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalResult)	History Data
VOID SetTagVal (BSTR szTagName, VARIANT vtTagVal)	Tag
LONG SetTagValEx (SHORT nMode, BSTR szTagName, VARIANT vtTagVal, BSTR szClientName, ULONG hClientHandle)	Tag
LONG SetUserAlarm (BSTR szAlarmMessage, BSTR szAlarmGroup)	Alarm
LONG SetUserAlarmEx (DOUBLE dOccur, LONG lAlarmLevel, BSTR szAlarmMessage ,BSTR szAlarmGroup, DOUBLE dCur, DOUBLE dPrev)	Alarm
LONG SetUserEvent (BSTR szEventMessage)	Alarm
VOID ShowAlarmPage (BSTR szAlarmTag)	System
VOID ShowCrossReference (BSTR szTagName)	Tag
VOID ShowNetworkStatus ()	I/O Driver
VOID ShowRawDataInfo ()	Tag
VOID ShowSIMCfgInfo ()	Tag
VOID ShowStationInfo ()	I/O Driver
VOID Sleep (LONG dwMiliseconds)	System
VOID StopAlarmSound ()	Alarm
VOID StopScript (BSTR szScriptName)	Script
T	BSTR TimeConvert (DOUBLE dTimeValue, INT nTimeType)	System
VOID TimeOutMsgBox (BSTR Msg, BSTR Title, LONG lSec)	Script
U	LONG UserLogOff ()	User
LONG UserLogOn (BSTR szUserID, BSTR szPassWord)	User

Appendix 5 Function

A5-11

5.2 Function Descriptions and Examples
5.2.1 Project Function

Item	Description
Type	LONG CloseProject ()
Kind	Project Function
Description	Close current project
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.CloseProject() If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "CloseProject() False" Else MsgBox "CloseProject() OK" End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	BSTR GetProjectName ()
Kind	Project Function
Description	Get current project name.
Example	Sub Main Dim PrjName As String PrjName = ole.GetProjectName() If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "GetProjectName()False" Else MsgBox "GetProjectName() OK " + PrjName End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-12

Item	Description
Type	BSTR GetProjectPath ()
Kind	Project Function
Description	Get current project path.
Example	Sub Main Dim PrjName As String PrjPath = ole.GetProjectPath() If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "GetProjectPath() False" Else MsgBox "GetProjectPath() OK " + PrjPath End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	BSTR GetProjectType ()
Kind	Project Function
Description	Get current project type
Example	Sub Main Dim PrjType As String PrjType = ole.GetProjectType MsgBox "GetProjectType : " + PrjType End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG OpenProject(BSTR szProjectName, BSTR szProjectPath)
Kind	Project Function
Description	Open Project. szProjectName : Project Name szProjectPath : Project Path
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.OpenProject("ProjectName", "ProjectPath") If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "OpenProject() False" Else MsgBox "OpenProject() OK" End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-13

Item	Description
Type	LONG QuitProject ()
Kind	Project Function
Description	Close current project
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.QuitProject() If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "QuitProject() False" Else MsgBox "QuitProject() OK" End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-14
5.2.2 Screen Function

Item	Description
Type	LONG ChangePage (BSTR szOldPage, BSTR szNewPage)
Kind	Screen Function
Description	Close an existing page and open a new page szOldPage: Old page szNewPage: New page
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.ChangePage("Page1.ivd", "Page2.ivd") If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "ChangePage() False" Else MsgBox "ChangePage() OK" End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG ClosePage (BSTR szPageName)
Kind	Screen Function
Description	Closes the specified page szPageName : Page name
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.ClosePage("page.ivd") If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "ClosePage() False" Else MsgBox "ClosePage() OK" End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-15

Item	Description
Type	VOID GetHWND(ULONG* hwnd)
Kind	Screen Function
Description	Get handle of runtime program. hwnd : Get handle of runtime program
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.GetHWND If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "GetHWND()OK" + CStr(lRet) Else MsgBox "GetHWND() False => lRet : " + CStr(lRet) End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID HardCopy()
Kind	Screen Function
Description	Prints the full screen associated with the graphic runtime window.
Example	Sub Main ole.HardCopy End Sub

Item	Description
Type	BOOL IsRunning ()
Kind	Screen Function
Description	Get current run-time status.
Example	Sub Main Dim bRet As Boolean bRet = ole.IsRunning If bRet = True Then MsgBox "IsRunning OK" Else MsgBox "IsRunning FALSE" End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-16

Item	Description
Type	VOID OpenPage (BSTR szPageName, BSTR szPageParam)
Kind	Screen Function
Description	Opens the file whose page name is specified by szPageName szPageName: Graphic page name szPageParam: Replace name for template screen.
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole. OpenPage ("PAGE1.ivd", “$GR=PLC1”) If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "OpenPage() False" Else MsgBox "OpenPage () OK" End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG OpenPageObject (BSTR szPageName, BSTR szObjectName)
Kind	Screen Function
Description	Opens the file whose pagename is specified by szPageName. szPageName: Graphic page name szObjectName: Replace name for template screen
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.OpenPageObject("Page.ivd", "ObjectName") If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "OpenPageObject() False" Else MsgBox "OpenPageObject() OK" End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID Quit()
Kind	Screen Function
Description	Terminates the execution of InfoU rumtime.
Example	Sub Main ole.Quit End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-17

5.2.3 Tag Function

Item	Description
Type	ULONG GetTagStatus (BSTR szTagName)
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Get the current tag status. szTagName : Tag Name
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.GetTagStatus("SCAnaTag") If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "GetTagStatus() OK" Else MsgBox "GetTagStatus() False" End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	BSTR GetTagStatusDesc (ULONG lTagStatus)
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Let you know the explanation of the tag status by string. lTagStatus: Tag Status Value
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long Dim szDesc As String lRet = ole.GetTagValueStatus("tagName") szDesc = ole.GetTagStatusDesc(lRet) MsgBox szDesc End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-18

Item	Description
Type	VARIANT GetTagVal (BSTR szTagName)
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Get tag value. szTagName: Tag Name
Example	Sub Main Dim Value As Variant Value = 12.0 Value = ole.GetTagVal("FAOA_F_EHV02.AR") MsgBox "FAOA_F_EHV02.AR Value = " + CStr(Value) End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VARIANT GetTagValbyTagId (LONG lTagId)
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Get tag values by tag id lTagId: Tag ID (Index)
Example	Sub Main Dim Value As Variant Dim Tagid As Long Value = ole.GetTagValbyTagId(Tagid) MsgBox "SCDigTag Value = " + Value End Sub

Item	Description
Type	BSTR GetTagValnStatusByTagId (LONG lTagId, VARIANT* vtTagVal, LONG lScanMode, LONG lMainQ, LONG lSubQCnt, LONG lSubQ1, LONG lSubQ2, LONG lSubQ3, LONG lSubQ4, LONG lSubQ5 )
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Get tag status by tag id. The return values is the description of tag status lTagId: Tag ID (Index) vtTagVal: Tag Value lScanMode: The main mode of tag status. (1:SCANSTOP, 2:SCANSTART) lMainQ: Main Quality Code lSubQCnt: Detail Quality Code Count lSubQ1: Detail Quality Code1 lSubQ2: Detail Quality Code2 lSubQ3: Detail Quality Code3 lSubQ4: Detail Quality Code4 lSubQ5: Detail Quality Code5

Appendix 5 Function

A5-19

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetTagValueStatus (BSTR szTagName, VARIANT *vtTagVal)
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Inform the tag value and status. In this time, the return value let you know the status value szTagName : Tag Name vtTagVal : Tag Value
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long Dim TagValue As Variant lRet = ole.GetTagValueStatus("Tag Name" , TagValue) If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox " GetTagValueStatus () : SCAN START , Value" + CStr(TagValue) Else MsgBox " GetTagValueStatus () : SCAN STOP False" End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG ResetStaticValue (BSTR szTagName)
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Reset statistic value of specified tag szTagName: Tag Name
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.ResetStaticValue("SCAnaTag") If (lRet = 0) Then MsgBox "ResetStaticValue() OK " Else MsgBox "ResetStaticValue() FALSE " End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-20

Item	Description
Type	LONG ShowCrossReference (BSTR szTagName)
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Inform you where specific tag is being used currently. szTagName : Tag Name
Example	Sub Main ole.ShowCrossReference("SCADA.UT_EHV07._KWHRESET_") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID ShowRawDataInfo()
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Display Raw Data Information dialog.
Example	Sub Main ole. ShowRawDataInfo End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID ShowSIMCfgInfo()
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Display Simulation Setting dialog.
Example	Sub Main ole. ShowSIMCfgInfo End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID SetTagVal (BSTR szTagName, VARIANT vtTagVal)
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Control tag szTagName: Tag Name vtTagVal: Tag value which was controled
Example	Sub Main Dim Value As Variant MsgBox " Before : SetTagVal(SCDigTag) Value = " + ole.GetTagVal("tagName") Value = 1 ole.SetTagVal("tagName", Value) MsgBox " After : SetTagVal(Tag Name ) Value = " + ole.GetTagVal("tagName") End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-21

Item	Description
Type	LONG SetTagValEx (SHORT nMode, BSTR szTagName, VARIANT vtTagVal, BSTR szClientName, ULONG hClientHandle)
Kind	Tag Function
Description	Control specified tag value nMode: Control Mode (Only No Return mode supported : 1) szTagName: Tag Name vtTagVal: Tag Value to Control szClientName : Client Program Name that perform control hClientHandle: Client Window Handle that perform control
Example	Sub Main Dim Value As Variant Dim TransNo As Long MsgBox " Before : SetTagValEx(SCDigTag) Value = " + ole.GetTagVal("tagName") Value = 1 TransNo = ole.SetTagVaLEx (1, "tagName", Value , “Script”, NULL) MsgBox " After : SetTagValEx(tagName) Value = " + ole.GetTagVal("tagName") End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-22
5.2.4 Script Function

Item	Description
Type	VOID RunScript (BSTR szScriptName)
Kind	Script Function
Description	Run Script szScriptName: Script Name
Example	Sub Main Dim scTime As Variant ole.RunScript("Script Name") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID StopScript (BSTR szScriptName)
Kind	Script Function
Description	Stop Script szScriptName: Script Name
Example	Sub Main Dim scTime As Variant ole.StopScript("Script Name") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID TimeOutMsgBox (BSTR Msg, BSTR Title, Int nSec)
Kind	Script Function
Description	Display message box while time interval In case of use normal message box in script, be careful of closing script function Msg: message contents Title: title nSec: time interval (second)
Example	Sub Main ole.TimeOutMsgBox "Today is Holiday","Title",5 End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-23

5.2.5 Event Function

Item	Descriptio
Type	LONG NotifyAlarmEvent (DOUBLE llOccur, USHORT nAlmLevel, BSTR szMessage, BSTR szArea, BSTR szOUser, BSTR szInformation, BSTR szUserDefine1, BSTR szUserDefine2, BSTR szUserDefine3, BSTR szUserDefine4, BSTR szPrev, BSTR szCur, BSTR szObject)
Kind	Event Function
Description	Occur Alarm & Event. llOccur: Occurrence Time. NULL = current time nAlmLevel: The level of alarm szMessage: Message szArea: Occurrence Region szOUser: Occurrence User szInformation: Information szUserDefine1: User Definition1 szUserDefine2: User Definition2 szUserDefine3: User Definition3 szUserDefine4: User Definition4 szPrev: Pervious Value of Message szCur: New Value of Message szObject: Message Object
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long Dim dDate As Double Dim iLevel As Integer ole.ChangeProcessServer("ALM_PROC","150.150.32.60") If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "ChangeProcessServer() False : ret = " + CStr(lRet) Else MsgBox "ChangeProcessServer() OK : ret = " + CStr(lRet) End If dDate = NUL iLevel = 1 lRet = ole.NotifyAlarmEvent(dDate, iLevel,"NotifyAlarmEvent Test", _ "Script", "Script", "Interfun API Success", "", "", "", _ "", “before bun", "after Run","") If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "NotifyAlarmEvent() False : ret = " + CStr(lRet) Else MsgBox "NotifyAlarmEvent() OK : ret = " + CStr(lRet)

Appendix 5 Function
A5-24

End If
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID SendEmail (BSTR szMailAddTo, BSTR szMailAddFrom, BSTR szMailTitle , BSTR szMailMsg)
Kind	Event Function
Description	Send E-Mail szMailAddTo : E-Mail Sender szMailAddFrom : E-Mail Receiver szMailTitle: E-Mail Title szMailMsg : E-Mail Body
Example	Sub Main ole.SendEmail("receiver@lsis.biz","sender@lsis.biz","title","message: Script Test Good~~!!") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID SendSMS (BSTR szRecvPhoneNo, BSTR szCallBackPhoneNo, BSTR szSMSMsg)
Kind	Event Function
Description	Send SMS. szRecvPhoneNo : The phone number of SMS receiver szCallBackPhoneNo : The phone number of SMS sender szSMSMsg : SMS Message (English:80, Korean:40)
Example	Sub Main ole.SendSMS("0194851234","0194850000","Script Test") End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-25

5.2.6 Log Function

Item	Description
Type	VOID NotifyError (USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
Kind	Log Function
Description	Error Logs are recorded. nLogCategory: Log Category (Default : LOG_CATE_SCRIPT= 1, 0) szMsg: Log Message szDesc: Log Description
Example	Sub Main ole.NotifyError(1, "ERROR", "Notify_ERROR") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID NotifyHostError (BSTR szHostName, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
Kind	Log Function
Description	Error Logs are recorded to specified computer. szHostName: Target computer Name nLogCategory: Log Category (Default : LOG_CATE_SCRIPT= 1, 0) szMsg: Log Message szDesc: Log Description
Example	Sub Main ole.NotifyHostError("127.0.0.1",1, "HOST_ERROR", "Notify_HOST_ERROR") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID NotifyHostInfo (BSTR szHostName, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
Kind	Log Function
Description	Information Logs are recorded to specified computer. szHostName: Target computer Name nLogCategory: Log Category (Default : LOG_CATE_SCRIPT= 1, 0) szMsg: Log Message szDesc: Log Description
Example	Sub Main ole.NotifyHostInfo ("127.0.0.1",1, "HOST_INFO", "Notify_HOST_INFO") End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-26

Item	Description
Type	VOID NotifyHostLog (USHORT nLogType, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szHostName, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
Kind	Log Function
Description	Logs are recorded to specified computer. nLogType: Log type( 1 = INFO_LOG_TYPE(information), 2 = WARN_LOG_TYPE (warning), 3 = ERRO_LOG_TYPE(error) ) nLogCategory: Log Category (Default : LOG_CATE_SCRIPT= 1, 0) szHostName: Target computer Name szMsg: Log Message szDesc: Log Description
Example	Sub Main ole.NotifyHostLog(1, 1, "127.0.0.1", "HOST_INFO", "NotifyHostLog__ INFO") ole.NotifyHostLog(2, 1, "127.0.0.1", "HOST_WARN", "NotifyHostLog _ WARN") ole.NotifyHostLog(3, 1, "127.0.0.1","HOST_ERROR", "NotifyHostLog _ ERROR") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID NotifyHostWarn (BSTR szHostName, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
Kind	Log Function
Description	Warning Logs are recorded. szHostName: Target computer Name nLogCategory: Log Category (Default : LOG_CATE_SCRIPT= 1, 0) szMsg: Log Message szDesc: Log Description
Example	Sub Main ole.NotifyHostWarn ("127.0.0.1",1, "HOST_WARN", "Notify_HOST_WARN") End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-27

Item	Description
Type	VOID NotifyInfo (USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
Kind	Log Function
Description	Information Logs are recorded. nLogCategory: Log Category (Default : LOG_CATE_SCRIPT= 1, 0) szMsg: Log Message szDesc: Log Description
Example	Sub Main ole.NotifyInfo(1, "INFO", "Notify_INFO") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID NotifyLog (USHORT nLogType, USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
Kind	Log Function
Description	Logs are recorded nLogType: Log type (1 = INFO_LOG_TYPE(Information), 2 = WARN_LOG_TYPE (Warning), 3 = ERRO_LOG_TYPE(Error) ) nLogCategory: Log Category (Default : LOG_CATE_SCRIPT= 1, 0) szMsg: Log Message szDesc: Log Description
Example	Sub Main ole.NotifyLog(1, "INFO", 1,"NotifyLog _ INFO") ole.NotifyLog(2, "WARN", 1, "NotifyLog _ WARN") ole.NotifyLog(3, "ERROR",1,"NotifyLog _ ERROR") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID NotifyWarn (USHORT nLogCategory, BSTR szMsg, BSTR szDesc)
Kind	Log Function
Description	Warning Logs are recorded nLogCategory: Log Category (Default : LOG_CATE_SCRIPT= 1, 0) szMsg: Log Message szDesc: Log Description
Example	Sub Main ole.NotifyWarn(1, "WARN", "Notify_WARN") End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-28
5.2.7 Network Function

Item	Description
Type	BSTR ChangLine (BSTR szLineMode, BSTR szTargetLineIP)
Kind	Network Function
Description	Changes a network line with designation IP address szLineMode: line mode (DEFAULT, SUB) szTargetLineIP: line IP address
Example	Sub Main Dim bRet As Boolean bRet = ole.ChangLine("DEFAULT", "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx") If bRet <> 0Then MsgBox "ChangLine FALSE" Else MsgBox "ChangLine OK" End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG ChangeProcessServer (BSTR szProcessName, BSTR szProcessIP)
Kind	Network Function
Description	Changes with process of network address (IP). szProcessName: process name szProcessIP: target computer's IP address
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.ChangeProcessServer("ALM_PROC","xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx") If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "ChangeProcessServer() False" Else MsgBox "ChangeProcessServer() OK " End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG ChangeServerMode (BSTR szServerMode)
Kind	Network Function
Description	Changes a server mode.(redundancy option only) szServerMode: target mode (NORMAL, RUN, STANDBY)
Example	Sub Main

Appendix 5 Function

A5-29

Dim lRet As Long
lRet = ole.ChangeServerMode("NORMAL")
If lRet <> 0 Then
MsgBox "ChangeServerMode()False"
Else
MsgBox "ChangeServerMode() OK"
End If
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetCurLine (int* nCurLine)
Kind	Network Function
Description	Get current used line.(line redundancy option only) nCurLine: network line(0: Default IP, 1: Sub IP , 2: stop)
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long Dim lLineSatus As Long lRet = ole.GetCurLine(lLineSatus) If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "GetCurLine()False => Status " + CStr(lLineSatus) Else MsgBox "GetCurLine() OK => Status " + CStr(lLineSatus) End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	INT GetLineStatus (INT nLineMode)
Kind	Network Function
Description	Get current line status nLineMode: line status
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long Dim lLineStatus As Long lLineStatus = 0 lRet = ole.GetLineStatus(lLineStatus) If (lRet = 1) Then MsgBox "GetLineStatus() OK: " + CStr(lLineStatus) Else

Appendix 5 Function
A5-30

MsgBox "GetLineStatus() FALSE: " + CStr(lLineStatus)
End If
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	BSTR GetNodeCurIP (BSTR szNodeName)
Kind	Network Function
Description	Get current used node IP address szNodeName: node name(computer name)
Example	Sub Main Dim IP As String IP = ole.GetNodeCurIP("SERVER") MsgBox "GetNodeCurIP() => SERVER " + IP End Sub

Item	Description
Type	BSTR GetServerMode ()
Kind	Network Function
Description	Get server mode(mode: run, standby)
Example	Sub Main Dim SvrMode As String SvrMode = ole.GetServerMode MsgBox "GetServerMode : " + SvrMode End Sub

Item	Description
Type	BOOL IsDualLine ()
Kind	Network Function
Description	Get network line redundancy settings
Example	Sub Main Dim bRet As Boolean bRet = ole.IsDualLine If bRet = True Then MsgBox "IsDualLine OK" Else MsgBox "IsDualLine FALSE" End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-31

5.2.8 System Function

Item	Description
Type	VARIANT GetSystemTime ()
Kind	System Function
Description	Get current system time
Example	Sub Main Dim scTime As Variant scTime = ole.GetSystemTime If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "GetSystemTime() False" Else MsgBox "GetSystemTime() OK" + scTime End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG IsHoliday (szDateTime)
Kind	System Function
Description	It informs you of whether the date delivered as a factor is a holiday or not. szDateTime: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS Return Value: 0=Weekday, 1=Saturday, 2=Sunday, 3=Holiday
Example	Sub Main Dim szDateTime Dim lRetn szDateTime = Format(Now(),"YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS") lRetn = ole.IsHoliday(szDateTime) If lRetn = 0 Then Debug.Print "Today is a Weekday" ElseIf lRetn = 1 Then Debug.Print "Today is Saturday" ElseIf lRetn = 2 Then Debug.Print "Today is Sunday" ElseIf lRetn = 3 Then Debug.Print "Today is Holiday" End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-32

Item	Description
Type	VOID ProcessSleep(LONG dwMiliseconds)
Kind	System Function
Description	Suspends the current process for a specified time dwMiliseconds: millisecond
Example	Sub Main Dim scTime As Variant ole.ProcessSleep(1000) End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID RunApp (BSTR szAppPath)
Kind	System Function
Description	Excute application. (include path) szAppPath: application path
Example	Sub Main Dim scTime As Variant ole.RunApp("C:WINDOWSSystem32mspaint.exe") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID ShowAlarmPage(BSTR szAlarmTag)
Kind	System Function
Description	This function displays the alarm page with tag which is occured alram szAlarmTag: Tag name
Example	Sub Main Dim scTime As Variant ole. ShowAlarmPage ("Tag name") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID Sleep(LONG dwMiliseconds)
Kind	System Function
Description	Suspends the current script for a specified time dwMiliseconds: millisecond
Example	Sub Main Dim scTime As Variant ole. Sleep(1000) End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-33

Item	Description
Type	BSTR TimeConvert(DOUBLE dTimeValue, INT nTimeType)
Kind	System Function
Description	According to format outputs a time in string dTimeValue current time. ( ex <=0 : curent time) nTimeType : 0 : HH:MM 1 : HH:MM AM/PM 2 : HH:MM:SS 3 : HH:MM:SS AM/PM 7 : mm/dd 8 : mm-dd 10 : yy/mm/dd 11 : yy-mm-dd 13 : yyyy/mm/dd 14 : yyyy-mm-dd 15 : mm/dd HH:MM 16 : mm/dd HH:MM AM/PM 17 : mm/dd HH:MM:SS 18 : mm/dd HH:MM:SS AM/PM 19 : mm-dd HH:MM 20 : mm-dd HH:MM AM/PM 21 : mm-dd HH:MM:SS 22 : mm-dd HH:MM:SS AM/PM 23 : yy/mm/dd HH:MM 24 : yy/mm/dd HH:MM AM/PM 25 : yy/mm/dd HH:MM:SS 26 : yy/mm/dd HH:MM:SS AM/PM 27 : yy-mm-dd HH:MM 28 : yy-mm-dd HH:MM AM/PM 29 : yy-mm-dd HH:MM:SS 30 : yy-mm-dd HH:MM:SS AM/PM 31 : yyyy/mm/dd HH:MM 32 : yyyy/mm/dd HH:MM AM/PM 33 : yyyy/mm/dd HH:MM:SS 34 : yyyy/mm/dd HH:MM:SS AM/PM 35 : yyyy-mm-dd HH:MM 36 : yyyy-mm-dd HH:MM AM/PM 37 : yyyy-mm-dd HH:MM:SS 38 : yyyy-mm-dd HH:MM:SS AM/PM

Appendix 5 Function
A5-34

Item	Description
Type	BSTR TimeConvert(DOUBLE dTimeValue, INT nTimeType)
Kind	System Function
45 : yy/mm 47 : yyyy/mm 49 : yy 50 : yyyy 51 : mm 52 : dd 53 : HH 54 : MM 55 : SS 65 : “SUN” ~ “SAT”
Example	Sub Main Dim szTime As String szTime = ole.TimeConvert (1, 33) MsgBox szTime End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-35

5.2.9 Recipe Function

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeChangeData (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szRecipeName)
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Change Data Set of the workingset (Model must be the workingset's model) szModelName: Recipe Model Name szRecipeName: The data name belonging to the recipe model
Example	Sub Main Dim Result As Long Result = ole.RecipeLoadSet("CoffeDispenser2",NUL,"CreamCoffee") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeLoadSet : Error~~!!") Else Result = ole.RecipeChangeData("CoffeDispenser2","CoffeeA") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeChangeData : Error~~!!") Else MsgBox("RecipeChangeData : OK~~!!") End If End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeChangeUnit (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szUnitName)
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Change Unit Set of the workingset (Model must be the workingset's model) szModelName: Recipe Model Name szUnitName: The unit name belonging to the recipe model
Example	Sub Main Dim Result As Long Result = ole.RecipeLoadSet("CoffeDispenser2",NUL,NUL) If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeLoadSet : Error~~!!") Else Result = ole.RecipeChangeUnit("CoffeDispenser2", _ "OfficeDispenser")

Appendix 5 Function
A5-36

If (Result <> 0) Then
MsgBox("RecipeChangeUnit : Error~~!!")
Else
MsgBox("RecipeChangeUnit : OK~~!!")
End If
End If
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeControlSet (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szUnitName, BSTR szDataNamet) LONG RecipeControlSetEx (SHORT nMode, BSTR szClientProgName, ULONG hClientHandle, BSTR szModelName, BSTR szUnitName, BSTR szDataName, LONG* plTransNo, SHORT* pnResult)
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Perform recipe control with the model, unit and data information. (This function has no connection with workingset) nMode: Control Mode (nMode : 1: no return, 2: Return) szClientProgName: The program name that want to recipe control. hClientHandle: The client handle that want to recipe control. szModelName : Recipe Model Name szUnitName : The unit name belonging to the recipe model szDataName : The data name belonging to the recipe model plTransNo: In the case of recipe control return mode, The transaction number when control was succefully completed pnResult : Result of function
Example	Sub Main Dim TransNo As Long Dim Result As Long Dim Result2 As Integer Result = ole.RecipeLoadSet("CoffeDispenser2",NUL,"CoffeeA") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeLoadSet : Error~~!!") Else Result2 = ole.RecipeControlSetEx(2,"Script",this, _ "CoffeDispenser2","OfficeDispenser","CoffeeA",TransNo) Result2 = ole.RecipeControlSet("CoffeDispenser2", _

Appendix 5 Function

A5-37

"OfficeDispenser","CoffeeA")
If (Result2 <> 0) Then
MsgBox("RecipeControlSet : Error~~!!")
Else
MsgBox("RecipeControlSet : OK~~!! , TransNO = " _
+ CStr(TransNo))
End If
End If
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeControlWorkingSet (); LONG RecipeControlWorkingSetEx (SHORT nMode, BSTR szClientProgName, ULONG hClientHandle, LONG* plTransNo, SHORT* pnResult);
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Control workingset data with unit name. (There is no control return) nMode: Control Mode (nMode: 1:No Return, 2:Return) szClientProgName: The program name that want to control hClientHandle: The client handle that want to control plTransNo: In the case of recipe control return mode, The transaction number when control was succefully performed pnResult : Result of function
Example	Sub Main Dim TransNo As Long Dim Result As Long Dim Result2 As Integer Result = ole.RecipeLoadSet("CoffeDispenser2",NUL,"CoffeeA") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeLoadSet : Error~~!!") Else Result2 = ole.RecipeControlWorkingSetEx(2,"Script",this, TransNo) 'Result2 = ole.RecipeControlWorkingSet() If (Result2 <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeControlWorkingSet : Error~~!!") Else MsgBox("RecipeControlWorkingSet : OK~~!! , TransNO = " + CStr(TransNo))

Appendix 5 Function
A5-38

End If
End If
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeDeleteData (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szRecipeName)
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Delete Recipe Data szModelName : Recipe Model Name szRecipeName : The data name belonging to the recipe model
Example	Sub Main Dim Result As Long Result = ole.RecipeDeleteData("CoffeDispenser2","Amerian") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeDeleteData : Error~~!!") Else MsgBox("RecipeDeleteData : OK~~!!") End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeDeleteModel (BSTR szModelName)
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Delete Recipe Model (The recipe unit and data will be deleted belonging to recipe model) szModelName: Recipe Model Name
Example	Sub Main Dim Result As Long Result = ole.RecipeDeleteModel("CoffeDispenser3") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeDeleteModel : Error~~!!") Else MsgBox("RecipeDeleteModel : OK~~!!") End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-39

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeDeleteUnit (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szUnitName)
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Delete Recipe Unit szModelName: Recipe Model Name szUnitName : The unit name belonging to the recipe model
Example	Sub Main Dim Result As Long Result = ole.RecipeDeleteUnit("CoffeDispenser2","SubOfficeDispenser") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeDeleteUnit : Error~~!!") Else MsgBox("RecipeDeleteUnit : OK~~!!") End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeLoadDynamic (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szUnitName)
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Get real-time data of the unit and put recipe model and data on workingset szModelName: Recipe Model Name szUnitName: The unit name belonging to the recipe model
Example	Sub Main Dim Result As Long Result = ole.RecipeLoadDynamic("CoffeDispenser2","MainOfficeDispenser ") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeLoadDynamic : Error~~!!") Else MsgBox("RecipeLoadDynamic : OK~~!!") End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-40

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeLoadSet (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szUnitName, BSTR szRecipeName)
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Put recipe model, unit and data on workingset szModelName: Recipe Model Name szUnitName: The unit name belonging to the recipe model szRecipeName : The data name belonging to the recipe model
Example	Sub Main Dim Result As Long Result = ole.RecipeLoadSet("CoffeDispenser2",NUL,"CreamCoffee") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeLoadSet : Error~~!!") Else MsgBox("RecipeLoadSet : OK~~!!") End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeSaveAsArchive (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szRecipeName)
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Save workingset data as recipe name of the model name. (Model must be the workingset's model) szModelName: Recipe Model Name szRecipeName: The data name belonging to the recipe model
Example	Sub Main Dim Result As Long Result = ole.RecipeLoadSet("CoffeDispenser2",NUL,"BlackCoffee") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeLoadSet : Error~~!!") Else Result = ole.RecipeSaveAsArchive("CoffeDispenser2", _ "BlackCoffee") If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeSaveAsArchive : Error~~!!") Else MsgBox("RecipeSaveAsArchive : OK~~!!") End If End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-41

Item	Description
Type	LONG RecipeSetData (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szItemName, VARIANT szSetValue)
Kind	Recipe Function
Description	Change position value of the item in the workingset (Model must be the workingset's model) szModelName : Recipe Model Name szItemName : Item in the workingset szSetValue : The change value of the item position in the workingset
Example	Sub Main Dim vtSetValue As Variant Dim Result As Long Result = ole.RecipeLoadSet("CoffeDispenser2",NUL,NUL) vtSetValue = 55 If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeLoadSet : Error~~!!") Else Result = ole.RecipeSetData("CoffeDispenser2", _ "Coffee",vtSetValue) If (Result <> 0) Then MsgBox("RecipeSetData : Error~~!!") Else MsgBox("RecipeSetData : OK~~!!") End If End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-42
5.2.10 Database Function

Item	Description
Type	VOID DataExportRunWork (BSTR szWorkName)
Kind	Database Function
Description	Run data export operation szWorkName : Operation Name
Example	Sub Main ole. DataExporRuntWork (“OperationName”) End Sub

5.2.11 Alarm Function

Item	Description
Type	BOOL AckAllAlarm()
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	The function ACKs all alarm with level of connected users.
Example	Sub Main ole. AckAllAlarm End Sub

Item	Description
Type	BSTR GetAlarmCountErrInfo (LONG lCount)
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	Give an explanation of the error number when you request the alarm count. lCount: Function GetAlmCount(),The Return Value of GetHistAlmCount() < 0
Example	Sub Main Dim szErrDesc As String Dim AlmCount As Long AlmCount = ole. GetHistAlmCount (1, 0) If AlmCount < 0 Then szErrDesc = ole.GetAlarmCountErrInfo (AlmCount) MsgBox szErrDesc End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-43

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetAlarmLogging (DOUBLE dtFrom, DOUBLE dtTo, BSTR szTag, BSTR szAlarmGr, LONG lAlarmType, LONG lOutCount, SAFEARRAY pszRstrTag, SAFEARRAY pszRstrGr, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtOccAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtRevAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtAckAlarm, SAFEARRAY plRnAlarmType, SAFEARRAY pszRstrMsg, SAFEARRAY *pszRstrAlarmKind)
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	This function retrieves history alarm list according to the condition dtFrom: Beginning Time (from the first data, if 0) dtTo: End Time (to the last data, if 0) szTag: Tag Name (NULL: ALL) szAlarmGr: Alarm Group (NULL: ALL) lAlarmType: Alarm Type (0: ALL, 1: Alarm(Occurrence), 2: Event, 3: Alarm(Recovery), 4: Alarm (Occurrence+Recovery)) lOutCount: Alarm List Count pszRstrTag: Tag Name List pszRstrGr: Alarm Group List pdbRdtOccAlarm: List of Alarm Occurrence Times pdbRdtRevAlarm: List of Alarm Occurrence Times pdbRdtAckAlarm: List of Alarm Ack Times plRnAlarmType: List of Alarm Types pszRstrMsg: List of Alarm Messages pszRstrAlarmKind: Alarm Type (HH,HI,LO,LL,Achange,MGap,SGap,On,Off,OnOff,OffOn,DChagne)

Appendix 5 Function
A5-44

Item

Description (Continued)

Example

Sub Main
Dim dtFrom As Date
Dim dtTo As Date
Dim szTag As String
Dim szAlarmGr As String
Dim lAlarmType As Long
Dim lOutCount As Long
Dim aRstrTag() As String
Dim aRstrGr() As String
Dim aRdtOccAlarm() As Double
Dim aRdtRevAlarm() As Double
Dim aRdtAckAlarm() As Double
Dim aRnAlarmType() As Long
Dim aRstrMsg() As String
Dim aRstrAlarmKind() As String
dtFrom = Now() - 27
dtTo =Now()
szTag =""
szAlarmGr = "AlmGrp_UT"
lAlarmType = 0
lRet = ole.GetAlarmLogging(dtFrom ,dtTo , szTag ,
szAlarmGr,lAlarmType,lOutCount, aRstrTag, aRstrGr,
aRdtOccAlarm, aRdtRevAlarm,aRdtAckAlarm, aRnAlarmType,
aRstrMsg,aRstrAlarmKind)
For i = 0 To lOutCount - 1
MsgBox (aRstrTag(i) + " " + aRstrGr(i) + " "+
CStr(CDate(aRdtOccAlarm(i))) + " "+
CStr(CDate(aRdtRevAlarm(i))) + " "+
CStr(CDate(aRdtAckAlarm(i))) + " " +
CStr(aRnAlarmType(i)) + " " +
aRstrMsg(i) + " " + aRstrAlarmKind(i))
Next i
End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-45

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetAlarmLoggingEx (DOUBLE dtFrom,DOUBLE dtTo,BSTR szTag, LONG nAlarmGroupCount, SAFEARRAY *pszAlarmGr,LONG lAlarmType, LONG lAlarmGrade, BSTR szAlarmKind, LONG lOutCount, SAFEARRAYpRstrTag,SAFEARRAYpRstrGr, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtOccAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtRevAlarm, SAFEARRAY pdbRdtAckAlarm, SAFEARRAY plRnAlarmType, SAFEARRAY pszRstrMsg, SAFEARRAY pszRstrAlarmKind, SAFEARRAY pdbRvOccDValue, SAFEARRAYpszRvOccSValue, SAFEARRAY **plAlarmGrade)
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	This function retrieves history alarm list according to the condition, extension function of GetAlarmLogging() dtFrom: Beginning Time (from the first data, if 0) dtTo: End Time (to the last data, if 0) szTag: Tag Name (NULL: ALL) nAlarmGroupCount: Alarm Group Count pszAlarmGr: Alarm Group List (NULL: ALL) lAlarmType: Alarm Type (Event has only Occurrence.) (0: ALL, 1: Alarm(Occurrence), 2: Event, 3: Alarm(Recovery), 4: Alarm (Occurrence+Recovery) ) lAlarmGrade: Alarm Level. You can get the alarm lists that have higher level than this level. Level1 is higher than Level10. ex) If input is level5, returns level1 ~ level5. szAlarmKind:: Alarm Type (NULL: ALL, HH,HI,LO,LL,Achange,MGap,SGap, On,Off,OnOff,OffOn,DChagne) lOutCount: Alarm List Count pszRstrTag: List of Tag Names pszRstrGr: List of Alarm Groups pdbRdtOccAlarm: List of Alarm Occurrence Times pdbRdtRevAlarm: List of Alarm Recovery Times pdbRdtAckAlarm: List of Alarm Ack Times plRnAlarmType: List of Alarm Types pszRstrMsg: List of Alarm Messages pszRstrAlarmKind: Alarm Type

Appendix 5 Function
A5-46

(HH,HI,LO,LL,Achange,MGap,SGap,On,Off,OnOff,OffOn,DChagne)
pdbRvOccDValue List of Current Values (Only if Alarm)
pszRvOccSValue: List of Current Values (only if Event)
plAlarmGrade: List of Alarm Levels

Example

Sub Main
Dim dtFrom As Double
Dim dtTo As Double
Dim szTag As String
Dim nAlarmCount As Long
Dim aAlarmGr(0) As String
Dim lAlarmType As Long
Dim lAlarmGrade As Long
Dim szAlarmKind As String
Dim lOutCount As Long
Dim aRstrTag() As String
Dim aRstrGr() As String
Dim aRdtOccAlarm() As Double
Dim aRdtRevAlarm() As Double
Dim aRdtAckAlarm() As Double
Dim aRnAlarmType() As Long
Dim aRstrMsg() As String
Dim aRstrAlarmKind() As String
Dim aOccDvalue() As Double
Dim aOccSValue() As String
Dim aAlarmLevel() As Long
dtFrom = Now() - 27
dtTo = Now
szTag =""
nAlarmCount = 1
aAlarmGr(0) = "AlmGrp_UT"
lAlarmType = 4
lAlarmGrade = 10
szAlarmKind = "LO"
lRet = ole.GetAlarmLoggingEx (dtFrom ,dtTo , szTag , nAlarmCount,
aAlarmGr,lAlarmType,lAlarmGrade, szAlarmKind,
lOutCount, aRstrTag, aRstrGr, aRdtOccAlarm,
aRdtRevAlarm,aRdtAckAlarm, aRnAlarmType,

Appendix 5 Function

A5-47

aRstrMsg,aRstrAlarmKind, aOccDvalue,
aOccSValue, aAlarmLevel)
For i = 0 To lOutCount
MsgBox (aRstrTag(i) + " " + aRstrGr(i) + " "+
CStr(CDate(aRdtOccAlarm(i)))+ " "+
CStr(CDate(aRdtRevAlarm(i)))+ " "+
CStr(CDate(aRdtAckAlarm(i))) + " " +
CStr(aRnAlarmType(i)) + " " +
aRstrMsg(i) + " " + aRstrAlarmKind(i))
Next i
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetAlmCount (LONG lKind, LONG lStatus)
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	Inform the real-time alarm count. lKind: Alarm Kind 0 : All 1 : Process Alarm 2 : System Alarm 3 : Process + System 4 : Event 5 : Process + Event 6 : System + Event lStatus: Alarm Status 0 : All 1 : Unrecovered 2 : Unrecognized 3 : Unrecovered + Unrecognized
Example	Sub Main Dim AlmCount As Long AlmCount = ole. GetAlmCount(1, 0) If AlmCount > 0 Then MsgBox “ Real-time Alarm Count = “ + CStr(AlmCount) End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-48

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetGroupUserInfoByTag (BSTR szTagName, LONG* lOutCount, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserID, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserName, SAFEARRAY(LONG) plMailCheck, SAFEARRAY(LONG) plSMSMCheck, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszMailAdd, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszHPhoneNo)
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	Get registered user information of the alarm group that contains specified tag by tag name. It is used to call the relevant user with tag information (alarm information) szTagName: Tag Name lOutCount: Count of the returned user information pszUserID : User ID pszUserName: User Name plMailCheck:: Check whether to receive a mail notice in case of the occurrence of alarm plSMSMCheck: Check whether to receive a SMS notice in case of the occurrence of alarm pszMailAdd: Mail address registered by the user pszHPhoneNo: Mobile phone number registered by the user
Example	Sub Main Dim lOutCount As Long Dim aUserID() As String Dim aUserName() As String Dim aMailCheck() As Long Dim aSMSCheck() As Long Dim aMailAdd() As String Dim aHPhoneNo() As String ole.GetGroupUserInfoByTag("AlmGrpTestTag", lOutCount, aUserID, aUserName, aMailCheck, aSMSCheck, aMailAdd, aHPhoneNo) For i = 0 To lOutCount MsgBox (aUserID(i) + " " + aUserName(i) + " " + CStr(aMailCheck(i) ) + " " + CStr(aSMSCheck(i) ) + " " + aMailAdd(i) + " " + aHPhoneNo(i)) Next i End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-49

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetHistAlmCount (LONG lKind, LONG lStatus)
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	Inform the history alarm count lKind: Alarm Kind 0 : All, 1 : Process Alarm, 2 : System Alarm, 3 : Process + System, 4 : Event, 5 : Process + Event, 6 : System + Event lStatus: Alarm Status 0 : All, 1 : UnRecover, 2 : UnAck
Example	Sub Main Dim AlmCount As Long AlmCount = ole. GetHistAlmCount (1, 0) If AlmCount > 0 Then MsgBox “History Alarm Count = “ + CStr(AlmCount) End If End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetUserInfoList(LONG* lOutCount, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserID, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszUserName, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszDesc, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszPassword, SAFEARRAY(LONG) plUserLevel, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszHPhoneNo, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszPhoneNo, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) pszMailAdd)
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	The function returns all user's list and informations. lOutCount: Returned list count pszUserID : User ID pszUserName: User name pszDesc : User's description pszPassword : User's password plUserLevel : User's level

Appendix 5 Function
A5-50

pszHPhoneNo: User's cell phone number
pszPhoneNo: User's phone number
pszMailAdd: User's e-mail address

Example

Sub Main
Dim lRet As Long
Dim lOutCount As Long
Dim aUserID() As String
Dim aUserName() As String
Dim aDesc() As String
Dim aPassword() As String
Dim aUserLevel() As Long
Dim aMailAdd() As String
Dim aHPhoneNo() As String
Dim aPhoneNo() As String
lRet = ole.GetUserInfoList(lOutCount, aUserID, aUserName, aDesc,
aPassword, aUserLevel, aHPhoneNo, aPhoneNo, aMailAdd)
For i = 0 To lOutCount - 1
MsgBox (aUserID(i) + " " + aUserName(i) + " "+
CStr(aUserLevel(i))+ " " + aHPhoneNo(i) + " "
+ aPhoneNo(i)+ " " + aMailAdd(i))
Next i
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG SetUserAlarm (BSTR szAlarmMessage, BSTR szAlarmGroup)
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	This is the alarm function that user occurs. The alarm occurrence and recovery are generated at the same time szAlarmMessage: Alarm Message szAlarmGroup : Alarm Group Automatic entry user : Current logon user Occured Time, Recovery Time : current system time Alarm type : Process Alarm AlarmLevel: Input 10 level. Input "$Script" in tag name

Appendix 5 Function

A5-51

Example

Sub Main
ole.SetUserAlarm "UserAlarm ", "AlarmGroup"
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG SetUserAlarmEx (DOUBLE dOccur, LONG lAlarmLevel, BSTR szAlarmMessage ,BSTR szAlarmGroup, DOUBLE dCur, DOUBLE dPrev)
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	This is the extended alarm function that user occurs. The alarm occurrence and recovery are generated at the same time dOccur: Time Input - If you set this value by 0, current time value will be applied lAlarmLevel: Alarm Level - If you set this value from 0 to 10, then setting value will be applied. Else 10 will be applied automatically szAlarmMessage : Alarm Message szAlarmGroup : Alarm Group dCur : Current Value dPrev : Previous Automatic entry user : Current logon user Alarm type : Process Alarm Input "$Script" in tag name
Example	Sub Main ole.SetUserAlarmEx Now(), 2, " UserAlarm ", "AlarmGroup", _ 22.34, 44.56 End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG SetUserEvent (BSTR szEventMessage)
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	This is the event function that user occurs. szEventMessage : Event Message Auto input Item Event time : Current system tme Event occur : Current logon user Occurred Computer: This Computer Name

Appendix 5 Function
A5-52

Alarm type : Event Alarm
Example	Sub Main ole.SetUserEvent "UserEvent" End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID StopAlarmSound ()
Kind	Alarm Function
Description	The function stops playing sound of the alarm.
Example	Sub Main ole. StopAlarmSound End Sub

5.2.12 External Device Function

Item	Description
Type	VOID PlaySound(BSTR szWaveFile)
Kind	External Device Function
Description	Play sound (Async) szSoundFile : wave file path
Example	Sub Main ole.PlaySound ("wave file .wav") End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID PlaySoundFile (BSTR szSoundFile)
Kind	External Device Function
Description	Play sound (Sync) szSoundFile : wave file path
Example	Sub Main ole.PlaySoundFile("SoundFile.wav") End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-53

5.2.13 User Function

Item	Description
Type	BSTR GetUserID ()
Kind	User Function
Description	The function returns ID of the user
Example	Sub Main Dim szUserID As String szUserID = ole. GetUserID MsgBox " User ID = “szUserID End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetUserLevel ()
Kind	User Function
Description	The function returns Level of the user
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole. GetUserLevel MsgBox " User Priority = “+ CScr(lRet) End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG UserLogOff ()
Kind	User Function
Description	Notifies InfoU Runtime that a user has logged off
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.UserLogOff If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "UserLogOff() False" Else MsgBox "UserLogOff() OK" End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-54

Item	Description
Type	LONG UserLogOn (BSTR szUserID, BSTR szPassWord)
Kind	User Function
Description	Notifies InfoU Runtime that a user has logged on szUserID: User ID szPassWord: User Password
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long lRet = ole.UserLogOn("UserID", " UserPassword ") If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox "UserLogOn() False" Else MsgBox "UserLogOn() OK" End If End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-55

5.2.14 Report Function

Item	Description
Type	VOID ReportDialog ()
Kind	Report Function
Description	Shows the report windows
Example	Sub Main ole. ReportDialog End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID ReportListRefresh()
Kind	Report Function
Description	Refresh a report list
Example	Sub Main ole. ReportListRefresh End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID ReportPrint (BSTR szReportName)
Kind	Report Function
Description	Outputs the report szReportName : report name
Example	Sub Main ole. ReportPrint (“ReportName”) End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID ReportPrintEx (BSTR szReportName, BSTR sz ReqTime)
Kind	Report Function
Description	Outputs the report szReportName : report name szReqTime : request report start time
Example	Sub Main ole. ReportPrintEx (“ReportName”, ”2007/02/01”) End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-56

Item	Description
Type	VOID ReportSchedulerHide ()
Kind	Report Function
Description	Hide the report schedule windows
Example	Sub Main ole.ReportSchedulerHide End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID ReportSchedulerShow ()
Kind	Report Function
Description	Shows report schedule list
Example	Sub Main ole. ReportSchedulerShow End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-57

5.2.15 History Data Function

Item	Description
Type	VOID GetHistDataCount (BSTR szModelName, BSTR , BSTR szDataKind, DOUBLE dRefTime, LONG lCount, LONG lDir, LONG* lResultCount, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblTimeStamp, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblNumValue, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalStatus, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalResult)
Kind	History Data Function
Description	This function returns logging data from the logging group you specified according to the base time, direction and logging data count. (TimeStamp, Tag Value, Tag Status, Result) szModelName : Logging Group Name szTagName : Logging Tag Name szDataKind: Value Type (Default : Current Value) dRefTime: Base Time lCount, : Logging Data Count lDir: Direction (forward or backward from base time) lResultCount: Logging Data Count psadblTimeStamp: Array of TimeStamps psadblNumValue: Array of Tag Values psalStatus: Array of Tag Status psalResult: Result
Example	Sub Main Dim ModelName As String Dim TagName As String Dim DataKind As String Dim RefTime As Date Dim lCount As Long Dim lDir As Long Dim ResultCount As Long Dim TimeStamp() As Double Dim NumValue() As Double Dim Status() As Long Dim Result() As Long ModelName = "INV1_SEC" TagName = "INV_1.1_AI_CT" DataKind = "Current" RefTime = Now() lCount = 5

Appendix 5 Function
A5-58

lDir = 1
ole.GetHistDataCount(ModelName, TagName, DataKind,
RefTime, lCount, lDir, ResultCount,
TimeStamp, NumValue, Status, Result)
For count = 0 To ResultCount -1
MsgBox("NumValue = " + CStr(NumValue(count))
+ " Status = " + CStr(Status (count)))
Next
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID GetHistDataPeriod (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szTagName, BSTR szDataKind, DOUBLE dFrom, DOUBLE dTo, LONG* lResultCount, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblTimeStamp, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblNumValue, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalStatus, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalResul)
Kind	History Data Function
Description	This function returns logging data from logging group you specified within a given period of time. (TimeStamp, Tag Value, Tag Status, Result) szModelName : Logging Group Name szTagName : Logging Tag Name szDataKind: Value Type (Default : Current Value) dFrom: Beginning Time dTo: End Time lResultCount: Logging Data Count psadblTimeStamp: Array of TimeStamps psadblNumValue: Array of Tag Values psalStatus: Array of Tag Status psalResult: Result
Example	Sub Main Dim ModelName As String Dim TagName As String Dim DataKind As String Dim dFrom As Date Dim dTo As Date Dim ResultCount As Long Dim TimeStamp() As Double

Appendix 5 Function

A5-59

Dim NumValue() As Double
Dim Status() As Long
Dim Result() As Long
ModelName = "INV1_SEC"
TagName = "INV_1.1_AI_CT"
DataKind = "Current Value"
dFrom = Now() -1
'To = Now()
ole.GetHistDataPeriod( ModelName, TagName, DataKind, _
dFrom, dTo, ResultCount, TimeStamp, _
NumValue, Status, Result)
For count = 0 To ResultCount -1
MsgBox("NumValue = " + CStr(NumValue(count))
+ " Status = " + CStr(Status (count)))
Next
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetLoggingModelList (LONG lOutCount ,SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszModelName, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszModelDesc, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszModelType, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszArchvingCycle, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszSegmentPeriod)
Kind	History Data Function
Description	This function returns Logging Group Lists lOutCount: Logging Group count psaszModelName: List of Logging Group Names psaszModelDesc: List of Logging Group Descriptions psaszModelType: List of Logging Group Types psaszArchvingCycle: List of Acquisition Cycles psaszSegmentPeriod: List of Storage Periods
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long Dim lOutCount As Long Dim aModelName() As String Dim aModelDesc() As String Dim aModelType() As String Dim aArchivingCycle() As String Dim aSegmentPeriod() As String

Appendix 5 Function
A5-60

lRet = ole.GetLoggingModelList(lOutCount, aModelName, _
aModelDesc, aModelType,aArchivingCycle, aSegmentPeriod )
For i = 0 To lOutCount -1
MsgBox (aModelName(i) + " " + aModelDesc(i) + " "+ _
aModelType(i)+ " " + aArchivingCycle(i) + _
" " + aSegmentPeriod(i))
Next i
End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetLoggingTag(BSTR szModelName, LONG lOutCount ,SAFEARRAY(BSTR) psaszTagName, SAFEARRAY(BSTR) *psaszTagType)
Kind	History Data Function
Description	This function returns Logging Tags according to the Logging Group. szModelName: Logging Group Name lOutCount: Logging Tag Count in the Logging Group psaszTagName: List of Tag Names psaszTagType: List of Tag Types
Example	Sub Main Dim lRet As Long Dim lOutCount As Long Dim aTagName() As String Dim aTagType() As String lRet = ole.GetLoggingTag ("INV1_MON", lOutCount, aTagName, aTagType) For i = 0 To lOutCount -1 MsgBox ("INV1_MON " + aTagName(i) + " " + aTagType(i)) Next i End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-61

Item	Description
Type	VOID SetHistData (BSTR szModelName, BSTR szTagName, BSTR szDataKind, LONG lDataCount, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblSaveTime, SAFEARRAY(double) psadblNumValue, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalTagStatus, SAFEARRAY(LONG) psalResult)
Kind	History Data Function
Description	This function saves tag values as logging data in the logging group user specified. szModelName : Logging Group Name szTagName : Logging Tag Name szDataKind: Value Type (Default : Current Value lDataCount : Data Count psadblSaveTime : TimeStamp psadblNumValue : Tag Value psalTagStatus : Tag Status psalResult: Result
Example	Sub Main Dim szModelName As String Dim szTagName As String Dim szDataKind As String Dim lCount As Long Dim dtSaveTime(3) As Double Dim dblTagNumValue(3) As Double Dim ulTagStatus(3) As Long Dim lResult() As Long Dim lRet As Long szModelName = "INV1_SEC" szTagName = "INV_1.1_AI_CT" szDataKind = "Current Value" lCount = 3 For count = 0 To lCount -1 dtSaveTime(count) = Now() + count*0.1 dblTagNumValue(count) = 100 + count + 1 ulTagStatus(count) = 0 Next lRet = ole.SetHistData(szModelName ,szTagName , szDataKind, lCount , dtSaveTime, dblTagNumValue, ulTagStatus, lResult) If lRet <> 0 Then MsgBox("SetHistData Error!!!1") Else

Appendix 5 Function
A5-62

For count = 0 To lCount -1
MsgBox("Result = " + CStr(lResult (count)))
Next
End If
End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-63

5.2.16 I/O Driver Function

Item	Description
Type	VOID ClearStaStatusCount (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
Kind	I/O DRIVE FUNCTION
Description	Reset Station Status counts. szChannelName : Channel Name szStaName : Station Name
Example	Sub Main ole. ClearStaStatusCount (“ChannelName”, “StationName”) End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID EnableStation (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName, LONG lMode)
Kind	I/O DRIVE FUNCTION
Description	Set a station enable or disable. szChannelName : Channel Name szStaName : Station Name lMode : 0 : Enable, 1: Disable
Example	Sub Main Dim SuccessCount As Long SuccessCount = ole. EnableStation (“ChannelName”, StationName”,0) End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetCountReadSuccess (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
Kind	I/O DRIVE FUNCTION
Description	Return Read OK counts szChannelName : Channel Name szStaName : Station Name
Example	Sub Main Dim SuccessCount As Long SuccessCount = ole. GetCountReadSuccess (“ChannelName”,“StationName”) MsgBox “Read Success Count = “ + CStr(SuccessCount) End Sub

Appendix 5 Function
A5-64

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetCountReadTotal (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
Kind	I/O DRIVE FUNCTION
Description	Return Read Total counts szChannelName: Channel Name szStaName: Station Name
Example	Sub Main Dim ReadCount As Long ReadCount = ole. GetCountReadTotal (“ChannelName”,“StationName”) MsgBox “Read Count = “ + CStr(ReadCount) End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetCountWriteSuccess (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
Kind	I/O DRIVE FUNCTION
Description	Return Write OK counts. szChannelName: Channel Name szStaName: Station Name
Example	Sub Main Dim SuccessCount As Long SuccessCount = ole. GetCountWriteSuccess (“ChannelName”,“StationName”) MsgBox “Write Success Count = “ + CStr(SuccessCount) End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetCountWriteTotal (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
Kind	I/O DRIVE FUNCTION
Description	Return Write Total counts. szChannelName: Channel Name szStaName: Station Name
Example	Sub Main Dim WriteCount As Long WriteCount = ole. GetCountWriteTotal (“ChannelName”,“StationName”) MsgBox “Write Count = “ + CStr(WriteCount) End Sub

Appendix 5 Function

A5-65

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetStatusRunMode (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
Kind	I/O DRIVE FUNCTION
Description	Return Station Runmode. szChannelName: Channel Name szStaName: Station Name
Example	Sub Main Dim RunModeCount As Long RunModeCount = ole. GetStatusRunMode (“ChannelName”,“StationName”) MsgBox “Station Run Mode Count = “ + CStr(RunModeCount) End Sub

Item	Description
Type	LONG GetStatusStaOK (BSTR szChannelName, BSTR szStaName)
Kind	I/O DRIVE FUNCTION
Description	Return Station OK status. szChannelName: Channel Name szStaName: Station Name
Example	Sub Main Dim OKCount As Long OKCount = ole. GetStatusStaOK (“ChannelName”,“StationName”) MsgBox “OK Count = “ + CStr(OKCount) End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID ShowNetworkStatus ()
Kind	I/O DRIVE FUNCTION
Description	Display Station Status dialog.
Example	Sub Main ole.ShowNetworkStatus End Sub

Item	Description
Type	VOID ShowStationInfo ()
Kind	I/O DRIVE FUNCTION
Description	Display Station Status dialog.
Example	Sub Main ole.ShowStationInfo End Sub

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-1
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
6.1 Q&A for Windows XP
6.1.1 Q: How can I install the Internet Information Service (IIS) in Windows XP?
A: In order to install the internet information service (hereinafter referred to as ‘IIS’) in Windows XP, you
need the CD to install Windows XP OS in your computer. On condition that you have the Windows XP
OS installation CD, you can refer to the below installation procedures. Namely, if you do not have the
OS installation CD, you cannot install IIS.
(1) Click the [Start][Control Panel] menu.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-2
(2) Click the [Add/Remove Programs] in the [Control Panel].
(3) Click the [Add/Remove Windows Components(A)] menu.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-3
(4) After selecting internet information service (IIS) in the dialog box of [Windows Components Wizard], click the
[Next] button.
If the message is displayed; ‘There is no Windows installation CD’, insert the CD’, insert the CD and wait until
file copying is completed.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-4
It shows the process copying file from the Windows original CD.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-5
(5) If the message is displayed; Windows Components Wizard is completed, click the [Finish] button.
(6) Select [Start][Control Panel][Performance and Maintenance].
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-6
(7) Select [Administrative Tools][Internet Information Service].
After selecting [Default Web Site], click with the right mouse button. Then, choose the [Browse] menu.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-7
(8) When IIS is normally installed, the default page will show up as below. Alternatively, if you open the web
browser and input the local host, the default page will also be displayed.
6.1.2 Q: After installing IIS in Windows XP and operating the web server, if I access to
http://127.0.0.1, the below message is displayed; Internet Explorer cannot
display the webpage.
A: In case the above massage; [Internet Explorer cannot display the webpage] shows up instead of IIS
error code page, it means IIS is not normally installed.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-8
(1) Select [Start][My computer][Right Mouse][Manage]. In [Service and Applications]
[Internet Information Service][Web Sites], stop all other websites and change [Default Web Site] into ‘Start’.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-9
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-10
(2) Open the web browser and input http://localhost or http://127.0.0.1. Then, the default page will be normally
opened as shown below. If the default page is not opened, it means IIS installation is wrong or there are
some problems with the components of IIS. In this case, after removing IIS, reinstall it.
6.1.3 Q: When entering the ID and password in the login screen, the below message
shows up.
(1) Windows XP version
(2) Windows 7 version
A: It means the project information was not obtained properly. After running the [Navigation Management],
select [Get project information] to read the project information.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-11
6.1.4 Q: When logging in to the site, the page is executed and the below message is
displayed.
A: To access to the InfoU Web site, real-time operation should run and the Web HMI Server should be
running. To run the Web HMI Server, follow the procedures shown below.
(1) After selecting the tray icon of real-time operation, if you click with the right mouse button, the below screen
will show up.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-12
(2) Select [Show Process Status]. After selecting 17th item, iuWebHMIServe, click [Run process].
(3) Check the tray icon in the lower right corner of Windows to confirm whether the Web HMI Server works
properly.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-13
6.1.5 Q: Although I log in to the monitoring screen, there is nothing on the screen. It
looks like a blank one.
A: If the server version does not match up with the web system version when you update the file
randomly, such a problem may occur. Namely, it means the version of GraRun.dll involved in a web
plant screen does not match with the local one so the screen is not loaded. In this case, you need to
match dll of C:InfoUin with C:InfoUWeb NavigatorctiveXInfoUWebClient dll version.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-14
6.2 Q&A for Windows 7
6.2.1 Q: If IIS7 is not automatically installed in Windows 7, how can I install it manually?
A: In order to use InfoU Web, you can install Windows7 IIS7 based on the following procedures.
< How to install IIS 7 in Windows 7 >
(1) Click [Start]  [Control Panel]

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-15
(2) After selecting the [Programs] menu in the Control Panel, click the [Turn Windows features on or off]
menu.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-16
(3) Click the [Internet Information Service] in the dialog box of the Windows Features.
(4) After expanding [Internet Information Service]-[World Wide Web service], put a check the [Basic
Authentication] and [Request Filtering] menu in [Security].

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-17
(5) In the [Application Development Features], put a check [ASP], [ISAPI Extensions], [Server-Side Includes]
menus.
(6) In the [Web Management Tools], put a check [IIS Management Script and Tools].
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-18
6.2.2 Q: The site seems not to work properly due to wrong settings of the InfoU Web
IIS7. How can I configure IIS7 in Windows 7?
A: In order to use InfoU Web, you can install Windows7 IIS7 based on the following procedures.
< How to set IIS7 (internet information service) administrative tools in Windows 7>
(1) Click [Start]  [Control Panel].

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-19
(2) After selecting the [System and Security] menu, choose [Administrative Tools].
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-20
(3) After clicking the [Administrative Tools] menu, click the [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager].
(4) Expand the site in the tree structure on the left side of the screen and click the [InfoU_WebNavigator] site.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-21
(5) After selecting [IIS]  [ASP] in the [Features View] window, double-click it.
(6) Set [Enable Parent Paths] as True in the ASP screen and click Apply in the Actions.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-22
(7) In the tree structure on the left side of the screen, click the [InfoU_WebNavigator] site.
(8) After selecting [IIS]  [Default Document] in the [Features View] screen, double click it.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-23
(9) In the [Actions] on the right side of the Default Document page, select the [Add] menu.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-24
(10) In the dialog screen of Add Default Document, after entering index.asp into the Name column, click the OK
button.
(11) In the tree structure on the left side of the screen, click the [InfoU_WebNavigator] site.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-25
(12) After selecting [IIS]  [HTTP Response Headers] in the [Features View] screen in the center of the screen,
double-click it.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-26
(13) Select the [Set Common Headers] menu in Actions the screen on the right side of the HTTP Response
Headers page.
(14) In the dialog box of the Set Common HTTP Response Headers, after unchecking the [Enable HTTP keepalive] item, click the OK button.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-27
(15) In the tree structure on the left side of the screen, click the [InfoU_WebNavigator] site.
(16) After selecting [IIS]  [MIME Types] in the [Features View] screen in the center of the screen, double-click
it.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-28
(17) In the [Actions] on the right side of the MIME Types page, select the [Add] menu.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-29
*
(18) In the dialog box of [Add MIME Type], enter * into the [File name extension] column and enter
application/octet-stream into the [MIME type] column. Then, click the OK button.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-30
6.2.3 Q: After deleting the file by mistake during version update, the web site does not
work and in addition, the monitoring screen is not displayed as below. How
can I check on normal operation?
A: It seems the project file is damaged during update. After creating the project file newly and check
whether the web site works normally.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-31
(1) C:InfoUWeb NavigatorprojectInfoInfoUWebNavigator.mdb  Change the name of the project information
file into InfoUWebNavigator_Old.mdb.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-32
(2) Run [Start][All Programs][InfoU][InfoU-Web][Navigation Management].
(3) After selecting [Get project information], click the [OK] button.
(4) To get the project information, click the [OK] button.
After getting the project information again as above, you can try to access to the plant screen.

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-33
6.2.4 Q: After logging in to the site, the monitoring screen is not displayed with the
message ‘Can’t Find URL’
A: As you see from the error message, please check whether the file exists in the web site path. This
problem may occur when a user deletes the file or change the name so check whether the file properly
exists. In terms of the web site folder, you need to check if the plant file exists in the Web
NavigatorgraphicFile folder located in the drive where the InfoU is installed. If the InfoU system is
installed in C: drive, the C:InfoUWeb NavigatorgraphicFilesystem status.ivd file must exist.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-34
6.2.5 Q: If I access to the InfoU Web site, the error message is displayed instead of the
login screen as below.
A: Such a screen may be displayed when InfoU Web is not installed normally. In case DLL registration is
not properly done, the screen is not displayed. In this case, register DLL manually as shown below.
(1) Run [Start][Run] and enter the cmd(command).

Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection

A6-35
(2) Enter regsvr32 SBMaster.dll in the command widow or drag it from the below folder. After getting the
message showing registration is done, reenter regsvr32 WebInterface.dll in the command window or drag it
from the below folder.
Appendix 6 InfoU Web Q&A Collection
A6-36
(3) If you get the message showing registration is done, it means DLL registration is normally completed.
(4) Confirm it by accessing to the InfoU Web site.

www.lsis.com
LS values every single customer.
Quality and service come first at LSIS.
Always at your service, standing for our customers.

10310001053

InfoU / 2015. 2
※ LSIS constantly endeavors to improve its product so that
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
ⓒ LSI S Co., Ltd 2015 All Rights Reserved.
■ HEAD OFFICE
LS Tower, 127, LS-ro, Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-Do, 431-848, Korea
http://www.lsis.com
■Southeast Asia +82-2-2034-4888 cshwang@lsis.com (Charles Hwang)
■Europe +82-2-2034-4676 sukyong@lsis.com (Brian Choi)
■Turkey/Israel/CIS +82-2-2034-4879 dkimc@lsis.com (Daniel Kim)
■Oceania +82-2-2034-4394 kacho@lsis.com (Kendra Cho)
■North/Latin America +82-2-2034-4286 hkchung@lsis.com (Hank Raul Chung)
■Southwest Asia/Africa +82-2-2034-4467 myleed@lsis.com (Henry Lee)
■Middle East +971-4-886-5360 khchoi1@lsis.com (Lambert Choi)
■ LSIS(Dalian) Co., Ltd. /CHINA
No. 15, Liaohexi 3-Road, Economic and Technical Development zone,
Dalian, P.R. China
Tel : 86-411-8731-7542 Fax : 86-411-8730-7560 E-Mail : dskim@lsis.com
■ LSIS(Wuxi) Co., Ltd./CHINA
102-A, National High & New Tech Industrial Development Area,
Wuxi, Jiangsu, P.R. China
Tel : 86-510-8534-6666 Fax : 86-510-8534-4078 E-Mail : sojin@lsis.com
■ LS Hukai Electric(Hubei) Co., Ltd./CHINA
No. 100, Tanjiahe Road, Dianjun District, Yichang City, Hubei Province, P.R. China
Tel : 86-717-667-7536 Fax : 86-717-667-7222 E-Mail : jaewoongh@lsis.com
■ LS-VINA Industrial Systems Co., Ltd./VIETNAM
Room 1311, 13th, M3-M4 Building 91 Nguyen Chi Thanh street, Hanoi, Vietnam
Tel : 84-4-6275-8055 Fax : 86-21-5237-7189
■ LSIS(ME) FZE/U.A.E.
LOB 19-205, JAFZA View Tower, Jebel Ali Free Zone, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel : 971-4-886-5360 Fax : 971-4-886-5361 E-Mail : shunlee@lsis.com
■ LSIS Europe B.V./NETHERLANDS
1st. Floor, Tupolevlaan 48, 1119NZ,Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands
Tel : 31-20-654-1420 Fax : 31-20-654-1429 E-Mail : htha@lsis.com
■ LSIS Japan Co., Ltd./JAPAN
16th,Higashi-Kan, Akasaka Twin Tower, 2-17-22, Akasaka, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Tel : 847-941-8240 Fax : 847-941-8259 E-Mail : ybleeb@lsis.com
■ LSIS USA Inc./U.S.A.
2000 Millbrook Drive, Lincolnshire, Chicago, IL 60069, United States of America
Tel : 86-510-8534-6666/Fax : 86-510-8534-4078 e-mail : caidx@lsis.com.cn
■ LSIS Gurgaon Office/INDIA
109 First Floor, Park Central, Sector-30, Gurgaon- 122 002, Haryana, India
Tel : +0091-124-493-0070 Fax : 91-1244-930-066 E-Mail : hwyim@lsis.com